JP7446803B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

A gaming machine, for example, a pinball gaming machine, uses the entry of a ball into the starting slot as an opportunity to perform a jackpot lottery, as well as a symbol variation display game. The structure is such that the player can enjoy the game by displaying a preview effect. In this type of gaming machine, there is a known gaming machine that, when a jackpot is won, shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state, after the jackpot game ends (for example, Patent Document 1 listed below)

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-239986

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the time-saving state cannot be entered unless the player hits a jackpot, and the degree of freedom in terms of gameplay and production is limited, making the game less interesting.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the fun of the game by providing a new winning type that allows the player to enter a time-saving state without going through a jackpot.

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means.
(1) A symbol display means configured to be able to perform variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols, and capable of stopping and displaying the plurality of decorative symbols in a display mode according to a game result;
During one fluctuating display of the decorative symbols, a predetermined performance including a result performance that notifies the game result, a success/failure performance that suggests the content of the result performance , and a pre-success/failure performance that is executed before the success/failure performance. A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
A production mode control means capable of controlling the production mode;
Equipped with a special electric accessory that can open and close the grand prize opening,
A gaming machine capable of controlling the winning state of opening and closing the big prize opening,
In a normal state, a first specific state that can be transitioned to via the winning state;
In the normal state, it has a second specific state that can be transitioned to without going through the hit state,
In the case where the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the state is transferred to the first specific state via the winning state, and after the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the state is transferred to the second specific state without passing through the winning state. In the case of migration, while the same pre-success/failure performance is executed, the content of the success/failure performance is different,
The production mode control means is configured to control to a first production mode in the first specific state, and to control to a second production mode different from the first production mode in the second specific state. configured,
In the second performance mode, the player is configured to be able to issue an alert alert to the player;
The variable display of the decorative patterns is capable of executing a plurality of stopping motion patterns having different stopping motion periods from the time when at least one of the decorative symbols first starts the stopping motion until all the decorative symbols stop;
The stop motion pattern is configured to be able to perform variable display of the decorative pattern in which the stop motion pattern differs depending on the performance to be performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

1 is an external view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a game board and performance buttons. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a control device. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining winning types and game state transitions. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining screen display of a liquid crystal display device. It is an explanatory diagram provided for explanation of a look-ahead preview performance. This is a game flow for explaining the game contents (normal, time saving, variable probability mode) related to the support equipped type. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the probability variable mode according to the number of consecutive games. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the time saving mode according to the remaining number of time reductions. 3 is a flowchart showing main control side main processing. 3 is a flowchart showing main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 10. 13 is a flowchart showing a random number determination process for determining the operation of a special electric accessory in FIG. 12. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the game state transition preparation process in FIG. 12. 13 is a flowchart showing support time saving flag management processing in FIG. 12. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol fluctuation in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half of the process during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half of the process during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process based on the modification of FIG. 10 (1st Embodiment). It is a flowchart which shows the random number determination process (determination process form 1) for special electric accessory operation determination in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the random number determination process (determination process form 2) for special electric accessory operation determination in FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the game state transition preparation process in FIG. 18. 11 is a flowchart showing special electric accessory management processing in FIG. 10. It is a flowchart showing main processing on the production control side. It is a flowchart which shows production control side timer interrupt processing. 17 is a flowchart showing a pending addition command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. 16. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a decorative design designation command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. 16. It is a diagram showing a winning random number determination table (first embodiment). It is a figure showing a winning random number determination table (a modification of the first embodiment). It is a diagram showing a symbol table selection table. It is a diagram showing a jackpot symbol table. It is a diagram showing a support time saving symbol table. It is a diagram showing a losing symbol table. It is a diagram showing a normal mid-win/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table. It is a figure which shows the loss variation pattern distribution table in normal. It is a diagram showing a probability variable medium winning/support time saving winning variation pattern distribution table. It is a figure which shows the probability fluctuation change loss fluctuation pattern distribution table. 35 is a diagram illustrating a modification (modification A) of the probability variable mid-win/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table of FIG. 34. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a modification (modification A) of the probability variation/loss variation pattern distribution table of FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a modification example (modification example B) of the probability variable medium hit/support time-saving winning fluctuation pattern distribution table of FIG. 34. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a modification (modification B) of the probability variation/loss variation pattern distribution table of FIG. 35. FIG. It is a diagram showing a time saving medium winning/support time saving winning variation pattern distribution table. It is a figure which shows the losing fluctuation pattern distribution table during time saving. It is a diagram showing a gaming state transition table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern distribution designation number table related to the support-equipped type. It is a timing chart showing decorative pattern production. This is a timing chart that focuses on the stop motion pattern of decorative patterns. It is a figure provided for explanation of the time-saving entry notification performance when support time-saving is won. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of the production|presentation of the time-saving rush notification production. It is a figure showing example 2 of production of time-saving rush notification production. This is the first half of the game flow for explaining the game contents (normal, time saving, variable probability mode) related to the ceiling function equipped type. This is the second half of the game flow for explaining the game contents (omens, ceiling, heaven mode) related to the ceiling function equipped type. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pre-read notice related to a ceiling function-equipped type. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process related to a type without ceiling activation support (Tenki A) at the start of the game. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling function management process concerning the same type (Tenki A). It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling activation management process at the time of the game start regarding the same type (Tenki A). It is a flowchart showing the game state transition preparation process related to the same type (Tenki A). It is a flowchart showing the first half of the process during the special symbol confirmation time related to the same type (Tenki A). It is a flowchart showing the second half of the process during the special symbol confirmation time related to the same type (Tenki A). It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process related to a type without ceiling activation support at the end of the game (Tenki B). It is a flowchart showing the first half of the process during the special symbol confirmation time related to the same type (Tenki B). It is a flowchart showing the second half of the process during the special symbol confirmation time related to the same type (Tenki B). It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling activation management process at the end of the game regarding the same type (Tenki B). It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing related to the ceiling activation support installed type (Tenki C1) at the start of the game. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling activation management process at the time of the game start regarding the same type (Tenki C1). It is a flowchart showing the game state transition preparation process related to the same type (Tenki C1). It is a flow chart which shows support time saving flag management processing concerning the same type (Tenki C1). It is a flowchart showing the first half of the process during the special symbol confirmation time related to the same type (Tenki C1). It is a flowchart showing the second half of the process during the special symbol confirmation time related to the same type (Tenki C1). It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing according to a modification of the ceiling activation support installed type (Tenki C1) at the start of the game. It is a flowchart showing the special symbol fluctuation start process related to the ceiling activation support installed type (Tenki D1) at the end of the game. It is a flowchart showing the game state transition preparation process related to the same type (Tenki D1). It is a flow chart which shows support time saving flag management processing concerning the same type (Tenki D1). It is a flowchart showing the first half of the special symbol confirmation time processing related to the same type (Tenki D1). It is a flowchart showing the second half of the process during the special symbol confirmation time related to the same type (Tenki D1). It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling activation management process at the end of a game regarding the same type (Tenki D1). It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing according to a modification of the ceiling activation support installed type (Tenki D1) at the start of the game. It is a diagram showing a game state transition table for ceiling. It is a diagram showing a winning/support time-saving winning fluctuation pattern distribution table (general, for omen) related to the ceiling function-equipped type. It is a diagram showing a winning/support time-saving winning fluctuation pattern distribution table (for ceiling and heaven) related to the ceiling function equipped type. It is a figure showing a loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (general use) concerning a ceiling function equipped type. It is a diagram showing a loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (for omen, ceiling, heaven (heaven time saving)) related to the ceiling function equipped type. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern distribution designation number table regarding a ceiling function mounted type. It is a diagram showing an example of a production example related to a type equipped with ceiling non-priority activation support. It is a figure which shows an example of the example of a performance concerning a ceiling priority activation support mounted type. It is a figure which shows an example of the example of a production in FIG. 77 and FIG. 78. It is a figure which shows an example of the example of a production in FIG. 77 and FIG. 78. 78 is a diagram showing the production scenario types in FIG. 77. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the production scenario types in FIG. 78. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing other production scenario types in FIG. 78. FIG. It is an explanatory view provided for explanation of a modification of a privilege provision form. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a case in which a ceiling function is activated during a ceiling time reduction state (a case of a ceiling activation type at the start of the game). It is a diagram showing a case where the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time saving state (case of ceiling activation type at the start of the game). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a case in which a ceiling function is activated during a support time saving state (a case where a ceiling function is activated at the start of the game). It is a diagram showing a case in which a ceiling function is activated during a ceiling time reduction state (a case of a ceiling activation type at the end of the game). It is a diagram showing a case where the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time saving state (case of ceiling activation type at the end of the game). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a case in which a ceiling function is activated during a support time reduction state (a case of a ceiling activation type at the end of the game). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a case in which a ceiling function is activated without going through a ceiling mode during a normal state (a case where there is a residual reservation). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a case in which a ceiling function is activated without going through a ceiling mode during a normal state (a case in which there is no remaining reservation). 92 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 91. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an output form of an outer end signal. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an output form of an outer end signal. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an output form of an outer end signal.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pinball game machine will be explained as an example of a game machine according to the present invention.

[First embodiment]
<1. Configuration overview: Figures 1 and 2>
An overview of the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the front side showing the external appearance of a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board.

A pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as "gaming machine 1") shown in FIG. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a board storage frame (not shown), and a game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of this gaming area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling game operations are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and by inserting a key into this key cylinder and operating it to one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be changed. , by operating the front frame 2 to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 relative to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

A front operation panel 7 is disposed below the glass door 6 and is pivotally supported to the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) so as to be openable and closable. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing ejected game balls.

The upper tray unit 8 also includes a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 downward from the gaming machine 1, and a ball removal button 14 for pulling out game balls stored in the upper tray 9 downward from the game ball lending device (not shown) on the island equipment side. A ball lending button 11 for requesting the payout of balls and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of valuable media inserted into the game ball lending device are provided.

In addition, the upper tray unit 8 includes a push-button type production button 13 (first operation means), a button 75a pointing upward, a right button 75b, a down button 75c, and a left button 75d. A cross-shaped direction key 75 (second operating means) is provided that can be operated to input directions. The production button 13 and direction keys 75 function as operation means that can be operated by the player, and are used during a predetermined operation valid acceptance period (button valid period ), and if a predetermined operation (for example, single press, long press, continuous press, etc.) is performed during this valid period, the performance may change before and after that operation. It is possible. In addition, these operating means can be used to display the game setting screen (menu screen: for example, 46 to 48)", it is also used when the player makes his/her favorite game settings. In this game setting, for example, the player can set the game environment, such as adjusting the volume and light amount as desired, within a predetermined range (for example, see FIG. 46). The production button 13 is provided with a button LED 13b inside, and depending on the lighting mode of this LED, there is a valid operation acceptance period (lit or flashing in a predetermined color) and an operation reception invalid period (for example, the light is turned off). (middle) can be notified.

Further, on the right end side of the front operation panel 7, a firing operation handle 15 is provided for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3). The firing device 32 according to this embodiment has a firing performance of about 100 rounds per minute.

Further, on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and above the firing operation handle 15, speakers 46 are provided to produce a sound production effect (sound effect) by sound. In addition, decorative lamps 45 (for display purposes) are placed in appropriate places of the gaming machine, such as decorative members around the front frame of the glass door 6 and inside the center decoration body 48 (see FIG. 2). A plurality of LEDs are provided.

(Game board: Figure 2)
Next, referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 3 will be explained. As shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 is attached to the game board 3 in an annular manner as a board partitioning member to guide the launched game balls, and a substantially circular area surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is The four corners of the gaming area 3a are non-gaming areas.

A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided approximately in the center of the gaming area 3a. This liquid crystal display device 36 independently displays a plurality of types of decorative patterns (for example, the left pattern , the middle symbol, and the right symbol (see, for example, FIG. 5A)).

Further, within the game area 3a, a center decoration body 48 is provided in the form of a winding circle around the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36. The center decoration body 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and forms the outer periphery of the center decoration body 48 and the front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3, and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. It is integrally equipped with an armor frame part 48b, and protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and also distributes the flow path of the game balls to the left and right depending on the strength of the launch of the game balls or the stroke length. It acts as a flow path distribution means that makes it possible to do this. In this embodiment, a play area through which game balls can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decoration body 48 and the ball guiding rail 5, and the game balls shot into the upper side of the game area 3a by the firing device 32 is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and flows down either the left downstream path 3b on the left side of the center decorative body 48 or the right downstream path 3c on the right side.

In addition, the non-gaming area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 serves as a display area for various functions, with a 7-segment display (with dots) located at the upper starting port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b ( A second special symbol display device (second special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a ``special symbol variable display game'' is executed by a variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of a "special symbol" expressed by 7 segments. The above-mentioned liquid crystal display device 36 displays a decorative pattern based on an image in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and displays various preview effects (effect images). At the same time, a ``decorative symbol variation display game'' is executed. In addition, the details of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game will be explained later.

Further, in the various function display section, a composite display device (LED display for pending composite display) 38c consisting of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. What is called "compound" is the display of the number of pending balls for special symbol 1, the display of the number of pending pitches for special symbol 2, the display of the number of pending pitches for normal symbol, notification of the status favoring right-handed players, and the variable time shortening function. A hold/time-saving/high-accuracy combined display device (hereinafter simply referred to as a "combined display device") that has multiple display functions, such as game status information such as status notification during operation (time-saving mode) and high-probability state (high-accuracy mode). This is because it is called

Further, in the various function display section, a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) formed by arranging a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs is provided next to the composite display device 38c. In the normal symbol display device 39a according to the present embodiment, a normal symbol variable display game is executed by a variable display operation of normal symbols expressed by two LEDs. For example, as a fluctuating display operation, the normal symbols by LEDs alternately turn on and off like a seesaw, and by stopping with one side lit, it becomes clear whether the normal symbol fluctuating display game is correct or not. There is.

Further, a right-handed display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. This right-handed display device 39b shows whether it is advantageous to hit the game ball to the right, which aims so that the game ball passes (flows down) the right-hand downstream path 3c, depending on the combination of lighting and non-lighting states of the LEDs. It is reported whether it is advantageous to "hit the ball to the left" by aiming so as to pass (flow down) the downstream path 3b. For example, if the light emitting state of the LED is lit, it is reported that the player is advantageous for right-handed players, and when the LED is turned off, it is reported that the player is advantageous for left-handed players.

Further, a round number display device 39c is provided adjacent to the right-hand hitting display device 39b, and is formed by arranging two LEDs (round display LEDs). This round number display device 39c notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot based on a combination of the lighting/extinguishing states of a plurality of LEDs.

Below the center decoration 48, there are an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means). Detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper starting hole sensor 34a, lower starting hole sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) are formed inside each of them to detect the passage of a game ball. has been done.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol will be referred to as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). This is a winning opening related to the starting conditions for the variable display operation of ``Special Figure 1'' (also referred to as "Special Figure 1" in some cases), and does not have a ``starting opening/closing means'' that allows the starting opening to be opened or enlarged. It is configured as a prize-winning device. In this embodiment, due to the action of a game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center ornament 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the ball flows down the left flow path to the upper starting port 34. The game ball that has flown down the right flow path 3b has a configuration that allows the ball to enter (win) easily, whereas the game ball that has flown down the right flow path 3c has a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible for the ball to enter.

The normal variable winning device 41 is configured as a ``winning rate variable winning device'' that can vary the winning rate of game balls in the starting hole by means of opening and closing the starting hole. In this embodiment, a pair of left and right movable wings (movable members) 47 are provided as the starting port opening/closing means, and when the movable wings 47 perform the opening/closing operation, the lower starting port 35, which is the second special symbol starting port, is provided. can be opened or expanded.

In addition, the lower starting port 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is connected to the second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol will be referred to as "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). , sometimes abbreviated as "Special Figure 2") is a winning opening related to the starting conditions for the variable display operation of the lower starting opening 35, and the winning area of this lower starting opening 35 depends on the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. The state is converted into an open state (easy-to-win state) that makes it easy to win a prize, and a closed state (difficult-to-win state) that makes winning more difficult or impossible than the open state. In this embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, it maintains a closed state (a winning impossible state) in which winning to the lower starting port 35 is impossible.

In addition, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, there are 4 general winning holes 43 on the left side (43a to 43d) and 1 on the right side (43e), a total of 5 general winning holes 43. A general winning hole sensor 43h (corresponding to each general winning hole 43a to 43e) is formed to detect the passage of a ball.

In addition, a normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) consisting of a passage gate through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally above the right side of the normal variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle part of the right downstream path 3c. It is being This normal symbol starting opening 37 is a winning opening related to the normal symbol fluctuating display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside thereof is a normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) that detects a passing game ball. is formed. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right downstream path 3c side, and is not formed on the left downstream path 3b side, but is not limited to this, and may be formed in both downstream paths. .

In the middle of the path from the normal symbol start opening 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right downstream path 3c, there is a special variable winning hole configured to allow the large winning hole 50 to be opened or enlarged by a retractable opening door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a big winning hole sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 50 is formed inside the device 52 (special electric accessory).

The area around the big prize opening 50 is a bulge (decorative member) 55 that bulges out from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of this bulge 55 forms the downstream guide part of the right downstream path 3c. There is. When the big winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (big winning opening closed state), by forming a surface that is continuous with the upper side 55a of this bulging part 55, the downstream guide part of the right downstream path 3c ( It forms part of the upper side 55a). In addition, in the downstream area of the right downstream path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging part 55, or more precisely, in the gaming area above the big prize opening 50, there is a flow path correction plate approximately parallel to the downstream direction of the game ball. 51d is provided in a protruding manner, and serves to draw the falling game balls toward the big prize opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the grand prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the top surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is placed on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulge 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along the Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the surface of the game board 3, whereby the flowing direction of the game ball is corrected in the direction of the big prize opening 50 (downward). At this time, if the grand prize opening 50 is covered by the push-in type open door 52b (grand prize opening closed state), the game ball rolls on this, and further the gauge structure (not shown) (The arrangement of the game nails) guides the player in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting opening 35). At this time, if the lower starting port 35 is in a winning state (starting port open state), a game ball can be won in the lower starting port 35, but the opening door 52b has retreated into the game board surface and the big winning port 50 When the game ball is in an open state (big winning hole open state), the game ball is guided into the big winning hole 50.

In the case of this embodiment, when the player aims the firing position toward the special variable winning device 52 side (when the game ball aims so as to pass through the right downstream path 3c), the upper starting port 34 side The configuration is such that the game ball is difficult to be guided or is not guided. Therefore, in the "big winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each starting opening 34, 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates.

If we classify the above-mentioned winning means to which of the left and right downstream paths they belong, that is, which of the left downstream path 3b or the right downstream path 3c can win prizes, the winning means belongs to the left downstream path 3b. , there are an upper starting hole 34, a lower starting hole 35, and the general winning holes 43a to 43d on the left side, and winning means belonging to the right downstream route 3c include an upper starting hole 34, a lower starting hole 35, and a normal symbol starting hole. 37, a large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening 43e on the right side. Note that when the movable wing piece 47 is in the open state (starting port open state), the lower starting port 35 belongs to both the left downstream path 3b and the right downstream path 3c, and prizes cannot be won from either the left or right downstream path. It is possible. However, since the operating condition for the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 is the passage of a game ball (winning) into the normal symbol starting port 37 located on the right side of the gaming area 3a, the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 actually flows rightward. It can be said that this is a winning means that belongs only to route 3c. Moreover, the big prize opening 50 belongs only to the right downstream path 3c, and only game balls from the right downstream path 3c can win.

(Composition favoring right-handed hitting under specific conditions)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is aimed at "right-handed hitting" so as to pass through the right downstream path 3c, the game ball tends to land in the normal symbol start opening 37, but the upper start opening The game ball is configured to be difficult or not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "big winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each starting opening 34, 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates. However, the movable wing pieces 47 are designed to operate in an opening/closing pattern that is more advantageous than at least the normal state (normal gaming state) when a later-described "electrical support state" occurs. Therefore, under this electric support state, instead of "left-handed" aiming so that the game ball passes through the left downstream path 3b, "right-handed hitting" where the game ball aims so that it passes through the right downstream path 3c. ``Uchi'' is said to be advantageous. On the other hand, if it is the "state without electric support (during non-electric support)", which will be described later, on the contrary, the game ball will be left to the left instead of the "right-handed" aiming so that the game ball passes through the right downstream path 3c. It is said that "left-handed hitting" in which the target is aimed so as to pass through the downstream path 3b is advantageous. That is, depending on the game state, the progress of the game is made to work advantageously or disadvantageously for the player depending on which of the left downstream path 3b and right downstream path 3c the game ball is caused to flow down. The details will be described later, but the gaming state with electric support (also referred to as the "easy winning state") includes a "time saving state" and the "variable probability state", and the gaming state with no electric support is a "normal state". There is also a "latent state".

Each winning opening, such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the big winning opening 50, or the general winning openings 43a to 43e, functions as a winning means arranged within the gaming area 3a. , In addition, detection switches (winning detection switches) such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43h are used to detect when the ball enters the winning means. It functions as a winning detection means for detecting game balls that have been played. Note that the number, shape, formation position, etc. of each of the winning means described above can be changed as appropriate depending on the gameplay. In addition, for each winning means, whether the game ball flowing down the left flowing downward path 3b and/or the right flowing downward path 3c is made difficult to win, impossible to win, or possible to win is changed as appropriate depending on the gameplay. be able to.

When a game ball enters each winning hole, the number of prize balls per winning ball promised for each winning hole is paid out from a game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 3). For example, the upper starting hole 34 has 3 pieces, the lower starting hole 35 has 1 piece, the normal symbol starting hole 37 has 0 pieces (no prize ball)), the big winning hole 50 has 15 pieces, and the general winning hole 43a to 43e has 3 pieces. is paid out. The game balls that do not enter into each of the above-mentioned winning holes are discharged from the gaming area 3a through the out hole 49. Here, "winning" refers to a winning opening that does not have a structure in which a winning opening takes in a game ball into its interior, or a winning opening that takes in a gaming ball into its interior, but is a passing type gate (for example, the normal symbol starting opening 37 ), it means that a game ball passes through that gate, and in reality, if a game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning hole, a "winning" is detected in that winning hole. is treated as having occurred. The game balls related to this winning are also referred to as "winning balls."

<Movable role object>
Furthermore, within the game area 3a, a plurality of movable accessories are arranged at positions that do not obstruct the flow of game balls. In this embodiment, a first movable accessory 80 is disposed on the upper right side of the center ornament 48, and a second movable accessory 90 is disposed diagonally below the right side. The first movable accessory 80 includes a clock face part 81 consisting of a number display part divided into 12 number sectors with numbers from Roman letters "I" to "XII" attached, and a clock face part 81 on the clock face part 81. It has a clock hand 82 consisting of a short hand and a long hand that are rotatably formed, forming a "wall clock section" as a whole. In this sense, the first movable accessory 80 is also referred to as a "watch-type accessory." The clock face section 81 has full-color LEDs on the back side or inside each sector section indicated by the hour hand, or the number sectors themselves are composed of full-color LEDs, and each number sector has a different color independently. It has a configuration that allows it to emit light.

In addition, the second movable accessory 90 arranges a corolla consisting of a plurality of petals around the flower center, and further arranges a calyx around the outside of the corolla to make the perianth double, thereby changing the shape of the flower. A flower-shaped part 91 (first movable body 91) is attached to the tip of an arm 92 (second movable body 92) capable of swinging motion, and the whole is configured as a flower-shaped accessory 90. In addition, in the flower-shaped part 91, a plurality of petals can rotate around the flower center. This flower-shaped accessory 90 normally remains stationary at its original position (shown by a solid line in FIG. 2) on the edge inside the LCD screen or on the side outside the LCD screen, and when predetermined operating conditions are met, the arm 90 is tilted, and the flower-shaped portion 91 moves together with the arm 92 to a position (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 2) covering the liquid crystal screen. When the flower-shaped part 91 is moved to the production position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 2, it rotates at the tip of the arm, and the semi-transparent flower center and petal parts are illuminated from behind by a lamp or full-color LED, making them beautifully illuminated. . When the flower-shaped accessory 90 completes its operation, it returns from the performance position indicated by the broken line to the origin position indicated by the solid line. The flower-shaped portion 91 is capable of a plurality of motion patterns such as high-speed rotation, low-speed rotation, and reverse rotation as a rotation motion of the petals, and the arm 92 is capable of performing a predetermined tilting motion in addition to a full-open tilting motion of tilting to the broken line portion. Multiple types of operation patterns are possible, such as a semi-tilting operation in which the arm is tilted to a tilting angle, a vibration operation in which the arm vibrates rattling, and an inching operation. The above-mentioned clock-shaped accessories 80 (clock hands 82) and flower-shaped accessories 90 (first movable body 91, second movable body 92) are used for preview effects, as well as setting suggestions as described below, depending on their operation mode. It is also used when performing (appearing) a performance.

<2. Control device: Figure 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device that controls gaming operations of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

The control device of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as "main control unit 20") that centrally controls control related to overall gaming operations (gaming operation control). Then, upon receiving a production control command from the main control unit 20, a production control board (production control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "production control unit 24") that centrally controls the execution (appearance) of production by the production means. ), a payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19, and a payout control board (payout control means) that generates the necessary power (including a backup power supply) from an external power source to each board of the gaming machine. It is mainly composed of a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)). Further, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control section 24. Note that the power supply route is omitted in FIG. 3.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 201 (main control CPU), and a ROM 202 (main control It is equipped with a ROM (ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer (equivalent to the Z80 system) as a whole.

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 provides interrupt signals to the CTC and CPU, which provide the Z80 system with periodic interrupts, constant cycle pulse output generation functions (bit rate generator), and time measurement functions. An interrupt controller circuit that enables/disables interrupts such as timer interrupts, a reset circuit that detects when the power is turned on, shut off, or a power abnormality, and outputs a system reset signal to reset the CPU, and a control program. A watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors malfunctions of the computer; an IAT circuit that monitors whether programs are being executed correctly within a preset address range; It also includes a counter circuit for generating random numbers (hard random numbers). In addition, at least the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive a voltage drop signal (power abnormality signal) from a power supply board (not shown), and start backup processing prior to power cutoff. The game operation that was in place before the power was cut off can be resumed after the power is restored (backup function). This gaming machine 1 is capable of retaining each memory content of the RAM for at least several days.

The counter circuit is configured to include a random number generation circuit that generates random numbers and a sampling circuit that samples random numbers from the random number generation circuit at predetermined timing, and works as a 16-bit counter as a whole. The CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number (random number for jackpot determination (random number size: 65536)) by sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state. , and use that random number for the jackpot lottery. Note that the internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a soft random number generated by appropriate software processing and a hard random number in order to prevent cheating such as trying to win.

The main control unit 20 also includes an upper starting hole sensor 34a that detects winnings in the upper starting hole 34, a lower starting hole sensor 35a that detects winnings in the lower starting hole 35, and a game ball that detects winnings in the normal symbol starting hole 37. The normal symbol starting hole sensor 37a that detects the passage of the symbol, the big winning hole sensor 52a that detects the winning to the big winning hole 50, and the general winning hole sensor 43h that detects the winning to the general winning hole 43 are connected, The main control unit 20 receives detection signals from these sensors and determines which winning hole the game ball has won (entered).

In addition, an "OUT monitoring switch 49a" that detects game balls (so-called out balls) discharged from the gaming machine through the out port 49 and each winning port is connected to the main control unit 20, and can receive the detection signal. It has become. The main control unit 20 includes an out pitch counting means for counting the number of out pitches based on the detection signal from the OUT monitoring switch 49a. The number of out pitches is one of the "gaming performance information" defined by a specific value. For example, if "today's total number of out balls is 30,000 shots", the operation information that gaming machine 1 has been operating for 300 minutes today ("total number of out balls (pieces) / firing performance (100 shots per minute) = operation time") can be obtained. Further, the number of out pitches is used to calculate a base value (one of the game performance information), which will be described later.

In addition, a fraud detection sensor (for example, a vibration sensor, a radio wave sensor, a magnetic sensor: not shown) for detecting fraud on the gaming machine 1 is connected to the main control unit 20. Based on the detection signal, it is possible to monitor fraudulent activities against gaming machines.

In addition, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling opening and closing of the opening door 52b of the large winning opening 50. are connected to each other, and the main control section 20 can transmit control signals for driving and controlling these.

Further, special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 is capable of transmitting control signals for controlling the display of the special symbols 1 and 2. Further, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying and controlling the normal symbols.

Further, a composite display device 38c, a right-handed display device 39b, and a round number display device 39c are connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 can display and control various information displayed on these devices. ing.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to an external terminal board 21 for the frame, and the main control unit 20 provides predetermined game information (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine via the external terminal board 21 for the frame. It is possible to send the data to external devices such as "data counter DT" and "hall computer HC". The predetermined game information includes, for example, winning game start/end information, winning information, special symbol fluctuation start/fluctuation stop information, prize ball number information, and various security information (cheating detection information, RAM clearing, door opening, Occurrence information such as setting changes), etc. The above-mentioned "data counter DT" is based on the gaming information included in the outer end signal, and collects specific information about the gaming machine, such as the number of jackpots, the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (the number of symbol variations), and the number of games executed between jackpots. It is a gaming information notification device that can notify users, and is usually installed on the top of a gaming machine. In addition, the hall computer HC is a so-called "hall computer" that monitors and collects the game progress status of gaming machines based on the gaming information included in the outer terminal signal, and is installed in a pachinko hall. This is a management computer dedicated to the hall that comprehensively manages the operational status of gaming machines. The data counter DT and the hall computer HC are both conventionally known devices.

In addition, the main control unit 20 corresponds to the type test (test related to the type test of gaming machines based on the regulations regarding the certification of gaming machines, type testing, etc.) conducted by the Security Electronic Communication Technology Association (HOTSUKYOU). Therefore, a type test signal for specifying gaming operations in real time can be outputted from the frame external terminal board 21. Furthermore, when a gaming machine that has passed the type test is installed in a pachinko hall, no changes to the compliant control program are permitted. Therefore, even after installation in a pachinko hall, the type test signal is repeatedly output and processed.

The main control unit 20 also includes a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area (memory within the area) of the RAM 203, and a setting key that can be inserted and turned on/off to change setting values. A setting key switch 94 that can be switched between a setting change permissible state (ON) and a setting change prohibited state (OFF), and a setting change switch for changing set values (details will be described later) in the setting change permissible state (OFF). 95 and a setting change completion switch 96 for finalizing the setting value selected by the setting change switch 95 are connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these switches. The RAM clear switch 98, setting change switch 95, and setting change completion switch 96 are all push-button switches that can be operated by the operator. These switches 94, 95, 96, and 98 are formed at appropriate locations inside the gaming machine that cannot be seen by the player, from the perspective of preventing fraudulent activities with respect to the set values. ON/OFF operation is not possible.

Further, a setting display 97 (setting display means) for displaying information regarding setting values is connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal to display and control the display. . The setting display 97 according to this embodiment is composed of one 7-segment display, and is mounted on the main control section (main control board) 20. Note that the setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board 20, but also includes a payout control board 28, a firing control board 29, and a relay board (a relay board that relays connections between various display devices, switches, etc. and the control board: (not shown), or the performance control unit (performance control board (including liquid crystal control board)) 24, etc., can be provided at an appropriate location inside the gaming machine.

(About setting values)
The main control unit 20 is provided with a "setting change function" that allows the expected value (profit) of the profit to be given to the player, such as the payout rate (so-called machine discount, payout rate), to be changed in stages. The above-mentioned "setting value" is a value indicating this stage. This set value can be checked on the setting display 97, and is appropriately set by the hall clerk solely based on the business strategy of the pachinko hall (gaming parlor).

For example, the "setting value" defines the lottery probability (winning probability) of a jackpot (a winning type that will cause the condition device described below to operate) in stages, and the higher the setting value, the higher the jackpot lottery probability ( The probability of winning a jackpot is set high, which is advantageous to the player. Such setting values can be provided in at least two stages (at least a first setting value and a second setting value). In this embodiment, setting values are provided in six stages from settings 1 to 6. For example, when the probability is low, setting 1 is 1/200, setting 2 is 1/196, setting 3 is 1/192, and setting 4 is 1/188, setting 5 is 1/184, setting 6 is 1/180, etc. That is, the higher the set value is, the easier it is to win a jackpot (the machine discount becomes higher), which is advantageous to the player. In this way, the "set value" is a value that defines events that affect the machine allocation by stage, and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of occurrence of a special event such as a jackpot. In other words, the lottery probability of a jackpot when the probability is low and/or the lottery probability of a jackpot when the probability is low can be configured to differ depending on the set value. In addition, when the jackpot lottery probability is in a high probability state (when the special symbol probability changing function described later is activated), the probability can increase to a value not exceeding 10 times. However, the rate of increase may be the same or different for each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the rate of increase is the same for each set value. In the above example, if the jackpot lottery probability at low probability is set 1 to 6 = 1/200 to 1/180 and the increase rate is 4 times, the jackpot lottery probability at high probability is set 1 to 6. = 1/50 to 1/45.

Furthermore, when a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the probability of winning one or more types of jackpots can be changed according to the set value. For example, if there are four types of jackpots, jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of winning all jackpots 1 to 4 may be. It may be configured so that only the winning probability of certain jackpots 1 to 3 is increased (in this case, jackpot 4 will have a common winning probability for all setting values), or only a specific jackpot (for example, only jackpot 1) ) may be configured so that only the winning probability is increased (in this case, jackpots 2 to 4 will have a common winning probability for all set values). Further, it may be configured such that the higher the setting value is, the higher the total probability of winning jackpots 1 to 4 becomes. In addition, the winning probability of the small winning type and/or the support time saving type that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device may be changed according to the setting value, as in the case of the jackpot described above, or the winning probability may be the same for all settings. It may also be a probability. The details of the jackpot, small win, and support time reduction will be described later.

(About changing settings)
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, if at least the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state, the setting change is allowed, and when the power is turned on by other switch operations, It is controlled in a state where setting changes are prohibited. When the setting change switch 95 is turned ON in this setting change permissible state, the current display value of the setting display 97 changes to "1→2→3→4→5→6→1→2→3→..." The display is switched in a cyclical manner within the usage range of settings 1 to 6, as shown below. Then, when the desired setting value is displayed, when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on (setting confirmation operation), the current displayed value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 ( Setting value storage area). Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change permissible state is terminated, and the game will thereafter be started under the determined setting values. The main control unit 20 has a setting function (setting means) that can set a setting value regarding the winning probability by a jackpot lottery (random number lottery). Note that the present invention can also be applied to a "setting-less gaming machine" that does not have a setting function. Alternatively, the game machine may be a "gaming machine with a one-stage setting function" that does not allow setting values to be switched to a plurality of levels, but only has one setting value. A "gaming machine with a one-stage setting function" refers to a type in which setting values can be set, but there is only one setting value. It is used to facilitate design by providing design compatibility and versatility when designing new models. This gaming machine with a one-stage setting function is substantially the same as a "gaming machine without a setting function" in that there is only one setting value. In the case of a one-stage setting gaming machine, even if the setting change switch 95 is operated, the display value on the setting display 97 will not change to a certain setting value, for example, "1→1→1→1→..." Only the settings are displayed, and the setting operation itself is possible.

In addition, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information regarding the special symbol variation display game and error information to the performance control unit 24 using a performance control command, depending on the processing state. . However, in order to prevent acts of fraud from outside, the main control section 20 only transmits signals to the production control section 24, and has a one-way communication configuration in which it is not possible to receive signals from the production control section 24. It has become.

(About performance indicator 99)
Furthermore, a performance display device 99 (information display means) that notifies information (hereinafter referred to as "performance information") regarding game results for a predetermined period (specific gaming period) is connected to the main control section 20. 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling the display thereof. The performance indicator 99 of this embodiment is composed of a plurality of 7-segment LEDs, and specifically, four 7-segment LEDs (7-segment indicators 99a to 99d) in which a display part and a circuit part are unitized are arranged horizontally. are arranged and mounted on the main control board 20, for example, to constitute a display capable of displaying a four-digit number. Further, each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP (dot) below the 7-segment number. The above-mentioned "performance information" is information mainly used by pachinko halls and related agencies for confirmation and investigation. This is information for investigating whether the game machine's original ball output performance (designed ball output performance) is being properly demonstrated, in other words, "information regarding gaming performance (gaming performance information)". . Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game itself when the player plays the game, unlike the preview presentation, setting suggestion presentation, etc., which will be described later. For this reason, the performance indicator 99 is not installed in a location visible to the player, but is mounted in an easily visible location inside the gaming machine, for example, on the control board or on the board case that protects it.

In this embodiment, the total number of balls paid out during the normal state (the state where the jackpot lottery probability is low probability (normal probability) and there is no electric support, which will be described later) (the number of paid out balls at normal time), and the cumulative number of out balls during the normal state (normal The number of pieces out at normal times) is measured in real time, and the value obtained by dividing the number of pieces paid out at normal times by the number of pieces out at normal times multiplied by 100 (base value calculated as number of pieces paid out at normal times ÷ number of pieces out at normal times x 100: Normal time base value) is adopted as the above-mentioned "performance information", and this is displayed in a predetermined manner by the performance display 99. Note that the base value is displayed on the performance display 99 as a value rounded to the first decimal place. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the base value (performance information), if the number of out pitches being measured reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60,000), the measurement will be stopped once. , the base value at the end of the measurement is stored in the RAM 203 as history information (the current base value is stored), and measurement of a new base value is started again. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, the above-mentioned "specified number (60,000 pieces)" that triggers the end of the measurement is not the number of pieces out in normal times, but the cumulative number of pieces out that is measured during all gaming states (including during winning games). The number of pitches (number of outs in all states) is used, and this "number of outs in all states" is also measured in real time. In addition, the processing program related to display control and base value on the performance display 99 and its work area are set in an area (outside area memory) that is different from the area (in area memory) that the CPU 201 accesses during normal game progress. ing. Furthermore, the performance information is not limited to the above-mentioned base value in the normal state, but is not particularly limited as long as it is useful gaming performance information.

Further, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and this payout control board 29 includes a launch control board (fire control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32, and a payout control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32. A game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 that performs the following is connected.

The main roles of the payout control board 29 are to receive payout control commands from the main control unit 20, to control the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control commands, and to send information regarding the payout operation status to the main control unit 20 ( status signals), etc. When it is necessary to pay out balls, the main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control command regarding payout (a “payout control command” that specifies the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29, and on the other hand, The payout control board 29 is capable of transmitting the above status signal to the main control unit 20.

The payout control board 29 includes a full detection sensor 60 that detects the storage state of game balls stored in the upper tray 9 (whether the upper tray 9 is full or not), and a front frame 2 and/or a front operation panel. A door open sensor 61 (ON when open/OFF when closed) that detects the opening/closing state of 7 is connected, and the dispensing control board 29 can receive detection signals from these sensors.

Further, the payout control board 29 receives detection information from a supply-out detection sensor 19a that detects a lack of supply of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b that detects game balls (prize balls) to be paid out, which are provided in the game ball payout device 19. It is possible to receive signals. The payout control board 29 is also capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling the payout motor 19c of the game ball payout device 19 (the motor that drives the ball payout mechanism (not shown) for paying out game balls). ing.

The dispensing control board 29 uses detection signals from various sensors such as the full detection sensor 60, the door open sensor 61, the out-of-supply detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b as the state signals to detect a "ball jam" indicating a full state. "Signal", "Door open signal" indicating that the front frame 2/front operation panel 7 is open, "Out of supply signal" indicating insufficient supply of game balls, abnormality in prize ball payout (insufficient payout, excessive payout) The configuration is such that various status signals can be transmitted to the main control unit 20, such as a "counting error signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed, and a "payout completion signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not the front frame 2 and front operation panel 7 are in the open state (door open error), and whether or not the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal ( It monitors whether or not the upper tray 9 is full (ball clogging error).

Further, a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a launch control signal ES (launch permission signal ES) can be transmitted to the launch control board 28. The firing control board 28 controls the energization of a firing solenoid (not shown) provided in the firing device 32 based on the firing permission signal ES outputted from the dispensing control board 29, and controls the firing operation handle 15. The game ball launch operation is realized by the operation of . Specifically, the payout control board 29 outputs the firing permission signal ES, and a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 detects that the player is touching the handle. The firing operation of the game ball is permitted on the condition that the firing stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the firing permission signal ES is not output, no firing operation is performed even if the firing operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not fired. Furthermore, the strength with which the game ball is launched can be changed according to the amount of operation of the firing operation handle 15.

(2-2. Production control section 24)
The performance control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 241 (performance control CPU), and also includes a ROM 242 (performance control ROM) that stores performance data required for performance control processing, and a RAM 243 (functioning as a work area and buffer memory). It is mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with a production control RAM), an audio control section (sound source LSI), an RTC function section (Real Time Clock), and a counter circuit (16-bit 8-bit counter, 8-bit counter), an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit, etc., to control the overall production operation. The RTC function unit is a clock IC that keeps track of time, and it also contains real-time time information such as the current time ("what hour, minute, and second it is") and/or date (month, day, day of the week). Serves as a clock means of providing calendar information. In addition, like the main control unit 20, it is also provided with a backup function and soft random number generation means (for example, random number generation means for lottery for performance).

The main roles of the production control unit 24 are to receive production control commands from the main control unit 20, to select and decide production based on the production control commands, to control the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36, to control the sound of the speaker 46, and to perform various functions. These include light emission control of performance LEDs (decorative lamp 45, button LED 13b, and other performance LEDs), operation control of various movable accessories (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90), and the like.

The effect control section 24 also includes a display control section (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit includes a VDP that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) that the VDP performs image development processing, and an image ROM that the VDP develops. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs the control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, and a program that describes the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and buffer memory.

The production control unit 24 also controls a light display device 45a that includes various production LEDs such as a decorative lamp 45 and a button LED 13b to display a light display in order to perform an image display production, a light production, a sound production, a movable body production, etc. A control unit, a sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generating device 46a including the speaker 46, and movable accessory motors 80c and 91c that operate the movable accessories (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped part 91, and arm 92). , 92c, etc. are provided.

A position detection sensor 82a that monitors the movement of the movable accessory is connected to the performance control unit 24, and the performance control unit 24 detects the current movement of the movable accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). The performance control unit 24 also monitors malfunctions in the operation of the movable accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, and performs a predetermined error notification process if a malfunction occurs.

Further, the production control unit 24 is connected with a production button switch 13a that detects the operation of the production button 13, and direction key switches 75a' to 75d' that detects the operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d), and controls the production. The unit 24 is capable of receiving operation detection signals from the performance buttons 13 and direction keys 75.

When the production control unit 24 receives the production control command sent from the main control unit 20, the production control unit 24 selects a production pattern by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of pre-prepared production patterns based on the information included in the command. Then, various presentation means are controlled at the necessary timing to produce the desired presentation. As a result, the display of an effect image on the liquid crystal display device 36 (image display effect), the reproduction of sound from the speaker 46 (sound effect), and the lighting and blinking driving of the decorative lamp 45 and other LEDs for effect (light effect) are realized. A "performance scenario" in a broad sense is realized by chronologically developing various performance patterns (fluctuating decorative pattern display operations, preview performances, etc.). Furthermore, the performance control unit 24 determines which direction to perform with respect to the performance button 13 and/or direction key 75 based on operation detection signals from the performance button switch 13a and direction key switches 75a' to 75d' during a predetermined operation acceptance valid period. The structure is such that it is possible to identify whether such an operation has been performed (for example, a press, a long press, a continuous press, the order in which the direction keys 75 are pressed in the up, down, left, or right directions, etc.) (operation identification means). It has a configuration that allows execution and control of the performance.

The production control command defines the function with a 2-byte structure consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit 7 of MODE is ON, EVENT Bit 7 is OFF. When transmitting this information as valid information, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the production control unit 24, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from this setting, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) transmits the command for the first time. The strobe signal is transmitted. Furthermore, event information is set and output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the strobe signal was transmitted, and a second strobe signal is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be active by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period to ensure that the CPU 241 (performance control CPU) can receive commands.

In addition, the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing, so that the production control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become. Also, unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal, the CPU 241 is in the middle of executing interrupt processing based on another interrupt (timer interrupt processing that is executed periodically). Even if a command reception interrupt occurs, the command reception interrupt processing is performed by interrupting the corresponding processing, and even if other interrupts occur at the same time, the command reception interruption processing is performed with priority.

<3. Overview of operation>
Next, a gaming operation related to the gaming machine 1 using the above-mentioned control device (FIG. 3) will be explained.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 operates based on a predetermined starting condition, specifically, a game ball enters the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 (winning). A "jackpot lottery" will be held by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol variation display game by displaying special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, displays the result as a special symbol. It is derived and displayed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot lottery based on winnings in the upper starting slot 34 and the jackpot lottery based on winnings in the lower starting slot 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result regarding the upper starting opening 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result regarding the lower starting opening 35 is derived on the special symbol displaying device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, the first special symbol variable display game is started by displaying the special symbol 1 in a variable manner on the condition that the game ball enters the upper starting port 34, On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that the game ball enters the lower starting port 35, the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner and a second special symbol variable display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variable display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, if the jackpot lottery result is “jackpot”, a predetermined jackpot symbol mode is displayed. In the case of "Small hit", the predetermined small hit pattern is displayed, in the case of "Support time reduction", the predetermined support time reduction pattern is displayed, and in other cases, the predetermined loss pattern is displayed. The special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game result (jackpot lottery result) is derived from this.

In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38b side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". The special symbol variation display game may be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2." In addition, unless otherwise necessary, "Special Symbol 1" and "Special Symbol 2" will be simply referred to as "Special Symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "Special Symbol"), and "Special Symbol Variation Display Game 1" and " It may be referred to as the ``special symbol variation display game'' without distinguishing it from the ``special symbol variation display game 2''.

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variable display game is started, the decorative symbol variable display game is started by variably displaying decorative symbols (actual game symbols) on the liquid crystal display device 36, and accompanying this, the decorative symbol variable display game is started. Various performances will be held. When the special symbol variable display game ends, the decorative symbol variable display game also ends, and the special symbol display device displays a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. Decorative patterns are derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by a decorative symbol variation display game that includes a decorative symbol variation display operation.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game (result of the jackpot lottery) is a "jackpot", the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect that reflects the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (for example, 7 segments is displayed as “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left,” “middle,” and “right.” In each display area of ``, the display mode in which the decorative pattern reflects the ``jackpot'' (winning pattern: For example, in each display area of ``left'', ``middle'', and ``right'', 3 decorative patterns are ``7'', ``jackpot'') 7”, “7” display mode, etc.).

When this "jackpot" occurs, specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the "jackpot" symbol mode is derived and displayed. After that, the big winning hole solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable winning device 52 is activated, and the opening door 52b opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, thereby opening and closing the big winning hole 50, making the game more enjoyable than in the normal state. A special game state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player occurs. In this jackpot game, until the opening time of the grand prize opening by the opening door 52b passes a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds), or the number of winning balls into the grand prize opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number ( With one activation of the accessory, its entrance opens or the winning area is opened or expanded until the maximum number of winning balls allowed for the expanded winning hole (for example, 10 balls) is reached. A "round game" in which the big prize opening is closed when any of the conditions is met (the round game end condition (closing condition) is met) is played for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 10 rounds). )Repeated.

When the above-mentioned jackpot game starts, the opening performance (performance during start INT) is performed using the start interval time (start INT), and when the start INT ends, the round game starts for a predetermined number of rounds (maximum round (number) is performed multiple times. When the maximum number of rounds ends, an ending performance (performance during end INT) is performed using the end interval time (end INT), and the series of jackpot games ends. Note that when the current round game ends, the next round game starts after a predetermined interval time (inter-round INT). Further, during a round game, an "in-round effect" appears, and between round games (during inter-round INT), an "inter-round INT effect" appears. That is, the jackpot game is roughly divided into an opening period (start INT period), a round game period with the maximum number of rounds as an upper limit, and an ending period (end INT period).

Regarding the information necessary to execute the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 specifically determines the information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the upper starting hole 34 or the lower starting hole 35 (winning). , "Jackpot", "Small hit", or "Lose" on the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper starting hole sensor 34a or the lower starting hole sensor 35a and the starting condition (starting condition regarding special symbols) is satisfied. If it is a "big hit", the type of the jackpot is determined. If it is a "small win", it is the type of the small win, and if it is a "loss", the Perform a jackpot lottery including a 'symbol lottery (winning type lottery)' that draws the type of loss (if there is only one type of jackpot, small hit, or loss, there is no need to conduct a symbol lottery, so the lottery can be omitted) ), and based on the lottery result information, determine the variation pattern of the special symbol and the special symbol that will finally be stopped and displayed (special stop symbol) (in this embodiment, the "Support Time Shortening" described later will also be applied to the winning/losing pattern). It is subject to a lottery and a design lottery.This "support time reduction" will be explained later). Then, as a production control command that specifies the processing state, a "variation pattern specification command" that includes at least variation pattern information of special symbols (for example, jackpot lottery results, information regarding variation time of special symbols, etc.) is transmitted to the production control unit 24. Send to the side. As a result, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the performance control section 24. In this embodiment, in order to provide a rich variety of performances, a "decorative design designation command" including information regarding special stop symbols (design lottery result information) is also transmitted to the performance control section 24.

In addition to the jackpot lottery results, the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation pattern information may also include information specifying the execution of a specific preview effect (for example, a reach effect or a pseudo-continuation effect (including the number of pseudo-continuations) described below). can. In detail, the fluctuation patterns of special symbols are roughly divided into "win fluctuation patterns" in the case of a hit and "loss fluctuation patterns" in the case of a loss, depending on the jackpot lottery result.These fluctuation patterns include, for example, "Reach variation pattern" that specifies the execution of a reach effect (including specifying the type of reach), "Normal variation pattern" that does not specify the execution of a reach effect, and 'Pseudo combination pattern' that specifies the execution of a pseudo linked effect and a reach effect. A plurality of types of variation patterns are included, such as a "normal variation pattern with pseudo-coupling" that specifies the execution of a pseudo-coupling effect but not specifying the execution of a ready-to-reach production. In addition, for the reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuation variation pattern, a longer variation time is basically determined than the variation time of the normal variation pattern in order to secure the performance time for the preview performance. Hereinafter, the reach variation pattern may be abbreviated as "reach variation" and the normal variation pattern may be abbreviated as "normal variation."

The performance control unit 24 performs time-series display during the decorative pattern fluctuation display game based on information included in the performance control commands (here, the fluctuation pattern designation command and the decorative pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. The contents of the performance (performance scenario) to be developed and the decorative symbols to be displayed in the final stage (decorative stop symbols) are determined, and according to the time schedule based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols, the preview performance during the decorative symbol fluctuation display game is decided. Controls the fluctuating display performance of decorative designs. As a result, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 36 in time synchronization with the variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and during the period of the special symbol variable display game and during the decorative symbol variable display game. The period has substantially the same time width. Furthermore, the performance control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the optical display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, in accordance with the performance scenario, and develops various performances in the decorative symbol variation display game. Thereby, the reproduction of images (image production) on the liquid crystal display device 36, the reproduction of sound effects (sound production), and the lighting and blinking driving of the production LEDs such as the decorative lamps 45 (light production) are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display results of the special symbol variation display game are reflected in the decorative symbol variation display game. Therefore, these two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In this specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as a "symbol variation display game" or simply a "game" unless otherwise necessary. In addition, for the convenience of explanation, the number of executions of symbol variation display games (especially special symbol variation display games) is expressed as "Number of executed games," "Number of symbol variations," "Number of variations," or "*Rotation ("* `` is a natural number (for example, 1 rotation, 10 rotations, 1000 rotations, etc.)''.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 37 (winning), the main control unit 20 performs an "assistance winning lottery" by random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol displayed by the LED is displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the result is displayed on the LED lighting and non-lighting. It is designed to stop and display in combination. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "assistance win", the display section of the normal symbol display device 39a is stopped and displayed in a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are lighting).

When this "assistance hit" occurs, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see Fig. 3) is activated, which causes the movable blade 47 to open in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 to open. Alternatively, the game ball is enlarged and enters a state where it is easy to enter (starting mouth open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "normal power open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. In this normal power opening game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 operates (opening operation), and the opening time of the lower starting port 35 (starting port open state time) is the maximum opening time (for example, maximum 6 seconds). ) has elapsed, or until the number of winning balls into the lower starting port 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 10 balls), the winning area is controlled to be in an open state where it is opened or expanded, and either of these conditions is satisfied. In this case, the opening operation of the movable blade 47 is completed and the lower starting port 35 is closed. Note that the lower starting port 35 can be opened one or more times within the maximum opening time.

(3-1-3. Operation holding ball)
In this embodiment, a prize is won at each start opening 34, 35 or the normal symbol start opening 37 during a symbol variation display game, a normal symbol variation display game, a jackpot game, a small win game, or a normal power release game. If this occurs, that is, if a detection signal is input from the upper starting port sensor 34a, the lower starting port sensor 35a, or the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a, and the corresponding starting condition is established, this is set as the starting right of the variable display game. Such data is held and stored up to a predetermined upper limit, which is the maximum number of held storages, except for data related to the variable display. The pending data that has not been subjected to this symbol variation display operation or the game balls related to the pending data are also referred to as "operation pending balls." In order to make the number of activated and reserved balls clear to the player, a dedicated reservation display (not shown) provided at an appropriate location of the gaming machine 1 or a reservation display provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is used. Display the device by lighting it.

Further, in this embodiment, up to four operation-reserved balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are each stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are retained as the number of confirmed fluctuations of the special symbol or the normal symbol. In addition, the maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) regarding the special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol is not particularly limited. In addition, all or part of the maximum number of stored symbols may be different, and the number can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay. In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are referred to as "special symbol 1", "special symbol 2", "special symbol 1", "special symbol 2", and "special symbol 2". It is also referred to as the "Fuzu action holding ball".

(3-2. Gaming status)
Next, the gaming state will be explained. The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate multiple types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot, which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the generation of various gaming states will be explained.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" whose function is played by the main control unit 20 (CPU 201). There are two types of this: a probability variation function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probability variation function") and a probability variation function related to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol probability variation function").

The special symbol probability variation function is a function that changes the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability (normal probability) to a high probability to generate a "high probability state (high probability jackpot state)" that is more advantageous than the normal state. . In a gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability changing function is in operation, the jackpot lottery probability becomes high, making it easier for jackpots to occur. In addition, as already explained, in the case of this embodiment, the jackpot lottery probability at low probability and high probability differs depending on the setting value (see FIG. 4).

The normal pattern probability variation function changes the lottery probability of winning the assistance from a predetermined probability (normal probability) from a low probability to a high probability (for example, from 1/256 to 255/256), which is more advantageous than the normal state. This is a function that generates a variable state of probability of receiving assistance. Under the gaming state in which this normal symbol probability variable function is active (assistance hit probability variable state), the lottery probability of winning assistance becomes a high probability state, making it easier for assistance hits to occur, and general power open games occur frequently. , the operating rate is improved, in which the operating rate of the movable blade 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal state.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment also includes a "fluctuating time reduction function (time saving function)" for which the main control section 20 is responsible. There are two types of this: a time-saving function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time-saving function") and a time-saving function related to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol time-saving function").

The special symbol time-saving function generates a "special symbol time-saving state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts changing until it is stopped and displayed). This function allows you to Under the gaming state in which this special symbol time saving function is active (special symbol time saving state), the average variation time of special symbols in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average variation time required for a no-reach loss variation). (the time is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), resulting in a state where the number of jackpot drawings increases per unit time compared to the normal state.

The normal symbol time saving function generates a "normal symbol time saving state" that shortens the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the regular symbol starts changing until it is stopped and displayed). This function allows you to Under the gaming state in which the normal symbol time saving function is activated (normal symbol time saving state), the average variation time of the normal symbols in one normal symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, from 20 seconds to 0.6 seconds). (shortened), the number of drawings per unit time is increased compared to the normal state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes an "opening extension function" in which the main control section 20 serves as a functional section. This opening extension function is a function that generates an "open extension state" in which the opening operation period (opening time of the movable wing pieces 47) of the movable wing pieces 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 is extended than the normal state. Under the open extension state, the opening operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable blade 47 is extended from, for example, 0.2 seconds to 1.6 seconds, and the number of opening and closing times is, for example, once (open extension function (when the opening extension function is in operation) is extended twice (when the opening extension function is in operation), resulting in an operation rate improvement state in which the operation rate of the movable blade 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, when the opening extension function is activated, the frequency of winnings to the lower starting port 35 increases, and therefore, in the gaming state, the frequency of fulfillment of the starting conditions for the special symbol variation display game that derives the jackpot lottery result is higher than in the normal state. This creates a gaming state that is advantageous for the player compared to a state in which the opening extension function does not operate (non-operating). In this respect, the open extended state is also referred to as the "electric support state".

By operating one or more of the above functions, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. Below, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function are activated will be referred to as the "probability change state", and among these functions, A gaming state in which the special symbol probability varying function is removed is referred to as a "time saving state", and is a gaming state in which at least the special symbol probability varying function operates and the opening extension function does not operate (in this embodiment, a gaming state in which only the special symbol probability varying function operates) ) is referred to as a "latent state", and a state in which all functions are not in operation (non-operating) is referred to as a "normal state". Therefore, if we focus on the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, if the gaming state is "time saving state" or "normal state", the jackpot drawing probability will be 'low probability state (normal probability)', and if the gaming state is In the case of the "potential probability state" or the "probability variable state", the jackpot lottery probability is in the 'high probability state'. In addition, during the jackpot related to the operation of the conditional device, a winning game in which the jackpot is opened and closed occurs, but all of the above functions are inactive, and basically the game state is the same as the normal state above. The variable display of the special symbol is also interrupted.

(High base gaming state)
In this embodiment, the three functions related to the above-mentioned normal symbols, that is, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the opening extension function, operate at the same opportunity. However, when focusing on the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the opening extension function described above individually, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is improved. Since it becomes a rate improvement state and the frequency of winnings to the lower starting slot 35 increases (it becomes easier to win), the gaming state is based on the frequency with which the starting conditions for the special symbol variation display game that derives the jackpot lottery result are met or the balls are put out. A "high base gaming state (advantageous state for balls entering the starting opening)" occurs in which the rate (base) is higher than the normal state. In addition, the "high base gaming state" here refers to the gaming state when the functions related to normal symbols (at least one of the normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function) are activated, and the special symbol This is different from the gaming state in which at least one of the special symbol probability changing function and the special symbol time saving function is activated.

On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability changing function and special symbol time saving function), when the above-mentioned special symbol probability changing function is activated, it becomes a "high probability state" where the jackpot lottery probability is higher than the normal state, When the above-mentioned special symbol time saving function is activated, a "special symbol time saving state" is established in which the average execution time of the special symbol variation display game (average variation time of special symbols) is shorter than the normal state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the above-mentioned "high base gaming state" in which the frequency of fulfillment of the starting conditions for the special symbol variation display game is higher than in the normal state.

In this embodiment, as an example of the above-mentioned "high base gaming state", an electric chew support state to which at least an opening extension function is provided is treated as a "high base gaming state". Under this electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of openings) of the movable blades 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 improves, the winning rate to the lower starting port 35 increases, and the winning frequency per unit time increases. Since the value increases, the game state becomes more advantageous for the player compared to the case where there is no electric chew support state (low base game state). When focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chew support state, if the gaming state is "normal state" or "potential state", it will be 'no electric chew support state', and if the gaming state is "time saving state" or "probable variable state" If so, it is determined that 'electronic chew support status exists'. In this specification, "no electric support state" is referred to as "no electric support state" or "non-electric support state", and "with electric support state" is referred to as "electric support state" or "electric support state". ”.

(3-2-1. Internal gaming status (gaming status determination number YJ): Figure 44)
Regarding the operating status of each of the above functions (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function) that determine the gaming state, the main control unit 20 side controls these functions. Its activation (5AH)/non-activation (00H) is managed by the ON/OFF state of the corresponding flag. The gaming state that focuses on the operating status of each function is also referred to as an "internal gaming state." The current internal gaming state is managed using an identifier called "gaming state determination number YJ". For example, if the gaming state determination number YJ is "00H", specify 'normal state (normal)', if it is "01H", specify 'variable state (probable variable)', and if it is "02H", specify 'time saving'. Specify the status (time saving)', and in the case of '03H', specify the 'potential status (potential)'.

(3-2-2. Fluctuation pattern selection mode (fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode): Figure 44)
Here, in this embodiment, in order to realize various performances related to the above-mentioned internal gaming states, the configuration is such that one internal gaming state can be further classified and managed. The details will be explained later, but for example, the variable probability state includes multiple types of variable probability states such as "variable probability modes 1 to 3", and the time saving state includes multiple types of time saving states such as "time saving modes 1 to 3". These are managed as different gaming states using an identifier called "fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode". The entity of this "fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode" is an identifier (variation pattern selection mode data). For example, when classifying a variable probability state (gaming state determination number YJ = 01H) into "variable variable modes 1 to 3", the variable pattern allocation designation number Tcode corresponding to the variable state (YJ = 01H) is set to "01H (probable variable mode)". By setting "mode 1),""02H (variable probability mode 2)," and "03H (variable probability mode 3)," it becomes possible to select different fluctuation pattern distribution tables for each of the probability variation modes 1 to 3.

The above-mentioned "variation pattern distribution table" is used when determining the variation pattern of special symbols related to the symbol variation display game, and one or more types of variation patterns (variation patterns of special symbols) are used at least It is determined in association with the current gaming state (fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode) and the jackpot lottery result (see S413 in FIG. 12, FIGS. 32 to 42, etc. described later). For example, if the fluctuation pattern distribution specification number Tcode is "01H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for definite variable mode 1 is specified, and if it is "02H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for definite variable mode 2 is specified. is specified and is "03H", the variable pattern distribution table for variable probability mode 3 is specified. That is, even if the internal gaming state is the same "probable variable state", a variation pattern related to a different variation pattern distribution table is selected depending on the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode from "01H" to "03H". It turns out.

Therefore, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function) related to determining the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support, that is, the "internal game For example, when paying attention to the state (gaming state determination number YJ), even if the same "probable variable state" is concerned, regarding the variation pattern of the special symbol, there are different gaming states (variable pattern distribution) such as "probable variable mode 1 to 3". It becomes possible to select a variation pattern corresponding to the specified number Tcode).

Also, due to this, multiple types of "performance modes" related to the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode are provided, and the performance under each production mode is displayed (executed) on the performance control unit 24 side. It is now possible to do so. Note that details regarding the production mode will be described later.

In this way, the "internal gaming state" focuses on the functions related to determining the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support, and the "gaming state" focuses on determining the fluctuation pattern of special symbols (determining the performance). By managing the "variable pattern selection mode)" as different, even if the internal gaming state (for example, probability variation state) is the same, special It is now possible to select a variation pattern of the symbols. As a result, even under the same internal game state, it is possible to bring about dynamic changes in the consumption time of the symbol variation display game (the variation time of special symbols) and the performance related thereto.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the types of the "internal gaming state" include a normal state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc. (see the column "YJ" in FIG. 44). On the other hand, there are more types of gaming states (gaming modes) related to the determination of the fluctuation pattern of special symbols, that is, gaming states (gaming modes) related to the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode (fluctuation pattern selection mode) than there are types of internal gaming states. , "Normal mode", "Probability variable mode 1", "Probability variable mode 2", "Probability variable mode 3", "Time saving mode 1", "Time saving mode 2", "Time saving mode 3", etc. are included (see the "Tcode" column in Figure 44). .

In this specification, unless otherwise required, at least the gaming state associated with the variable pattern allocation designation number Tcode will be referred to as a "gaming mode" (see the "gaming mode type" column in FIG. 44). As shown in FIG. 44, this gaming mode is the gaming state related to the "fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode and gaming state determination number YJ (internal gaming state)", in other words, the "gaming state taken as a whole of the gaming machine". ” can also be treated as For convenience of explanation, the internal gaming state and the gaming mode may be simply referred to as "gaming state" without distinguishing between them. Further, the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode may be referred to as a "variation pattern selection mode" or simply "Tcode".

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, a "gaming state with a low probability state" corresponds to a "normal state" or a "time-saving state" when focusing on an internal gaming state; In this case, "normal mode" or "time saving mode" is applicable. In addition, "gaming state with high probability state" refers to "probable variable state" or "potential state" when focusing on the internal gaming state, and "probable variable mode" or "potential state" when focusing on the gaming mode. "Accurate mode" is applicable. Furthermore, the "gaming state with electric support available state (electric support state)" corresponds to a time saving state or a variable probability state, and when focusing on the gaming mode, it corresponds to a "time saving mode" or a "variable probability mode". Furthermore, the term ``gaming state with no electric support'' corresponds to a normal state or a potential state, and when focusing on the gaming mode, it corresponds to a ``normal mode'' or a ``potential mode.'' In addition, the "time saving state" includes a time saving state due to a jackpot (jackpot time saving state), a time saving state due to a support time saving win (support time saving state), a time saving state due to activation of the ceiling function described below (ceiling time saving state), and a time saving state. Unless otherwise specified, these time-saving conditions can be applied as appropriate.

<4. About winning＞
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, "winning" according to this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining winning types (jackpot type, support time saving type, loss type), winning game operation mode, and destination gaming state (transitioning destination gaming mode) after winning game.

(4-1. About the hit type)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning types (win types) for the jackpot lottery include, as shown in the figure, "10R certain variable jackpot,""4R certain variable jackpot,""4R time-saving jackpot (4R non-probable variable jackpot)," etc. Includes multiple types of hits. These hits belong to the "jackpot type" that triggers the activation of the conditional device, and are different from the hits (small wins) that belong to the so-called "small hit type" that does not trigger the activation of the conditional device. Here, "conditional device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (device that continuously operates special electric accessory) for playing round games, and is a specified device. Activates when a combination of special symbols is displayed or the game ball passes through a specific area in the grand prize opening (excluding those that enter the grand prize opening while the accessory continuous activation device is operating) . In addition, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is a condition for causing the electric support state (open extension function operation) and probability fluctuation (transition from one internal game state to another internal game state).

Therefore, if a "small hit" is won, the conditional device does not operate and the accessory continuous operation device also does not operate, so there is no transition of the internal gaming state (transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small winning) is not carried out). However, transition control of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be performed. In addition, in the winning game based on the small winning (small winning game), since the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, a round game like a jackpot is not executed, but depending on how the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening is determined, It is possible to realize a "pseudo round game" that behaves as if a round game is being played. If such a transition form is used, for example, if the gaming state after a small winning game and the gaming state after another jackpot game are transferred to the same variable pattern selection mode (Tcode), the same effect will be achieved in both. You can stay in production mode. Also, due to winning a small hit, it is possible to shift from the first variable pattern selection mode to the second variable pattern selection mode, or to transfer from the second variable pattern selection mode to the first variable pattern selection mode again. It is.

The operating mode of the small winning game is basically the same as that of the jackpot game, except that a round game is not executed. Specifically, after a predetermined start INT elapses, an "opening/closing action game (pseudo round game)" is executed to open the big prize opening, and when the opening/closing action game ends, after a predetermined end INT, a series of The small winning game ends. Such a small win is different from a mere "loss" in that it is a winning type that triggers a transition (execution trigger) to a winning game (special game state) that involves the opening and closing of the big winning opening, just like a jackpot. make a difference. Although this embodiment does not provide a "small win," it is possible to provide one or more types of small wins for the lottery targets on the special map 1 side and/or the special map 2 side in consideration of gameplay etc. can.

(4-2. Regarding winning games)
Next, the contents of the winning game based on each winning mentioned above will be explained.

"10R Guaranteed Variable Jackpot" has a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening in one round game is such that the number of winnings in the big winning opening may reach the maximum number of winnings (10 pieces). The jackpot is set at a "long opening time (for example, 29.8 seconds)" that can be fully expected. In addition, the maximum number of rounds for "4R sure-change jackpot" and "4R time-saving jackpot" is 4 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening in one round game is the same "long opening time" as for 10R sure-change jackpot. It has become a jackpot to be set. Regarding the profit state (profit degree) during a jackpot game, the larger the maximum number of rounds is, the higher it becomes, and the longer the maximum opening time of the jackpot opening becomes, the higher it becomes. In the case of this embodiment, since the maximum opening time for each jackpot is the same, the larger the maximum number of rounds is for a jackpot, the higher the profit state during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that the opening pattern of the big prize opening related to the round game is freely determined. For example, the opening pattern of the big winning opening for at least some round games (round games of a certain number of rounds) may be changed to a "short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds)" that is shorter than the long opening time. , it may be set to an even shorter "extremely short opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds)". Also, during the maximum opening time, the big prize opening may continue to be opened, or an opening pattern that involves closing one or more times (for example, "open for 1.3 seconds + close for 0.5 seconds + open for 27 seconds") You can also use it as

(4-3. About the destination game state after a winning game)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, a description will be given of the game state to which the game state is transferred after each jackpot game described above ends. The column “Game state at the time of winning/Destination game state” shown in FIG. The relationship is shown. In addition, the "gaming state at the time of winning" in FIG. 4 indicates the internal gaming state type at the time of winning (the corresponding gaming mode type is in parentheses), and the "transition destination gaming state" indicates the internal gaming state type to which the transition is made. (The number in parentheses indicates the corresponding game mode type). Details regarding the gaming mode to which the game mode is transferred will be described later.

(If you win the 10R definite strange jackpot or 4R sure strange jackpot)
In the case of a ``10R variable probability jackpot'' or a ``4R variable probability jackpot,'' regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, the game is shifted to the ``probability variable state'' after the jackpot game. These jackpots are called "probable variable jackpots" in that they are jackpots that trigger a transition to a variable probability state.

If the state changes to the above-mentioned "determined variation state", the special symbol variation display game continues until the number of executions (number of symbol variations) reaches a predetermined number of times, or until a jackpot is won within a predetermined number of times. When this is possible and the special symbol variable display game ends without winning a jackpot within the specified number of times, the variable probability state ends and a transition is made to the normal state from the next game. In addition, whether or not the specified number of times has been reached is determined by counting the number of executions of special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (the number of symbol variations of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2) (in the time saving state described later). The same applies to cases)). That is, when the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (the total number of symbol variations of the special symbols 1 and 2) ends for the specified number of times without hitting the jackpot, the variable probability state is ended.

In this embodiment, after the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to a gaming state where the probability is at least high (probable variable state or potential state), a jackpot (however, excluding "small wins" that do not trigger the transition to the internal gaming state) If the special symbol fluctuation display game ends a predetermined number of times without winning, the high probability state is ended and the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to a low probability state. ))”. Hereinafter, the upper limit number of times of the special symbol variation display game (the number of variations of the special symbol) in which this high probability state is continued will be referred to as the "ST number of times" as necessary.

Therefore, when the state is shifted to a variable probability state, as in this embodiment, when the ST number ends, the variable state ends and the state is shifted to the normal state (YJ=00H) (probable variable → normal). , Unlike this embodiment, there is a case where only the high probability state ends when the ST number ends. There is a case (probability variation → time saving) in which only the "special symbol probability variable function" is completed and transferred to the "time saving state (YJ=02H)". In the case of this embodiment, the number of STs is set to 65,535 (see Note (3) in Fig. 4), and due to the jackpot lottery probability, the "infinite" state is virtually guaranteed until the next jackpot is won. However, in reality, if the ST number of 65,535 times ends without winning a jackpot, the state will be shifted to the normal state.

It should be noted that whether the number of STs is infinite (including the number of STs that can continue until the next jackpot win) or finite can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay. When setting the number of STs to a finite value, consider the fact that "the number of STs cannot continue until the next jackpot win", and for example, set the denominator of the jackpot winning probability (probability denominator value) at high probability to "F1 ”, if the ST number is “F2 (natural number)”, then “0<F2<F1 (any ST number less than the probability denominator)” or “F1≦F2≦5×F1 (1 to 5 times the probability denominator)”. It is preferable that the number of STs satisfies the following: (within 63% to 99%): Any number of STs with a consecutive winning rate of approximately 63% to 99%).

(If you win the 4R time-saving jackpot)
In the case of the "4R time-saving jackpot", regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, the game is shifted to the "time-saving state" after the jackpot game. These jackpots are referred to as "time-saving jackpots" in that they are jackpots that trigger a transition to a time-saving state.

When the above-mentioned "time saving state" is entered, the number of executions of the special symbol fluctuation display game will continue until a predetermined number of times is reached, and within that number of times, a jackpot (however, a small hit that does not trigger the transition to the internal gaming state) will continue. When the special symbol variation display game ends without winning (excluding winnings), the time saving state ends and a transition is made to the normal state from the next game. In the case of this embodiment, the prescribed number of times related to the time saving state (time saving number) includes the time saving state related to "support time saving" described later, "100 times (support time saving A, time saving jackpot: finite time saving)", "200 times", "200 times (support time saving A, time saving jackpot: finite time saving)" There are 65,535 times (Support time reduction B: Limited time reduction), 65535 times (Support time reduction C: Infinite time reduction that can continue until the next jackpot win) (see note (2) in Figure 4). Here, one type of time-saving jackpot, "4R time-saving jackpot", is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple types of time-saving jackpots having different number of time-saving jackpots may be provided. In this case, at least one time-saving jackpot may be the same as the number of time-savings due to support time-saving, and the other time-saving jackpots may be a different number of time-savings from the number of time-savings due to support time-saving. Further, all the time saving jackpots may be different from the number of time saving times due to support time saving.

It should be noted that whether the number of time-saving jackpots related to the time-saving jackpot is infinite (including the number of time-savings that can continue until the next jackpot win) or finite can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay. When setting the number of time savers to a finite value, take into consideration the fact that ``the number of time savers is not something that can continue until the next jackpot win.'' If F3 is the number of time saving times F4 (natural number), then "0<F3<F4 (any number of time saving times less than the probability denominator)" or "F3≦F4≦5×F3 (within 1 to 5 times the probability denominator: It is preferable that the number of shortened working hours satisfies "any number of shortened working hours with a consecutive rental rate of about 63% to 99%)".

(About losing)
Further, as shown in the figure, on the special drawing 1 side, there are a plurality of loss types such as loss A, B, and C, each having a different symbol lottery rate. In this embodiment, the relationship satisfies "loss A>loss B>loss C", and for example, loss A is 95%, loss B is 4%, and loss C is 1%. Although the special drawing 2 side shows an example in which one type of loss A is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple types of loss may be provided.

(About shortening support time)
In this embodiment, as one aspect of the addictive relief function (supportive benefit), or for the purpose of increasing the degree of freedom of the game and improving the fun of the game, we use the jackpot win (time-saving jackpot win) as an opportunity. Instead, there is a ``Support Time Saving'' that grants a ``Time Saving State''. This "Support time saving" is characterized in that the time saving state is given without going through the jackpot winning (operation of the conditional device, operation of the accessory continuous operation device) (without going through the jackpot game).

(A. Special electric activation type support time reduction)
If you win "Support time reduction", the condition device will not be activated (because the condition device does not work, the continuous accessory actuator will not operate), but the special electric accessory will be activated in the same way as if you won "Small hit". may be activated to execute an opening/closing action game (opening/closing the big prize opening in a predetermined opening pattern), and then providing a time saving state. In this specification, the time-saving support for operating the special electric accessories is referred to as "special electric activation type support time-saving", and the series of opening/closing operation games based on this is referred to as "support time-saving opening/closing game". This support time-saving opening/closing game, like the small winning game, can be configured to include a predetermined start INT, an opening/closing operation game in which the big prize opening is opened/closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and a predetermined end INT. . Therefore, if you win the "Special Electric Actuated Support Time Saving", the time saving state will be granted through the support time saving opening/closing game.

To put it simply, the above-mentioned "Special electric activation type support time reduction" includes support time reduction that gives a time reduction state via small hit winning (small hit winning type support time saving), and support time reduction that is based on a winning type different from the small winning type. There is a support time saving (time saving symbol winning type support time saving) which gives a time saving state after winning. The former "small hit winning type support time saving" is suitable when it is desired to provide a special electric activation type support time saving that provides a time saving state via the conventional small winning game. On the other hand, the latter "time saving symbol winning type support time saving" is useful if you want to manage the small winning type and the supporting time saving type separately, for example, the small winning game related to the small winning and the support time saving release related to the special electric activation type support time saving. This is suitable when you want to control games separately or when you do not want to provide a small win itself. In addition, the type of time-saving symbol winning support time-saving includes the time-saving state without activating the special electric accessories (without performing the support time-saving opening/closing game), such as the "special electric non-activation type support time saving" described later. There is a support time reduction provided. Which of the support time reductions, the small hit winning type support time reduction and the time saving symbol winning type support time reduction, is provided, and which support time reduction is provided, one or more, can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay.

(When providing a small hit and special electric activation type support time reduction)
If we provide "Small hit (here, it means "simple small hit (hereinafter referred to as "normal small hit") that does not give a time saving state)" and "Special electric activation type support time saving", the small hit game and support time-saving opening/closing game aspects (opening/closing pattern of the grand prize opening, production during the game (opening production (production during start INT), ending production (production during end INT), right hit instruction production (fire guidance notification production), etc. )) are the same or similar, it is possible to keep which one won a secret state (support time-saving win secret state). Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether he has won the regular small win or the shortened support time. In particular, at least a part of the performance during symbol fluctuation (fluctuation performance) in the case of winning the small hit and the case of winning the special electric activated support time reduction is made common, and in terms of performance, the small hit winning and the support time reduction It is preferable to configure the system so that it is possible to hide which of the winnings has been won for a predetermined period of time. For example, during the fluctuating period and at least part of the winning game period (small winning game and support time-saving opening/closing game), which one won is kept secret for performance purposes. More preferably, a configuration is adopted in which a common winning variation pattern can be selected in cases where a small winning is won and a case where a support time reduction is won, and the performance during the variation is made into a common performance mode. Then, during the period of the winning game executed after the end of the winning fluctuation, the performance mode is such that it is possible to notify which of the small winning and the short support time win has been won. Note that the "common performance" herein may also include a combination of stop decoration patterns. For example, when the decorative pattern associated with a small winning win is "123", it is preferable that the decorative symbol associated with a support time saving win also be "123", and which one has been won is hidden from the stop shape of the decorative symbol. Of course, by changing the fluctuating effects, changing the opening pattern of the grand prize opening, or changing the start INT and/or end INT (opening effect and/or ending effect), you can change the appearance or effect. It may be configured such that it is possible to notify (recognizable to the player) whether or not the player has won.

In addition, when providing multiple types of small winning winning types including small winning winning type support time saving, the following configurations (1st grade) to (3rd grade) can be used.
(Small 1) Among the plurality of small wins, at least one small win can be made to function as a "normal small win", and the remaining small wins can be made to function as a "small win winning type support time saving". For example, when a plurality of small winnings A, B, and C are provided, small winnings A and B function as "small winning type support time saving", and small winning C functions as a "normal small winning". In this case, for "Small win A" and "Small win B" that function as small win type support time savers, the same number of time savings may be given to both, or the number of time savings may be different for each (for example, Small win A In the case of , the number of time reductions may be given as 1000 times, and in the case of small win B, the number of time reductions may be given as 100 times). Regarding the probability of winning a small win, considering the degree of advantage (profit status) for the player, if the same or almost the same number of time savings is given for small wins A and B, "Small win C < Small win B ≦ Small win If the number of times saved is greater for the small win A than for the small win B, it is preferable to set the winning probability to satisfy the relationship ``Small win C<Small win B<Small win A.'' In addition, the above-mentioned support time-saving winning concealment state is executed in the case of winning the regular small hit (small winning C) and winning the small winning type support time saving (in this example, small winning A and/or small winning B). This may be a possible configuration.
(Elementary 2) All of the support time reductions A, B, and C shown in Figure 4 can be made into small winning type support time reduction (in each figure, support time reduction A to C are read as small win A to C, may be applied as appropriate). For example, if you win small win A, the number of time savings is 100 (small win A = the same time saving performance as support time saver A), and if you win small win B, the number of time savings is 200 (small win B = support time saver B). If you win the small win C, you can be awarded 65,535 time savers (small win C = the same time saver performance as the support time saver C).
(Elementary 3) When multiple small winning type support time reductions are provided, if a specific small winning type support time reduction is won during the time reduction state, a new number of time reductions can be set (updated). (Same case as for (1st grade) and (2nd grade) mentioned above). For example, in the case of a small win type support time reduction where small win A gives 1000 time savings and small win B gives 100 time savings, if small win B is won during the time reduction state, the time reduction number is set to 100 times. However, if the small win A that gives a larger number of time savings than the small win B is won, the number of time savings can be configured not to be set. More specifically, for example, if the small win B (100 time savings) is won on the 30th remaining time saving number, a new time saving number of 100 is set in the winning game, and the remaining time saving number is 100. Updated every time. However, if the small win A (1000 times of time savings) is won, a new number of time savings will not be set, and the current small win A win will be treated as invalid (can be treated as a loss), and the remaining number of time savings will remain. The amount of the current game will be subtracted from this (remaining number of time reductions - 1).

(B. Special electric non-operating type support time reduction)
In addition, as a form of support time reduction different from the above-mentioned "special electric activation type support time reduction", without activating the special electric accessory, (1) after the winning game ends (after the special symbol fluctuation time ends, or after the special symbol variation time ends, or After the fixed display time has elapsed), or (2) the time saving state may be entered upon the start of the next game. In this specification, such support time reduction is referred to as "special electric non-operation type support time reduction."

In addition, it is free to adopt one or more of the above-mentioned special electric activated type support time saving or special electric non-activated type support time saving, or whether to adopt one or more of both types of support time saving. In this embodiment, an example in which "special electric non-operation type support time saving" is adopted will be mainly explained.

The "Support Time Saving" according to this embodiment is subject to a jackpot lottery, and like the jackpot, it is designed to be won at a predetermined probability (for example, about 1/500) (win/loss lottery target form). To be more specific, either a "big hit", "shorter support time", or "lose" (including a "small win" if a small win is provided) is drawn through a lottery, and the winner of the "shorter support time" is selected. If so, then the support time saving type (for example, any one of support time saving A to C) is determined by drawing a symbol lottery (see the remarks column (4) in FIG. 4). Note that the lottery probability for shortening support time is the same for all setting values, but it may be different for each setting value, or it may be the same lottery probability for a part of each setting value.

(Support time saving performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, multiple types of support time savings A, B, and C are provided on the special map 1 side, and multiple types of support time savings B and C are provided on the special map 2 side. When a support time reduction is won by lottery, one of the support time reductions is determined by a symbol lottery based on a predetermined symbol lottery rate (see the column of symbol lottery rate in FIG. 4). Furthermore, support time saving A to C each have different time saving performance. Specifically, the details are as follows.

(A) If you win "Support Time Saving A", you will be given 100 time saving times, which is the same as the time saving state granted by the jackpot (4R Time Saving Jackpot) (small benefit).
(B) If you win "Support Time Saving B", you will be granted 200 time saving times, which is more than the time saving state granted by winning the jackpot (medium benefit).
(C) If you win "Support time saving C", you will be given 65,535 time reductions (substantially continuing until the next jackpot), which is more than the time reduction status granted by the jackpot (big benefit). When the number of times of time saving is set to 65,535 times, it is considered as "infinite time saving" in which the time saving state is virtually guaranteed until the next jackpot is won due to the jackpot lottery probability.
To be precise, infinite time saving means that the number of time saving times is "unlimited (infinite)", but it is actually the number of time saving times that guarantees the time saving state until the next jackpot (for example, 10,000 times or 65,535 times). are treated as belonging to "infinite time saving" in this specification. Note that even when a number of time reductions that cannot be completed during business hours of a pachinko hall (for example, about 5000 times) is given, it can be treated as belonging to "infinite time reduction".

(About the probability of winning support time reduction for models with multiple setting stages)
(Mangoku 1) In the case of a gaming machine with a setting function, the probability of winning the jackpot differs depending on multiple setting values (in the case of this embodiment, settings 1 to 6) (see Figure 4), but the probability of winning the support time reduction is , it is possible to have a common winning probability regardless of the set value. In this embodiment, setting 1 is 1/200, setting 2 is 1/196, setting 3 is 1/192, setting 4 is 1/188, setting 5 is 1/184, and setting 6 is 1/180. , the probability of winning the short support time can be set to 1/300, which is common to all settings, for example. If the probability of winning the support time reduction is set as a common probability for all settings, the following configurations can be made (Mangoku 2) to (Mangoku 7).

(Mangoku 2) The probability of winning the short support time can be determined based on the minimum setting of 1. For example, if the probability of winning the jackpot with the minimum setting of 1 is 1/M and the probability of winning with the short support time being 1/N, it can be determined to satisfy the following relational expression (red 1).
"1/M<1/N"...(Red 1)
In the case of the formula "Red 1", the probability of winning the short support time can be made higher than the probability of winning the jackpot with the minimum setting of 1. Note that "1/M=1/N" may also be used.

(Mangoku 3) Also, if the probability of winning the jackpot with the lowest setting 1 is 1/M, the probability of winning the jackpot with the highest setting 6 is 1/L, and the probability of winning the short support time is 1/N, then the following relational expression (Red 2 ).
"1/M<1/N<1/L"...(Red 2)
In the case of formula "Red 2", for example, the winning probability of short support time is set higher than the jackpot winning probability of the lowest setting 1, and the high setting range of settings 4 to 6 makes the winning probability of short support time lower than the jackpot winning probability. It is possible to make it a probability. In this case, depending on the set value, the relationship between the probability of winning the support time reduction and the probability of winning the jackpot can be set high or low. This increases the variety of gameplay in the gaming machine with the setting function, and makes the game more interesting.

(Mangoku 4) Furthermore, the probability of winning the support time reduction (common probability for all settings) can be determined based on the highest setting 6. For example, if the probability of winning the jackpot for the highest setting 6 is 1/L and the probability of winning the support time reduction is 1/N, it can be determined to satisfy the following relational expression (red 3).
"1/L<1/N"...(Red 3)
In the case of the formula "Red 3", the winning probability of the support time reduction can be made higher than the jackpot winning probability of the highest setting 6 at least. In this case, even if the set values are different, it is possible to create a gaming experience in which it is easy to win with a short support time.

(Mangoku 5) Furthermore, the probability of winning the support time reduction (common probability for all settings) can be determined based on setting values other than the minimum setting 1 and the maximum setting 6. For example, if the probability of winning the jackpot for setting value 3 (setting 2 or setting 4 is also acceptable) of the intermediate setting range is 1/G, and the winning probability of shortening support time is 1/N, the following relational formula (red 4) or formula (Red 5) can be specified.
"1/N<1/G"...(Red 4)
"1/G<1/N"...(Red 5)

(Mangoku 6) In addition, if the probability of winning the jackpot for the lowest setting 1 is 1/M, the probability of winning the jackpot for setting 3 in the intermediate setting range is 1/G, and the probability of winning for short support time is 1/N, the following relationship is established. It can be determined to satisfy the formula (red 6).
"1/M<1/N<1/G"...(Red 6)

(Mangoku 7) Note that the reference setting value (reference setting value) can be determined as appropriate. Further, the probability of winning the short support time can be set higher or lower than the jackpot lottery probability of the standard setting value. Further, the winning probability of the support time reduction and the jackpot lottery probability of the reference setting value may be the same or approximately the same probability. In any case, the probability of winning the support time reduction may be determined based on the jackpot lottery probability of the standard setting value.

Note that it is up to you whether to adopt one or more types of support time reduction. Further, there is no particular restriction on which special figure side is provided with a support time-saving function having what kind of time-saving performance. For example, at least one of the support time savings A to C may be provided on the special map 1 side and/or the special map 2 side, or at least one of the support time savings A through C may be provided only on one special map side, and the other There is no need to provide any support time reduction on the special map side.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the support time saving with relatively higher time saving performance is won on the special map 2 side (lower starting port 35 side) than on the special map 1 side (upper starting port 34 side). It is also easy to win a jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot) with relatively high jackpot performance. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery on the special drawing 2 side.

In addition, in the illustration, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, if you win support time reduction A, B, or C, the number of time reductions will be 100 times (finite time reduction), 200 times (finite time reduction), and 65535 times (infinite time reduction), respectively. However, the special feature of "support time saving" may be utilized to configure the following (structure A) to (structure G).

(Structure A: Fall transition avoidance function)
In order to prevent the occurrence of a "falling transition" situation in which the system shifts to a time-saving state with a low profit level, the following configurations (α1) to (α4) can be adopted.
(α1) After the infinite time reduction is granted, if a support time reduction that grants a finite time reduction (for example, 100 or 200 times) is won, the infinite time reduction remains. For example, if support time reduction A (100 time reductions) or support time reduction B (200 times) is won during infinite time reduction, the number of time reductions is controlled not to be updated.
(α2) At least during a gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) involving electric support, support time saving is excluded from lottery targets. Specifically, if a support time reduction is won during a gaming state (work time reduction state, variable probability state) that involves electric support, the winning will be treated as invalid and the time reduction state due to support time reduction (hereinafter, the time reduction state due to support time reduction will be referred to as a "support time reduction state"). By executing a jackpot lottery in which the support time reduction is not granted or the support time reduction is excluded from the lottery target, the support time reduction is treated as invalid, and the time reduction state due to the support time reduction is not granted. In the former case, if you win the support time reduction, you can perform the same process as when you win a loser (if there are multiple types of losers, the same process as when any of the losers wins). It can be carried out). In the latter case, since the support time reduction is excluded from the jackpot lottery, it becomes a lottery format in which there is no winning of the support time reduction itself. Incidentally, at least during a gaming state involving a high probability state (variable probability state or potential state), the support time reduction may be excluded from the lottery target.
(α3) It may be configured such that the time saving state due to the support time reduction (support time saving state) is not provided only during the variable probability state. Since the variable probability state (high probability state + electricity support state) is a more advantageous gaming state than the time saving state (low probability state + electricity support state), if you recklessly apply the support time reduction state during the variable probability state, the gaming state will fall. This is because In addition, if the number of STs is not an infinite number but a finite number (for example, a finite variable number such as 100 times or 50 times), depending on the number of STs, the next jackpot is not guaranteed during the number of STs. There are cases where the probability of consecutive winnings of a jackpot is low (for example, the consecutive winning rate during ST is about 30% to 50%). In such a case, considering the number of time reductions due to support time reduction and the degree of profit with finite probability variation (degree of advantage to the player (profit state (profit degree) given to the player), even if it is in a state of probability variation. , it may be configured such that a support time-saving state can be given.For example, considering the jackpot lottery probability (considering the so-called "TS" value), even if the time-saving state is reached, the next jackpot will not be won during the time-saving state. It is not necessary to treat winnings of support time-savings that can give a highly expected number of time-savings (for example, a consecutive win rate of about 95% to 99%) as invalid.For example, in this embodiment, a jackpot at a low probability The winning probability is 1/180 to 1/200 (setting 6 to setting 1), and support time reduction A (number of time reductions: 100 times), support time reduction B (number of time reductions: 200 times), and infinite time reduction (number of time reductions: 65,535 times) are granted. In this case, the success rates during each short-time situation are approximately 42.7% to 39.4% (100 shortened working hours), approximately 67.2% to 63.3% (200 shortened working hours), Approximately 100% (65,535 times of time reduction).Support time reduction C that grants infinite time reduction has a consecutive winning rate of approximately 100%, that is, it provides a benefit that can virtually guarantee a jackpot win next time while in the time reduction state. Therefore, even if you are in a variable probability state, support time saving C does not have to be treated as invalid.Also, as mentioned earlier, support that can give you a time saving number that can greatly expect you to win the next jackpot during that time saving state. For example, if the number of time reductions is three times or more than the TS (1/240) of setting 1 (720 or more time reductions), a continuous rate of approximately 95% or more can be given in settings 1 to 6. .Support time reduction that grants such a finite time reduction does not have to be treated as invalid even if it is in a state of variable probability.
(α4) In the present embodiment, when the electric support state is reached, a situation may occur in which the player can “hit the right hand” and receive the lottery on the special drawing 2 side, aiming for a jackpot consecutive winning state. Therefore, in order to prevent the transition from falling when receiving the lottery on the special drawing 2 side, the special drawing 2 side should (1) not provide a support time reduction, (2) provide a support time reduction that grants infinite time reduction, or (3) It is preferable to provide support time saving that gives a greater number of time reductions than the time saving jackpot (in the case of this embodiment, the number of time reductions is greater than 100 times).

(Structure B: Additional function)
(Italy 20) If the support time reduction is won during the time reduction state, it is added to the current remaining number of time reductions (the configuration is such that it is possible to add the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction to the current number of time reduction counters). For example, if you win support time reduction A when the remaining number of time reductions is 50, it is updated to "remaining number of time reductions 50 times + 100 times = 150 times". Further, support time reduction that can be added on and support time reduction that cannot be added may be provided. For example, if you win support time saving A, you can add it, but if you win support time saver B, you can not add it. The add-on function can expand the range of playability and improve the fun of the game. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.
(Means for restricting the number of additional hours saved)
In addition, in order to prevent excessive additions from occurring, it may be configured such that additions are not made more than a predetermined number of times (time saving number addition restriction means). For example, the upper limit of the number of additional time saving times can be set to "300 times." If support time reduction B (200 time reductions) is won when the remaining number of time reductions is 150, it will be limited to the upper limit of ``300 times'' instead of ``150 remaining time reduction times + 200 times = 350 times''. Ru. In addition, even if there is an additional limit, if you win the support time reduction C that grants infinite time reduction, in order to prevent the player from feeling a loss, the restriction will be lifted and the infinite time reduction will be applied. (65535 times) may be given. In addition, if there is an additional amount, the number of notifications (displays) using the "remaining time reduction number notification presentation (for example, countdown display)" described later, which visually announces the remaining number of time reductions, will be increased by ``+50!'' or ``+100.'' It is preferable to perform an "additional notification effect" such as "!" to notify that the number of time savings has been added (increased).

(Structure C: Infinite/finite time saving promotion function)
When the support time reduction is won during the time reduction state, infinite time reduction can be granted (time reduction state promotion means). In addition, when the time saving state is due to infinite time saving, even if the support time saving is won, the number of time saving times does not need to be updated, or may be updated. Further, instead of granting infinite time savings, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined number of time savings can be granted. For example, if you win support time saving B while in the time saving state, you would originally be given 200 time savings, but if you win during the time saving state, you will receive a larger number of time savings, for example 300 time savings. May be granted. Furthermore, the maximum number of time savings that can be given due to a jackpot and/or support time reduction may be provided. In the case of this embodiment, infinite time savings (65535 times) is the maximum number of time savings, so infinite time savings will be granted. Further, it may be configured such that infinite time reduction or a predetermined number of time reductions are granted only when a specific support time reduction is won during the time reduction state. For example, if support time reduction A (high probability of winning) is won, only 100 time savings will be given, but if support time reduction B (low probability of winning) is won, infinite time savings will be granted. Good too. In addition, when the number of times of time saving increases, it is preferable to display the above-mentioned "additional notification effect".

(Structure D: Regarding time-saving jackpot and support time-saving according to special symbols)
When the number of types of support time saving on the special map 1 side is "X" and the number of types of support time saving on the special map 2 side is "Y", it can be configured to satisfy the following relational expression (a).
"X" = "Y", "X"<"Y", or "X">"Y"... (a)
In addition, if the above relational expression (a) is satisfied, "X = 0 (support time reduction on the special map 1 side is not provided)" or "Y = 0 (support time reduction on the special map 1 side is not provided)". Good too.
In addition, one or more types of support time saving with the same time saving performance (time saving number) may be provided on the special map 1 side and the special map 2 side (for example, support time saving B is provided on special map 1 and 2). , one or more types of support time savers with different time saving performance may be provided (for example, support time saver C is provided for special map 1 and support time saver B is provided for special map 2). Further, the support time saving may be a finite time saving or an infinite time saving, and the number of types thereof is not particularly limited.
In addition, when providing a time-saving jackpot on the special map 1 side and/or the special chart 2 side, a time-saving jackpot with the same time-saving performance as support time-saving may be provided, or a time-saving jackpot with different time-saving performance may be provided, for example. , When providing a "time-saving jackpot" and "support time-saving" on one special drawing side, these may have the same time-saving performance or may have different time-saving performances.
In the case of this embodiment, during electric support, it is "advantageous for right-handed players", that is, it is easier to receive the lottery on the special map 2 side, so the support time saving provided on the special map 2 side has higher time saving performance than on the special map 1 side. It is preferable to set a time limit for support. In addition, when providing support time reduction and jackpot that give a time reduction state that is treated as essentially infinite time reduction, the number of time reduction set as "infinite time reduction" (for example, 65535 times) should be standardized to reduce the control burden. is preferred.

(Structural E, F: Regarding the lottery probability of shortening support time)
(Structure E) It is possible to determine the probability of winning the support time reduction according to the set value. For example, the lower the setting value is, the higher the probability of winning the short support time can be. In this case, the lower the setting is, the more the user can benefit from shorter support time, which can help avoid getting stuck. Moreover, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of winning the support time reduction can be. In this case, the higher the setting, the higher the ball payout rate, without making any difference in the probability of winning the jackpot depending on the setting value.
(Structure F) The probability of winning the support time reduction (if there are multiple support time reductions, the total winning probability may be used) is the same (almost the same) as the probability of winning the jackpot when the probability is low, preferably lower than that. It is preferable to do so. This is because the support time reduction is a "support-like benefit," so it is preferable not to blindly let people win with a high probability. For example, with setting 1, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1/200 (see Figure 4), so set the probability of winning the short support time to be the same or approximately the same as 1/200, or set it to a lower probability. It is preferable to set it to approximately 1/500 (in this embodiment, it is set to about 1/500). In addition, if the probability of winning the jackpot is the same as, or almost the same as, or lower than the probability of winning the jackpot of the setting value that can be set on the gaming machine, the probability of winning the support time reduction will not be excessively high, so it is not necessarily the case that a specific It is not necessary to use the jackpot winning probability of the set value, for example, the jackpot winning probability of the minimum setting 1 or the maximum setting 6, as the standard.

(Structure G: About the support time-saving opening/closing game by special electric activation type support time-saving)
When a plurality of special electric actuation type support time savers are provided, the support time saver opening/closing game mode corresponding to each support time saver may be the same, but at least one of the support time savers may be different. For example, in the support time saving opening/closing game using support time saving A to C, the opening patterns of the big prize openings are made different. Specifically, the opening time of the big prize opening 50 is 0.4 seconds for the support time reduction A, 0.8 seconds for the support time reduction B, and 1.8 seconds for the support time reduction C. In this case, the number of prize balls acquired by the support time-saving opening/closing game can be different. In this way, if the opening pattern of the big winning opening is different depending on the type of support time reduction, even if the number of time reductions granted is the same, the support time reduction can have different advantages (profit status). There is an advantage.

(About the grant form of the number of working hours reduced due to support working hours reduction)
Here, when granting finite time savings or infinite time savings through support time savings, the following grant forms (Ω1) to (Ω4) can be used.

(Limited time saving form Ω1)
If there are multiple types (number of types A) of the number of time reductions due to a jackpot (number of time reductions granted due to winning a jackpot), the type of number of time reductions due to support time reduction is set to a smaller number of types (number of types B). . Specifically, it is configured to satisfy the relationship "number of types B<number of types A". For example, if two types (number of types A) are provided as the number of time reductions due to jackpots: 100 times (number of time reductions A) and 50 times (number of time reductions B), one type of number of time reductions due to support time reduction (for example, 100 time reductions). ). In addition, as long as the relationship of "number of types B<number of types A" is satisfied, a different number of time reductions than the number of time reductions due to jackpot may be given as the number of time reductions due to support time reduction. Further, two or more types of time saving times (time saving states) due to support time saving may be provided (in this case, the relationship is "2≦number of types B<number of types A").

(Limited time saving form Ω2)
When the average number of time reductions due to the jackpot is N, and the average number of time reductions due to support time reduction is M, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Formula 1) to (Formula 3).
(Equation 1) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of time reductions N<average number of time reductions M". For example, if there are 100 times and 75 times of time savings due to the time saving jackpot, the average number of time savings N is 75 times, so the average number of time savings due to support time reduction M is set to be a larger number of time savings (for example, 100 times). do. In this case, the time-saving state due to the support time reduction has a higher degree of profit than the time-saving state due to the jackpot, so it can be a nice support benefit for the addicted player. Note that the average number of time reductions M may be an infinite number of times.
(Equation 2) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship: "average number of time reductions N=average number of time reductions M". In this case, the time-saving state due to the jackpot and the time-saving state due to the support time reduction have the same degree of profit. In addition, "infinite time saving" may be included in both the time saving state due to the jackpot and the time saving state due to support time saving. In this case as well, "average number of time reductions N (infinite number of times) = average number of time reductions M (infinite number of times)", which satisfies (Formula 2).
(Equation 3) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of time reductions N>average number of time reductions M". In this case, the degree of profit in the time-saving state due to the support time reduction is relatively lower than the time-saving state due to the jackpot, so the position of the support time reduction as a "support benefit" can be maintained without giving an excessive benefit. . In addition, "infinite time saving" may be included in the time saving state due to the jackpot, and in this case, "infinite time saving" is not included in the time saving state due to support time saving.

(Limited time saving form Ω3)
(4) Similarly to the above (Formula 3), focusing on the point of not giving excessive benefits, the number of time reductions can be set to satisfy the following relationships (4α) and (4β).
(4α) Determine the number of time reductions that satisfies at least the relationship “number of time reductions due to support time reduction≦maximum number of time reductions due to jackpot”. In this example, the number of times of time saving due to support time saving is set to be equal to or less than the number of time saving due to time saving jackpot (for example, 100 times of time saving of 4R time saving jackpot). For example, the number of time reductions due to support time reduction is 100 times, 90 times, 70 times, etc.
(4β) In addition, when multiple time-saving jackpots with different numbers of time-savings are provided, paying attention to the minimum number of time-savings due to the time-saving jackpot and the maximum number of time-savings MAX, it is determined that “Minimum number of time-savings due to jackpot ≦Number of time-savings due to support time-saving ≦ Jackpot” The number of time reductions may satisfy the relationship ``maximum number of time reductions MAX''. For example, if multiple time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are provided, and the number of time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are 100 and 50, respectively, the number of time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 is 50. As described above, the number of time saving times that satisfies the number of time saving times of 100 times or less due to the time saving jackpot 1 can be set. For example, the number of time reductions due to support time reduction is 60, 99, etc.
Note that the time saving state due to the jackpot may include "infinite time saving", and in this case, the time saving state due to support time saving does not include "infinite time saving". Further, the minimum number of time savings due to the jackpot may be 100 times or more, and as long as the above (Formula 3) is satisfied, the number of time savings due to support time reduction may be 100 times or more. Hereinafter, the "time saving state due to jackpot (time saving state given due to jackpot)" will also be referred to as "jackpot time saving state".

(Limited time saving form Ω4)
Regarding the jackpot or support time saving, it is possible to provide a number of time saving times that is greater than the probability denominator of the jackpot lottery probability when the probability is low. Further, it may be configured to give the same or substantially the same number of time reductions as the probability denominator of the jackpot lottery probability when the probability is low. Note that if the probability denominator is not a natural number, a value obtained by rounding down to the decimal point may be used as the number of time reductions. For example, if the jackpot lottery probability is 1/300.15, it is "300 times", which is the value rounded down to the nearest whole number. Further, if the probability denominator is less than 100, a value calculated by "value of the tens place x 10", and if it is less than 1000, a value calculated by "value of the hundreds place x 100" may be adopted as the number of time saving times.
In this way, by employing the same, substantially the same, or approximate value as the probability denominator, it is possible to cause an appropriate number of successive purchases during the time-saving state due to the support time reduction. Specifically, since it is possible to achieve a consecutive play rate of about 63% to 64%, it is not an excessive benefit, and the number of times can be shortened to balance the interests of both the player and the hall. can.

(Limited time saving form Ω5)
Moreover, when focusing on the point that the support time reduction does not become an excessive benefit, it is preferable to determine the number of time reductions that satisfy the following relationship with respect to the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction.
(Formula 4) If there are multiple times of time saving due to support time saving, the maximum number of time saving among these time saving times is "S", and the denominator of the jackpot lottery probability (1/T) at low probability is "T", It is preferable that the relational expression "S≦T" be satisfied.
Note that the value of "S" may be based on the jackpot lottery probability of any of settings 1 to 6. Preferably, the jackpot lottery probability with an intermediate setting of 3, more preferably with a minimum setting of 1 or a maximum setting of 6 is used as the standard. For example, referring to FIG. 4, if the jackpot lottery probability at low probability of setting 1 is used as the standard, if "M = 200 (low probability: 1/200)" is the above (formula 4), then support It can be said that it is preferable to adopt a maximum value of 200 times or less for the number of time reductions.

(Regarding the power supply release game related to the support time reduction state and the power supply release game related to the time reduction state due to a jackpot or the variable probability state due to a jackpot)
The operation mode of the power supply release game related to the support time saving state (hereinafter referred to as "support time reduction power supply release game") and the power supply release game related to the time reduction state due to a jackpot or the probability change state due to a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot power supply release game") The relationship with the operation mode of "open game" can be configured as follows. The operation mode of the normal power release game mainly means the opening/closing operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47 when the assist hit occurs.
(Italy 4) At least the support time-saving general electricity release game and the jackpot general electricity release game are common. By standardizing the general electricity release game, it is possible to reduce the number of programs related to the general electricity release game. In addition, during the development stage, it becomes easy to calculate the payout rate during the electric support state. Furthermore, depending on how the performance is presented, it can be made difficult for the player to understand whether the game is in a jackpot time-saving state or a support time-saving state.
(Italy 5) At least the support time-saving general electricity release game and the jackpot general electricity release game are different. According to this configuration, it is possible to make a difference in the winning rate between the support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state, thereby improving the gameplay.

<5. About the production＞
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the performance mode (performance state) will be explained. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of performance modes are provided that perform performances related to the gaming state, and the system is configured to be able to control transition between the performance modes in response to the transition (update) of the gaming state. Specifically, the performance mode can be shifted when the internal gaming state or the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated (changed). The production modes include "normal production mode" related to the "normal state", "probable variation production mode" related to the probability variation state, "time saving production mode" related to the time saving state, and "win production mode" related to the winning game. There are multiple types of production modes depending on each gaming state, such as "Mode". In addition, in each production mode, a background display (background effect) is displayed as the background of the fluctuating display screen of decorative symbols so that the player can understand which production mode corresponds to the gaming state he/she is staying in. , and are each changed to a performance mode related to the gaming state.

For example, under the "Normal Production Mode", the first background production (for example, a background display displaying a background image of a cherry tree) is reminiscent of the season 'Spring', while under the 'Time Saving Production Mode', the first background production is reminiscent of the Season 'Summer'. The second background effect (for example, a background effect that displays a background image of the sea), and the third background effect that evokes the season 'autumn' (for example, a background image of a tree with autumn leaves) under the "variable effect mode" (background effect that displays), etc., and this can indicate the gaming status during the stay. It should be noted that not only the background display is changed, but also the BGM, decorative patterns (pictures), pending display mode, etc. can be changed to a performance mode related to the gaming state. Although the details will be described later, the performance mode can be changed depending on the number of successive jackpots and the number of remaining time reductions (for example, see FIGS. 7A and 7B described below).

(5-1-1. Production stage)
Furthermore, at least one production mode includes a plurality of types of "production stages", and it is possible to shift between these production stages. Like the performance mode, this performance stage is an aspect of the performance mode that performs a performance related to the game state. For example, in the normal state, the production stages belonging to the normal production mode (for example, the production stage reminiscent of the season 'spring') include the "cherry blossom stage (production stage A)" that displays a background image of cherry blossom trees, and the "cherry blossom stage (production stage A)" that displays a background image of cherry blossom trees. There is a ``Nanohana Stage (Production Stage B)'' where a background image is displayed, a ``Kamakoei Stage (Production Stage C)'' where a background image of Kamakoei is displayed, and a production corresponding to each production stage appears. That is, even in the same production mode, production can be produced according to each production stage, so it is possible to have a wide variety of production variations. In addition, the transition from one production stage to another production stage may be triggered by the execution of a certain preview production (for example, a stage change production described below), and the transition from one production stage to another production stage may be triggered by the execution of a certain preview production (for example, a stage change production described below), and the transition from one production stage to another production stage may be triggered by the execution of a certain preview production (for example, a stage change production described later), may be migrated depending on the situation. In addition, when there are a plurality of production stages belonging to one production mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) itself associated with each of the plurality of production stages is the same. That is, the variation pattern distribution table used when selecting a variation pattern is the same in any of the plurality of performance stages. For example, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) associated with production stages A to C is a production stage related to the normal mode (Tcode = 00H), and when selecting a variation pattern in any of production stages A to C, The variation pattern distribution table used for both is the same.

The performance control unit 24 (CPU 241) is configured to be able to control the transition between each performance mode in accordance with the transition (update) of the gaming state, and includes a functional unit (performance state transition control means) that controls the transition between multiple types of performance modes. ). Out of the performance control commands sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), the performance control unit 24 uses a performance control command that includes information regarding the gaming state, specifically, designates the current gaming state, and specifies the gaming state. Based on the information included in a specific production control command that specifies that the The production mode is managed in a manner that maintains consistency with the game state of the side, and the transition from one production mode to another production mode (transition between multiple types of production modes) can be controlled according to the processing status. has been done. The above-mentioned specific performance control commands include, for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a game state designation command, and a specific command (a jackpot start command and a jackpot end command) sent during a win. In addition, if the performance control section 24 side can independently determine the gaming state, it is possible to control the transition of the performance mode or performance stage without depending on a specific performance control command.

(5-2. Preview performance)
Next, the preview performance will be explained. The production control unit 24 executes the jackpot based on at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern specification command (specifically, the variation pattern specification command and/or the decorative pattern specification command, the information included in the winning command described below, etc.). It is configured to be able to execute and control various "notice performances" related to lottery results (notice performance execution control means). The main role of the preview performance is to suggest (notice) the level of expectation (well-known ``win expectation level'') of whether or not you have won the winning type (including shortened support time), and to indicate the level of expectation for the occurrence of a specific preview performance (notice). This includes suggestions regarding the level of expectation for specific advance notices to occur. Specifically, it is configured to be able to perform performances related to at least the above-mentioned performance mode and the jackpot lottery results (at least the winning/losing lottery results).

Many of the preview performances function as "inciting performances" to arouse players' expectations of winning. Typical preview performances include ``reach performance'', ``pseudo continuous performance'', ``player participation type performance'', ``step-up performance'', ``stage change performance'', and ``pre-read preview performance''. Accompanying these performances, there are various preview performances (cut-in performances, etc.) that occur in combination (simultaneously, overlappingly) or independently.

(5-2-1. Reach performance)
The above-mentioned "reach performance" refers to a performance mode that involves a reach state (a variable display mode that involves a reach state), and specifically refers to a performance mode that derives and displays the game result via a reach state. "Reach state" means that before the result of the decorative symbol fluctuation display game is derived, some decorative symbols derived and displayed during the decorative symbol fluctuation display game indicate that a jackpot has occurred (jackpot winning). This is a display mode in which a decorative pattern that forms part of the display mode and which has not yet been derived and displayed is displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the jackpot is generated by using the fluctuating display mode of the decorative pattern that is dramatic. This refers to a variable display mode that suggests that the displayed mode is easy to derive (that there is a possibility of winning the jackpot) and makes the player expect to win the jackpot. For example, if the combination of decorative symbols (jackpot symbols) indicating a jackpot win (jackpot occurrence) is a set of symbols such as "7 (left symbol),""7 (middle symbol)," and "7 (right symbol)," the predetermined On the hit effective line, the left and right symbols, where part of the decorative symbol is part of the pattern alignment, display "7" (so-called tenpai state), and the middle symbol (the rest that does not constitute the tenpai state) This is a state in which the symbol ( ) is being displayed in a fluctuating manner while changing at high speed, moving frame by frame, swinging, enlarging/reducing, deforming, etc. Therefore, even if a reach state is formed, the result of the decorative symbol fluctuation display game does not necessarily mean a "jackpot", and the final result is not a stop display mode (jackpot symbol) indicating a jackpot. In this case, the result of this game will be a “lose”.

The above-mentioned "reach effects" include multiple types of reach effects associated with the degree of expectation of winning. For example, it includes the conventionally known "N reach (normal reach)" and "SP reach (super reach)" where the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when N reach appears. '' have a relatively longer performance time (fluctuating time) than N reach in order to stimulate expectations of winning the jackpot. Further, SP reach includes special SP reach such as "SP reach", "SP reach + SPSP reach", and "SPSP reach". The contents of each reach are explained below.

(r1) "N Reach" is a system that notifies game results (hits or losses (information related to jackpot lottery results)) without SP Reach occurring by simply passing through the Normal Reach state after normal fluctuations. This is the variation mode when the winning bid ends, and it is the reach performance with the lowest expectation of winning. N Reach includes N Reach 1 and N Reach 2, which have different winning expectations, and the relationship between the winning expectations is "N Reach 1 < N Reach 2".
(r2) "SP reach (normal SP reach)" is the first reach effect (SP reach) that occurs via normal reach (N reach 1 or N reach 2), then the game result is announced and the game ends. This is how the reach changes depending on the situation.
(r3) "SP Reach + SPSP Reach", after the normal fluctuation, the first reach effect (SP reach) occurs via the normal reach, and once the loss is announced, the winner is won than the above first reach effect. This is a reach fluctuation mode when a highly anticipated second reach effect (SPSP reach) occurs (develops into other SP reach types) and ends after announcing the game result (hereinafter also referred to as "developed SPSP reach") ).
(r4) "SPSP reach" normally changes and then goes through the normal reach state, but the first reach effect (SP reach) is not passed through, that is, it is omitted, and the second reach effect (SPSP reach) is immediately performed. This is a reach fluctuation mode when a game occurs (directly develops into SPSP reach) and ends after announcing the game result (hereinafter also referred to as "direct SPSP reach").

The degree of expectation of winning in the reach effect mainly changes depending on the selection rate of the reach effect. For example, among normal reaches, the selection rate is related to the jackpot lottery result so that the winning expectation relationship is "N reach 1 < reach N2 < SP reach < advanced SPSP reach < direct SPSP reach". is determined. Furthermore, for example, among the reaches with variable probability shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, "direct hit reach 1 < direct hit reach 2", "mid reach A < mid reach B", "mid reach A < dalian" The relationship between the winning expectations of "Daliansho Medium Reach B<Daliansho Medium Reach C", and the winning of "Timesaver Medium Reach A<Timesaver Medium Reach B<Timesaver Medium Reach C" between the short-time medium reaches shown in Figures 40 and 41. The selection rate is determined in relation to the jackpot lottery result so that it is related to the level of expectation.

Note that the actual winning expectation level changes depending on whether or not other preview performances (for example, pseudo-continuation performances) are included. For example, even if an advanced SPSP reach appears, if a preview performance with a high expectation of winning is involved, the expectation of winning can be equal to or higher than that of a direct SPSP reach. In addition, in this specification, for convenience of explanation, Zhongrensho middle reach A, Zhongrensho middle reach B, Daliansho middle reach A, Daliansho middle reach B, Daliansho middle reach C, time-saving middle reach A, time-saving middle reach B. Time-saving medium reach C is treated in the same way as reaches belonging to "SP reach," but in some cases, medium-time reach medium reach A and time-saving medium reach A, which have low expectations of winning, are treated in the same way as "N reach." Can be done.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned ready-to-win effect is used in the process of deriving and displaying a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot. Therefore, for the player, the presence or absence of reach is a clue to know the possibility of winning the jackpot. Therefore, a plurality of types of "anticipation preview performance" are provided as a performance mode that foretells (suggests) the possibility of a reach, in other words, a performance mode that can more clearly predict the degree of expectation of winning. This "expectation preview performance" plays the role of an inciting performance that foretells the degree of expectation of winning, but it also serves as a notice that a specific performance (for example, a reach performance) may occur, or a specific performance. It also plays the role of foretelling the definite occurrence of a performance. Therefore, for example, in a ready-to-win performance scenario, a certain preview performance may occur before the ready-to-win performance occurs, not only foretelling the possibility of the occurrence of a ready-to-win performance but also foretelling the degree of expectation of winning. In other words, when accompanied by one or more expected preview performances, the degree of expectation of winning becomes clearer and the degree of expectation of winning may also increase, rather than when the reach effect occurs alone. Such expected preview performances include ``pre-notice performances'' that can occur before the reach performance, and ``post-notice performances'' that can occur during the reach performance.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-connection performance (pseudo-connection))
In the present embodiment, one of the expected preview performances is a "pseudo-continuation performance (hereinafter abbreviated as "pseudo-continuation").""Pseudoseries" refers to a performance mode that involves a pseudo continuous variation display state (so-called "pseudo variation") of decorative patterns. This "pseudo fluctuation" means that during one decorative symbol fluctuation display game, some or all of the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (using one or more pseudo-continuous exclusive symbols instead of normal decorative symbols). This refers to a variable display mode in which a display operation is repeated one or more times, such as performing a re-variable display operation of decorative symbols from the temporarily stopped state. In this respect, it is different from the "pre-reading preview performance" described later, which can be executed over multiple symbol change display games.

Basically, the occurrence rate of "pseudo-links" is determined so that the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, if the number of pseudo fluctuations is two times than once, the expectation of occurrence of a preview performance with high expectation of winning, such as SP reach, is higher. Therefore, in the case of a performance scenario that includes a reach effect, the reach state is mainly generated in the stage before the reach state is formed (the stage before the reach effect), and after one or more pseudo fluctuations are performed, the real change in the reach The performance will be executed and the final game result will be derived and displayed. In this specification, when it is referred to as "pseudo N", it means the total number of pseudo fluctuations M times and real fluctuations. For example, when written as "Pseudo 2", it means "one pseudo fluctuation + real fluctuation", and when written as "Pseudo 3", it means "two pseudo fluctuations + real fluctuation" (for example, the pseudo fluctuation in Figure 33 2+SP reach, pseudo 3+SP reach, etc.). Furthermore, if pseudo 2 or 3 are not attached, it means "no pseudo connection", and no pseudo connection occurs (for example, N reach 2, SP reach, etc. in FIG. 33).

(5-2-3. Player participation type production)
Further, in this embodiment, one of the expected preview effects is a "player participation type effect.""Player participation type production" belongs to the so-called "button preview production", in which a predetermined operation (for example, single press, long press, This is a preview performance mode in which the content of the performance can change based on the operation details when a player presses the button repeatedly (such as repeatedly hitting the player). In a player participation type performance, when a predetermined button is valid, an "operation instruction performance" that instructs the operating means to perform a predetermined operation is executed, and during the button valid period, the player operates the operating means. Then, based on the content of the operation, the current production changes to another production (production at the time of operation), and depending on the production mode before and after the operation (production content), the winning expectation level, winning/losing result, or setting suggestion information is displayed. etc. can be reported. The production control unit 24 performs an operation validity period setting that sets an operation validity period (button validity period) during which the operation of the operating means is valid based on predetermined setting conditions (for example, a predetermined timing during a player participation type production). means, a pre-operation effect control means for controlling a pre-operation effect during the button validity period, and a post-operation effect control means for controlling a pre-determined post-operation effect based on the operation of the performance button during the operation validity period. and means.

(5-2-4. Step-up production)
Further, in this embodiment, there is a "step-up preview performance" as one of the expected preview performances. "Step-up preview performance" is a performance mode with one or multiple stage performance steps, specifically, from the first stage performance (Step 1) to the multiple stage performance (Step N (N≦2) This is a preview performance mode in which the expectation of winning increases when the stage progresses to a later stage (the expectation of winning is the highest when the stage progresses to the final stage).For example, the 3-stage performance SU1 ~ If it is a step-up production consisting of SU3, "Production SU1 (Step 1): Low expectation of winning", "Production SU1 → Production SU2 (Step 2): Medium expectation of winning", "Production SU1 → Production SU2 → Production "SU3 (Step 3): High expectation of winning", the higher the production step stage is, the higher the expectation of winning is.Furthermore, some step-up productions belong to player participation productions, such as , the next stage can be developed in response to the operation of the operating means (the effect button 13 or the direction key 75), or in response to the expiration of the button validity period.

(5-2-4. Pre-read preview effect: Figure 5A, Figure 5B)
"Pre-reading notice performance" (hereinafter abbreviated as "pre-reading notice") refers to balls with pending operation (unexploited pending balls) that have not yet been used for the execution of the symbol variation display game (variable display operation of special symbols). , by using the pending display mode and the effect during the symbol change display game that is executed first in chronological order, the winning expectation level (not only the winning expectation level regarding the jackpot) regarding the activated pending ball (not only the winning expectation level regarding the jackpot, but also the support time reduction described below) This is a performance mode that can notify in advance the winning expectation level (which may also include the degree of expectation of winning).

An overview of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to this embodiment, including the above-mentioned pre-read notice, will be explained using FIG. 5A. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the present embodiment.

In a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the illustration, below the decorative pattern display area), there is a reservation display area 76 that displays the number of special figure 1 operation reserved balls and a reservation display area 76 that displays the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls. A holding display area 77 is provided to display whether or not there is a holding ball, and the presence or absence of a holding ball is indicated by a lighted state (with a holding ball: "○ (white circle)" shown in the figure) or an unlit state (no holding ball: "O"). Information regarding the current number of active pending pitches is notified by the dashed circle shown in the figure.

The display regarding the presence or absence of this action pending ball (hereinafter referred to as the "pending display") is displayed in order of occurrence (order of winnings), and in each of the pending display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost action pending ball is It is displayed as the first (that is, the oldest) activated suspended ball that occurred on the time axis among all activated suspended balls in the suspended display. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is provided with hold display areas a1 to d1 ( (corresponding to the special symbol 1 side) and a2 to d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) are provided. Normally, the display mode of these reservation display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is switched to the operation state (lit state) for the same number of active reservation balls, for example, three, as the number of active reservation balls that exist when making a pre-read determination. Therefore, this reservation display section functions as a reservation display means for displaying the number of active reservation balls. However, when executing the pre-read notice described later, the hold display mode of the corresponding one of the hold display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined pre-read notice display mode (special hold display mode). This serves as a means of generating advance notice.

Further, on the left side of the holding display areas 76 and 77, a fluctuating display area 78 is provided to show the activated holding balls that are currently being used in the special symbol fluctuation display game. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured such that an image in which an icon of a game currently being played pending K appears on top of the icon of the catch J. That is, when the variable display of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is started, the icon (icon image) of the oldest pending a1 or a2 displayed in the pending display areas 76 and 77 is changed to the icon (icon image) of the oldest pending K during game execution. As an icon, it moves onto the icon of the catch J in the changing display area 78, and this state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

In addition, in the lower right corner of the LCD screen shown in Figure 5A, there is a display area for sub effects (sub effects) that are different from the main effects such as decorative patterns and preview effects. A sub-display area 79 is provided which can display information regarding the number of pending pitches for regular symbols, information regarding the variable display operation of the special symbols 1 and 2, and information regarding the variable display operation of the regular symbols. The information in this sub-display area 79 continues to be displayed even when the decorative pattern display and/or the hold display area are hidden when displaying the preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to identify from the information in the sub-display area 79 whether or not the symbol variation display game is currently being played and how many balls are on hold.

Note that depending on the gaming state (gaming mode or internal gaming state), the hold display area 76 may be displayed more emphatically than the hold display area 77, or conversely, the hold display area 77 may be displayed more emphatically than the hold display area 76. You can also display it. For example, during the first gaming state (during the normal state (performance mode belonging to the normal mode)), the hold display area 76 can be displayed in an emphasized manner. When displaying the hold display area 76 emphatically, for example, the hold display area 76 may be displayed preferentially, the hold display area 76 may be displayed in a large size, the hold display area 77 side may be hidden. The same holds true when displaying the hold display area 77 in an emphasized manner, such as preferentially displaying the hold display area 77, displaying the hold display area 77 in a larger size, or hiding the hold display area 76 side.

Further, during the second gaming state (for example, during the time saving state (performance mode belonging to the time saving mode) or the variable probability state (performance mode belonging to the variable probability mode)), the hold display area 77 can be displayed in an emphasized manner. Further, during the first gaming state, both the pending display areas 76 and 77 are displayed, and during the second gaming state, the pending display area 77 is preferentially displayed (for example, only the pending display area 77 is displayed). Can be done.

(About advance notice)
Next, a look-ahead notice will be explained. Regarding the appearance control regarding this pre-read notice, first, in the main control unit 20, when a pending ball occurs (when the starting condition is met), the pending ball is displayed in the symbol fluctuation display game (special symbol fluctuation display operation). Before the ball is used for execution, a "pre-read hit judgment (pre-read win/loss judgment, pre-read symbol judgment)" is performed to determine in advance the jackpot lottery result (win/loss lottery result, symbol lottery result) related to the operation pending ball. See the random number determination process to special stop symbol data creation process (steps S318 to S319) in FIG. 11, and the "random number determination process for special electric accessory operation determination to special stop symbol creation process (steps S410 to S411)" in FIG. 12, which will be described later. ).

Furthermore, by using the result of the above-mentioned "preread hit determination", the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation) when the activated pending ball is used in a symbol fluctuation display game in the future is determined in advance. "Ahead fluctuation pattern determination" is performed (see "Random number determination process (step S320)" in FIG. 11). This special symbol variation pattern determined in advance is referred to as a "preread variation pattern." In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, it is determined in advance, for example, what kind of reach state the reach variation pattern will pass through, or whether it will be a normal variation pattern that does not pass through the reach state.

Note that the above-mentioned pre-reading fluctuation pattern is determined using at least the winning/losing lottery results (in this embodiment, the pre-judgment results of the winning/losing lottery and symbol lottery), so the pre-reading fluctuation pattern information includes the "winning fluctuation pattern" at the time of winning. In addition to information on whether it is a "loss pattern" or a "loss fluctuation pattern" when winning a losing lottery (information about winning/losing lottery results), there is also information on the presence or absence of reach (if there is reach, its type) and the presence or absence of pseudo-relationships (pseudo Information regarding the execution of a specific preview performance, such as information regarding the number of consecutive preview performances (if there is a series), may also be included. In this way, a series of processes for determining a prefetch variation pattern through a prefetch hit determination is referred to as a "prefetch determination."

When information on this pre-reading variation pattern is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control process regarding the pre-read notice is performed in the effect control unit 24. In detail, when the look-ahead judgment is executed, a "hold addition command" that can specify the number of balls on hold at the time of the look-ahead judgment (the existing number of balls on hold, including the ball on hold that occurred this time) and the above-mentioned look-ahead fluctuation pattern are used. "Winning commands" that can specify information (at least information pre-reading and determining the winning/losing lottery results at the start of variation) are sent from the main control unit 20 to the performance control unit 24, and when the performance control unit 24 receives these commands. Based on the information included in the command, effect control processing regarding the hold display and pre-read notice is performed.

Specifically, when the performance control unit 24 receives the pending addition command and the winning command, it performs a "pre-read preview lottery" regarding whether to execute (appear) the pre-read preview based on the pre-read fluctuation pattern information. When executing a pre-read notice, a presentation scenario related to the pre-read notice is created, and the pre-read notice is made to appear according to the presentation scenario (see FIGS. 5A and 5B). The pre-read notice is executed with a higher probability for a ``jackpot'' than for a ``lose'', and for a pre-read fluctuation pattern with a relatively high expectation of winning. Therefore, the degree of expectation of winning is indicated by whether or not a pre-read notice occurs. A look-ahead notice is a look-ahead notice that targets the current action-pending ball at the timing when the action-pending ball occurs, at the same time as the start of a chronologically earlier symbol change display game, or at a predetermined timing during that game. A notice may appear.

The above-mentioned pending addition command includes data on the upper byte side that allows the special figure type information (special figure 1 and 2) to be specified, and lower byte side data that allows the information on the number of pending balls to be activated at the time of look-ahead judgment. It consists of 2 bytes. In addition, the winning command consists of two bytes: upper byte data (MODE1) that specifies the winning or losing result, and lower byte data (EVENT) that allows the content of the prefetch variation pattern to be specified as prefetch judgment information. . Note that instead of using two commands, the pending addition command and the winning command, one command may be sent. For example, reservation addition in which the data that can specify the special figure type information and the information on the number of active pending balls at the time of look-ahead judgment is the data on the upper byte side, and the data that allows the identification of winning/losing result information and the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information as the data on the upper byte side. A configuration may also be adopted in which a command (or a winning command) can be transmitted and a pre-read notice can be executed based on the command.

(Winning timeline advance notice: Pending change notice)
In this embodiment, when a pre-read notice is executed (if a pre-read notice lottery is won), among the pending icons in the hold display areas a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon that is the target of the pre-read notice is, for example, , from the normal white color of the hold display (normal hold display mode) to the flashing white notice display, and the hold display with special hold colors and colors of blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors (special hold display mode). Pending change notices that change may be executed. This pending change notice is also referred to as a ``winning time-based advance notice'' because it can appear when a prize is won (pending display).

As this reservation change notice, FIG. 5A shows an example in which the hatched operation reservation sphere of the reservation display section b1 changes to a special reservation display. Here, the display of the pending icon blinking white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors means that the probability of winning is high in this order. In particular, the display of the rainbow-colored pending icon means that the jackpot is confirmed. It is a premium-like hold icon (probable reservation notice) that is displayed as (probable). The blinking white icon is a pending icon that indicates the possibility of a "step-up pending change notice," which will be described later, and makes you look forward to what the final pending color will be. (In some cases, the indicator may remain blinking white without changing.) In the case of blinking white, if the pending display remains as it is, the expectation of winning is the lowest among the special pending displays, but if it changes to another pending color, the expectation of winning by that pending color increases.

In this embodiment, regarding the preview performance, if the jackpot lottery result is a loss, it will be selected with a relatively low probability (low appearance rate), and if it is a jackpot, it will be selected with a relatively high probability (high appearance rate). As a preview performance with a high expectation of winning, such as a preview performance with a high expectation of winning, a preview performance with a high expectation of winning of 20% or higher (in this embodiment, a preview performance with an expectation of winning of 20% or more) In the case of the above-mentioned pending change notice, the winning expectation of blinking white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow color is 1%, respectively. If the percentages are 5%, 9%, 20%, 30%, and 100%, then "green, red, and rainbow colors" belong to the high expectation preview effects, and the others (flashing white, blue, yellow), and low expectations. It belongs to the expectation level preview performance.When a look-ahead notice occurs, during the symbol change display game for the activated pending ball, a high expectation level notice with a relatively high winning expectation (high number of pseudo consecutive, SP reach, etc.) ) occurs, combined with the content of the preview performance, the expectation of winning will further increase.

The existing operation pending balls are sequentially consumed with the execution of the symbol variation display game. At this time, in order to express that one action-holding ball has been used up, the display position of the holding display section corresponding to the existing action-holding ball is moved forward (sequentially shifted to the left), and the number of displayed balls is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the above-mentioned special hold display continues to be continuously displayed while changing the display position of the hold display. In this respect, the look-ahead notice can appear over multiple symbol change display games (multiple symbol change display actions), and is different from the one-time symbol change such as pseudo-continuation. This is different from the preview performance that takes place during the operation.

The special reservation display related to the reservation change notice is (A) a case where it appears when a prize is won, in other words, a case where it appears at the timing of the reservation display, and (B) a case where it is usually a reservation display (white) when a prize is won. (C) Cases in which the normal pending display changes to a special pending display (blue, etc.), (C) A change to a special pending display that has a relatively higher winning expectation than the current special pending display (for example, a change from blue to yellow or higher) There are also cases where the color is changed in a step-up manner. In this case (B) or (C), the predetermined timing during the shift display, the predetermined timing during the previously executed symbol variation display game, the predetermined timing during the appearance of a specific preview effect, and the pending It is possible to change from one pending display mode to another pending display mode during a player participation type presentation for change notice (for example, during a valid button operation period). It should be noted that a pending change notice such as (B) or (C) above, which changes to a pending display with a higher winning expectation, is referred to as a "step-up pending change notice."

Also, when the pending K is placed on the catch J during game execution, basically the same display mode as the pending display mode in the pending display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the display mode is basically the same as the pending display mode in the pending display areas 76 and 77. A pre-read notice (special suspension display) for the activated pending balls can be notified to the player even during the game, but at a predetermined timing during the symbol change display game, the pending display mode of the pending K during the game execution. may change to other pending display modes. Such a change in the display mode of the game suspension K is also handled as belonging to the step-up suspension change notice.

In addition, as a general rule, there is no "special pending display fall" that changes from the current pending color to a pending color with a relatively low winning expectation, but in the exceptional case where a falling change occurs, the activated pending ball will be the winning ball. It is suggested that this is the case, and it becomes a premium reservation change notice similar to this reservation notice. An example of a downward trend is when, for example, the pending color changes to a pending display with a lower expectation of winning than the current pending display, such as "blue → white" or "red → blue." In addition, the hold display mode is not limited to the hold icon display as a still image (static display mode), but also the hold icon display as a moving image (animation) (dynamic display mode: for example, the hold icon can be rotated, vibrated, rocked, blinked, etc.). It may also be displayed with high-speed blinking or slow blinking).

(Pre-reading notice during pattern fluctuation: Pre-reading notice during fluctuation)
Furthermore, in this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned "winning time series" look-ahead preview performance, it is possible to display a "fluctuating look-ahead notice" that is triggered by the start of the symbol change display game. This pre-reading notice during fluctuation is different from the above-mentioned pending change notice and can appear at a predetermined timing during symbol fluctuation display, so it is also referred to as a "pre-reading notice during symbol fluctuation system (change system at the start of fluctuation)".

This "pre-reading notice during fluctuation" means, for example, displaying a pre-reading-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, and executing this in one or more symbol fluctuation display games (single or continuous display). ) is a preview notice. In other words, the look-ahead notice during fluctuation is such that when a game ball enters the starting hole during a certain symbol fluctuation display game and the starting condition is met, the right to execute the symbol fluctuation display game related to the establishment of the starting condition is temporarily suspended and stored. At the same time, a pre-read preview lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance, and when executing this pre-read preview lottery, if there are multiple active pending balls (pending memory) existing at that time, , all or some of them can be expressed in a way that has some kind of relation to the symbol variation display game. For example, during a game where all or some of the existing motion pending balls from the oldest motion pending ball to the motion pending ball subject to the look-ahead notice are displayed in a game, a look-ahead-only preview image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. (For example, a preview image imitating a lightning bolt in FIG. 5B) is displayed. In this case, in each symbol variation display game, pre-read previews that are different in whole or in part may be displayed. For example, if the symbol is displayed over three symbol variation display games, the first symbol variation display game is a thundercloud image, and the second symbol variation display game is a rain image (an image displaying rain falling from a thundercloud) or The thundercloud image and the third symbol variation display game can be a lightning bolt image. Furthermore, the degree of expectation of winning may vary depending on the preview image. In the above example, a thundercloud image can have a low expectation level, a rain image can have a medium expectation level, and a lightning image can have a high expectation level. In this case, if only the thundercloud image is displayed, the expectation of winning is low, but if the lightning image is displayed, the expectation of winning can be dramatically increased. Furthermore, it may be a step-up type pre-read notice in which the level of expectation develops (the level of expectation increases) in stages such as "thunder cloud image → rain image → lightning image" each time the symbol variation display game is executed.

In this embodiment, the look-ahead notice during change and the pending change notice can each appear independently. Specifically, the lottery for executing the pending change notice and the lottery for executing the look-ahead notice during fluctuation are each independent lottery. Therefore, there are cases in which a pending change notice occurs alone, a case in which a look-ahead notice during variation occurs independently, and a case in which a pending change notice and a look-ahead notice during change occur simultaneously (overlappingly). Note that the performance means used when executing the pre-read notice during fluctuation and the content of the performance can be determined as appropriate.

(Example of look-ahead preview performance: Figure 5B)
Next, with reference to FIG. 5B, an example of a pre-read preview performance created by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described.

In the figure (1), during the symbol fluctuation display game (the "↓" shown in the diagram indicates that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner), the activation hold ball enters the upper starting hole 34 and the special symbol 1 side is activated. Assume that the number has become 3, and among the 3rd ball, the movement pending ball whose fluctuation start action is executed second is the target of the pre-reading notice performance, and here, the pending change notice and the pre-reading notice during fluctuation are This shows a case in which the two cases overlap. In addition, here, it is assumed that the first ball that was put on hold earlier and the third ball that was put on hold after that were action-reserved balls that did not execute the pre-read notice (not won the pre-read lottery).

The performance control unit 24 changes the hold display of the second operation hold ball, which is the target of the pre-read notice, to a special hold display, as shown in FIG. 1 (1). At this time, the suspension display corresponding to the first and third operation suspension balls that are not subject to the pre-read notice is maintained as the normal suspension display (white). The illustration shows a case where the display mode of the second action-holding ball that was the subject of the pre-read notice changes from the normal holding display (white circle (○) mark) to the special holding display (hatched circle). Showing. As a result, the player is notified that the pre-read preview performance has started. Note that (1) in the same figure shows a situation where the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed has ended and the decorative symbols have been stopped and displayed at "246" corresponding to a loss.

The game progress moves to (2) in the same figure, and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol fluctuation display game based on the action pending ball on the special symbol 1 side, which is the first (oldest action pending ball). The performance control unit 24 exhausts the operation hold balls (one is consumed), and at the start of the special symbol variation display game, shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each operation hold ball to the left, so that the operation hold ball A hold display mode is set to indicate that one ball has been consumed, and a decorative symbol variation display game based on the first activated hold ball is started. At this time, a special background image (lightning effect by displaying a lightning image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 as a pre-read preview during the fluctuation. As a result, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 takes on a display mode as shown in FIG. 2(2).

Then, the game progress moves to (3) in the same figure, and it is assumed that the symbol variation display game currently being executed ends and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "351" corresponding to a loss.

Next, the game progress moves to (4) in the same figure, and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol fluctuation display game based on the second action-holding ball, that is, the action-holding ball that was the target of the pre-read preview performance. The production control unit 24 shifts the pending display modes corresponding to the respective operation pending balls to the left at the start of the special symbol variation display game, and the performance control unit 24 shifts the pending display mode corresponding to each operation pending ball to the left. A decorative symbol variation display game based on the activated pending balls is started. At this time, the special hold display of the hold change notice disappears from the screen at the time of the above shift, and is terminated with the start of the current symbol change display game (as well as the expiration of the operation hold ball), and thereafter is displayed as game execution hold K. be done. Also, the look-ahead notice during fluctuation (in this case, lightning effect) will end after it occurs during this symbol fluctuation display game. This figure (4) illustrates the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 immediately after the start of the symbol variation display game. In addition, in the same figure (4), the lightning effect of the look-ahead notice during fluctuation (the look-ahead notice during fluctuation) is the same as that of the current symbol change display game (the symbol change display game related to the operation pending ball (second) that is subject to the look-ahead notice). Although it has been explained that the occurrence during the previous symbol variation display game is ended last, the present invention is not limited to this, and the occurrence during the previous symbol variation display game may be ended last. In this case, the look-ahead notice during fluctuation is ended at the same time as the "special pending display" of the pending change notice is provided for execution of the symbol variation display game.

(5-2-6. Setting suggestion effect)
Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to display a presentation mode (setting suggestion presentation) that suggests information regarding the above-mentioned "setting value." For example, the following settings (a) to (b) are suggested.
(a) "Low setting suggestion effect" that suggests low setting ranges (settings 1 to 3, 1 to 2, 2 to 3, etc.).
(Sa) "High setting suggestion effect" that suggests high setting ranges (settings 4 to 6, 4 to 5, 5 to 6, etc.).
(G) "Even number setting suggestion effect" that suggests even number settings (settings 2, 4, and 6).
(Y) "Odd number setting suggestion effect" that suggests odd number settings (settings 1, 3, 5).
(Me) "Specific setting confirmation effect" that definitively notifies a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6). For example, "Setting N confirmation effect" that definitely announces "Setting N". However, it is not desirable to definitively notify internal setting values blindly. The reason for this is that anything that definitively suggests a low setting area, such as setting 1 or setting 2, reduces the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is preferable to definitely notify one of settings 4 to 6 of the high setting area. In particular, if a setting suggestion performance that confirms a high setting such as setting 5 or setting 6 appears, the player's desire to play can be improved.
(iii) ``Specific setting negative effect'' that definitively informs that the specified setting value (any of settings 1 to 6 is acceptable) is not specified.
(c) "Specific range suggestion effect" that suggests setting values in a specific range. For example, it suggests settings 3 to 5 (α≦set value≦β), suggests settings 4 or more (α≦set value), suggests multiple specific values of “settings 1, 3, 5, 6”, etc. . In addition, the appearance rate can be varied depending on the setting value, so that a certain setting value has a high probability of appearing, for example, a certain effect is difficult to appear with setting 1, a certain amount with setting 4, and easy to appear with setting 6. It is also possible to suggest /low.

Note that the appearance rate (execution probability) of the setting suggestion effect can be determined as appropriate according to the setting value. For example, it may be determined that the lower the setting value is, the lower the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is. Further, there is no particular restriction on the presentation mode of the setting suggestion presentation, and one or more presentations among sound presentation, light presentation, image display presentation, and movable body presentation may be used.

Further, the setting suggestion performance can be made to appear at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game, for example, in combination with the preview performance or independently. In addition, it will appear not only during symbol fluctuation games, but also during jackpot games, and during waiting for the game to start, such as the "Pre-Customer Waiting Display (Demo Start Waiting Display)" and "Customer Waiting Display (Demo Screen)" etc. be able to.

Further, by defining the appearance rate of a specific preview performance according to a setting value, the preview performance itself can function as a "setting suggestion performance." For example, the appearance rate of at least one of a specific reach effect, a specific pseudo-sequence (a specific pseudo-sequence mode or a specific number of pseudo-sequences), a specific player participation type effect, and a specific pre-read notice, etc. By varying it according to the setting value, the preview presentation itself can function as a "setting suggestion presentation." For example, if a specific SP reach is likely to appear in the event of a loss, "high setting rich", if a loss is likely to result in 3 pseudo-sequences (2 pseudo fluctuations + real variation), "high setting rich", or a specific button. When an operation effect appears, it is a suggestion such as "Setting 6 confirmed". Further, by using the look-ahead preview performance, a look-ahead notice mode dedicated to the setting suggestion performance can be made to appear. For example, if the hold icon blinks at high speed, it is a high setting rich, and if one or all of the hold icons change to a dedicated hold icon (a dedicated character or item image), it is a "high setting rich" suggestion.

(About setting suggestion effects during support time reduction state)
(Italy 6) It is possible to execute a plurality of setting suggestion performances, and during the support time reduction state, execution of some or all of the plurality of setting suggestion performances is prohibited (restricted). Alternatively, the execution probability can be set to be different when compared with other gaming states. These include the following (Italy 6-1) to (Italy 6-4).
(Italy 6-1) During the support time reduction state, the execution probability of setting suggestion effects can be lowered than in the normal state. In this case, the probability of executing one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be lowered.
(Italy 6-2) During the support time reduction state, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects can be made higher than in the normal state. In this case, the appearance rate of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be increased.
(Italy 6-3) During the support time reduction state, execution of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be prohibited (restricted). There are no particular restrictions on the specific settings-suggesting effects, but for example, if settings-suggesting effects such as those shown in (a) to (b) above can be executed, execution of at least one of the settings-suggesting effects may be prohibited. Can be done. Specifically, during the support time reduction state, execution of setting suggestion performances that are less useful as setting guessing factors, such as (ki) even number setting suggestion performance and (y) odd number setting suggestion performance, can be prohibited. preferable.
(Italy 6-4) There is one or more setting suggestion effects that appear only during the support time reduction state. For example, only during the support time reduction state, a setting N confirmation effect of (me), which is highly useful as a setting estimation element, can appear.
According to this configuration, the appearance rate of setting suggestion notices can be varied depending on the gaming state. In addition, a specific setting suggestion performance can be made to appear only in a specific gaming state (support time saving state). Thereby, the effects can be varied and the fun of the game can be improved.

(About decorative patterns during support time reduction state)
The display mode of the decorative pattern in the support time saving state can be configured as follows.
(Italy 9) At least decorative symbols during the support time-saving state (e.g., arithmetic numerals) and decorative symbols during the normal state (e.g., Chinese numerals) or decorative symbols during the jackpot time-saving state (e.g., Roman numerals or Chinese numerals). and have different decorative designs. In this case, since the decorative symbols are different depending on the game state, the effects become more diverse. Furthermore, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the support time is being reduced. In addition, since decorative patterns can be displayed while waiting for a customer (for example, during pre-waiting performances), players can easily confirm that they are in a support time-saving state by simply checking the display screen when selecting a game machine. can be identified.
(Italy 10) At least the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the support time reduction state, the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the normal state, or the decoration after the power is restored during the jackpot time reduction state. The stop display eye is different from the stop display eye of the symbol. According to this configuration, when players and hall personnel check the state of the gaming machines first thing in the morning, they can easily determine whether or not the support time is being reduced.

(Regarding the hold display area related to the support time reduction state)
(Italy 11) After the end of the short support time winning game (at the end of the symbol fluctuation time (see Figure 16), or during the final symbol display time (see Figures 16 and 17A), or after the final symbol display time has elapsed (see Figure 16)) 17A to 17B)), the reservation display area 77 (the reservation display area on the special drawing 2 side) can be displayed in the above-mentioned emphasized manner (priority). When displaying the hold display area 77 emphatically, as already explained, the hold display area 77 is displayed preferentially, the hold display area 77 is displayed in a large size, or the hold display area 76 side is hidden. and so on.
If you win the short support time in the symbol fluctuation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side, it is preferable to change the priority of the pending display from the special figure 1 side to the special figure 2 side at the timing when the winning game ends ( During the support time reduction state, right-handed hitting is advantageous and the symbol fluctuation display game on the special map 2 side becomes the main one). By changing the priority of the pending display at the timing when the game on the special map 1 side ends, before the first symbol fluctuation display game on the special map 2 side starts during the support time shortening state, The reserved display of special figure 2 can be displayed preferentially.

(About the management form of support time reduction state and jackpot time reduction state)
The support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state are the same time saving state, but the internal gaming state can be configured as follows.
(Italy 12) As the internal gaming states managed by the main control unit 20 side, at least the support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be configured to be manageable as one winning easy state (electronic support state). In this case, the flag indicating that the support time-saving state is in effect and the flag indicating that the jackpot time-saving state is in effect may be managed by a "common flag (first specific time-saving state flag)". By using a common flag for both, the RAM capacity can be reduced. Moreover, the data and the transmission process for the effect control unit 24 can be easily shared, and the program capacity and data capacity can be reduced.
(Italy 13) As the internal gaming states managed by the main control unit 20 side, at least the support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be configured to be manageable as different winning easy states. For example, the game state determination number YJ relating to the support time saving state may be set to 05H, the gaming state determination number YJ relating to the jackpot time saving state may be set to 07H, etc., and these may be managed as different internal gaming states. According to this configuration, the support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be managed using separate flags, so that the main control unit 20 can easily grasp each gaming state. Further, it becomes easy to execute processing according to the gaming state depending on the gaming situation. For example, different information can be transmitted to the production control unit 24 regarding the support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state. Thereby, on the performance control section 24 side, it becomes possible to shift to different performance modes or easily execute different performances during the support time reduction state and the jackpot time reduction state.

(Conditions for activation of support time reduction state)
(Italy 14) In order to shift to the support time saving state, the condition is to win the support time saving type in the jackpot lottery, but normally the number of times the special electric accessory is activated by a small win (the number of times the small win game is executed) is a predetermined condition. You may transition to the support time reduction state on the condition that the number of times (for example, three times) has been reached. In this case, it is possible to shift to the support time reduction state without going through a jackpot lottery, so that the gameplay can be improved. In addition, the mere existence of a small win becomes important, and the significance of providing a normal small win increases, greatly expanding the range of gaming possibilities.
(Italy 15) If a specific support time reduction is won, if a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games) are played from that winning game, after the end of that game (after the third game), the support time reduction can be moved to the state. According to this configuration, it is possible to create a novel gameplay in which a support time reduction state is scheduled to be entered in a game to be executed after the game in which the support time reduction is won, and the degree of freedom in the gameplay is expanded.

(About special gameplay that utilizes support time reduction)
(Italy 17) If you win the support time reduction during the normal state, a predetermined number of time reductions will be given, and you will win the support time reduction in a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state (such as the time reduction state, variable probability state, or potential state). If this is the case, 0 time reductions will be given. For example, as a virtual gaming machine, the winning type on the special drawing 1 side is set at least support time saving D (low probability of winning of 1/5000), and the jackpot type on the special drawing 2 side is ``10R that gives 1000 time saving times. It is assumed that only ``time saving jackpot (winning at 1/100)'' and ``special support time saving with 0 time saving times (winning at 1/200)'' are provided. During the normal state, the game progresses while receiving the jackpot lottery on the special map 1 side. If the support time saving D with an extremely low probability is won, the time saving state is entered and the game progresses while receiving the jackpot lottery on the special map 2 side. On the special map 2 side, "10R time saving jackpot" and "Special support time saving with 0 time saving times" are subject to the jackpot lottery, so the 10R time saving jackpot will be won before the special support time saving with 0 time saving times is won. For example, it will be a series of jackpots, but if the special support time saving is won before the 10R time saving jackpot is won, the number of time saving times will be 0 and the time saving state will be forcibly terminated. In other words, the winning of the special support time reduction causes a transition to the normal state, and the consecutive winning chances end. Therefore, if you do not win even the special support time reduction, the transition to the normal state will be avoided, and the possibility of successive jackpots will remain, a pseudo "fall lottery type" (see (Moment 3) below). It becomes possible to create gaming machines of By providing a special support time reduction with 0 time reductions, the range of gameplay expands and innovative gameplay can be expected.

(About the conditions for ending the support time reduction state)
(Italy 18) The condition for ending the support time saving state according to this embodiment is such that it is ended when the number of time saving times is exhausted or when a jackpot is won. However, other termination conditions may be adopted. For example, if you win a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the supplementary win (when the normal open game is executed a predetermined number of times), if you win the normal small win a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) (by the normal small win) When the small winning game is executed a predetermined number of times), when one of the special drawings (either special drawing 1 or special drawing 2) fluctuates a predetermined number of times, when the "ceiling privilege" described below is granted (ceiling function (when the activation conditions are met), when the ceiling game described below is reached, etc. One or more termination conditions can be provided. As a result, the conditions for ending the support time saving state can be varied, broadening the range of playability and improving the fun of the game.

<6. Direction means>
Various effects in the game machine 1 are produced by effect means provided in the game machine. Such presentation means may be any stimulus transmission means that can produce a presentation effect by appealing to human senses such as visual, auditory, and tactile senses, and may include light generating means (light presentation means) such as decorative lamps 45 and LED devices. ), a sound generating device (sound production means) such as the speaker 46, a production display device (display means) such as the liquid crystal display device 36, a pressurizing device that transmits contact pressure to the operator's body, and a vibration device that provides vibration to the player. Typical examples include a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to the player's body (for example, the firing operation handle 15 vibrates), and a movable accessory that produces a visual performance effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a visually appealing display device like the image display device (image display means), but differs from the image display device in that it also includes devices that do not rely on images (for example, a 7-segment display). When referred to as an image display device, it refers to a type that mainly displays effects (image display effects) by displaying images, and devices that express effects by means other than images, such as a 7-segment display, are based on the above concept of effect display device. contained within.

<7. Game mode transition form: Figure 6>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the contents of the "gaming mode" related to the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode), transition control between each gaming mode (between each gaming state), and gaming mode according to the present embodiment. The production mode related to this will be explained. FIG. 6 is a game flow showing an outline of each game mode and the production mode related thereto.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, there are multiple types of game modes such as "normal mode," "time saving mode," and "variable probability mode," and the game can be played under these game modes. progress is controlled. In the following explanation, it will be assumed that the player follows the advantageous hitting method according to the game state, and unless otherwise specified, in the case of left-handed hitting (normal state), the game will be called "Special Figure 1 Side Symbol Variation Display Game 1". is executed, and when the right-hander is advantageous (variable probability state, time saving state), the description will be made assuming that "symbol variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side" is executed.

(7-1. Regarding “normal mode”)
The normal mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the normal state (YJ=00H), and this normal mode is the initial game mode. For example, the transition control between game modes due to game progress is Separately, the transition is also made when the in-area RAM is cleared by a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation.

This normal mode includes a "normal mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "00H". This "normal mode" is the game mode in which you can stay the longest during the game, and basically, you can win the jackpot or support time reduction from the normal mode, and use other game modes (definite variable mode and time saving mode described later). will be moved to

(7-1. About normal mode)
During the above-mentioned "normal mode", the controller stays in the "normal performance mode" which performs a performance related to the normal mode. In the normal production mode, a production representing an air battle in which fighter jets fly over each other appears as a background production, for example, as shown in FIGS.

(7-2. About "Definitely variable mode")
Next, the "variable probability mode" will be explained. As shown in the figure, the probability variation mode is a game mode in which the internal gaming state is related to the probability variation state (YJ=01H), and the probability variation mode includes "probability variation modes 1 to 3"(Tcode="01H") in which the variation pattern selection mode is different. ” to “03H”)” are included. This variable probability mode can be entered when a 10R variable jackpot or a 4R variable jackpot is won (see FIG. 4).

In the case of this embodiment, when you win for the first time (winning in the normal mode), you will be transferred to "Probability Variable Mode 1" which belongs to the Probability Variable Mode, and you will continue to win the jackpot without falling from the Probability Variable Mode 1 to the normal mode. (Consecutive winnings) Then, depending on the number of winnings (number of consecutive winnings), the mode is changed in stages as follows: "Probable variable mode 1 ⇒ Probable variable mode 2 ⇒ Probable variable mode 3". In other words, the number of consecutive games is determined as a change condition (transition condition) of the game mode. For example, the number of consecutive games is changed to variable variable mode 1 until the number of consecutive games is 3, and the variable mode is changed to fixed variable mode when the number of consecutive games is 4th to 6th. 2, and after the seventh successive game, the mode is changed to probability variable mode 3 (see FIG. 7A). By changing the probability variable mode according to the number of consecutive games, the performance and gameplay during the consecutive games can be varied, and the player's interest in the game can be greatly increased. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, since the variable probability state is assumed to be infinite variable (ST number is 65535 times, practically infinite), it is actually impossible to fall from the variable probability state to the normal state (from the variable probability mode to the normal mode). do not have. However, if a finite variable state (for example, the number of STs is 50, 100, etc.) is adopted as the variable state, the entire number of STs will be exhausted without winning the jackpot during the variable state (variable mode), and the normal state will be reached. (Normal mode) There is a possibility of falling.

Here, in order to make the present invention easier to understand, first, a method of counting the above-mentioned "number of consecutive games", which is used as an opportunity to change the game mode, will be explained.

The above-mentioned "number of consecutive games" will be explained with reference to the "example of counting the number of consecutive games" shown in FIG. 7A (A). As shown in Figure (A), the number of consecutive wins is basically counted as follows: ``Probable variable jackpot (first hit) ⇒ Probable variable jackpot (2 consecutive wins) in a variable variable state ⇒ Probable variable jackpot (3 consecutive wins) in a variable variable condition. ⇒ Guaranteed jackpot during a definite change state (4 consecutive games) ⇒ Guaranteed strange jackpot during a definite change state (5 consecutive games) ⇒ Guaranteed strange jackpot during a definite change state (6 consecutive games) ⇒ Guaranteed strange jackpot during a definite change state (7 consecutive games) ...'', the number of consecutive winnings (number of successive wins) of probability-variable jackpots is counted until the game shifts to the normal mode (normal state). In addition, "probability variation 1", "probability variation 2", and "probability variation 3" shown in the figure indicate probability variation mode 1, probability variation mode 2, and probability variation mode 3, respectively.

Here, in this embodiment, since a time-saving jackpot (4R time-saving jackpot) is provided, the question is whether or not to count the time-saving jackpot in the number of consecutive games.

<(A-1) Case where time-saving jackpot is not counted (no count)>
As shown in the figure (A-1), time-saving jackpots may be excluded from the count of consecutive wins. In the illustrated case, the time-saving jackpot won during the second consecutive game in probability variable mode 1 and the time-saving jackpot won during the third consecutive game in probability variable mode 1 are not counted (no count). In this case, the actual number of consecutive jackpots is 7, but the number of consecutive wins is counted as "5 consecutive wins."

<(A-2) Case where the count of consecutive games is cleared when winning the time-saving jackpot>
As shown in FIG. 2 (A-2), if the time-saving jackpot is won, the count of consecutive winnings may be cleared to zero. In the illustrated case, the number of consecutive wins becomes "zero" due to the time-saving jackpot won during the second consecutive game in the variable probability mode 1, and the subsequent probability-variable jackpot won in the time-saving state becomes the first consecutive game jackpot, that is, the first hit. It is treated as the same count as time.

When counting probability-variable jackpots, it is up to you which of the above-mentioned counting methods (A-1) and (A-2) to adopt.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2(B), all jackpots may be counted. In this case, as shown in the figure, even if the first hit is a time-saving jackpot, it is counted as the first consecutive win, and from then on, each time you win a jackpot, the number of consecutive wins is counted until the situation falls to the normal state (normal mode). +1 and go. In the illustrated case, the time-saving jackpot occurs 3 times (first hit, 3rd consecutive game, 4th consecutive game), and the definite change jackpot occurs 4 times (2nd consecutive game, 5th game, 6th game, 7th game in a row). ), the player won the jackpot seven times in total, so the number of consecutive wins is seven.

Note that the "number of consecutive games" is counted by a "number of consecutive games counting means" whose function is the main control unit 20. The number-of-consecutive-games counting means works as a functional unit that counts the number of consecutive games in a specific game period on the condition that the player has won a winning game. In addition, the count of "number of consecutive games" is, for example, the number of jackpot wins to be counted (+1 for each jackpot win), the number of times the jackpot game is executed (for example, +1 for each jackpot game executed), or , The number of activations of the condition device or continuous role actuating device related to the jackpot to be counted (for example, monitoring the ON (operation)/OFF (non-operation) of the condition device or continuous role object operation device, and counting +1). In the case of this embodiment, the number of jackpot wins is counted, and for example, in the various setting processes (step S475) when the jackpot symbol is stopped in FIG. 17A, which will be described later, if the jackpot is counted, It is designed to add +1 to the current number of consecutive hits (the number of consecutive hits is zero at the first time).

Further, although the support time reduction is not included in the count since it does not belong to the jackpot, the support time reduction may also be included in the count. However, if the support time reduction is counted, "special electric activation type support time reduction" in which the special electric accessory is activated and the prize ball is obtained is counted, and the special electric accessory is activated and the prize ball is obtained without the special electric accessory being activated. It is preferable that "special electric non-operating type support time reduction" that cannot be counted be excluded from counting. Furthermore, a "small win" in which a special electric accessory is activated may also be counted. Since the condition device and the continuous role actuating device do not operate for special electric actuated support time saving and small winnings, when counting these, the number of winnings for supporting time saving, the number of winnings for small winnings, support time saving opening/closing games, and small winning games are counted. What is necessary is to count the number of executions (the number of times the special electric accessory is activated).

(7-2-1. Characteristic points of definite variable mode)
Next, the characteristic points of the variable probability modes (variable probability modes 1 to 3) according to this embodiment will be explained. As already explained, variable probability modes 1 to 3 are game modes with different variation pattern selection modes (Tcodes) (see Fig. 44), and variable pattern distribution tables corresponding to variable probability modes 1 to 3 (Fig. 34, (see FIG. 35) is selected. Utilizing this, it is possible to create probability variation modes 1 to 3 each having its own characteristics.
For example, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for definite variable mode 1, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (for example, normal fluctuation) is selected with high probability, and in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for definite variable mode 2, A variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is selected with a high probability, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 4 seconds is selected with a high probability in the variation pattern distribution table for definite variation mode 3 (Fig. 35 FH11, FH15, FH19). In this way, the average variation time of the special symbols related to each probability variation mode, in other words, the average consumption time of the symbol variation display game (average execution time or unit time of the symbol variation display game per game) The number of executions of the symbol variation display game (hereinafter also referred to as "average digestion time") can be adjusted. In addition, the average consumption time of the above-mentioned symbol variation display game is the average consumption time at least at the time of loss, that is, the "average variation time of the loss variation pattern" in each probability variation mode.

In the case of this embodiment, the relationship between the average consumption times related to the variable probability modes is determined to satisfy "variable probability mode 3<variable probability mode 2<variable probability mode 1". That is, regarding the relationship of the fluctuation states between the variable variable modes, variable variable mode 1 is controlled under the "high speed variable state", variable variable mode 2 is controlled under the "medium speed variable state", and variable variable mode 3 is controlled under the "low speed variable state". In other words, the average digestion time is controlled to become longer as the number of consecutive games increases. In addition, as long as the average consumption time in each mode satisfies the above relationship "Probability variable mode 3 <Probability variable mode 2 <Probability variable mode 1", there is no particular restriction on the time, but Probability variable mode is a game related to a probability variable state. mode, and during the probability variation mode, the "special symbol time saving function" operates, so any variation state is at least shorter than the average digestion time of the normal mode (normal state).

As described above, the reason why the relationship between the average consumption time (game completion speed) related to the variable probability mode is set as "variable probability mode 3<variable probability mode 2<variable probability mode 1" is as follows.

In recent years, legal requirements have imposed regulations on the ball output performance of gaming machines in order to moderately suppress the excitement of gambling. For example, the ball output rate (safe balls/out balls) in the short-term test (1 hour) related to the type test above is limited from the upper limit ball output rate "300% (old standard)" to "220% (new standard)". (Regulations on Certification and Type Testing of Gaming Machines, Attached Table 4 Technical Standards Related to Pachinko Gaming Machines (Related to Article 6) (1) Performance Standards B (C), etc.) This regulation has a large impact on the ball output performance, especially during consecutive hits, and if this regulation is complied with, the ball output speed can drop to about two-thirds of the conventional ball output performance. Specifically, if the firing time is one hour, the number of out balls will be 6,000 (firing performance of the firing device 32 100 shots/min x 60 minutes = 6,000 shots), and under the old standard, the upper ball output rate would be ``300. %, so the safe ball is allowed up to 18,000 shots per hour (6,000 shots x 300% = 18,000 shots/h). However, under the new standards, the maximum ball release rate will be limited to ``220%,'' so the upper limit of safe balls will drop to 13,200 shots per hour (6,000 shots x 220% = 13,200 shots/h). Particularly during short time and variable probability conditions, the base condition is high (electric support condition), so if you hit the jackpot too many times in a row, you can easily exceed the upper limit of 220% (13,200 shots). As a result, it was found to be non-conforming in the type test. For example, when the base value under the electric support state is 70 (BA70), the safe ball by the normal electric power open game will be 4200 shots in 1 hour (BA70 x 100 shots / minute x 60 minutes = 4200 shots). Therefore, according to the old standard, it is possible to pay out "13,800 shots" (18,000 shots - 4,200 shots) in a jackpot game, but under the new standard, "9,000 shots" (13,200 shots - 4,200 shots) can be paid out. You will only be able to pay it out. Therefore, under the above regulations, it is necessary to devise ways to control the ball dispensing performance so as to make it easier to pass (comply with) the type test without impairing the ball dispensing feeling as much as possible.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as the number of successive hits increases, the average consumption time of the symbol variation display game becomes longer, and the speed at which the balls come out when the jackpot is hit consecutively increases dramatically. I am trying to suppress this.

On the other hand, by adjusting the average consumption time of the symbol fluctuation display game according to each game mode (in this case, each probability variable mode 1 to 3), the degree of freedom in playability and production increases, and the depth of the game is increased. You can also Specifically, the above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation state" is mainly useful in game modes (game states) that place emphasis on playability, such as "increasing the average game processing speed and increasing the time efficiency regarding game progress." . During the probability change mode (probability change state), it becomes "electrical support state + high probability state (special symbol probability change function activated) + special symbol time saving state (special symbol time saving function activated)", and at least compared to the normal mode, the symbol change display game is The average playing time is relatively short, and the game state is devised to make it easier to win the jackpot, but in such a game state, some players feel that they are more interested than enjoying the performance. Many players want to win the jackpot quickly. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of probability variation mode 1, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected, and a "high-speed variation state" is generated. On the other hand, under the "medium-speed fluctuation state" or "slow-speed fluctuation state", the average completion time of the symbol fluctuation display game will be longer than in the "high-speed fluctuation state", but in exchange, the performance time may be longer. Therefore, it is useful for game modes that place emphasis on gameplay, such as ``enjoying the performance.''

As mentioned above, regarding the average consumption time of the symbol fluctuation display game, the following relationship is established: "Probable variable mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) < Probable variable mode 2 (medium speed variable state) < Probable variable mode 1 (high speed variable state)" Therefore, it is preferable to have the following configurations (T1) to (T19), especially regarding the "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (FIG. 35)" that is referred to when a loss is most likely to be encountered in the progress of the game. . Note that the present invention is not necessarily limited to the relationships among the three variable probability modes 1 to 3. That is, the present invention provides a fixed variable mode in which the number of consecutive hits is less than a predetermined number (hereinafter referred to as "probable variable mode A"), and a variable variable mode in which the number of consecutive hits is greater than or equal to the predetermined number (hereinafter referred to as "probable variable mode B"). It is sufficient if the structure satisfies the relationship "variable variable mode A < variable variable mode B" when the average digestion time of variable variable mode A and variable variable mode B is compared. Same goes for B). Hereinafter, when it is referred to as "in the order of 'variable probability mode A⇒variable probability mode B'", it also includes the meaning of "in the order of 'variable probability mode 1⇒variable probability mode 2⇒variable probability mode 3'".

(T1) Increase the average fluctuation time of normal fluctuations in the order of "probable variable mode A⇒probable variable mode B". Note that one or more normal fluctuations can be provided.
(T2) Increase the average variation time of reach variation in the order of "probability variation mode A⇒probability variation mode B". Note that one or more reach fluctuations can be provided.
(T3) Increase the variation time of the normal variation with the highest selection rate in the order of "probable variable mode A⇒probable variable mode B".
(T4) Increase the variation time of the reach variation with the highest selection rate in the order of "variable probability mode A⇒variable probability mode B".
(T5) Decrease the selection rate of normal variation in the order of "probable variable mode A⇒probable variable mode B". Note that one or more normal fluctuations can be provided.
(T6) Increase the selection rate of reach variation in the order of "variable probability mode A⇒variable probability mode B". Note that one or more reach fluctuations can be provided.
(T7) Increase the variation time of the shortest normal variation in each mode in the order of "probable variable mode A⇒probable variable mode B".
(T8) Increase the variation time of the shortest reach variation in each mode in the order of "variable probability mode A⇒variable probability mode B".
(T9) Reduce the types of normal fluctuations in the order of "probable variable mode A⇒probable variable mode B."
(T10) Increase the types of reach fluctuations in the order of "probability variation mode A⇒probability variation mode B".
(T11) When "first variation time < second variation time", the types of variation patterns longer than the second variation time are increased in the order of "probability variation mode A⇒probability variation mode B". The "variation pattern for the second variation time or longer" may be a normal variation or a reach variation (the same applies hereinafter).
(T12) When "first variation time < second variation time", the types of variation patterns less than or equal to the first variation time are reduced in the order of "probability variation mode A⇒probability variation mode B". The "variation pattern of the first variation time or less" may be a normal variation or a reach variation (the same applies hereinafter).
(T13) When "first variation time < second variation time", probability variable mode A does not have a variation pattern longer than the second variation time, and probability variable mode B has a variation pattern longer than the second variation time.
(T14) When "first variation time < second variation time", probability variable mode A has a variation pattern shorter than the first variation time, and probability variable mode B does not have a variation pattern shorter than the first variation time.
(T15) When "first fluctuation time < second fluctuation time", there is no fluctuation pattern longer than the second fluctuation time in definite variable mode 1 and definite variable mode 2, and there is no fluctuation pattern longer than the second fluctuation time in definite variable mode 3. There is a pattern of variation.
(T16) If "first fluctuation time < second fluctuation time", definite variable mode 1 and definite variable mode 2 have a fluctuation pattern that is less than or equal to the first fluctuation time, and definite variable mode 3 has a fluctuation pattern that is less than or equal to the first fluctuation time. There is no pattern of variation.
(T17) In definite variable mode A and definite variable mode B, the variation selected when the number of active pending balls (the number of active pending balls that exist, excluding the active pending balls used for the current variation display operation) at the start of the variation is 0. The variation time of the patterns is set to be a common variation time (which may be the same or substantially the same), and when the number of operation-holding balls is other than 0, variation patterns having different variation times can be selected. For example, in fixed variable modes 1 to 3, if the number of pending pitches is 0, the normal variation 8s type (in this example, normal variation 8s during small series, normal variation 8s during medium series, normal variation during Dalian series), Only the variation 8s) is selected, and when the operation hold ball is other than 0, variation patterns with different variation times can be selected. In this case, in the order of "probable variable mode A⇒probable variable mode B", the variation time of the variation pattern that is likely to be selected when the operation hold ball is other than 0 is lengthened.
(T18)) The normal variation is made common in the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B, and the selection rate of the reach variation is made higher in the order of "probability variation mode A⇒probability variation mode B". For example, the normal variation is made common in probability variation modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of reach variation is set to have a high probability in the order of "probability variation mode 1⇒probability variation mode 2⇒probability variation mode 3".
(T19) The normal variation is made common between the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B, and the selection rate of the reach variation whose variation time is relatively long is set to have a high probability in the order of "probability variation mode A⇒probability variation mode B". For example, the normal variation is common in probability variation modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of the reach variation with a relatively long variation time is set to have a high probability in the order of "probability variation mode 1⇒probability variation mode 2⇒probability variation mode 3".

In addition, during the power support state, it is easy to accumulate activated balls, so we focused on the fluctuation pattern that is likely to be selected when there are relatively many activated balls, and the configurations of (T1) to (T6) above were It can be said that it is important to adopt a loss fluctuation pattern distribution table that has the following characteristics. On the other hand, since it is difficult to accumulate operation-reserved balls during a state without electric support, such as a potential state, if the above-mentioned "Definitely variable mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) < Definitely variable mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < Definitely variable mode 1 (high-speed fluctuation state), we focus on fluctuation patterns that are likely to be selected when there are relatively few balls on hold and distribute losing fluctuation patterns having the configurations (T1) to (T19). It is important to have a table.

Further, the winning-related variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 34 can be configured as shown in (T20) to (T27) below.

(T20) In the order of "probability variable mode A⇒probability variable mode B", lengthen the variation time of the reach variation that is likely to be selected in the event of winning.
(T21) If the advantage degree (profit degree) is "1st winning type < 2nd winning type", the fluctuation time is relatively longer when winning the 2nd winning type than when winning the 1st winning type. A reach variation with a long reach is likely to be selected. In this case, the variation time of the reach variation can be made longer in the order of "variable probability mode A⇒variable probability mode B".
(T22) If the advantage degree (profit degree) is "first winning type < second winning type", the reach fluctuations when the first winning type is won are the same (the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation is the same), The reach variation that is likely to be selected when the second winning type is won is different (the variation time of the reach variation is different). In this case, the variation time of the reach variation can be made longer in the order of "variable probability mode A⇒variable probability mode B".
(T23) The variation time of the longest reach variation that can be selected when winning in probability variable mode A (first winning longest reach variation) is set to "R seconds", and the longest reach variation that can be selected when winning in probability variable mode B (second winning longest reach variation) is set as "R seconds". If the variation time of the longest winning reach variation is "S seconds",
R/S value (variable time extension rate upon winning),
The variation time of the longest reach variation that can be selected in the event of a loss in the variable probability mode A (the longest reach variation for the first loss) is set to "T seconds", and the longest reach variation that can be selected in the event of a loss in the variable probability mode B (the longest reach variation for the second If the fluctuation time of (fluctuation) is "U seconds",
The value of T/U (loss fluctuation time extension rate) is different. In this case, it can be set as "T/U"<"R/S". Also, if the advantage degree (profit degree) is "first winning type < second winning type", the first winning type The value of "R/S" is larger for the second winning type than for the second winning type.
(T24) In the order of "probability variable mode A⇒probability variable mode B", at least lengthen the variation time of the reach variation that can be selected at the time of winning the winning type with the highest profit degree (in this embodiment, 10R probability variable jackpot).
(T25) In the order of "Probable Variable Mode A ⇒ Probable Variable Mode B", the variation time of the longest reach variation among the reach variations that can be selected at the time of winning the winning type with the highest profit degree (in this embodiment, 10R Probable Variable Jackpot) At least make it longer.
(T26) When comparing probability variable mode A and probability variable mode B, the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a loss does not change, but the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a win is relatively longer. Become. Although not shown in the figure, for example, the fluctuation pattern distribution table that is referred to in each probability variation mode 1 to 3 at the time of a loss can be set as the "loss variation pattern distribution table (for middle school)" corresponding to probability variation mode 2 in FIG. 35. , in the case of a win, the "probable medium win/support time saving winning variation pattern distribution table" shown in FIG. 34 is used depending on the number of consecutive wins. Note that "winning" herein means "big hit winning" and/or "support time saving winning" (the same applies to (T27) described below).
(T27) When comparing probability variable mode A and probability variable mode B, the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of winning does not change, but the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of loss is relatively long. Become. Although not shown in the figure, for example, when winning, the fluctuation pattern distribution table that is referred to in each probability variation mode 1 to 3 can be changed to the "Probability variation medium winning/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table (medium variation medium winning/support time saving variation pattern distribution table)" corresponding to probability variation mode 2 in Figure 33. In the case of a loss, the ``Probability Variable Loss Fluctuation Pattern Distribution Table'' shown in FIG. 35 is used depending on the number of consecutive wins.

In addition, in the case of this embodiment, after shifting to the variable probability mode 3, the shift from the variable probability mode 3 to other game modes is not made until the jackpot is won or the number of STs is exhausted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a predetermined number of games (variable number of times) is executed during variable probability mode 3, the game may be shifted to another gaming mode (variable probability mode 1 or variable probability mode 2). This is because if the variable rate mode 3 in the low-speed variable state continues for a long period of time, the player may feel tired or the game may become monotonous. The transition of the game mode is not limited to the transition form "Probability mode 3 ⇒ Probability mode 2 or Probability mode 1", but also "Probability mode 3 (first variation number is exhausted) ⇒ Probability mode 2 (second variation number is used) ⇒ Probability variation mode 3" "Mode 1" or "Definitely variable mode 3 (first variation number is used) ⇒ Definitely variable mode 1 (second variation number is used) ⇒ Definitely variable mode 2". Note that when the first number of fluctuations is K times and the second number of fluctuations is L times, "K times" = "L times", "K times < L times", or "K times > L times". can.

(Modification A)
In this embodiment, as described above, using the loss variation pattern distribution table (FIG. 35) corresponding to each of the probability variation modes 1 to 3, Although the relationship of "medium-speed fluctuation state)<probable fluctuation mode 1 (high-speed fluctuation state)" is realized, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, by using the fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to one certain variable mode (one Tcode), It is possible to realize the relationship of "speed fluctuation state)<probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)" and the fluctuation state of the same event. FIG. 36 shows an example of a probability variation medium hit/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table (winning variation pattern distribution table) according to modification A, and FIG. 37 shows a loss variation pattern distribution table according to modification A. An example of a variation pattern distribution table is shown.

First, the outline of this example will be explained with reference to the loss variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. In this example, the standard table is the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table used for small consecutive games (1st to 3rd consecutive games) (see Figure 37 (a)), and the medium consecutive games (4th to 6th consecutive games) (time), the fluctuation pattern at the start of the current fluctuation is obtained by adding the first addition time (for example, 5 seconds) to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern defined in this reference table (Fig. 37 (See (b)). In addition, when playing Dalian (from the 7th time onwards), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern defined in the above standard table plus the second additional time (for example, 10 seconds) is calculated as the start of the current fluctuation. It is acquired as a time fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 37(c)). That is, this is a variation pattern selection technique that uses a variation pattern distribution table corresponding to one game mode to obtain variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of game modes. In this example, the selection rate of the variation pattern does not change, as shown in FIGS. 37(a) to 37(b), because the result obtained by adding the predetermined time is obtained. The same applies to the "winning/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table" shown in FIGS. 36(a) to 36(b).

FIG. 37(a) shows a loss variation pattern distribution table used for the first to third consecutive winnings. For convenience of explanation, here, as the variation pattern types to be selected, normal variation 1 to 4 (variation time 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 3 seconds) during probability variation, N reach during probability variation, SP reach A during probability variation ( As a representative example, SP reach B (high expectation of winning) is shown.

As can be seen from FIGS. 37(a) to (c), although the selection rate of each variation pattern is the same, as the number of consecutive hits increases, the variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time becomes selected. (The same applies to Figures 36 (a) to (c)). As a result, the above-mentioned relationship of "Definite variable mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) < Definite variable mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < Definite variable mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)" and the fluctuation state of the same event, that is, "Xiao Renzhuang (high speed fluctuation state)" It is possible to realize a fluctuating state that satisfies the following: state) < Zhonglianzhuang (medium speed fluctuating state) < Dalianzhuang (low speed fluctuating state).

In addition, FIG. 37(B) shows the result obtained by adding 5 seconds (first addition time) to each variation pattern in the reference table, and FIG. 37(C) shows the result obtained by adding 10 seconds (second addition time) to each variation pattern in the reference table. time) is configured so that the added value is obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be configured as shown in (S1) to (S7) below.

(S1) A predetermined time is not added (hereinafter simply referred to as "addition") to the normal fluctuations (Normal fluctuations during definite fluctuations 1 to 4), and at least one reach fluctuation (N reach during definite fluctuations, It is added to medium SP reach A and variable medium SP reach B). For example, in the case of Zhongrensho, 5 seconds (first addition time) is added to the N reach in the standard table (Fig. 37 (a)), and in the case of Daliansho, 10 seconds (first addition time) is added to the N reach in the certain variable. 2 addition time) Add. Note that it is preferable that the reach variation that is relatively likely to be selected (here, among the reach variations, the N reach in the probability variation with the highest selection rate) is to be added. Further, the first addition time and the second addition time may satisfy the relationship “first addition time<second addition time” (the same applies to (S2) to (S5) described later).
(S2) Addition is made to at least one normal variation (normal variation 1 to 4 during probability variation), and addition is not performed to reach variation (N reach during probability variation, SP reach A during probability variation, SP reach B during probability variation). do not have. For example, in the case of Zhongrensho, 5 seconds (first additional time) is added to the standard table (Figure 37 (a)) for normal fluctuation 1 during definite change, and in the case of Daliansho, 10 seconds is added for normal fluctuation 1 during definite change. (Second addition time) Add. Note that it is preferable that a normal variation that is relatively easily selected (here, normal variation 1 among probability variations that has the highest selection rate among normal variations) is to be added.
(S3) In the case of a loss, no addition is made, but in the case of a win, it is added. For example, in the case of a win, 5 seconds (first addition time) and 10 seconds (second addition time) are added, as shown in Figures 37 (b) and (c), but in the case of a loss, no addition is made. (In case of a loss, use the reference table: Figure 37 (a)). In other words, the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a loss does not change, but the variation time that can be selected in the case of a win becomes relatively longer. Note that "winning" here means "big hit winning" and/or "support time saving winning" (the same applies to (S4) described below).
(S4) If you lose, add it up; if you win, don't add it up. For example, in the case of a loss, 5 seconds (first addition time) and 10 seconds (second addition time) are added, as shown in Figures 37 (b) and (c), but in the case of a win, no addition is made (winner In this case, use the reference table: Figure 36 (a)). In other words, the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a win does not change, but the variation time that can be selected in the case of a loss becomes relatively longer.
(S5) At least the longest variation pattern is not added. For example, SP reach B during variable probability is excluded from addition, and at least one variation pattern with a shorter variation time than this is included (addition contents are (T7) or (T8) above). be able to). The longest fluctuation pattern is due to the long original fluctuation time. The "longest fluctuation pattern" may be the longest one among the losing fluctuations (Figure 37) (in this example, SP reach B during the probability change), or the longest one among the winning fluctuations (Figure 36) in the table. It may be the longest one (in this example, SP reach B in variable probability).
(S6) A common effect can be performed during the first addition time or the second addition time. For example, "effect A" can be executed for an additional 5 seconds (during the first addition time), and "effect B" can be executed for an additional 10 seconds (during the second addition time). In addition, during the 10 seconds of addition (during the second addition time), "effect A (same effect as during the first addition time)" is executed for the first 5 seconds, and "effect C (same effect as during the first addition time)" is executed for the latter 5 seconds. It is possible to perform a different performance than during the time). Note that "effect A" is preferably a pseudo-connection. Furthermore, "performance B" is preferably a player participation type production.
(S7) If the number of active pending balls at the start of fluctuation (the existing active pending balls excluding the active pending balls used for the current fluctuation display operation) is 0, it will not be added, and the active pending ball number is other than 0. is added. This is because when the number of active pending balls is 0, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is selected (in this example, only the reach variation is selected), so it is not preferable to add them blindly. Note that the longest variation pattern among the normal variation types (in this example, normal variation 3 during probability variation or normal variation 4 during probability variation) may be configured to be easily selected.

(Modification B)
Furthermore, the above-mentioned relationship of "variable variable mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) < variable variable mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < variable variable mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)" is not limited to the above modification A, and for example, FIGS. As shown in 39, this can also be realized by using a variable pattern distribution table that changes the selection rate (distribution value) of the variable pattern according to the number of consecutive games.

First, an overview of this example will be explained with reference to FIG. 39. In this example, the reference table is the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table used for small consecutive games (1st to 3rd consecutive games) (see Figure 39 (a)), and the medium consecutive games (4th to 6th consecutive games) (time), the "first selection rate variation table (FIG. 39(b)") is referred to, in which the selection rate of the variation pattern defined in this reference table is changed.
In addition, when playing Dalian (from the 7th time onwards), the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern set in the above standard table is changed, but the "first selection rate fluctuation table (Fig. 39 (b))" Refer to the "second selection rate fluctuation table (FIG. 39(c)") for the selection rate different from the selection rate.
Here, the reference table (Figure 39 (a)) used for small consecutive games (1st to 3rd consecutive games),
The above-mentioned "first selection rate fluctuation table (FIG. 39 (b))" used in the middle consecutive games (4th to 6th consecutive games);
The relationship between the average fluctuation time of the above-mentioned "second selection rate fluctuation table (Figure 39 (c))" used when playing Dalian (from the 7th time onwards) is as follows:
The selection rate is changed so as to satisfy at least the relationship of "second selection rate variation table (low speed)<first selection rate variation table (medium speed)<reference table (high speed)". This makes it possible to realize the above-mentioned relationship of "variable variable mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) < variable variable mode 2 (medium speed variable state) < variable variable mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)".
In this example, since the selection rate of the variation pattern of the reference table is obtained by changing the selection rate, the variation time of the variation pattern related to each variation pattern distribution table is It does not change (the fluctuation pattern designation command (MODE2+EVENT1) also does not change) (the same applies to the "winning/support time-saving winning fluctuation pattern distribution table" in FIG. 38). In this point, it is greatly different from the above modification A in which the variation time of the variation pattern related to each variation pattern distribution table changes, but the selection rate does not change.

FIG. 39(a) shows a loss variation pattern distribution table used for the first to third consecutive winnings. Here, for convenience of explanation, as in the above modification A, the variation pattern types to be selected are normal variation 1 to 4 (variation time 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 3 seconds), N reach during probability variation. , a variable probability SP reach A (low expectation of winning), and a variable probability SP reach B (high expectation of winning) are shown as representative examples.

As can be seen from Figures 39 (a) to (c), although the variation time of each variation pattern is the same, the selection rate of the variation pattern changes depending on the number of consecutive hits, and as the number of consecutive hits increases, the variation Fluctuation patterns with relatively long times are easier to select (the same applies to FIGS. 39(a) to 39(c)). As a result, the above-mentioned relationship of "Definite variable mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) < Definite variable mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < Definite variable mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)" and the fluctuation state of the same event, that is, "Xiao Renzhuang (high speed fluctuation state)" It is possible to realize a fluctuating state that satisfies the following: state) < Zhonglianzhuang (medium speed fluctuating state) < Dalianzhuang (low speed fluctuating state).

Note that this modification can be configured as shown in (P1) to (P15) below.

(P1) The average fluctuation time of the "standard table" is "X seconds", the average fluctuation time of the "first selection rate fluctuation table" is "Y seconds", and the average fluctuation time of the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is " Z seconds'', the following relational expression (α) is satisfied.
"Y/X"<"Z/Y"...(α)
The extension rate of the average fluctuation time of "Probability variable mode 2⇒Probability variable mode 3" is greater than the extension rate of the average fluctuation time of "Probability variable mode 1⇒Probability variable mode 2".

(P2) The variation time of the longest variation pattern in the "standard table" is "X seconds", the variation time of the longest variation pattern in the "first selection rate variation table" is "Y seconds", and the "second selection rate variation table" When the variation time of the longest variation pattern is "Z seconds", the following relational expression (β) is satisfied.
"Y/X"<"Z/Y"...(β)
The extension rate of the variation time of the longest variation pattern of "Probability variation mode 2 ⇒ Probability variation mode 3" is greater than the extension rate of the variation time of the longest variation pattern of "Probability variation mode 1 ⇒ Probability variation mode 2".

(P3) Let the combined selection rates of the normal fluctuations of the "standard table", "first selection rate fluctuation table", and "second selection rate fluctuation table" be "X1", "Y1", and "Z1",
If the total selection rate of the reach fluctuations of the "standard table", "first selection rate fluctuation table", and "second selection rate fluctuation table" are "X2", "Y2", and "Z2", the following relational expression (γ ) is satisfied.
"X2"<"X1","Y2"<"Y1", and "Z2"<"Z1"...(γ)
In this case, it is possible to prevent the game time from becoming unnecessarily long. However, for tables other than the reference table, the reverse total selection rate may be used (“Y2” > “Y1” or “Z2” > “Z1”).

(P4) If the total selection rate of the reach fluctuations of the "standard table", "first selection rate fluctuation table", and "second selection rate fluctuation table" are "X2", "Y2", and "Z2", the following relationship is established. Formula (ε) is satisfied.
"X2"<"Y2"<Z2"...(γ)

(P5) The total selection rate of the N reach fluctuation of the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and "second selection rate fluctuation table" is "Y3", "Z3", and the total selection rate of SP reach is "Y4", "Z4"'', the following relational expression (ε) is satisfied in the "first selection rate variation table" and/or the "second selection rate variation table".
“Y4”≦“Y3”, “Z4”≦“Z3”...(γ)

(P6) One or more specific variation patterns are not selected in the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and/or "second selection rate fluctuation table" (selection rate 0: target for lottery, but selection rate is (not selected for 0).
(P7) The shortest normal variation in the "reference table" is not selected in the "first selection rate variation table" and/or the "second selection rate variation table" (selection rate 0).
(P7) The longest reach variation in the "first selection rate variation table" and/or the "second selection rate variation table" is not selected in the "reference table" (selection rate is 0).

(P8) In the "first selection rate variation table" and/or the "second selection rate variation table", the longest normal variation has the highest selection rate. When referring to the "selection rate" of a certain variation pattern, if there are multiple variation patterns, it includes the combined selection rate of these variations (the same applies hereinafter).
(P9) In the "first selection rate variation table" and/or the "second selection rate variation table", the selection rate of N reach variation is the highest.
(P10) In the "first selection rate variation table" and/or the "second selection rate variation table", the selection rate of SP reach variation is the highest.

(P11) The "first selection rate fluctuation table" and/or the "second selection rate fluctuation table" have a low selection rate of normal fluctuations in the "standard table", and the selection rate of normal fluctuations in the "standard table" is lowered. are distributed in order to make the selection rate of at least one reach variation high probability. In this case, if there are at least multiple types of reach variations such as "first variation time < second variation time < third variation time", the reach variation of the third variation time is varied with high probability, and the reach variation of the first variation time and the third variation time are varied with high probability. 2. The selection rate of the reach variation of the variation time is not varied. Alternatively, the selection rate of reach variation in the first variation time is not changed, but the selection rate of reach variation in the second variation time and the third variation time is varied (in this case, the selection rate of reach variation in the second variation time is changed). The range of increase in the selection rate of reach variation in the third variation time ≦ the range of increase in the selection rate of reach variation in the third variation time ≦ the range of increase in the selection rate of reach variation in the second variation time be able to).

(P12) The average fluctuation time of the "standard table" is "X seconds", the average fluctuation time of the "first selection rate fluctuation table" is "Y seconds", and the average fluctuation time of the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is "Z". seconds", by changing the selection rate of fluctuation patterns other than the longest fluctuation pattern,
It is configured to satisfy "X seconds"<"Yseconds"<"Zseconds".
In this case, the variation pattern (variation pattern other than the longest variation pattern) that changes the selection rate may be a "normal variation" or a reach variation.

(P13) The "first selection rate fluctuation table" is a table in which the selection rate of one or more fluctuation patterns in the standard table is changed, and the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is a table different from the standard table. Make use of it.
In this case, the following configurations (P13-1) to (P13-7) can be used.
(P13-1) The "second selection rate variation table" has more types of variation patterns (normal variation and/or reach variation) than the reference table (first selection rate variation table).
(P13-2) The "second selection rate fluctuation table" has fewer types of fluctuation patterns (normal fluctuations and/or reach fluctuations) than the standard table (first selection rate fluctuation table), but the average fluctuation time is longer. .
(P13-3) The longest variation pattern in the "second selection rate variation table" is longer than the longest variation pattern in the reference table (first selection rate variation table).
(P13-4) The shortest variation pattern of the "second selection rate variation table" is longer than the shortest variation pattern of the reference table (first selection rate variation table).
(P13-5) In the "second selection rate variation table", reach variation is more likely to be selected than normal variation.
(P13-6) The "second selection rate variation table" and the "standard table (first selection rate variation table)" have a common variation pattern that is selected when the number of pending pitches is 0 (operation When the number of pending pitches is other than 0, the variation patterns to be selected are different).
(P13-7) The "second selection rate variation table" and the "standard table (first selection rate variation table)" have a common variation pattern that is selected when the number of pending pitches is 0 to 2. Yes (the variation patterns to be selected are different when the number of pending balls is 3).

(P14) When losing, a table with a different selection rate of the standard table is used, but when winning (big hit and/or support time reduction winning), a common table is used.
(P15) When winning (big hit and/or short support time winning), a table with a different selection rate of the standard table is used, but when a loss, a common table is used.

(7-2-2. About the production in the fixed change mode: Figure 7A)
Next, the performance in the variable probability mode will be explained. In this embodiment, variable probability performance modes 1 to 3 corresponding to variable probability modes 1 to 3 are provided as variable probability performance modes. FIG. 7A (c) shows examples of performances in variable probability performance modes 1 to 3.

Referring to FIG. 7A, variable production mode 1 is an "intercept mode" that depicts intercepting an enemy aircraft, and variable production mode 2 is a production that depicts an air attack on an enemy fleet or enemy base by dive bombing. ``Bombing Mode'' is a production that creates a dramatic effect, and variable production mode 3 is a ``War Bombing Mode'' that produces a production that depicts a strategic bomber raiding an enemy city. In other words, the fixed change mode period is divided into three groups depending on the number of consecutive games: a small-scale performance mode, a middle-class performance mode, and a large-scale performance mode, and the user stays in any of these three categories. Shirika is a series of multi-game presentations, and is mainly based on dynamic changes in the fluctuation pattern (changes in the fluctuation state of high speed, medium speed, and low speed) and the accompanying effects (switching of background effects, preview effects, etc.). person will be notified. It should be noted that the illustrated display of "Right hit ⇒" is a "Right hit instruction performance (fire guidance notification performance)" that urges the player to play right. Further, regarding the hold icon, although not shown in the drawing, hold icons corresponding to the variable probability performance modes 1 to 3 are displayed. In addition, the illustration shows that the decorative symbols are in a fluctuating display state, which means that the current game is being executed, and if there is a pending ball after the current game ends, the decorative symbols will be The variable display game is executed sequentially.

In addition, if you win the time-saving jackpot, you will be transferred to the "time-saving performance mode" shown in FIG. The mode is shifted to the time-saving mode 4 (Tcode = "07H") shown in FIG. :Lightning mode)".

This special time-saving performance mode is only available during consecutive games, so for example, if you win a time-saving jackpot in addition to the first win, or when you have reached a predetermined number of consecutive games (for example, 4 consecutive games (mid-term consecutive games)) or more. It is preferable to transfer if you win. Specifically, the time-saving state after the time-saving jackpot in the case of "time-saving jackpots are not counted" in Figure 7A (A-1), and the triple series of cases in which "all jackpots are counted" in Figure 7A (B) It can be used as a production mode related to the time-saving state after the time-saving jackpot for the first to fourth consecutive games. In addition, in the case of FIG. 7A(B), since the time-saving jackpot is counted, it is preferable to display an effect image 761 that notifies the current number of consecutive wins, such as "〇 consecutive wins!" In the case of -1), since the time-saving jackpot is not counted (no count), it is preferable to display an effect image 761 such as "Continue winning challenge" instead of notifying the number of consecutive winnings. In the case of "clearing the number of consecutive games by winning the time-saving jackpot" in FIG. 7A (A-2), it is preferable to shift to the time-saving production mode as usual.

(Result performance)
In addition, if you win a time-saving jackpot (4R time-saving jackpot) during a series of games, a result performance can be made to appear at the final variation (100th rotation) when the number of time-savings ends. This "result performance" refers to predetermined game information when the symbols change when the time-saving state ends, such as the number of consecutive jackpots won up to that point and the total number of balls won in winning games (total number of prize balls). (For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-086102, FIG. 50, FIG. 54 to FIG. 56 of the same publication, etc.). Here, if the support time reduction is won without going through the first win and enters (transfers) to the time reduction state (support time reduction state), specifically, due to support time reduction A or support time reduction B that grants a finite time reduction. When entering the time saving state, in the final variation where the number of time reductions ends (Support time reduction C is an infinite time reduction, so it is virtually impossible to reach the final variation, so it is excluded here). Although it may be executed, it is preferable not to execute it. The reason for this is that if you enter the time saving state without ever winning a jackpot, and the time saving state ends without winning a jackpot, the total number of prize balls will be very small, and the result effect will not be effective. This is because there is little need to release it. Further, the same applies when the ceiling time reduction (finite time reduction) due to the ceiling benefit described below is activated and the time reduction state is entered. In addition, in general gaming machines, the ball output rate (ball output rate at low base) when there is no electric support (normal condition or probability condition) is approximately 30% to 40%, The ball output rate (ball output rate at high base) is approximately 80% to 95% in (condition), and since the ball output rate is less than 100% in both cases (if you keep hitting it), from this point, If you enter the support time reduction state without going through the first hit, or if you enter the time reduction state by activating the ceiling time reduction (finite time reduction) due to the ceiling benefit described below, the time reduction state ends without winning the jackpot. In this case, there is no need to show the result performance.

However, when going through the first hit, the significance of reporting the number of consecutive hits and the total number of pitches won (total number of prize pitches) increases. Therefore, if you win support time reduction A or support time reduction B after the first win, it is preferable to execute the result effect in the final variation. For example, as shown in the notes columns (3) and (4) of Fig. 41, when the final variation is used as the variation pattern for result production, and in time saving mode 1, the longest normal variation in time saving mode 1 (for example, normal variation 40 seconds), in the case of Time Saving Mode 2, the longest normal fluctuation in Time Saving Mode 2 (for example, normal fluctuation 45 seconds) is configured to be selectable, and the result performance is created using that performance time width (variation time). can be done. In this case, different result performances (for example, different display modes of game information, background images, etc.) can be produced between the time saving mode 1 and the time saving mode 2. Of course, the longest normal variation is the same in time saving mode 1 and time saving mode 2, as the same variation time or the same variation pattern, and the same result effect (for example, the same display format of game information, the same background image, etc.). You can let it come out.

(About other performances)
In addition, the performance related to the variable probability mode can be configured as shown below (Confirmation Performance 1) to (Confirmation Performance 5).
(Confirmed Performance 1) The probability of appearance of player participation type performances is set to be high in the order of "Probable Variable Mode 1⇒Probable Variable Mode 2⇒Probable Variable Mode 3".
(Confirmation 2) The appearance rate of the pre-read notice is made low probability or high probability in the order of "variable probability mode A⇒variable probability mode B".
(Confirmation 3) In the order of "probable variable mode A⇒probable variable mode B", the appearance rate of pseudo-connection is made high (the selection rate of the specified variation pattern with pseudo-continuous is increased).
(Confirmation performance 4) Increase the number of pseudo consecutives in the order of "Probability variation mode A ⇒ Probability variation mode B". For example, definite variable mode 1 is up to "pseudo 2", definite variable mode 2 is up to "pseudo 3", definite variable mode 3 is up to "pseudo 4", and so on.
(Confirmation performance 5) Regarding reach variation (reach performance), probability variation mode 3 includes at least a first variation pattern of a first variation time,
The probability variation mode 2 includes at least the second variation pattern of the second variation time, but does not include the first variation pattern,
The probability variation mode 1 includes at least the third variation pattern of the third variation time, but does not include the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern.
In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the relationship "third variation time<second variation time<first variation time" is satisfied. For example, the variable probability mode 3 includes at least the "developed special reach variation" that performs a full rotation effect after the developed SPSP reach (SP reach + SPSP reach), and the fixed variable mode 2 includes at least the "developed SPSP reach". "Advanced special reach variation" is not included, and variable probability mode 1 includes at least SP reach, but does not include "evolving SPSP reach" and "developed special reach variation". In this case, the SP reach effect executed in the first half will be standardized, and when the SP reach effect appears, you will be able to enjoy how far the reach effect will develop depending on the difference in probability mode. Become.
For example, the variable probability mode 3 includes at least a "direct hit type special reach variation" that performs a full rotation effect after a direct hit type SPSP reach (SPSP reach), and the variable variable mode 2 includes at least a "SP reach variation that includes the execution of a specific preview effect". ", but does not include "direct hit type special reach variation", and fixed variable mode 1 includes at least SP reach, but does not include "SP reach including the execution of a specific preview effect" and "direct hit type special reach variation". . In this case as well, you can enjoy how far the reach effect will develop depending on the difference in probability mode.

(7-3. About time saving mode)
Next, the "time saving mode" will be explained. As shown in the figure, the time saving mode is a game mode in which the internal gaming state is related to a variable probability state (YJ=01H), and the time saving mode is a game mode in which the internal gaming state is a variable probability state (YJ = 01H), and the time saving mode is a game mode in which the variable pattern selection mode is different (Tcode = "04H" to "06H"). is included. In addition, when providing the above-mentioned "special time-saving effect mode", a time-saving mode 4 (Tcode="07H") can be provided (see FIG. 7A (b), the remarks column of FIG. 42, and FIG. 43). This time-saving mode is entered when the 4R time-saving jackpot or support time-saving A to C is won (see FIG. 4).

In this embodiment, if you win the 4R time-saving jackpot or any of the support time-savings A to C, you will first be transferred to time-saving mode 1, and then depending on the number of time-savings awarded, you will be transferred to time-saving mode 2 and time-saving mode. 3. In other words, the mode is shifted from one time-saving mode to another according to the number of games being executed in the time-saving state. In other words, the mode is shifted from one time saving mode to another time saving mode according to the remaining number of time saving times. Specifically, with reference to the "time saving mode" block frame in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7B, the time saving mode 1 stays in the time saving mode 1 until the number of time saving times is 100, and the time saving mode 2 stays in the time saving mode 2 when the number of time saving times is 101 to 200. , and stays in time saving mode 3 when the number of time saving times is 251 or more.

Therefore, if you win the 4R time saving jackpot or support time saving A that gives you 100 time savings, you will only stay in time saving mode 1, and if you win support time saving B that gives you 200 time savings, you will stay in the time saving mode. If the user stays in time saving mode 1 and time saving mode 2 and wins support time saving C which gives infinite time saving (65535 times of working time saving), the user will stay in time saving mode 1 to 3. In addition, if the number of time reductions can be increased due to the above-mentioned "additional function" etc., even if you win Support Time Reduction A or Support Time Reduction B, there are cases where you will stay in Time Reduction Mode 2 or Time Reduction Mode 3. However, here, unless there is a particular need, a configuration without any additions will be mainly explained.

(7-3-1. Features of time-saving mode)
Next, the characteristic points of the time-saving modes (variable probability modes 1 to 3) according to the present embodiment will be explained. As already explained, the time saving modes 1 to 3 are game modes with different variable pattern selection modes (Tcodes) (see Figures 40 to 41 and 44), and the variable pattern selection modes (Tcode) corresponding to the time saving modes 1 to 3 are different. The minute table (see FIGS. 40 and 41) is selected. By utilizing this, it is possible to create time saving modes 1 to 3 each having its own characteristics. This point is based on the same method as the variable probability mode described above.

The time-saving mode of this embodiment is determined so that the relationship of average digestion time satisfies "time-saving mode 1<time-saving mode 2<time-saving mode 3" (see note 2 in FIG. 7B). In other words, the average time taken is controlled to be shorter as the number of time reductions increases, in other words, each time the game mode is stepped up. In this respect, it differs from the probability variable mode in which the average consumption time is controlled to be longer each time the game mode is stepped up. The reason why the relationship between the average completion time (game completion speed) related to the time saving mode is determined as "time saving mode 1 < time saving mode 2 < time saving mode 3" is as follows.

Unlike the variable probability mode (variable probability state), during the time saving mode (time saving state), it is an electric support state in which the jackpot lottery probability is low, so it is a game state in which it is more difficult to win a jackpot than under the variable probability mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the average consumption time of the symbol variation display game is adjusted to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the time saving mode. Specifically, in the case of time-saving modes 1 and 2, emphasis is placed on the gameplay of ``enjoying the performance'' in the ``low-speed fluctuation state'' or ``medium-speed fluctuation state'' where the average consumption time of the symbol fluctuation display game is long. In the case of Time Saving Mode 3, there is a "high-speed fluctuation state", which is a gaming mode that emphasizes gameplay, such as "increasing the average game completion speed and improving time efficiency regarding game progress". It is said that In particular, when the relationship between the average completion time (game completion speed) is set as "Time saving mode 1 < Time saving mode 2 < Time saving mode 3", there are the following advantages.

In this embodiment, a greater number of time reductions than the conventional number of 100 time reductions can be provided. Especially if you are given a number of time savers that can take a long time to complete, such as 200 time savers or infinite time savers, the speed of game completion may be slow and you will finish the time saver in a sloppy manner. This causes players to feel stressed and dissatisfied. Therefore, as the number of times the game is executed during the time saving state increases, the game completion speed is increased so that the next jackpot can be won in as short a time as possible.

Specifically, with reference to the "time saving medium loss variation pattern distribution table" in FIG. 41, the normal variation 4s is made more likely to be selected in time saving mode 1, and the normal variation 2s is made more likely to be selected in time saving mode 2. In time saving mode 3, normal variation 1 s (shortest normal variation) is made easy to select. This makes it possible to increase the game completion speed in the order of "time saving mode 1 ⇒ time saving mode 2 ⇒ time saving mode 3".

As mentioned above, regarding the average consumption time of the symbol fluctuation display game, there is a relationship of "time saving mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) < time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state)" Therefore, in the time-saving modes 1, 2, and 3 of this embodiment, the following (J1) is used in particular regarding the "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (FIG. 41)" that is referred to when a loss is most likely to be encountered in the progress of the game. It is preferable to have a configuration like ~(J20). Note that the present invention is not necessarily limited to the relationship between the three time saving modes 1 to 3. That is, the present invention provides a time-saving mode (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving mode A") in which the number of times the game is executed in the time-saving state (variable number of times) is less than a predetermined number of times, and a time-saving mode in which the number of game executions in the time-saving state (variable number of times) is less than a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving mode B"). It is sufficient if the configuration satisfies the relationship "time saving mode A < time saving mode B" when comparing the average digestion time between time saving mode A and time saving mode B. Hereinafter, when it is referred to as "in the order of 'time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B'", it also means "in the order of 'time saving mode 1 ⇒ time saving mode 2 ⇒ time saving mode 3'".

(J1) Shorten the average fluctuation time of normal fluctuations in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B". Note that one or more normal fluctuations can be provided.
(J2) Shorten the average variation time of reach variation in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B". Note that one or more reach fluctuations can be provided.
(J3) Shorten the variation time of the normal variation with the highest selection rate in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B".
(J4) Shorten the variation time of the reach variation with the highest selection rate in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B".
(J5) Increase the selection rate of normal fluctuation in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B". Note that one or more normal fluctuations can be provided.
(J6) Reduce the selection rate of reach variation in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B". Note that one or more reach fluctuations can be provided.
(J7) Shorten the variation time of the shortest normal variation in each mode in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B".
(J8) Shorten the variation time of the shortest reach variation in each mode in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B".
(J9) Increase the types of normal fluctuations in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B".
(J10) Reduce the types of reach fluctuations in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B".
(J11) When "first variation time < second variation time", the types of variation patterns longer than the second variation time are reduced in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B". The "variation pattern for the second variation time or longer" may be a normal variation or a reach variation (the same applies hereinafter).
(J12) When "first variation time < second variation time", the types of variation patterns less than or equal to the first variation time are increased in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B". The "variation pattern of the first variation time or less" may be a normal variation or a reach variation (the same applies hereinafter).
(J13) When "first variation time < second variation time", time saving mode A has a variation pattern longer than the second variation time, and time saving mode B does not have a variation pattern longer than the second variation time.
(J14) When "first variation time < second variation time", time saving mode A does not have a variation pattern shorter than the first variation time, and time saving mode B has a variation pattern shorter than the first variation time.
(J15) When "first variation time < second variation time", time saving mode 1 and time saving mode 2 have a variation pattern that is longer than the second variation time, and time saving mode 3 has a variation pattern that is longer than the second variation time. There is no pattern of variation.
(J16) When "first variation time < second variation time", there is no variation pattern below the first variation time in time saving mode 1 and time saving mode 2, and there is no variation pattern below the first variation time in time saving mode 3. There is a pattern of variation.
(J17) In time saving mode A and time saving mode B, the variation time of the variation pattern selected when the number of pending balls at the start of variation is 0 is set as a common (may be the same or almost the same) variation time, and the number of pending balls is If the value is other than 0, variation patterns with different variation times can be selected. For example, in time saving modes 1 to 3, if the number of pending balls is 0, only the normal variation 8s type (in this example, normal variation 8s during time saving, normal variation 8s during time saving, normal variation 8s during time saving) is available. When the operation holding ball is other than 0, a variation pattern having a different variation time can be selected. In this case, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that is likely to be selected when the operation hold ball is other than 0 is increased in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B".
(J18)) The normal variation is made common in time saving mode A and time saving mode B, and the selection rate of reach variation is made lower probability in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B". For example, the normal variation is common in time saving modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of reach variation is set to have a low probability in the order of "time saving mode 1⇒time saving mode 2⇒time saving mode 3".
(J19) Normal fluctuations are common in time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B, and the selection rate of reach fluctuations with relatively long fluctuation times is made low probability in the order of "time-saving mode A⇒time-saving mode B". For example, the normal fluctuation is common in time saving modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of reach fluctuations with relatively long fluctuation times is made low probability in the order of "time saving mode 1 ⇒ time saving mode 2 ⇒ time saving mode 3".
(J20) When comparing time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B, the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a loss does not change, but the variation time that can be selected in the case of a win becomes relatively longer. Further, although the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a win does not change, the variation time that can be selected in the case of a loss becomes relatively longer. Note that "winning" here means "big hit winning" and/or "support time saving winning".

In addition, in this embodiment, common time-saving medium reach A can be selected in time-saving modes 1 to 3, and common time-saving medium reach A and B can be selected in time-saving mode 1 and time-saving mode 2, but the present invention However, if there is a relationship of "Time saving mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) < Time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < Time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state)" regarding the average consumption time of the symbol fluctuation display game, the time saving mode can be reduced. In at least one of the time-saving modes of Modes 1 to 3, a different reach variation may be selected from that in the other time-saving modes.

In addition, in the case of this embodiment, after shifting to the time saving mode 3, the shift from the time saving mode 3 to other game modes is not made until the player wins the jackpot or the number of time saving times is exhausted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a predetermined number of games (variable number of times) is executed during time saving mode 3, a transition may be made to another game mode (time saving mode 1 or time saving mode 2). Time-saving mode 3 is a "high-speed fluctuation state," so the game speed progresses at a good tempo, but if the same game mode continues for a long time, the player may feel tired or the game may become monotonous. Resulting in. Therefore, when a predetermined number of games are played during time saving mode 3, it is preferable to shift to another time saving mode. The transition of the game mode is not limited to the transition mode "Time saving mode 3 ⇒ Working time saving mode 2 or Time saving mode 1", but also "Time saving mode 3 (first variable number is exhausted) ⇒ Time saving mode 2 (second varying number of times is exhausted) ⇒ Time saving" "Mode 1" or "Time saving mode 3 (first variable number of times used) ⇒ Time saving mode 1 (second variable number of times used) ⇒ Time saving mode 2". Note that when the first number of fluctuations is G times and the second number of fluctuations is H times, "G times" = "H times", "G times < H times", or "G times > H times". can.

(7-3-2. Regarding production during time saving mode)
In this embodiment, time-saving effect modes 1 to 3 corresponding to time-saving modes 1 to 3 are provided as time-saving effect modes. FIG. 7B shows examples of effects in time-saving effect modes 1 to 3.

Referring to FIG. 7B, time-saving production mode 1 is an "underwater acoustic warfare mode" that produces a production that depicts a battle between submarines, and time-saving production mode 2 is an "underwater acoustic warfare mode" that produces a production that depicts a battle between fleets. "Battle Mode", time-saving production mode 3 is "Land Battle Mode", which produces a production that depicts tanks fighting each other. In other words, the time-saving mode period is divided into three time-saving modes 1 to 3 depending on the number of times the game is executed during the time-saving state, and which of these three categories you are staying in depends on the above-mentioned variable mode and Similarly, the player is notified mainly by dynamic changes in the fluctuation pattern (changes in the fluctuation state of high speed, medium speed, and low speed) and the accompanying effects (switching of background effects, preview effects, etc.).

In addition, although the time saving mode is the same in the case of transitioning to the jackpot time saving state and the case of transitioning to the support time saving state, the mode may be shifted to different performance stages. In this case, although it is the same time saving mode (Tcode is the same), background effects, decorative patterns, hold icons, launch guidance notification effects (right-handed instruction effects), various preview effects, and pre-read notices according to each production stage. At least one of (the prefetched notice during fluctuation and/or the pending change notice) can have a different presentation mode. Thereby, even though the time-saving jackpot and the support time-saving mode are transferred to the same time-saving mode, it is possible to visually distinguish and notify whether it is the jackpot time-saving state or the support time-saving state.

(About the preview performance related to the support time reduction win)
As already explained, there are two types of support time reduction: "Special electric activation type support time reduction" and "Special electric non-operation type support time reduction," but in either case, round games such as jackpot games are not executed, and the game is infinite. There are exceptions such as support time reduction that grants a high number of time reductions, but basically the profit level is lower than that of a jackpot. For this reason, if a flashy inciting performance similar to the one at the time of winning a jackpot is made to appear in a preview performance during a symbol change display game in which a winning support time reduction is won, the player's expectations will be excessively aroused. Therefore, when the support time reduction is won, it is preferable not to display a "probable performance" that definitively announces the winning of the jackpot as a preview performance. For example, if it is a reservation change notice, the rainbow color reservation of premium reservation will not appear (in the case of a gaming machine that does not execute premium reservation, the reservation change notice with the highest winning expectation at the time of winning a jackpot will not appear), fluctuation In the case of a preview performance in the middle, specific characters or items that indicate the probability of success may not be displayed. In other words, when the support time reduction is won, it is possible to make a high expectation preview performance appear, excluding at least the high expectation preview performance that indicates the highest expectation level at the time of winning the jackpot. However, only the support time reduction that provides infinite time reduction with the highest profit among the support time reduction (in this embodiment, support time reduction C) may be configured to be able to perform the same winning performance as the jackpot. Further, when the support time saving is won, the same winning performance as the jackpot does not appear, but the winning performance for the support time saving may be executed.

In addition, in the pre-reading notice, if a support time-saving winning operation pending ball holding occurs, the pre-reading notice is prohibited for a predetermined number of games (for example, the maximum number of pending memories (4 times in the case of this embodiment)). Good too. Furthermore, after the start of the time-saving state due to support time-saving, pre-reading notices may be prohibited for a predetermined number of games (for example, the maximum number of pending memories).

(Regarding the winning performance related to the starting gate)
In the case where a "winning performance" is configured to be executed when a prize is won in the upper starting slot 34 and/or the lower starting opening 35, different winning performances are executed in the jackpot time saving state and the support time saving state. Good too. Note that the winning performance may not be performed during the jackpot time saving state, and the winning performance may be performed during the support time saving state (or vice versa).

(Remaining time reduction notification performance)
In addition, during the time saving mode (time saving state), a ``remaining time saving number notification effect (for example, countdown display)'' that visually announces the remaining number of time saving times can be displayed. The remaining time reduction number notification performance may be the same (the countdown display mode is the same) for at least support time reduction A and support time reduction B (support time reduction with limited time reduction), or may be the same for time reduction jackpot and support time reduction (support time reduction A and support time reduction). /Or the same presentation mode may be used for support time reduction B). Further, different performance modes may be used depending on the type of support time saving, or different performance modes may be used for time saving jackpot and support time saving. In the case of the former same performance mode, it is preferable to start the countdown display when the remaining number of times of the same break and time saving reaches a predetermined number. For example, a countdown display is performed from the remaining 10 times to the final variation. In the latter case, the countdown display can be started at different intervals. For example, in the case of 4R time saving jackpot, the countdown display can be started from the remaining 50 times, and in the case of support time saving A (or support time saving B), the countdown display can be started from the remaining 10 times.

In addition, in the case of a finite time reduction, it is preferable to configure the remaining time reduction number notification effect to be executable. On the other hand, in the case of infinite time reduction, since the remaining number of times is infinite, there is no need to perform the remaining time reduction number notification effect, and there is no need to perform the remaining time reduction number notification effect. However, there are cases where it is appropriate to notify that the remaining number of times is infinite. Therefore, when executing a display effect that displays the remaining number of times related to infinite time saving, for example, if it is an image display effect, it may be displayed that the remaining number of times is infinite, such as "∞ times remaining" or "Continue until the next jackpot". It is possible to display performance modes that can be grasped by the player.

(Concealed remaining time reduction notification performance)
Furthermore, which support time saving program has been won may be concealed for presentation purposes. For example, the performance (notice performance, etc.) in the game where the winner of each support time reduction is won will be a common performance, and the performance of the remaining time reduction number notification performance will also be a common performance, for example, "Remaining number of times ??? times" or "Remaining number of times 〇〇 times (regardless of which support time saving is won, the same initial value will be displayed and a countdown will be displayed)" or "0 times (the initial value will start from zero and a countdown will be displayed)" can do. As a result, the number of time reductions is kept secret, and it is possible to create a sense of tension by not knowing how many times it will last (or when it will end).

In addition, when displaying the above-mentioned "remaining number of times" and performing a countdown display, it is preferable to use the remaining time reduction number notification effect as described below. For example, if any of the support time savings A to C is won, "100" with the least number of time savings will be displayed. When the count reaches zero, if you have won Support Time Reduction B or Support Time Reduction C, which gives you more time reductions than 100 times, additional display effects such as "+50 times!", "+100!", etc. will be displayed. and notify that the time saving condition will continue. On the other hand, in the case of a count-up display, no matter which support time saver is won, the count-up display will start from zero, and when a predetermined number of times is reached, or every time a predetermined number of times is reached, the message "It's still going on! ”, “50 left!”, “Infinite time saving confirmed!”, etc. are displayed to notify that the time saving state will continue. In either case, it is preferable to perform an additional display performance after performing a performance to incite whether or not the time-saving ends, in order to arouse the player's sense of tension.

In addition, in the case of a time saving state due to support time reduction, the above-mentioned "remaining time reduction number notification performance" is not executed, and in the case of a jackpot time reduction state, the above-mentioned "remaining time reduction number notification performance" may be executed.Also, in the jackpot time reduction state In this case, the above-mentioned "remaining time reduction number notification effect" may not be performed, and in the case of the support time reduction state, the above-mentioned "remaining time reduction number notification effect" may be performed.

(Regarding the production related to the winning game with short support time (win fluctuation pattern))
In addition, in normal mode (normal state), if you win a short support time in this game, an "electronic support state" will occur after the end of this game, so we will inform you of the short support time win during the game. As the effect, for example, a "time saving rush notification effect 780" as shown in FIG. 6(a) is displayed. This time-saving entry notification performance is one aspect of a gaming state transition notification performance that notifies (suggests) that the game will shift to a gaming state (time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the current gaming state (normal state). In the illustrated example of production, a character image 778 saying "We are about to enter into a time reduction" is displayed as the time-saving entry notification production 780, a special character image 777 is displayed as the background display of the decorative pattern 775, and the decorative pattern 775 is , indicates a state in which the support time-saving winning symbols "hour,""☆," and "short" are stopped and displayed (usually, for example, numerical symbols).As a result, after the end of this game, the time-saving state will be activated. You will be notified in advance that there will be an intrusion.

The reason for creating such a "time-saving rush notification performance" is as follows. In particular, if the winning support time reduction is "special electric non-activated support time reduction", when the current game ends (variable time ends), the time reduction state will be entered after the extremely short confirmation display time (500ms) has elapsed. (Refer to the process during special symbol fluctuation (step S307) and the process during special symbol confirmation time (step S308) in FIG. 10). To be more precise, the current game ends after this fixed display time (500 ms) has elapsed. For this reason, the purpose is to notify the player of the occurrence of a situation in which right-hand playing is advantageous at an early stage, and to prevent the player from continuing to "left-hand playing" (incurring a disadvantage) during the time-saving state. Note that a firing guidance notification performance (right-handed hitting instruction performance) may be displayed during the winning game of short support time. However, in reality, until the final display time has elapsed, the device is not in the "time saving state" but in the "normal state". Therefore, if the player runs ahead and plays right-handed, a firing guidance notification performance (left-handed instruction performance (warning notification)) may be performed to encourage left-handed hitting. In this case, it is preferable to preferentially display (higher display priority) the left-handed batting instruction presentation over the right-handed batting instruction presentation. It should be noted that the judgment as to whether or not the ball is being hit to the right during the normal state is determined based on whether or not entry (passage) of the game ball into the normal symbol starting port 37 is detected.

On the other hand, in the case of "Special electric activation type support time saving", the time saving state is entered after the support time saving opening/closing game (in the case of small hit winning type support time saving, the small winning game) is executed, so during the support time saving opening/closing game (For example, during the start INT), it is sufficient to display the firing guidance notification effect (right-handed shot instruction effect), and no particular problem will occur. In the case of special electric activation type support time saving, it is preferable that the period of the support time saving opening/closing game is approximately several seconds or more.

(About the confirmed display time for winning games with short support time)
Further, in a winning game with short support time, the confirmed display time can be different from the normal confirmed display time (500 ms). Specifically, it can be set to a longer time (for example, about 1 second to 10 seconds) than the normal fixed display time (500 ms). By utilizing this long fixed display time, there is an advantage that a sufficient margin performance time width for executing the above-mentioned "time-saving rush notification performance" can be secured. In addition, after the execution time (win variation time) of the winning game ends, there is a longer than usual confirmation display time, so players can change from "left-handed" to "right-handed" with some margin. There is also the advantage that the firing operation handle 15 can be operated. In addition, only for winning games with short support time, a "right-handed hitting notification" (for example, a right-handed hitting instruction image such as right-handed hitting notification image 779) can be sent in advance during a predetermined period during the winning game, or at least by using the confirmed display time. May be executed.

<Example of time-saving rush announcement production: Figure 47, Figure 48>
Next, an example of the time-saving rush notification performance when the support time-saving is "special electric non-operating type support time-saving" will be described. First, in order to facilitate understanding of this production example, the transition of the production when the number of balls on hold after the game is zero will be explained using FIG. 46.

The time chart in Figure 46 shows that after this game ends with a "loss (big hit, small hit, and non-winning for support time reduction)", the number of activated pending balls is zero (special symbol 1 activated pending balls and special symbol number 1). 2 shows a case where the state (the number of balls held in action is zero) continues.

Referring to the time chart in FIG. 46, when the variable display of the current special symbol ends (time T2), the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the jackpot lottery result (here, the special symbol for loss is (stop display), and the current game is ended (time T3). At this time, if there are any pending balls, the next game (variable display of special figures) will start immediately, but if there are no pending balls (no pending balls), after the fixed display time Tb has elapsed, Until the next game starts (until a new operation pending ball occurs), the performance state is shifted to "waiting for customers (waiting for customers)" (times T3 to T5).

Specifically, if the number of pending balls is zero after the confirmed display time Tb has elapsed, the main control unit 20 transmits a “customer waiting command” to the performance control unit 24 (see S419 in FIG. 12 described below). ). When the production control unit 24 receives this customer waiting command, it performs production processing related to the production state "waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer)".

Specifically, when the production control unit 24 receives a customer waiting command, it understands that the game is stopped and is "waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer)", and from receiving the customer waiting command, a new operation pending ball is issued. If a predetermined waiting time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed without any occurrence (in this embodiment, without receiving the winning command and/or the pending addition command that are transmitted when an operation pending ball occurs) ( When the illustrated time T4 has arrived), that is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the number of pending balls becoming zero and the game has not started (when the customer waiting performance start conditions are met), the game machine 1 A ``customer waiting effect (demonstration display)'' is displayed in which a demo movie is played to explain the game and introduce (demonstrate) the game machine. Note that when an operation related to game settings by the player, such as a menu screen display operation to be described later, is detected, the measurement of the waiting time (120 seconds) is cleared and 120 seconds is set again. Note that measurement of the waiting time (120 seconds) may be started after the game settings are completed and the game returns to the "pre-customer waiting performance" described later.

Figure (C) shows an example of a customer waiting performance. The example in Figure (C) shows part of a demo movie as a customer waiting effect. Here, the name of the gaming machine ("CR Fujimaru Senki") is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, and the name is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. A specific character (Fujimaru-kun) is displayed in the corner. During the customer waiting period, a predetermined demo movie is repeatedly played and displayed to effectively promote the appeal of the game machine.

However, during the period until the customer waiting performance starts (until the predetermined time Td elapses), the "pre-customer waiting performance (demonstration start waiting display)" is made to appear (times T3 to T4). For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is set to a display state that includes a background effect (background image) corresponding to the game state and a decorative pattern that has been stopped in the current game (decoration stop pattern), and the start of a customer waiting effect (demonstration). This display state is maintained until the movie starts).

Figure (A) shows an example of a performance before waiting for a customer. The example in Figure (A) shows a display state in which decorative symbols corresponding to losses (decoration stop symbols corresponding to losses), which are the most recent game results, are stopped during the normal performance mode (air battle mode). In this embodiment, after the start of the pre-customer waiting presentation (after receiving the customer waiting command), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed (when time Tm has arrived), "Menu screen display →" is displayed at the bottom of the screen. A "menu displayable notification effect 811" including a character display and a button image (here, an image imitating the effect button 13) appears. The role of this menu display possible notification effect 811 is to notify that the menu screen (game setting screen) can be opened by operating the effect button 13, in other words, to notify that the menu operation is possible. . When the production button 13 is pressed during the menu operation enabled period, a "menu screen" as shown in the figure is displayed, and various game environment settings such as volume and light intensity can be set.

Figure (B) shows an example of the menu screen. Here, a character image of the game machine's name "CR Fujimaru Senki" is displayed at the top of the menu screen 811a, a specific character 813 is displayed at the center right side of the screen, and examples of menu items include "Character selection" and "Volume Menu items such as "adjustment", "light intensity adjustment", "background music selection", and "back" are displayed. On this menu screen 811a, when the player operates the cursor 812 using the direction keys 75 to select a desired menu item, and presses the production button 13 with the cursor 812 pointing to the menu item, the player selects the desired menu item. Game settings can now be configured.

For example, when "volume adjustment" is selected as a menu item, a volume adjustment screen 811b as shown in FIG. 8(D) is displayed. On this volume adjustment screen, a desired volume level can be selected using the cross key 75 and determined using the production button 13. Once the volume level is determined, the screen returns to the pre-waiting-for-customer presentation screen shown in Figure (A). In the example shown in FIG. 3(D), adjustment can be made in five stages from a reference volume value (MIN) to a predetermined maximum volume value (MAX).
Although not shown, a light intensity adjustment screen similar to the volume adjustment screen is also displayed when "Light intensity adjustment" is selected, and this light intensity adjustment can also be adjusted in multiple stages (for example, 4 levels). It becomes. Furthermore, when "character selection" is selected, a related ally character or enemy character can be selected during the current performance mode. This allows a favorite character to appear in a preview effect (such as a specific reach) or in a winning effect. Further, when selecting and deciding on "BGM selection", it is possible to select BGM related to the current production mode from a plurality of types of BGM.

In this example, four game settings are possible: "character selection," "volume adjustment," "light intensity adjustment," and "BGM selection." good. For example, in the case of a gaming machine that only allows volume adjustment, there is no need to display the menu screen (menu item) 811a as shown in Figure (B), so the volume adjustment screen (not shown) in Figure (D) is directly displayed. adjustment screen 811b) can be displayed. When displaying the adjustment screen 811b, for example, the adjustment screen 811c including a background image related to the current performance mode can be displayed in the background effect, like the adjustment screen 811c shown in FIG. In the illustrated example, a background image related to the normal performance mode is displayed, and a five-level volume adjustment screen is displayed with priority over the background image. In the case of this adjustment screen 811c, since it is a game setting screen that can notify the current performance mode, it has the advantage that it can notify the current game state (game mode) when adjusting the volume or light intensity. . Hereinafter, a mode in which the adjustment screen 811b or the adjustment screen 811c is displayed without displaying the menu screen 811a will be referred to as an "adjustment screen direct display mode."

The above-mentioned "menu operable period" may start immediately when the customer waiting command is received. For example, after the fixed display time has elapsed (after time T3 has elapsed), the menu operable period can be started. Specifically, the menu operable period in this case is the "menu operable period A" shown in the figure.

Moreover, the above-mentioned "menu operation possible period" may start after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting command. For example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the fixed display time has elapsed (for example, when the time Tm at which the menu display possible notification effect 811 is started has arrived), the menu operation possible period can be started. Specifically, the menu operable period in this case is "menu operable period B" shown in the figure.

Note that the menu display possibility notification effect 811 may be made to appear at the start of the menu operation possible period (in the case of notifying the start of the menu operation possible period), or may be made to appear at a predetermined timing of the menu operation possible period. Good too.

<Example of production: Figure 47, Figure 48>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48, an explanation will be given of an example of the effect when the current game is a winning game of "special electric non-operating type support time saving". FIGS. 47 and 48 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the transition of the effect when the number of pending balls is zero for a while after the end of the current game. Example 2 is shown. Further, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 46 described above will also be used as appropriate.

(Example 1: Figure 47)
First, production example 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 47.

(1-1. Execution start timing of time-saving rush notification effect)
In the case of production example 1 shown in FIG. 47, at a predetermined timing during symbol variation or at the end of symbol variation (numeral 801 indicates decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol)), for example, as shown in FIG. A time saving notification effect 871 appears.Specifically, at the arrival of a predetermined timing during symbol fluctuation (for example, time T1 in FIG. 46), or during the fixed display period (time T2 in FIG. 46). Taking the arrival as an opportunity, a time-saving entry notification performance 871 appears.The time-saving entry notification performance 871 of this example includes the words "Sound War Mode Entry" that notifies (suggests) that the time-saving mode (time saving state) is to be shifted. This is a performance image that includes an image 802, a character image 803, etc. In addition, in Figure (β), three decorative patterns are displayed in a small space on the right corner of the LCD screen (decorative pattern 801a shown), and this time An example is shown in which decorative stop symbols (symbols corresponding to support time saving winnings) indicating game results are displayed.Here, an example in which the decorative symbols 801a are stopped at "5", "7", and "9" is displayed. This is because during the fluctuation, "time", "☆", and "short" as shown in Figure 6 (a) are displayed as decorative symbols for temporary stop, making it easier for the player to understand the support time-saving winning. On the other hand, during the confirmation display, there is no need to do so, so the number-based decorative stop symbols (here, "5", "7", and "9") used in normal times are used as decorative stop symbols for short support time winnings. Of course, as the decorative pattern 801a, "hour", "☆", and "short" shown in FIG. , the decorative pattern 801a may not be displayed.

(1-2. Display period of time-saving rush notification effect)
The above-mentioned time-saving entry notification effect 871 continues to appear for a predetermined period (predetermined time) even after the symbol variation is finished and the fixed display time has elapsed (after time T3 in FIG. 46) (Figure (γ)) . However, after the confirmed display time has elapsed, it enters the "time-saving state", so the time-saving entry notification effect 871 is additionally displayed with a firing guidance notification effect (right-handed instruction effect) 851, as shown in Figure (γ). This results in a time-saving rush notification effect 872. As a result, it is notified that the player has entered a time saving state and that the player has entered a situation advantageous for right-handed batting. Note that the time-saving rush notification effect 872 here is displayed as part of the effect before waiting for the customer.

Then, after displaying the time-saving rush notification effect 872 shown in FIG. The front effect 890 is made to appear (Figure (δ)). The normal performance before waiting for customers 890 here is a performance mode related to the time-saving mode (time-saving state), and as shown in the figure (δ), it is a performance mode related to the time-saving performance mode as a background image according to the gaming state. A background image (for example, underwater acoustic warfare mode: see Figure 7B) is displayed (if a production mode dedicated to reducing support time is provided, a background image related to that production mode may be displayed), and the decoration is stopped. As the symbol, the most recent game result (in the case of this production example, "579": support time saving decorative stop symbol) is displayed. In addition, regarding the right-handed hitting instruction performance, as it has been switched to the normal performance before waiting for customers, “right-handed hitting instruction performance 851 related to the time-saving entry notification performance (first right-handed hitting notification: confirmed display time elapsed in the support time-saving winning game) After that, the right-handed hitting instruction performance (which is executed for a predetermined period of time) is finished, and the right-handed hitting instruction performance 852 (second right-handed hitting notification during electric support) is displayed in a display mode (performance mode) different from the right-handed hitting instruction performance 851. ：Right-handed instruction for electric support)” will appear.

In addition, the above-mentioned "Right hit instruction performance for electric support (second right hit notification)" can be made into the following (Instruction performance 1) to (Instruction performance 7).
(Instruction performance 1) A common right-handed instruction performance (second right-handedness notification) is provided during electric support, that is, during a time-saving state (time-saving state due to jackpot), during a probability change state, and during a support time-saving state.
(Instruction performance 2) During the game state other than the support time reduction state (in this embodiment, the time reduction state and the variable probability state), the "common right-handed hitting instruction performance (second right-hitting notification)" is used, and during the support time reduction state, it is A different right-handed hitting instruction performance (right-handed hitting instruction performance dedicated to the support time reduction state: third right-handed hitting notification) is provided.
(Instruction performance 3) A common right-hand hitting instruction performance (second right-hand hitting notification) is used at least during the time saving state and during the support time saving state.
(Instruction performance 4) During the time-saving state and the support time-saving state, a common right-handed instruction performance (time-saving right-handed notification: for example, the first right-handed notification (second right-handed notification) for electric support) is used, and in the variable state, A different right-handed hitting instruction performance (right-handed hitting notification for probability variation: for example, second right-handed hitting notification (third right-hitting notification) for electric support) is used.
(Instruction Performance 5) Different right-handed instruction performances are provided during the time saving state, during the probability variable state, and during the support time saving state.
(Instruction performance 6) A first right-hitting instruction performance (the above-mentioned first right-hitting notification) that is executed for a predetermined time after the confirmed display time in the support time-saving winning game, and a second right-hitting instruction performance during the support time reduction. At least, it is possible to perform a right-hitting instruction performance during a hit during a jackpot game due to a time-saving jackpot (a right-handed hitting instruction performance that is executed during at least a part of the period during the jackpot game), and the first right-hitting instruction performance and the winning instruction performance are possible. To make a performance mode different from a performance instructing a hit to the center right. In this case, the right-hand hitting instruction performance during the time-saving state after the jackpot game and the second right-hand hitting instruction performance are a common right-hitting instruction performance.
(Instruction performance 7) A first right-hitting instruction performance (the above-mentioned first right-hitting notification) that is executed for a predetermined time after the confirmation display time has elapsed in the support time-saving winning game, and a second right-hitting instruction performance during the support time reduction. At least, it is possible to perform a right-hitting instruction performance during a hit during a jackpot game due to a time-saving jackpot (a right-handed hitting instruction performance that is executed during at least a part of the period during the jackpot game), and the first right-hitting instruction performance and the winning instruction performance are possible. The performance mode is the same as the performance instructing center-right hitting. In this case, the right-hand hitting instruction performance during the time-saving state after the jackpot game and the second right-hand hitting instruction performance are different right-hand hitting instruction performances.

In addition, in the case where a small win (including a small win type support time reduction) is provided, the following (instruction performance 8) can be used.
(Instruction performance 8) A first right-hitting instruction performance (the above-mentioned first right-hitting notification) that is executed for a predetermined time after the confirmed display time in the support time-saving winning game, and a second right-hitting instruction performance during the support time reduction, It is possible to perform a right-hitting instruction performance during a small winning game (a right-hitting instruction performance that is executed during at least a part of the period during a small winning game), and at least the first right-hitting instruction performance and a winning instruction performance. The performance mode is the same as the performance instructing center-right hitting.

In addition, in the above, we have explained about special electric non-activated support time reduction, but if the support time reduction is "Special electric activation type support time reduction", during the opening and closing of the support time reduction game (in the case of small hit winning type support time reduction, the small hit Right hit instruction performance (during a small hit game related to) (a right hit instruction performance executed during at least a part of the period during the support time saving open/close game) and a small hit game (here, a small hit game due to a normal small hit) ) is preferably the same performance mode as the right hit instruction performance (the right hit instruction performance executed during at least a part of the period during the small win game), but may be a different performance mode.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 47(δ), here, a menu display possible notification effect 811 is also displayed to notify that the menu operation is possible. In addition, when the menu display operation is performed during the menu operation possible period, the menu screen shown in Figure (η) or the adjustment screen 811c shown in Figure (η-1) (here, the background image related to the time-saving production mode) (For example, an adjustment screen including an underwater acoustic warfare mode: see FIG. 7B) or an adjustment screen 811b shown in FIG. 7(η-2) can be displayed.

(1-3. Regarding the end timing of right-handed hitting instruction performance 851 (first right-handed hitting notification))
In addition, in this performance example, the end timing of the right-hand hit instruction performance 851 (first right-hand hit notification) was explained as being the timing when switching to the normal performance before waiting for a customer. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following (Tim1) to (Tim4) may be used.
(Tim1) The first right hit notification may be ended before the menu displayable notification effect 811 is executed (appeared).
(Tim 2) The first right hit notification may be ended before the menu operable period starts. Specifically, in the case where menu operation possible period B is adopted, the period is ended before the arrival of time Tm (FIG. 46), for example.
(Tim 3) The first right-click notification can be ended before the menu display possible notification effect 811 is executed (appeared) and during the menu operation possible period. For example, in a case where the menu display possible notification effect 811 is started after a predetermined time delay from the start of the menu operable period, it can be ended before the menu display possible notification effect 811 is executed.
(Tim 4) The first right hit notification may be ended when a menu operation (game setting operation) is performed. For example, the process can be terminated when the operating means is operated for menu operation. For example, when the menu screen 811a shown in Figure (η), the adjustment screen 811b shown in Figure (η-1), or the adjustment screen 811c shown in Figure (η-2) is displayed, the first right-handed hit notification is terminated. be able to. Further, after the adjustment screen 811b or the adjustment screen 811c is displayed, when an adjustment operation (game setting operation: for example, an operation to change or determine the volume level) is performed, the first right hit notification may be terminated. In other words, the first right-handed hit notification can be ended when the adjustment operation is performed, without ending the first right-handed hit notification at the stage when the adjustment screen 811b or the adjustment screen 811c is displayed.
Note that when the first right-handed hit notification ends (triggered by the end of the first right-handed hit notification), the second right-handed hit notification is started.

(1-4. Customer waiting performance (demo display))
Then, when the customer waiting effect start conditions are met, that is, without any menu display operation, the time saving notification effect 872 is started (after receiving the customer waiting command) for a predetermined waiting time (120 seconds). ) has elapsed, or if an operation related to game settings by the player is detected, and the waiting time (120 seconds) has elapsed after the detection (the waiting time after the game settings are finished and returns to the pre-waiting performance) (120 seconds) may have elapsed), a customer waiting effect is displayed (Fig. (ε)). If a pending ball occurs during the performance before waiting for a customer or during the performance while waiting for a customer (while waiting for a customer (including while displaying the game setting screen)), the symbol fluctuation display game in the time-saving mode (time-saving performance mode) will be executed. (Figure (ζ)).

(1-5. Regarding the end timing of the right-handed hit instruction production 851 (first right-handed hit notification) when there is a pending ball)
In the above, the end timing of the right-handed hitting instruction performance 851 (first right-handed hitting notification) in the case where the number of balls on hold for operation is zero for a while after the winning game of shortened support time has been explained. In the following, when there is an activated pending ball during a winning game for shortening support time, or for a short period of time (for example, before the normal customer waiting effect 890 is displayed) after a winning game for shortening support time, an activated suspended ball is The timing at which the right-handed hitting instruction effect 851 (first right-handed hitting notification) ends when this occurs will be explained. In this case, the right-handed hitting instruction performance 851 (first right-handed hitting notification) can be as follows (Tim5) to (Tim12).
(Tim 5) The first right hit notification can be ended until the symbol variation of the next game starts or when the symbol variation of the next game starts. For example, there is a production transition of "figure (β) or figure (γ) → figure (ζ)". Note that if there is an operation pending ball in the winning game of support time reduction, the next game is started immediately, but the time reduction entry notification effect 871 may be displayed over the next game. For example, it may be displayed for a predetermined period of time from the start of the next game, or it may be displayed until high-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbols of the next game (for high-speed fluctuation, see FIG. 44, etc. described later) is started. In this case, instead of displaying the time-saving rush notification effect 871 as it is, only a part of the display, for example, the character image 802 or the character image 803, may be displayed.
(Tim 6) The first right hit notification can be finished before the start of high-speed fluctuation of at least one of the decorative symbols in the next game (see FIG. 44, etc. described later).
(Tim 7) The first right hit notification can be completed before the stop operation of at least one of the decorative symbols in the next game (see FIGS. 44 to 45, etc. described later) starts.
(Tim 8) The first right hit notification can be ended before at least one of the decorative symbols in the next game is stopped and displayed.
(Tim 9) The first right hit notification can be ended after the stop display of at least one of the decorative symbols in the next game.
(Tim 10) The first right hit notification can be ended before the variation time of the special symbol (or decorative symbol) in the next game ends (the variation time elapses).
(Tim11) The first right hit notification can be ended at least after the end of the variation time of the special symbol (or decorative symbol) in the next game (after the lapse of the variation time).
(Tim 12) The first right hit notification can be ended during the confirmed display time in the next game. The first right-handed hit notification can be ended, for example, at the start, midway, or end of the final display time.
Note that when the first right-handed hit notification ends (triggered by the end of the first right-handed hit notification), the second right-handed hit notification is started.

(Example 2: Figure 48)
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a modification of the production example 1 (production example 2) will be described. The difference between the production example 1 in FIG. 47 and the production example 2 in FIG. 48 is mainly that the display period of the time-saving rush notification production is different, and the accompanying production mode is different.

In the case of production example 2 shown in FIG. 48, the time-saving rush notification production 871 is displayed until the next game starts or until the customer waiting production starts. Specifically, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed without starting the next game, the customer waiting effect is displayed without the customer waiting effect appearing.

The time-saving rush notification effect 871 of this effect example is a point that continues to appear for a predetermined period (predetermined time) even after the symbol variation ends and the confirmed display time has elapsed (after time T3 in FIG. 46), and This is substantially the same as the above-described example 1 (FIG. 47) in that the time-saving entry notification effect 872 in which the firing guidance notification effect (right shot instruction effect) 851 is additionally displayed appears after the display time has elapsed. be. However, in the case of this performance example, the normal pre-waiting-for-customer performance 890 does not appear even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, and the time-saving rush notification performance 872 continues to be displayed. This point is decisively different from production example 1. In addition, in this production example, after the time-saving entry notification production 872 appears for a predetermined time, the right-handed hitting instruction performance starts from the right-handed hitting instruction performance 851 (first right-handed hitting notification), as shown in Figure (δ). , the right-hand hit instruction performance 852 (second right-hand hit notification) is switched and displayed (time-saving entry notification performance 873 in FIG. 8(δ)).

Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 8(δ), a menu display possible notification presentation 811 is displayed while the time-saving entry notification presentation 873 is appearing. At this time, the transmittance of at least a part of the effect display of the time-saving rush notification effect 873 (here, the effect display of at least one of the character image 802, the character image 803, the right-hand hitting instruction effect 852, and the decorative pattern 801a), It is preferable to set it higher than the menu display possible notification effect 811 (the menu display possible notification effect 811 is displayed with priority over the time-saving entry notification effect 873) (see figure (δ)). In particular, it is preferable to make the menu-displayable notification effect 811 stand out by increasing the transmittance of the effect display (here, the character image 803) that overlaps with the menu-displayable notification effect 811. Furthermore, in order to emphasize the advantageous state of right-handed players, it is preferable that at least the transmittance of the right-handed player instruction effect 852 is not made high (the transmittance is set to be the same as that of the menu displayable notification effect 811).

In addition, if the menu display operation is performed during the menu operation possible period, the menu screen shown in Figure (η), the adjustment screen 811c shown in Figure (η-1), or the adjustment screen 811b shown in Figure (η-2) will be displayed. Note that as shown in Figure (η-1), the adjustment screen 811c may include a background image related to the time-saving production mode, but in the case of this production example, the time-saving entry notification production is continuously displayed, and when customers are waiting. Since the pre-effect is not displayed, the adjustment screen 811c may include a background image related to the time-saving rush notification effect. For example, instead of the submarine image, an image related to the time-saving entry notification effect (for example, the character image 803) or a specific image for the support time-saving state may be displayed. Further, instead of the specific character 813 on the menu screen shown in FIG. 7(η), an image related to the time-saving entry notification effect (for example, the character image 803) or a specific image for the support time-saving state may be displayed. Thereby, even if the screen related to game settings is being displayed, it is possible to notify that the support time reduction state is in progress.

The advantage of this production example is that the "time-saving rush notification production" appears until the next game or the customer waiting production starts, so the support time-saving state lasts for a relatively long time. The point is that it can be clearly communicated.

(Customer waiting performance during support time reduction state)
In addition, in production example 1 and production example 2, the customer waiting performance (demo screen) in the time saving state due to support time reduction (support time reduction state) is replaced with the normal customer waiting performance (customer waiting performance in other game states other than the support time reduction state). ) A different customer waiting effect (customer waiting effect for the support state) may be displayed. Preferably, at least a customer waiting effect different from the customer waiting effect in the normal state is displayed. For example, at least a part of the presentation mode by one or more presentation means used for the customer waiting presentation can be made into a different presentation mode. For example, the display color of "CR Fujimaru-kun Senki" shown in Figure (ε) is different (at least part of the display content of the demo screen (demo movie) is different: part of the image display effect is different). , the light effects are different (part of the light effect is different, etc.) In this case, by displaying a customer waiting effect (demo screen) that is different from the usual customer waiting effect, it is shown that the support time is shortened even during the customer waiting effect. Can be notified.

Further, in the second example of presentation, a configuration in which a customer waiting presentation can be displayed has been described, but a configuration may also be adopted in which the customer waiting presentation itself is not displayed. Specifically, the time-saving rush notification effect is continued until the next game starts. The performance transition in this case is the one excluding the customer waiting performance (demonstration display) of (ε) from among (α) to (ζ) shown in FIG.

(2. About irregular patterns)
(A) When the variable time related to the support short-time winning game ends, the main control unit 20 transmits a “variation stop command” as a production control command to the production control unit 24, and upon receiving this, the production control unit 24 It is recognized that the variable time has ended, and the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed (see step S452 in FIG. 16). However, if this fluctuation stop command is not correctly sent to the production control unit 24 due to some malfunction (noise, etc.) (if the production control unit 24 cannot correctly receive the fluctuation stop command), the decorative pattern is The special fluctuation state (for example, so-called "sway fluctuation") is entered into the support time reduction state. In other words, the decorative symbols continue to fluctuate, but the power support state due to the shortened support time is generated (the normal symbol fluctuation display game is executed as usual). In addition, if the shaking fluctuation remains and the machine is waiting for a customer (when the performance control unit 24 receives a customer waiting command), the shaking fluctuation is ended and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (determined stop display). ing. Specifically, a pre-waiting presentation is displayed and decorative patterns are stopped and displayed.

(Modified example of time saving mode transition)
In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving jackpot and the support time-saving mode are first shifted to the common "time-saving mode 1" (which contributes to reducing the control burden), but in order to diversify the gameplay and performance, different You may shift to a time saving mode. For example, in the case of a time-saving jackpot, the mode is shifted to the time-saving mode 1, and in the case of the support time-saving, the mode is shifted to the time-saving mode 2. In this case, it is possible to shift to different time saving modes (fluctuating states) between the 4R time saving jackpot and the support time saving A which give the same number of time saving times. In this case, the fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) of the final fluctuation of the time-saving jackpot and the final fluctuation of the support time-saving may be different. For example, the variation time of the final variation can be made shorter in support time reduction than in 4R time saving jackpot.
Further, the time-saving jackpot and the support time-saving may be transferred to different time-saving modes. For example, in the time-saving state due to the 4R time-saving jackpot, the game progresses under a low-speed fluctuation state (for example, time-saving mode 1), and in the case of support time-saving A, the game is played under a medium-speed or high-speed fluctuation state (for example, time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3). ) to advance the game. In this case, the average processing time (game processing speed) related to the time saving mode can be made different between the jackpot time saving state (normal time saving state) and the time saving state due to support time saving (support time saving state) (normal variation (with different variation times or average variation times). As a result, the degree of freedom in playability and production is expanded, and these can be made more diverse. In this case, although the stopping movement patterns of the decorative patterns described later may be the same, it is preferable that they be different.

Moreover, when a specific support time reduction is won among the plurality of types of support time reduction, the mode may be shifted to a different time saving mode from the case where another support time reduction is won. For example, in the case of support time reduction A and support time reduction B that provide finite time savings, the transition is made to time reduction mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) or time reduction mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state), and support time reduction C that provides infinite time reduction is time reduction. For example, the mode may be shifted to mode 3 (high-speed fluctuation state). In other words, it is possible to shift to a different time saving mode in part or all of the plurality of types of support time saving modes. In this case, it is preferable to shift to a fluctuating state in which the average consumption time (game consumption speed) is relatively short as the number of times of time reduction provided is relatively large and the time reduction support is won. For example, if support time reduction A, B, and C (number of time reductions are 100, 200, and 65535 times), if support time reduction A is won, time reduction mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state), and if support time reduction B is won, If the support time saving C is won, the time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) is entered, and if the support time saving C is won, the time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state) is entered.

(Game mode related to potential state)
In addition, when providing a potential state, data values that are different from Tcode and YJ (see FIG. 44) corresponding to other gaming states may be determined. Thereby, it is sufficient to provide a "probable probability mode" and a "probable probability production mode" as the game mode and the production mode. Although the variable probability mode according to the present embodiment has been described as a gaming mode corresponding to a "variable probability state", the present invention is not limited to this, and all or part of the variable probability mode may be used as a gaming mode corresponding to a "probability variable state". It can also be handled. In addition, the fluctuation state under the latent mode (potential state) is the same or almost the same as the normal mode, or at least slower than the time saving mode (a fluctuating state where the average digestion time is relatively long). It is preferable that

<Processing on the main control unit side: Figures 8 to 21>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 21, the game operation processing on the main control section 20 side of this embodiment will be explained. The processing on the main control unit 20 side consists of an infinite loop main processing (main processing on the main control side: Figure 8) and a timer interrupt processing activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (timer interrupt processing on the main control side: Figure 8). 9).

<12. Main control side main processing: Figure 8>
With reference to FIG. 8, main processing on the main control unit 20 side (main processing on the main control side) will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing details of main control side main processing.

The trigger for starting main processing on the main control side is when a system reset occurs when recovering from a power outage or power abnormality, or when the control program goes out of control, and the watchdog timer (WDT) function is activated and the CPU may be forcibly reset (WDT reset). In either case, when the main control side main processing is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first executes the initial setting processing necessary for starting the gaming operation as part of the power-on processing (step S011). ).

When the initial setting process in step S011 is completed, it is then determined whether the state is a transition state to a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed (step S014). In this embodiment, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and the door is opened (door open sensor 61 is ON (open detection)), the setting key switch 94 (operated to the setting change mode side) and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned ON. If the gaming machine 1 is powered on while the operation is continued (both the setting key switch signal and RAM clear signal are ON), the setting change permissible state where the settings change mode can be changed is assumed to have been met. (setting change mode transition state).

If the setting change mode is in the transition state (step S014: YES), a setting change process for managing the change operation of setting values (1 to 6 levels) is executed (step S023). In this setting change process, first, check whether the setting value Nc (setting value data) stored in the setting value storage area of the internal RAM is an abnormal value (a value other than 00H to 05H corresponding to settings 1 to 6). Determine whether or not. If the gaming operation is normal, the set value storage area stores any set value data (set value Nc) of '00H to 05H (normal value)' corresponding to settings 1 to 6. However, the setting value data may be damaged due to some kind of malfunction, and a value that does not correspond to any of settings 1 to 6 may be set (setting abnormal error). Therefore, if the set value Nc is not a normal value, the set value storage area is cleared to zero and returned to the initial value 00H (here, setting 1).

When the initial value is returned or when the value is normal, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 97. Thereafter, the ON/OFF operation of the setting change switch 95 is monitored, and the current setting value Nc is changed (updated) every time the setting change switch 95 is turned ON. Regarding the setting value during setting change (setting change operation), as described above, each time the setting change switch 95 is operated, the setting value changes in the range of settings 1 to 6 in a cyclical manner, and the setting change is displayed on the setting display 97. The current settings are displayed. If the ON operation of the setting change completion switch 96 is confirmed, it is assumed that the setting value has been finalized, and the current setting value Nc (setting work value) is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 203. This exits the setting change process. Then, the processing state is shifted to intra-area RAM clearing processing (step S031), which will be described later.

Note that the configuration may be such that the RAM clear switch 98 functions as the setting change switch 95 without providing the setting change switch 95. Each time the RAM clear switch 98 is pressed, any one of settings 1 to 6 can be selected. Alternatively, the setting key switch 94 may be configured to function as the setting change completion switch 96 without providing the setting change completion switch 96. In this case, the setting change operation can be ended by turning off the setting key switch 94.

On the other hand, if it is not in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: NO), the contents of the RAM are checked to determine whether there is any abnormality (step S015). Specifically, it is checked whether the setting value data (setting value Nc) in the setting value storage area is a normal value, and whether the checksum value at the time of backup is a normal value. If there is an abnormality in the contents of the RAM (step S015: YES), a power re-on standby process (step S020) related to a RAM abnormality, which will be described later, is executed.

If there is no abnormality in the contents of the RAM, that is, if it is normal (step S015: NO), then it is determined whether the backup flag BF is in the ON state (5AH) (step S016). This backup flag BF is set to "5AH (normal value)" in the BF flag storage area of the internal RAM when the backup process is normally executed in the power abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 9) to be described later. is set to Therefore, under normal conditions, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, there may be a case where some kind of problem occurs and the backup flag BF is not a normal value (≠5AH). Therefore, if the backup flag BF is not in the ON state (step S016: NO), a power restart wait process is executed (step S020).

In the power restart waiting process of step S020, the game is controlled to a game stop state in which the progress of the game process is forcibly stopped. Specifically, after sending a power restart command and clearing the backup flag BF, the WDT clearing process that clears the WDT until a power outage occurs and checking the ON state of the power abnormality signal (confirming the power outage) The process (power supply abnormality check process) is repeated. Note that when a RAM error occurs, the WDT clear process is executed until a power outage is confirmed, and the WDT reset does not occur at the timing when the infinite loop process is repeated. In addition, when the production control unit 24 receives a power-on command, a RAM error notification (power-on command production) is displayed on the LCD display 36 saying "RAM error. Please turn on the power again and set the setting value to 1. '', etc., all the LEDs for effect such as the decorative lamp 45 are turned off, and the speaker 46 is muted.

If the power restart waiting process is executed and the game is stopped, turn the power on to the gaming machine 1 again and operate it so that it is set to the setting change mode transition state when the power is turned on again. Unless the change process (step S023) is executed, the currently occurring RAM error state cannot be resolved. In this embodiment, after the setting change process (step S023) is executed (after the setting value storage area is cleared in the case of a setting abnormal error), the internal RAM clearing process of step S031, which will be described later, is executed. This clears virtually the entire area of the RAM 203 (excluding the RAM area related to performance display (RAM area outside the area)), which returns the RAM 203 to its initial state and eliminates the RAM error. ing.

If the backup flag BF is in the ON state (step S016: YES), it is determined whether the RAM clear mode transition state is entered (step S025). In this embodiment, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the setting key switch 94 is operated OFF (do not operate to the setting change mode side), and the RAM clear switch 98 is operated ON (setting key switch signal OFF). , RAM clear signal ON) When the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, it is assumed that the RAM clear transition condition is satisfied, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to enter the RAM clear mode transition state.

If it is in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025: YES), in-area RAM clear processing is executed (step S031). In this in-area RAM clearing process, at least the out-of-area RAM area related to performance display out of the storage area of the RAM 203 and the storage area in the in-area RAM area excluding the setting value storage area are cleared. Therefore, the value of the backup flag BF, the checksum value, etc. that were set when the power was cut off are both cleared to zero in this process. Also, various commands necessary for clearing the RAM (for example, a "RAM clear command" indicating that the RAM has been cleared, a "customer waiting command", etc.) are transmitted to the production control section 24. When the performance control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, it executes an initialization notification performance to notify RAM clear, and sets the performance mode to "normal performance mode" as the performance mode in the initial state. That is, when the area RAM clearing process is executed, the game mode is set to the initial mode, which is the normal mode, and the performance mode is also set to the normal performance mode related to the normal mode.

After completing the intra-area RAM clearing process in step S031, an initial setting process when clearing the RAM (initial data setting process at power-on) is executed (step S032). In the initial data setting process when the power is turned on, for example, a timer for transmitting a RAM clear signal (one of the security signals) is set to 30,000 ms, and the special symbols (special symbol 1 stop symbol, special symbol 1 stop symbol, Loss pattern data is set as the special figure 2 stop pattern) data. Then, a CTC setting process (step S036), which will be described later, is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S025, if it is not in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025: NO), then it is determined whether the current setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation allowed state). (Step S026). In the case of this embodiment, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the setting key switch 94 is turned ON, and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned OFF (setting key switch signal ON, RAM clear signal OFF). When the power to the device 1 is turned on, it is assumed that the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode are satisfied, and the device is controlled to transition to the setting confirmation mode (see steps S014 to S026).

If it is in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: YES), a setting confirmation process (step S027) is executed to control the current setting value to a setting confirmation state where the current setting value can be confirmed. Then, a backup restoration process (step S028) is executed to restore the gaming process from the backup data backed up at the time of power outage. In the setting confirmation process of step S027, a display process is performed to display the current setting value on the setting display 97 (setting confirmation display). The display of the set values is terminated when the setting key switch is turned off. After the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the backup restoration process described above is performed, and the CTC setting process (step S036), which will be described later, is executed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: NO), that is, if the power is simply turned on to the gaming machine 1, the backup recovery process (step S028) is performed, and based on the backup data, the game at the time of backup is Resume processing.

After performing any of the above-described settings change processing (step S023), area RAM clear processing (step S031), setting confirmation processing (step S027), and backup restoration processing (step S028), the CTC settings The process is executed (step S036). Here, a CTC setting process for periodically generating a timer interrupt every 4 ms is executed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is periodically output to the interrupt controller, and the main control side timer interrupt process (4ms interrupt process) shown in FIG. 9 is executed.

Then, assuming that the game is ready to start, the firing control signal (firing permission signal ES) that permits the firing operation of the firing device 32 is set from the OFF state (firing prohibited state) to the ON state (firing permitted state), and the game is started. A start command is sent to the production control section 24 (step S037). This allows the firing operation of the game ball from the firing device 32. Further, when the performance control unit 24 receives the game start command, it executes an initialization operation regarding the movable accessory. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decorative lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation here is exclusively an operation check regarding the movable accessory when the power is turned on.

In addition, after executing the backup restoration process in step S028, and before executing the CTC setting process in step S036, necessary operations are performed to confirm whether or not the performance display 99 is operating normally. The configuration may be such that the "operation confirmation setting process" can be executed. In this confirmation operation of the performance display 99, for example, the display mode of the four 7-segment displays 99a to 99d is changed to "all blinking" which periodically repeats all lights on and all lights off for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). display (operation confirmation display)” mode (operation confirmation display processing). This makes it possible to check for defects such as missing segments. In this case, display processing related to operation confirmation is performed in performance display monitor processing (step S102: out-of-area program) during main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. The display of the base value by the performance display device 99 is executed in the performance display monitor process (step S102) during the main control side timer interrupt process after the CTC setting process in step S036, so the display of the base value by the performance display device 99 is executed in the performance display monitor process (step S102) during the main control side timer interrupt process. ) or during the setting confirmation process (step S027), the performance display 99 does not display the base value at this stage. Taking advantage of this point, at least one of the four segments 99a to 99d of the performance display 99 is configured to be usable as the setting display 97, and the performance display 99 is temporarily used as the setting display 97. It may be configured to function. In this case, the setting display 97 can be replaced by the performance display 99, which can contribute to a reduction in control burden and cost.

When the above-mentioned series of power-on processing is completed, an infinite loop processing of steps S040 to S045 related to normal game progress is executed. As a result, the game is controlled to be in a game startable state in which the game can proceed. When entering the loop process, first, the CPU is set to an interrupt disabled state (step S040), and various random number update processes are executed (step S041). In this various random number update processing, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating within a predetermined numerical value range by increment processing) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, random numbers for special symbol determination used in symbol drawings, random numbers for auxiliary winning lottery (random numbers for auxiliary winning determination used in auxiliary winning lottery, normal symbol determining random numbers used for auxiliary winning symbol lottery) random numbers) used to change the initial value (start value) (initial value random number for special symbol determination, initial value random number for assistance hit determination, etc.), random number for fluctuating pattern used to select fluctuating pattern, etc. Update.

After completing the above various random number updating processes (step S041), next, performance display monitor total division processing for out-of-area programs is executed (step S043). In this performance display monitor total division processing, processing necessary for calculating the base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 is executed.

When the performance display monitor total division process in step S043 is finished, interrupts are enabled (step S045), the process returns to step S040, and the processes in steps S040 to S045 are repeated (main loop process). . The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processes and performance display monitor total division processes, except while performing timer interrupt processes that are executed intermittently.

<13. Main control side timer interrupt processing: Figure 9>
Next, timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main control side timer interrupt processing. This main control side timer interrupt processing is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular intervals (about 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the execution of the main control side main processing.

In FIG. 9, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes the power abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, the power level supplied from the power board (not shown) is monitored, and if a power supply abnormality such as a power outage occurs, the backup flag BF is set (BF←5AH), the checksum value is Backup processing is performed, including checksum calculation (in this case, 8-bit addition calculation processing for the internal RAM) and storage of the calculation results. The power abnormality check process functions as a backup means for retaining data in a predetermined area of the RAM even after the power is shut off.

Next, timer management processing is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers (times) used to control the gaming operations of the gaming machine 1 are updated here.

Next, input management processing is executed (step S083). In the input management process, various counters (for example, a winning counter for counting winning balls provided for each winning opening) are updated based on input information (detection information) from various sensors and switches installed in the gaming machine 1. (input data creation process). In addition, input data is also created here based on the input information of the status signal from the payout control board 29. If the status signal indicates an abnormality, predetermined error processing is performed in accordance with the abnormality in the error management process (step S089), which will be described later.

Next, a setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting abnormality check process, it is determined whether the setting value data is a normal value (a value indicating settings 1 to 6), and if the value is not within the normal range, an abnormality has occurred in the setting value data and a setting error is detected. Set the flag to ON state (5AH). Then, a setting value abnormality command is sent to the production control section 24, and the setting abnormality check process is exited. When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting value abnormality command, it uses the effect means to execute setting abnormality error notification (RAM error notification). Note that when the setting error check process is executed again, if the setting error flag is in the ON state, the process exits without doing anything.

Next, timer interrupt random number management processing is executed (step S085). In the timer interrupt random number management process, random numbers related to each variable display game are updated regularly. Specifically, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, the random number for special symbol determination and the random number for assistance hit determination are updated (+1 is added for each interrupt), and the random number counter is updated in one cycle. Each time, the start value of the random number counter is changed. Note that the random number for internal lottery (random number for jackpot determination) is generated by the random number generation circuit, so it is not updated here.

Next, error management processing is executed (step S089). In this error management process, based on detection information related to various switches and sensors, status signals from the payout control board 29, etc., it is monitored whether an error (abnormality) has occurred in the gaming operation, and whether or not an error has occurred is monitored. If so, an error command that can specify the error type is sent to the production control unit 24, and error processing according to the error type is executed. Further, when the error is canceled, an error cancellation command is sent to the effect control section 24 to execute error cancellation processing.

Next, prize ball management processing is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management process, the entered prize counter is checked, and if there is a prize, a payout control command specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When receiving the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command, and causes the game ball payout device 19 to perform a payout operation for the specified number of prize balls.

Next, normal symbol management processing is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, processing necessary for the normal symbol variable display game (normal symbol variable display operation) is executed. Here, it is monitored whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a, and when a game ball is detected, predetermined game information (such as a random number for determining a support hit) necessary for the support win lottery is sent. The game information is stored as pending data (general pattern action pending balls) up to the maximum number of pending memories (here, 4 pieces) (general pattern pending storage process). Then, when the predetermined starting conditions are met, a supplementary winning lottery is performed based on the normal symbol operation holding ball, and a variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the supplementary winning lottery result, and a stop display mode of the regular symbol (normal stopping symbol) Determine. Also, here, in order to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, if the symbol is in motion, create LED display data for the variable display, and if it is not in motion, create LED display data for the stop display (normal symbol display data update processing).

Next, a normal electric accessory management process is executed (step S092). In this normal electric accessory management process, the process necessary for executing the normal electricity release game is executed based on the lottery result of the above-mentioned auxiliary winning lottery. Specifically, solenoid control data for the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c is generated and set. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal based on the solenoid control data is output to the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c in the solenoid management process in step S100, which will be described later, and the operation pattern of the movable blade 47 is controlled. be done.

Next, special symbol management processing is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, processing necessary for the special symbol variation display game is executed. In this special symbol management process, the following are mainly carried out: reservation memory regarding the special symbol activation reserved ball, pre-read judgment, determination of a pre-read fluctuation pattern based on the pre-read judgment result, jackpot lottery, determination of a fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation based on the jackpot lottery, special It performs processing related to determining stopping symbols, controlling the variable display operation of special symbols, setting transitions to gaming states, etc. Note that details of the special symbol management process will be described later using FIG. 10.

Next, special electric accessory management processing is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessory management process, processes necessary for winning games (big winning games, small winning games) are executed. The special electric accessory management process mainly performs processing related to execution control of the winning game based on the jackpot lottery result, setting of the destination gaming state after the jackpot game, etc. Note that details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later using FIG. 21.

Next, right-handed hit notification information management processing is executed (step S097). In this right-handed hitting notification information management process, when the game state is "advantageous to right-handed hitting" (during a winning game, in an electric support state (time saving state or variable probability state)), a control is performed to light up the right-handed hitting display device 39b. LED data is created to turn off the right-handed display device 39b when the game condition is "advantageous for left-handed players" (normal state).

Next, LED management processing is executed (step S098). In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) to various LED display devices such as the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the right-handed display device 39b is executed. Control signals based on the LED display data created in the normal symbol management process (step S091), special symbol management process (step S093), right hit notification information management process (step S097), etc. are output in this LED management process. be done.

Next, external terminal management processing is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various external terminal signals are created and output control is executed to the external device through the frame external terminal board 21.

Next, solenoid management processing is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, based on the solenoid control data set in the normal electric accessory management process (step S092) and the special electric accessory management process (step S094), the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c and the grand prize opening solenoid 52c are The excitation signal output control is executed for the excitation signal. Thereby, the movable wing piece 47 and the opening door 52b are driven and controlled, and the opening/closing operation of the lower starting opening 35 and the big winning opening 50 is realized.

Next, all registers are saved (step S101), performance display monitoring processing belonging to the out-of-area program is executed (step S102), and then all registers are restored (S103). In the performance display monitor process, necessary processes related to calculation of a base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 and display control are executed. In addition, type test signals are created and output processed here.

Next, the count value of the WDT is cleared (step S104). As a result, the WDT is reset for each interrupt, and the count value is returned to the initial value.

When the above steps S081 to S104 are completed, the timer interrupt process is ended and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<10. Special symbol management processing: Figure 10>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 9 will be explained. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process. Here, we will mainly explain the case where the special electric non-activation type support time reduction is adopted as the support time reduction.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first performs a "special map 1 starting port check process" regarding the special map 1 side (upper starting port 34 side) (step S301), and then on the special chart 2 side (lower starting port 35 side). "Special figure 2 starting gate check process" related to this is executed (step S302). The details of the special figure 1 starting opening check process and the special figure 2 starting opening checking process will be described later using FIG. 11.

After completing the starting port check process in steps S301 and S302, the state of the conditioner activation flag is then determined (step S304). This "conditional device activation flag" is a flag for specifying whether or not a jackpot game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that a jackpot game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

When the conditional device activation flag is ON, that is, when a jackpot game is in progress (step S304:=5AH), the special symbol display is performed in step S309 without performing the processing related to the special symbol variable display operation in steps S306 to S308. Proceed to data update processing. Therefore, when a jackpot game is in progress, the special symbol variable display operation is not performed. In other words, during the jackpot game, the stop display mode of the special symbol is maintained as determined and displayed as the support time saving symbol or the jackpot symbol. In addition, in the case where a special electric activation type support time saving or small winning game is provided, when the supporting time saving opening/closing game or the small winning game is in progress, the special symbols in steps S306 to S308 are Without performing the process related to the variable display operation, the process directly advances to the special symbol display data update process of step S309.

On the other hand, in step S304, if the conditional device operation flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S304:≠5AH), processing according to the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H) is performed. The "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

In the special symbol operation status branching process in step S305, depending on which status value the special symbol operation status is: "Waiting (00H, 01H)," "Fluctuating (02H)," or "Confirming (03H)." Then, any one of steps S306 to S308 is executed. Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is "on standby (00H, 01H)", special symbol fluctuation start processing (step S306) is performed, and when it is "fluctuation (02H)", special symbol fluctuation start processing is performed. When the symbol variation processing (step S307) is "confirming (03H)", the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next variation, and "changing" indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in the process of variation (fluctuating display). The above-mentioned "confirming" indicates that the variation of the special symbol has ended and is being stopped (confirmed) and being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). Through these processes, a special symbol variable display operation (a display operation in which a variation start and a variation stop are set) is realized. Note that details of steps S306 to S308, which are closely related to the present invention, will be described later using FIGS. 12, 16, and 17A to 17B, respectively.

After completing any of the processes in steps S306 to S308, special symbol display data update process in step S309, which will be described later, is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating, and if it is fluctuating, the data of the special symbol that repeats blinking at predetermined time intervals (7-segment blinking display data that is fluctuating) is determined. ) is created, and if the special symbol is not changing, data for a stop display (data for a 7-segment blinking display during a stop display) is created. The special symbol display data created here is output as LED data in the LED management process (step S098) in FIG. 9, and variable display and static display of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. . As a result, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special electric accessory management process of step S095 in FIG. 9 is executed.

<9. Special figure 1 starting gate check process: Figure 11>
Referring to FIG. 11, the special figure 1 starting opening check process (step S301 in FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the special drawing 1 starting gate check process. This special figure 1 starting hole check process plays a role as a winning process that is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and is mainly a process related to reservation storage when a game ball enters the upper starting hole 34. It is mainly composed of processing related to read-ahead determination. In addition, the difference between the special figure 1 starting gate check process and the special figure 2 starting gate check process is whether the processing content is related to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side. Substantially, the processing contents are the same. Therefore, here, in order to avoid duplicate description, the explanation will focus on the special figure 1 start opening check process.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether a winning ball (winning ball) is detected at the upper starting port 34 (step S311).

When a winning of the upper starting opening 34 (special figure 1 side starting opening) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether the number of special figure 1 action pending balls is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is less than the maximum number of reserved balls (here, 4 balls). In addition, when there is no winning detection of the upper starting opening 34 (step S311: NO), the special drawing 1 starting opening check process is exited without doing anything.

If the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is 4 or more, that is, if an over-winning that exceeds the maximum number of reserved balls occurs (step S312: YES), an over-winning command that specifies an over-winning (for example, the special figure 1 B406H in case of special figure 2, B506H in case of special figure 2) is transmitted to the production control section 24 (step S324). On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 operation is not 4 or more, that is, less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 operation (step S313), and step S314 Proceed to processing.

Proceeding to the process of step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special symbol 1 action pending ball that has occurred this time are obtained (step S314). Specifically, the current values of random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for special symbol determination, and random numbers for fluctuation patterns are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random values are stored in the reserved storage area of the internal RAM. This reservation storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation reservation ball (retention data), and this reservation storage area stores the above-mentioned various random numbers as reservation data. Until the first variable display operation is performed (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the symbols are held and stored in the order in which the starting conditions are met (in the winning order). In addition, the above-mentioned holding storage area includes holding storage areas corresponding to the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side (the special figure 1 holding storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 holding area corresponding to the special figure 2). A storage area) is provided, each of which can store pending data for the maximum number of active pending balls.

Next, prefetch prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") that prohibits prefetch determination is acquired in the command data (winning command 1) corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the winning command (step S315), and then, It is determined whether the "prefetch prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S316). This "pre-reading prohibition condition" is a condition for prohibiting a pre-reading determination, specifically, a condition for prohibiting a pre-reading notice. If the special figure 1 starting opening check process is in progress, the pre-reading prohibition condition for the special figure 1 activated pending ball is in progress, and if the special figure 2 starting opening check process is in progress, the pre-reading prohibition condition for the special figure 2 activated reserved ball is set. Determine whether the prohibition condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the current gaming state is a "gaming state with an electric support state", that is, a gaming state in which special drawing 2 activation reserved balls are likely to occur (a winning easy state), 'special drawing 1 pre-reading is prohibited' In the case of a "gaming state accompanied by a state without electric support", that is, in a gaming state in which a special figure 1 activated reserved ball is likely to occur, it is set as ``special figure 2 pre-reading prohibited''. Therefore, in the determination process of step S316, if the current gaming state is the time saving state or the variable probability state, the determination result becomes 'YES' as the special symbol 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is satisfied. It should be noted that which of the special drawings 1 and 2 is prohibited from pre-reading can be determined depending on the internal gaming state (gaming state determination number YJ) and/or the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode).

If the above-mentioned special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the setting error flag determination process (step S317) and the process related to look-ahead determination (steps S318 to S320) are skipped, and the process of step S321 described below is skipped. Proceed to. In this case, the pre-reading judgment for the current special figure 1 activated pending ball will not be executed, and a winning command with pre-reading prohibited data (EVENT: "9FH") will be created (starting entrance winning command described below). time random number determination process (see step S320)). As a result, the execution of the pre-read notice for the current operation-suspended ball is prohibited (the pre-read notice for the current operation-reserved ball is not executed).

If the special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), then it is determined whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S317). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S317:=5AH), that is, when a RAM error (setting abnormality error) has occurred, the process related to the prefetch determination (steps S318 to S320) is skipped, and the process in step S321 described later is performed. Proceed to processing. In this case as well, the look-ahead determination for the current operation pending ball is not executed, and a winning command with look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, so that the look-ahead notice is not executed. In other words, the prefetch prohibition data (9FH) is data that specifies that the process related to prefetch determination (steps S318 to S320) has not been executed.

If the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S317:≠5AH), a setting value command is transmitted and random number determination processing is executed (step S318). This random number determination process is performed as a part of the 'pre-reading determination' process, and here, the 'winning/losing lottery at the start of fluctuation' (described later) is performed when the current operation pending ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. A 'look-ahead hit/fail determination' is performed to determine in advance the result of the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory object (step S410 in FIG. 12).

(Set value command)
The above-mentioned "setting value command" includes information that can identify the current setting value, and is used by the effect control unit 24 to control the appearance of a preview effect (setting suggestion effect described later) based on the setting value. be done. This set value command is transmitted every time an operation pending ball occurs in the starting port check process. As a result, the performance control unit 24 can control the appearance of a preview performance related to the operation pending ball (for example, a setting suggestion performance related to a pre-read preview performance) based on correct setting value information. Note that in the case of a "gaming machine without a setting function" or a "one-stage setting gaming machine", there is no need to send a setting value command (processing related to sending a setting value command may not be provided).

In the random number determination process in step S318, first a "hit random number determination table" is acquired, and then a random number value for jackpot determination is acquired. Then, based on the acquired random number value for jackpot determination and the hit random number determination table, a winning/losing lottery (pre-read winning/losing determination) targeting the current operation pending ball is executed, and the lottery result (pre-reading winning/losing result) is obtained.

(T-1. Hit random number determination table: Figure 26)
FIG. 26 shows an example of a winning random number determination table according to this embodiment. FIG. 26(A) shows the case where the support time reduction is provided on the special drawing 2 side, and FIG. 26(B) shows the case where the support time reduction is not provided on the special drawing 2 side (because the lottery probability (winning area) is 0, This table shows a winning random number determination table (including cases equivalent to cases in which the game is not actually provided). "Support time reduction" in the embodiment is defined as a lottery target. From this point of view, the lottery format related to the reduction in support time is referred to as the "winning/losing lottery target lottery format." In addition, if you use a winning random number determination table (a winning random number determination table with no support time saving winning area or zero winning area) as shown in FIG. 26(B) or FIG. 27 (described later) depending on the specific gaming state, It is possible to set the mode such that the support time reduction is not activated during a specific gaming state.

The above-mentioned hit random number determination table includes the hit random number determination table (special figure 1 hit random number determination table: Figure (A) (A) or Figure ( B) (C)) and the hit random number determination table (special figure 2 winning random number determination table: Figure (A) (B) or Figure (B )(d)) are provided. That is, during the special figure 1 starting opening check process, the "hit random number determination table for special figure 1" is referred to, and during the special figure 2 starting opening check process, the "hit random number determination table for special figure 2" is referred to. . This winning random number determination table is also used when performing a winning lottery in the later-described "random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessory object (step S410 in FIG. 12)".

These hit random number determination tables contain information for determining the type of win or loss (jackpot, short support time, or loss (may include small wins)) for each jackpot lottery probability state (high probability or low probability). The determination area (judgment value) and the random number value for jackpot determination (size of random number for jackpot determination: 65536) are determined in association with each other, and depending on which determination value the random number value for jackpot determination belongs to, The winning/losing type is determined.

In the case of this embodiment, the hit random number determination table includes a hit random number determination table corresponding to each setting value (settings 1 to 6) (a table with at least a different jackpot lottery probability depending on settings 1 to 6 (for example, Six types of the above-mentioned hit random number determination tables) are provided (in the illustration, determination values for settings 1, 3, and 6 are representatively shown). In addition, in the case of this embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at low probability (probability increase rate: high probability / low probability) is the same for each setting value, and the ratio is 10. It is set to a value that cannot be exceeded. For example, setting 6 "1/180 when low probability, 1/45 when high probability", setting 5 "1/184 when low probability, 1/46 when high probability", setting 2 "1/46 when low probability", etc. 196, high probability 1/49'' and setting 1 ``low probability 1/200, high probability 1/50'' to win the jackpot. Note that the probability increase rate may be different for each set value. Furthermore, in the case of a "gaming machine without a setting function" or a "gaming machine with one-stage setting", there is only one type of setting, and therefore there is also one type of the above-mentioned random number determination table.

FIG. 26(B) is a random number judgment table for special drawing 2 when support time reduction is not provided on the special drawing 2 side, but in this embodiment, it corresponds to the judgment value (65405 to 65535) of support time saving winning. Not only the data of the part but all the judgment values are "00H". In other words, no matter what the random number value for jackpot determination is, the result of winning or losing is determined to be a non-win for short support time (in this example, a "lose" that is neither a jackpot win nor a short win for support time). In this way, in the case where support time reduction is not provided, instead of a lottery format in which a lottery targeting support time reduction is not performed, a lottery targeting support time reduction is executed, but all judgment values (here, 0 to 65535 ) as the judgment value for not winning the support time reduction, if you later want to set the support time reduction on the special map 2 side, just change the data corresponding to the judgment value you want to make the support time reduction winning to "5AH". This eliminates the need to change the entire data structure again. This makes it easy to make adjustments when developing a new model or at the design and development stage.

After completing the random number determination process in step S318 described above, a special stop symbol data creation process is then executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the 'pre-read judgment' process, and here, the 'symbol at the start of fluctuation' process is performed when the current operation pending ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. A 'pre-read symbol determination' is performed to determine in advance the result of the lottery (special stop symbol creation process (step S411) in FIG. 12, which will be described later).

In the above special stop symbol data creation process, a "symbol table" is selected according to the pre-read win/loss result obtained in step S318 and the special symbol type (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) to be processed this time. .

(T-2. Design table selection table: Figure 28)
This symbol table selection is determined based on the "symbol table selection table" shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the symbol table selection table includes symbol table selection tables corresponding to special symbol variation display game 1 and special symbol variation display game 2 (symbol table selection table for special symbol 1, symbol table selection table for special symbol 2). A table) is provided. For example, if the current change is on the side of special drawing 1 and the result of the lottery is "Support time saving", "Support time saving symbol table 1" is selected. These symbol table selection tables are also used when selecting a symbol table at the start of variation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 28, the above-mentioned "symbol table" includes a "jackpot pattern table", "support time-saving pattern table", and "loss pattern table" for determining the jackpot type, support time-saving type, and loss type. , each symbol table is provided corresponding to the special symbol type. These symbol tables are also used when performing a symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12), which will be described later. In addition, in Figures 28 (a) and (b), when there is a short support time in the lottery target on the special map 2 side, in Figure 28 (b) and (c), there is no "short support time" in the lottery target on the special map 2 side. It shows the symbol table selection table for the case. Moreover, in this embodiment, since a small win is not provided, a "small win symbol table" is not provided.

Then, the random value for special symbol determination obtained in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the acquired random value for special symbol determination, the symbol lottery (pre-reading) for the current operation pending ball is The lottery result (pre-read symbol result) is obtained.

(T-3. Design table: Figures 29 to 31)
29 to 31 show the above-mentioned "jackpot symbol table", "support time saving symbol table", and "loss symbol table". As shown in Figures 29 to 31, the symbol table includes a determination area (determination value) for determining the winning type (symbol type) and a random value for special symbol determination (for example, a random value for special symbol determination). size: 200) is defined in association with the above. Specifically, the winning type is determined according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate depending on which determination value the random number value for special symbol determination belongs to, and the special symbol determination data special stop symbol is used as data indicating the lottery result. The number and offset value for variation pattern selection (offset value shown) are acquired. In this embodiment, according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate (for example, see the "Design lottery rate" column in FIG. 4), the winning type (winning type: jackpot type (10R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 4R time saving jackpot) ), the support time reduction type (support time reduction A, support time reduction B, and support time reduction C) and loss type (loss A, loss B, loss C)) are determined.

In addition, the above-mentioned "special symbol judgment data" is data that identifies the above-mentioned winning type, and specifically, the winning type (10R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 4R time saving jackpot) and the support time saving type (support time saving This is data for identifying which of the winning types (loss A, loss A, loss B, loss C) has been won. This special symbol determination data is used in processes that require winning type information (for example, the game state transition preparation process (step S412) shown in FIG. 12, which will be described later), the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process (step S413), and the jackpot game. It is used in processing related to execution control (special electric accessory management processing in FIG. 21).

In addition, the above-mentioned "special stop symbol number" is data that specifies the special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and the stop symbol type of the special symbol (in this embodiment '7 It is used to specify the display mode of segment. In addition, even if the winning type is the same, the display mode of the special stop symbols displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b ('7 segment' display mode in this embodiment) may differ depending on the judgment value. be. Also, as with the special symbols, normal symbols are also provided with normal symbol determination data and normal stop symbol numbers.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "offset value for variation pattern selection" is data used to select a target variation pattern distribution table.

In addition, in the illustration, for convenience of explanation, the value of the special symbol judgment data special stop symbol number and the offset value for fluctuation pattern selection is expressed as "**H", but the appropriate values corresponding to each winning type are shown here. The value is determined.

(About other jackpot lottery formats)
In this embodiment, one or more types of "support time saving (time saving granting symbols)" that give a time saving state are provided for the "winning lottery" that uses random numbers for jackpot determination, and the winning lottery result and special symbol determination It is a lottery format in which the first "Support time reduction" is drawn by a "design lottery" using random numbers (a lottery format for winning and losing lottery). Specifically, this is a case where a predetermined determination area (winning area) related to support time reduction is provided in the winning random number determination table, and a "support time reduction symbol table" shown in FIG. 30 is provided as the symbol table. In the case of the winning/losing lottery target lottery format, since the jackpot and support time reduction are drawn independently, there is a feature that even if the jackpot lottery probability changes, the support time reduction lottery probability does not change (see FIG. 26).

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to determine the winning type (see the "Winning Type" column in Figure 4) using only the random numbers for jackpot determination, that is, without using the random numbers for special symbol determination. It may be configured (a configuration in which the symbol lottery process is not executed). For example, to explain the winning type on the special drawing 2 side as a representative example (see Figure 4), if the range of the random number value for jackpot determination is "0≦A≦B (B>0)", it is a loss A, "B If <C≦D, it is a 10R definite variable jackpot; if “D<E≦F”, it is a 4R definite variable jackpot; if “F<G≦H”, it is a 4R time-saving jackpot; if “H<I≦J” If support time reduction B is satisfied and "J<K≦L (L=65535)", support time reduction C is selected. The winning area (winning probability) for each winning type can be determined as appropriate. In addition, at least the type of support time reduction (in this example, the special map 1 side is different from support time reduction A, B, C, and the special map 2 side is different from support time reduction B, C) using only the random number for jackpot determination. It may also be configured to be determinable.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11. When the above-described special stop symbol data creation process in step S319 is finished, a random number determination process at the time of starting opening winning is executed (step S320). This random number determination process at the time of winning the starting opening is also performed as part of the 'pre-reading determination' process, and here, the 'fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation' when the current operation pending ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation is determined. Perform a 'look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination' that is determined in advance. Specifically, the result of the "special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413)" shown in FIG. 12, which will be described later, is pre-read and determined.

Specifically, the results of the pre-read symbol determination obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) (at least the winning/losing lottery results obtained in the random number determination process (step S318)) and the fluctuation pattern data obtained in step S314 are used. A random number (size of random number: 10,000) is used to pre-read and determine the "fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation" regarding the current operation pending ball. Note that pre-reading pattern determination is to determine the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation in advance, so a "pre-reading determination table" is separately provided that has the same basic configuration as the fluctuation pattern distribution table used at the start of fluctuation. Do this by referring to However, in the case of this embodiment, in order to reduce the program capacity, a fluctuation pattern distribution table is provided for "both the time of winning (at the time of pre-reading judgment) and the time of starting fluctuation" (MODE 1 as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33). , MODE2, EVENT), both at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is read in advance based on this fluctuation pattern distribution table and the random value for fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of step S314. judge.

Then, "winning command data" is obtained as the pre-reading determination result. Here, as the command data that constitutes the winning command, the command data on the "MODE1 (1st byte (upper byte))" side that can identify whether it is a win or a loss, and the contents of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern can be specified. The command data on the EVENT (second byte (lower byte)) side is acquired.In other words, the command data determined in the random number judgment process at the time of winning the starting opening is used to determine the look-ahead fluctuation pattern (excluding the information on the number of pending balls). ) will be specified.

Regarding the above-mentioned "Random number determination process (step S320) at the time of winning starting slot", in order to make it easier to understand the present invention, the variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. The explanation will be given not only at the time of determination) but also the content at the start of variation (special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) in FIG. 12).

The starting opening winning random number determination process includes the following processes (a) and (b) as a process for determining a "winning command" for specifying a look-ahead fluctuation pattern.
(a) Refer to the “variable pattern distribution table selection table (not shown)” for selecting a variable pattern distribution table, and determine the “winning time fluctuation pattern” that will be referred to this time. "Distribution table determination process"
(b) Refer to the "variation pattern distribution table" determined in (a) above, and determine the winning command data corresponding to the look-ahead variation pattern based on the random value for variation pattern obtained in the process of step S314. ``Winning command data determination process (pre-reading variation pattern determination process)''.

(Fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table (at the time of winning): not shown)
The above-mentioned "fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table" includes multiple types of "fluctuation pattern distribution tables" associated with the special symbol type, winning type, number of active pending balls, and fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode). It is determined. The variable pattern distribution table selection table has multiple types of variable pattern distribution tables (FH1 to 7) based on the special symbol type, winning type, number of balls on hold, and variable pattern selection mode (Tcode). The configuration is such that any one "variation pattern distribution table" can be determined.

This variation pattern distribution table selection table is used not only to determine the "win command" at the time of winning (pre-reading judgment), but also to process ( It is also used in the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) in FIG. 12, which will be described later, and serves as a common variation pattern distribution table selection table at the time of winning and at the start of variation. However, at the time of look-ahead determination (the above-mentioned "Winning variation pattern distribution table determination process"), the number of pending balls is ignored (the number of pending balls is set to zero), and the purpose is selected from the above variation pattern distribution table selection table. (This will be described later). On the other hand, at the start of fluctuation, the value obtained by subtracting the number of active pending balls to be used for the current fluctuation display operation from the existing active pending balls (number of active pending balls - 1) is referred to as information on the active pending ball number (Figure 33 (See steps S403 and S413 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 12, which will be described later).

(Fluctuating pattern distribution table (at the time of winning))
Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern distribution table will be explained. Here, for convenience of explanation, the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to normal mode shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 will be used as a representative example. Fig. 32 shows the "Normal mid-win/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table" that is referred to when a jackpot or support time-saving winning occurs in the normal mode (normal state), and Fig. 33 shows the "normal mid-hit/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table" that is referred to when losing in the normal mode. ``Normal-medium loss fluctuation pattern distribution table'' is shown.

Referring to FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to the normal mode includes the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FB1 to FB6" for winning and the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH7" for losing. and is included. These fluctuation pattern distribution tables are provided as tables for both the time of look-ahead determination and the time of start of fluctuation. Therefore, the following data groups are defined in the fluctuation pattern distribution table.

(B) The fluctuation pattern distribution table contains the command data ("MODE1" shown in the figure) on the upper byte (1st byte) side for configuring the "winning command" that specifies the look-ahead fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte ("MODE1" in the figure). The command data ("EVENT" in the figure) on the second byte) side and a random number value for a variation pattern (size of random number number for a variation pattern: 10000) are defined in association with each other. The above "MODE1" is command data that can specify whether it is a win or a loss, and "EVENT" is command data that can specify the content of the look-ahead variation pattern. At the time of look-ahead determination, this fluctuation pattern distribution table is referred to, and depending on which judgment value the random value for the fluctuation pattern belongs to (a lottery using the random value for the fluctuation pattern), the command for configuring the winning command is determined. Command data is now determined. As a result, a winning command is created and the contents of the prefetch variation pattern are specified. When this prize-winning command is sent to the effect control section 24, the effect control section 24 grasps the content of the pre-read variation pattern and uses it for effect processing regarding the pre-read notice.

(b) The variation pattern distribution table also defines data regarding a "variation pattern designation command" that specifies the variation pattern at the start of variation. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern distribution table includes command data ("MODE2" in the figure) on the upper byte (1st byte) side and the lower byte (2nd byte) side for configuring the fluctuation pattern specification command. The command data ("EVENT" in the figure) and the random number value for the fluctuation pattern are determined in association with each other. The above "MODE 2" is command data that can specify whether it is a win or a loss, and "EVENT" is command data that can specify the content of the fluctuation pattern. This fluctuation pattern distribution table is also referred to at the start of fluctuation (see special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process (step S413) in FIG. 12 described later), and a fluctuation pattern designation command is constructed by lottery using random numbers for fluctuation patterns. The command data for the command is determined. As a result, a fluctuation pattern designation command (upper byte MODE2+lower byte EVENT) is created, and the contents of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation are specified. The “fluctuation pattern designation command” is composed of 2-byte control data consisting of “MODE2” and “EVENT” in the same way as the winning command, and when this fluctuation pattern designation command is sent to the production control unit 24, On the performance control unit 24 side, the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is grasped and used for performance processing regarding the performance during symbol fluctuation.

Although the illustration shows "selection rate," in reality, the judgment area (judgment value: 0 to 9999), and these command data are determined depending on which judgment value the random value for the fluctuation pattern belongs to.

The relationship between the random value for the fluctuation pattern and the judgment value is as follows. For example, to explain the loss variation pattern distribution table "FH1" shown in FIG. They are listed in the order of "10", "8990", and "1000", but this content means that the random number value for fluctuation pattern (BRND = 0 to 9999) is within the judgment value range of 0 to 9 (the above "10"). If it belongs to the judgment value range of 10 to 8999 (corresponding to the entry column of "8990" above), the command data specifying "normal fluctuation 13s" is selected. If the command data that specifies is selected, and the judgment value falls within the range of 9000 to 9999 (corresponding to the column for writing ``1000'' above), the command data that specifies ``N reach 1'' is selected. . In the case of this embodiment, the blank part in the figure, that is, the address where the determination value is stored, does not mean that no determination value data is stored, but "0" is stored as the determination value. This is to facilitate adjustment of the selection rate when developing a new model or at the design and development stage.

To explain this using a simple example, for example, in the loss variation pattern distribution table "FH1", the judgment values are distributed to normal variation 13s, normal variation 16s, and N reach 1. If it is desired to additionally select 8s, it will be necessary to change the entire data structure again, and the design may have to be restarted from scratch. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, if a variation pattern distribution table for each setting value is provided, it may be necessary to change the data structure of all of these tables. Generally, when developing a new model, various judgment values are set and the design is carried out while adjusting the judgment values in consideration of the balance of fluctuation time (suppression of fluctuation slump) and the balance of effects such as reach effects. go. Therefore, there are cases where the design is based on the initially set determination values, and there are cases where changes are required.

Therefore, in the design stage, we temporarily set "0 (zero)" as the judgment value data in the storage address of the judgment value of the variation pattern that is considered not to be selected, and if there is a change, we change the value as appropriate. is changed so that it can be easily included in the variation pattern of the selection target. For example, the judgment value data of the loss variation pattern distribution table "FH1" actually includes normal variation 4s "0", normal variation 8s "0", normal variation 13s "10", normal variation 16s "8990", Data including a zero (blank part in the figure) such as normal fluctuation 16s for advance notice "0", N reach 1 for advance notice 1 "0", and N reach 1 "1000" is stored.

In the case of this embodiment, when losing A is won, as shown in the figure, N reach 2 and later are defined as fluctuation patterns that are not eligible for selection, so in each of "FH1" to "FH4", normal fluctuation 4s to N Judgment value data including "0" within the address range (consecutive addresses here) related to reach 1 is stored (of course, the selection target may be a variation pattern after N reach 2). Even when the judgment value is "0", the lottery process (determining the look-ahead fluctuation pattern and determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation) is executed, but the fluctuation pattern with the judgment value of zero is actually selected. Therefore, in practice, it can be registered as an "unused variation pattern". If it is necessary to adjust this "judgment value zero" part during the design stage, etc., by setting a value other than zero, you can change the "variation pattern not to be used" to "variation pattern to be selected". , can be easily modified. In this way, for fluctuation patterns that are not used, the judgment value is left as zero, and when developing a new model, by assigning the same addresses as those at the development stage, the table data structure can be changed one by one. There is no need to make any changes, making design changes extremely easy. Note that the same applies to other fluctuation pattern distribution tables.

As described above, in the variation pattern distribution table, the command data that constitutes the "winning command" is determined at the time of winning depending on which judgment value the random value for variation pattern belongs to, and at the time of the start of variation. The command data constituting the "variation pattern designation command" is determined.

Here, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the target variation pattern distribution table is selected by ignoring the number of pending balls (the number of pending balls being released is set to zero) when making a look-ahead determination. The reason for this is described below. That's right.

The fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in Fig. 33 is a table that can be used both at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation (the same applies to other fluctuation pattern distribution tables), but in reality, it is used for the number of balls on hold at the time of winning and at the time of the start of fluctuation. It does not necessarily match the number of pending operations. Therefore, at the time of look-ahead determination (at the time of winning), the number of balls on hold is set to zero, and the target variation pattern distribution table is selected. For example, referring to FIG. 33, when the current gaming state is normal (Tcode=00H), the operation pending ball to be read ahead this time is on the special symbol 1 side, and the winning type is loss A (special 1), the variable pattern distribution table "FH1" will be selected regardless of the number of active pending balls at the time of winning.

However, just because the number of pending pitches at the time of look-ahead judgment and the number of pending pitches at the start of fluctuation do not match, it is not possible to blindly ignore the number of pending pitches and judge the look-ahead variation pattern. There is a possibility that there will be a big difference between the content of the fluctuation pattern and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation. To be more specific, when winning a prize, the main control unit 20 sends a “winning command” including pre-read fluctuation pattern information to the performance control unit 24, and upon receiving this, the performance control unit 24 executes the command based on the pending addition command. , performs performance control regarding advance notice performance. On the other hand, at the time of starting the fluctuation, the main control section 20 sends a "fluctuation pattern designation command" containing the fluctuation pattern information at the time of the start of fluctuation to the performance control section 24, and upon receiving this, the performance control section 24 processes the fluctuation pattern designation command. Based on this, performance control including a decorative pattern variable display operation performance (decorative pattern variable display performance (decorative pattern performance described later)) and a notice performance (a notice performance during variation) during a decorative pattern variable display game is performed. Based on this relationship, if there is a large difference between the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation, the relationship between the content of the look-ahead notice and the content of the fluctuating notice will collapse, and the reliability of the notice performance will be affected. There is a risk that the game will become less interesting and the player's desire to play will decrease. Therefore, in this embodiment, the following characteristic element (first characteristic element) is provided for the prefetch determination.

(First characteristic element)
For example, if the current gaming state is normal, and the pending ball to be read ahead this time is on the special chart 1 side, and the winning type is loss A (special chart 1 side loss A), as described above, At the time of look-ahead determination, the loss variation pattern distribution table "FH1" is selected regardless of the number of pending pitches. On the other hand, at the start of fluctuation, one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" is selected according to the number of pending balls (column "00H (normal), special chart 1, loss A" in Fig. 33). reference).

Here, referring to FIG. 33, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH3 to FH4", "normal fluctuation 4s, normal fluctuation 8s, normal fluctuation 13s", etc. belonging to the normal fluctuation (normal fluctuation pattern) type can be selected ( (determinable), but these are defined as "non-pre-reading notice variation pattern types" in which the pre-reading notice is not executed. Specifically, this non-pre-reading notice variation pattern is a pre-reading variation pattern such as "Not eligible for the pre-reading notice lottery" or "Eligible for the pre-reading notice lottery, but the probability of winning is zero (pre-reading notice not executed)" be. In this embodiment, among the normal variation types, the only one that is subject to the look-ahead notice is the "normal variation 16s for look-ahead notice" that can be selected in the case of loss B (see FH5).

Further, in the variation pattern distribution tables "FH1" and "FH2", in addition to "normal variation 13s and normal variation 16s" belonging to the normal variation type, N reach 1 belonging to the N reach type can be selected. Here, simple "N reach 1" is different from N reach 1 for lookahead notice and belongs to the above-mentioned variation pattern for non-lookahead notice. Therefore, if you win the special drawing 1 side losing A in the regular, at the time of winning ("FH1" is selected at the time of look-ahead judgment), the fluctuation pattern that is the target of the look-ahead notice (look-ahead fluctuation pattern) never selected. In other words, there is a case where different fluctuation patterns are determined at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation, for example, a case where it is determined that N reach is 1 at the time of look-ahead determination, and it is determined to be normal fluctuation at the time of start of fluctuation. However, in the case of a loss A on the special drawing 1 side during normal play, no particular problem occurs because the pre-read notice does not appear. It should be noted that the structure does not necessarily have to be such that no pre-read notice appears at all, but if the normal variation 13s, normal variation 16s, or N reach 1 is selected, and the pre-read notice rarely appears, a problem will arise. It is thought that there is no. For example, at least any one of the normal variation 13s, normal variation 16s, and N reach 1 can be used as the pre-read notice variation pattern. Preferably, the selection rate is "normal variation 13s" and/or "N reach", which have a relatively low probability, and more preferably, the "normal variation 13s", which has the lowest selection rate. However, in this case, in order to prevent the pre-read notice from appearing excessively, the appearance rate of the pre-read notice (probability of winning the pre-read lottery) is higher than "Normal fluctuation 16s for pre-read notice" and/or "N Reach 1 for pre-read notice". It is preferable to set the probability to be low.

Also, as shown in Figure 33, if you win on the special drawing 1 side losing B (normal medium special drawing 1 side losing B) or when you win the special drawing 1 side losing C (normal medium special drawing 1 side losing C), as shown in FIG. ), or if you win the losing A on the special drawing 2 side (normally the winning on the special drawing 2 side), both at the time of winning and at the start of the fluctuation, regardless of the number of pending balls, each is the same. The loss variation pattern distribution tables "FH5", "FH6", and "FH7 (common to all losses)" are selected. In other words, when making a pre-read judgment when winning a regular medium special drawing 1 side loss B, a normal medium special drawing 1 side loss C, or a winning special drawing 2 side loss A, the number of pending balls for each operation is used both at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation. Since the common fluctuation pattern distribution table is referred to in the table, it is possible to accurately pre-read and determine the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation.

(About the second characteristic element)
Generally, even without an electric support, the number of balls on hold can change by about 1 or 2 in a relatively short period of time. If this is used to make it possible to select a variation pattern according to the number of balls on hold, the production time (execution time of the symbol variation display game) will change for each symbol variation display game, allowing for a variety of productions. It is possible to generate In particular, if the average execution time (symbol fluctuation time) of one symbol fluctuation display game at the time of a loss is made short (for example, about a few seconds), the so-called "fluctuation slump" (symbol fluctuation display game is not being executed) The occurrence rate of ``periods'' increases, making it easier for players to feel that ``it's not fun or interesting,'' leading to a decline in interest in the game and a decrease in the repeat rate of the game. Therefore, it is thought that if the average execution time of one symbol variation display game is lengthened, the number of pending balls will be more likely to accumulate, and the occurrence rate of variation slump can be reduced.

However, if the execution time of the symbol fluctuation display game is made to be unnecessarily long, the progress speed of the game will slow down, the performance during the fluctuation will be slow, and the tension of winning the jackpot due to the preview performance will be interrupted. This causes players to feel bored and dissatisfied. In addition, if the execution time of the symbol fluctuation display game is unnecessarily extended, an overflow of the activated reserved balls (starting prize winning exceeding the maximum reserved memory number (4)) will easily occur, in other words, the right to execute the game will be lost. There is a risk that players will lose a lot of money and lose their desire to play. Therefore, it is necessary to devise a well-balanced execution time for the symbol variation display game. For example, it is important to have a variation pattern selection technique that takes into account the number of balls on hold at the start of the variation, the game state, etc. In particular, it is important to have a variation pattern selection technique that focuses on the failures that players often encounter during the course of the game.

In view of such problems, in this embodiment, the "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table" shown in FIG. 33 has a characteristic configuration. Hereinafter, a detailed description will be given focusing on the "loss variation pattern distribution table 'FH1 to FH7'" which is selected in the case of a winning result.

<A. Features of the fluctuation pattern distribution table for winning during regular losses>
In this embodiment, the loss types include multiple types of losses A to C, and the lottery rates for these symbols are 95% for loss A, 4% for loss B, and 1% for loss C. (See the remarks column in Figure 4). Here, as shown in FIG. 33, if the special drawing 1 side loss A is won, one of the variable pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" is selected depending on the number of pending balls. However, if you win the special figure 1 side losing B, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5" will be selected regardless of the number of active pending balls, and if you win the special figure 1 side losing C, the number of active pending balls will be selected. Regardless, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH6" is selected. Furthermore, even when winning on the special drawing 2 side, the common variable pattern distribution table "FH7" is selected regardless of the number of pending balls.

These variable pattern distribution tables (FH1 to FH7) related to winnings during regular losses have the following characteristics (α) to (Δ). Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the variation pattern distribution table that is selected regardless of the number of balls on hold will also be referred to as a "common variation pattern distribution table."

(A-1. Variation pattern distribution table related to winning of special drawing 1 side normal medium losing A (variation pattern distribution table by number of reservations) "FH1 to FH4")
(α) Each of the loss variation pattern distribution tables “FH1 to FH4” has at least “a plurality of types of normal variations available for selection”. Specifically, when "FH1" is selected, normal variation 13s, normal variation 16s, or N reach 1 (variation time 26s) may be selected, and when "FH2" is selected , normal variation 13s, normal variation 16s, or N reach 1 may be selected. In addition, when "FH3" is selected, there is a possibility that normal fluctuation 8s or normal fluctuation 13s is selected, and when "FH4" is selected, normal fluctuation 4s or normal fluctuation 8s is selected. There is a possibility that The normal fluctuation 16s belongs to the "longest normal fluctuation (longest normal fluctuation pattern) type" which has the longest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types, and the normal fluctuation 4s belongs to the "shortest normal fluctuation (shortest normal fluctuation pattern) type" which has the shortest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types. It belongs to the "normal fluctuation pattern) type". In this embodiment, the "normal variation 16s", which has a variation time that is approximately the same as the "normal variation 16s for look-ahead notice", has a different selection rate depending on the number of active pending balls (the number of pending memories). It has a configuration that allows selection (decision).
Note that (Z1) the present invention can include a loss variation pattern distribution table in which the longest normal variation and/or the shortest normal variation can be selected at different selection rates depending on the number of pending pitches. (Z2) The present invention also provides a first specific variation pattern (for example, a normal variation of 16 seconds) and a shortened variation pattern (for example, a normal variation of 4 seconds) with a shorter variation time than the first specific variation pattern, depending on the number of balls on hold. , normal variation 8s or normal variation 13s), and a variation time that is approximately the same as the variation time of the first specific variation pattern regardless of the number of balls on hold. It is possible to include a second loss variation pattern distribution table that can determine a second specific variation pattern (for example, 16s of normal variation for look-ahead notice). (Z3) The present invention also provides a first loss variation pattern distribution table that can determine the first specific variation pattern (for example, normal variation 16s) at different selection rates depending on the number of balls on hold; a second loss variation pattern distribution table capable of determining a second specific variation pattern (for example, a normal variation of 16 seconds for look-ahead notice) having a variation time that is substantially the same as the variation time of the first specific variation pattern without depending on the can be included. In this case, the selection rate of the first specific variation pattern (normal variation 16s) can be configured to be different for each number of active pending balls.

Therefore, if we focus on the overall picture of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4", when winning a loss (in this embodiment, loss A), which the player often encounters in the course of the game, the number of balls on hold is relatively low. If there are many (2 to 3 pending balls), a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected, and if there are relatively few activated balls (0 to 1 pending), the variation pattern will have a relatively short variation time. Relatively long fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. As a result, the fluctuation time can be appropriately slowed down, contributing to a reduction in the occurrence rate of fluctuation slump, and the player feels as if the balls on hold are accumulating and spinning. In addition, in the loss variation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4", the normal variation is selected with a high probability, and as the number of pending balls decreases, the probability of selecting the reach variation becomes higher. The reach variation to be selected is "N reach (reach variation with a relatively short variation time)" which belongs to the low expected reach. As a result, expectations of winning will not be incited in the event of a loss. According to the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4" according to the present embodiment, a well-balanced structure that contributes to a reduction in the occurrence rate of fluctuation slump and does not recklessly arouse the expectation of winning in the event of a loss. It becomes possible to generate a symbol variation display game.

In addition, in the loss variation pattern distribution tables "FH1" and "FH2", "reach variation (reach variation)" can be selected, in other words, reach variation is selected when the number of pending balls is relatively small. Although this configuration is possible, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the reach variation can be selected only in the variation pattern distribution table "FH1", that is, a configuration in which the reach variation is selected only when the number of pending pitches is the smallest. Further, in the variation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4", only the normal variation may be selected.

In this embodiment, when normal fluctuation types are distinguished by the length of fluctuation time, fluctuation patterns of 10 seconds or more, such as normal fluctuation 16s type and normal fluctuation 13s type, are treated as "long fluctuation patterns" whose fluctuation time is relatively long. . On the other hand, fluctuation patterns of less than 10 seconds, such as the normal fluctuation 4s type and the normal fluctuation 8s type, are treated as "short fluctuation patterns" whose fluctuation time is relatively short. The reason for this distinction is that in a general pinball game machine, if the game ball is continuously fired for about 10 seconds, it is thought that a ball with suspended operation will occur with a high probability. In the case of this embodiment, short fluctuation patterns include normal fluctuations 4s and 8s that can be selected during normal fluctuations, as well as normal fluctuations that can be selected during definite fluctuations (normal fluctuation 2s during small series, small fluctuation 8s). There are normal fluctuations that can be selected during time saving (such as 8s of normal fluctuation during time saving, etc.: see Figure 35), and normal fluctuations that can be selected during time saving (such as 4s of normal fluctuation during time saving, 8s of normal fluctuation during time saving: see Figure 41), but such short fluctuation patterns It is likely to be selected when there is a large number of balls currently in play, or in a gaming state involving an "electrical support state" where balls in play are likely to occur.

(β) Loss fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" are determined such that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern with the highest selection rate (high frequency fluctuation pattern) among the fluctuation patterns determined by each is different ( The fluctuation time of the high-frequency fluctuation pattern differs depending on the number of balls on hold). Specifically, regarding the fluctuation time of the high frequency fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time is long in this order of "FH4 (pending 3), FH3 (pending 2), FH2 (pending 1), FH1 (pending 0)". It is determined that it will become. In other words, it is determined that as the number of pending balls decreases, the fluctuation time of the high frequency fluctuation pattern becomes relatively long. In the case of this embodiment, the high frequency fluctuation pattern is "normal fluctuation (normal fluctuation pattern)" (high frequency normal fluctuation pattern), and specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1" is used. In case of , "normal fluctuation is 16 seconds", in case of "FH2", "normal fluctuation is 13 seconds", in case of "FH3", "normal fluctuation is 8 seconds", and in case of "FH4", "normal fluctuation is 4 seconds". In addition, when the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4" is selected, the average fluctuation time (average execution time of one symbol fluctuation display game) is "FH4 (on hold 3), FH3 (on hold 2), FH2 (Pending 1), FH1 (Pending 0)'' in this order, the average fluctuation time is determined to be a long time. In other words, it is determined that the average fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of pending balls decreases.

(A-2. Common fluctuation pattern distribution table when winning regular medium special drawing 1 side losing B: "FH5")
(γ) The loss variation pattern distribution table “FH5” allows selection of variation pattern types with winning expectations of “less than SPSP reach type (highest expected reach type)”. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, in addition to the N reach type and the SP reach type, the "longest normal variation type" which has the longest variation time among the normal variation types can be selected. Specifically, the "SPSP reach type (developed SPSP reach, direct SPSP reach)" which has a higher winning expectation than the "SP reach type" (has a longer fluctuation time than the SP reach type) is not selected. The average fluctuation time when this loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5" is selected is relatively longer than the aforementioned loss fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH4".

(A-3. Common fluctuation pattern distribution table when winning the normal medium special drawing 1 side loss C: "FH6")
(δ) In the loss variation pattern distribution table "FH6", at least the "SPSP reach type" can be selected, that is, the highest expected level reach variation type can be selected. In other words, it can be said that the table configuration is such that the reach variation with the longest variation time among the reach variations is selected. In the case of this embodiment, only the SPSP reach types (developed type SPSP reach, direct hit type SPSP reach) can be selected, as shown in the figure. Therefore, the average fluctuation time when the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH6" is selected is longer (the longest average fluctuation time ).

(Special figure 2 side common fluctuation pattern distribution table when winning in normal medium: "FH7")
(ε) Loss fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH7” is a fluctuation pattern distribution table when the special drawing 2 side loses and wins. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, only the normal variation type (here, normal variation 16s) is selected. That is, if a reach occurs during the special symbol variation display game 2 (during the special symbol variation 2) during normal play, the winning confirmation is notified at that time. The reason why there are fewer types of fluctuation patterns at the time of losing winnings on the special drawing 2 side than on the special drawing 1 side is as described below. During normal times, there is no electric support, there are almost no prizes entered into the lower starting port 35, and it is rare for the special map 2 operation reserved ball to occur. Therefore, there is no need to be able to select a wide variety of variation patterns, and providing a wide variety of variation patterns blindly would lead to an increase in control burden.

The above-mentioned "fluctuation pattern distribution table related to losing winnings" can provide the following effects.

(A) The loss types include multiple types of losses A to C, and the lottery rates for these symbols are 95% for loss A, 4% for loss B, and 1% for loss C (the lottery probability is high or low). The relationship is "Loss A > Loss B > Loss C" (see the remarks column in Figure 4). In the present embodiment, by utilizing the relationship between the symbol lottery rates, in the case of winning the losing A in the normal mode, a plurality of short fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times are selected when there are relatively many pending balls. If there are relatively few balls on hold, a plurality of long variation patterns with different variation times are likely to be selected. Furthermore, when losing A is won, reach variation is selected with a lower probability than when losing B or C is winning. As a result, a structure in which symbol fluctuations with long fluctuation times do not occur recklessly, in other words, an appropriate speed and speed are exhibited in the fluctuation time, which not only contributes to lowering the occurrence rate of fluctuation slump, but also allows balls to be held in action to accumulate and spin. It is possible to generate a well-balanced execution time of a symbol variation display game in which the player feels as if the player is playing the game (for example, see (α) to (δ) above).
(B) In addition, in the case of winning a loss A during normal play, the smaller the number of pending balls, the longer the average fluctuation time (average execution time of one symbol fluctuation display game) becomes. In other words, the greater the number of pending balls, the shorter the average fluctuation time (for example, see (α) and (β) above). As a result, the execution time of the symbol fluctuation display game is not unnecessarily prolonged, the occurrence rate of fluctuation slump can be suppressed, and the occurrence rate of overflow of the operation-held ball can also be suppressed. Execution time can be incurred. This is particularly suitable during "normal play" where the stay period can be long in terms of game progress.
(Γ) Also, if you win loser A during normal times, normal variation will be selected with higher probability than reach variation, and if you win loser B, low expectation reach types (N reach and SP reach) will be selected with higher probability. is selected, and if you win the loss C, the high expectation reach type (advanced SPSP reach, direct SPSP reach) is selected with high probability (for example, see (α) to (δ) above). In other words, in most cases of losing, a performance related to the normal variation (normal variation performance) is displayed, and the reach performance can be made to appear at an appropriate frequency. This prevents players from becoming overly excited about their expectations of winning. In addition, interest in the game (expectation of winning) can be greatly increased by the highly anticipated reach performance that appears rarely.
(Δ) During probability variation or time saving, a common variation pattern distribution table is selected regardless of the type of loss and the number of pending pitches (see (ζ) above). This reduces the program capacity and significantly reduces the control burden.

(Third characteristic element)
In addition, in this embodiment, as already explained, "normal variation 16s for advance notice" and "N reach 1 for advance notice" are provided. These fluctuation patterns are defined as fluctuation patterns for advance notice, and have the following characteristics.
(A) As shown in FIG. 33, the variation time of "Normal variation 16s for lookahead notice" is approximately the same as the variation time of "Normal variation 16s" belonging to the non-lookahead notice variation pattern type, and "Normal variation for lookahead notice The fluctuation time of "Reach 1" is approximately the same as the fluctuation time of "N Reach 1" which belongs to the non-pre-reading notice fluctuation pattern type. These fluctuation patterns belong to long fluctuation patterns. In the case of this embodiment, "16 seconds of normal variation for advance notice" and "16 seconds of normal variation" are defined as the longest variation time among the normal variation types (belonging to the longest normal variation type).
(B) Also, as shown in FIG. 33, "16s of normal fluctuations for look-ahead notice" and "16s of normal fluctuations" are the same type of fluctuation patterns, but the values of the winning commands are different. In addition, "N Reach 1 for advance notice" and "N Reach 1" are also the same type of variation pattern, but the values of the commands at the time of winning are different.
(C) “Normal variation 16s for look-ahead notice” and “Normal variation 16s” are variation patterns that belong to low expectation variation patterns (normal variation type, N reach type), and their winning expectations are almost the same. be. Similarly, "N reach 1 for advance notice" and "N reach 1" are fluctuation patterns that belong to the low expectation fluctuation pattern, and their winning expectations are also approximately the same.

The functions of the above-mentioned "Normal variation 16s for look-ahead notice" and "N reach 1 for look-ahead notice" will be explained using the loss variation pattern distribution table in Figure 33, while touching on the relationship with the appearance control of lookahead notice. do.

Referring to FIG. 33, if loser A wins during the normal period, at the start of fluctuation, loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4" (variation pattern distribution table by number of reservations) according to the number of pending balls. Normal variation 16s or N reach 1 can be selected. In addition, in rare cases, loss B (symbol lottery rate 4%) is won, but in this case, it is selected in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5" (common fluctuation pattern distribution table), and the normal fluctuation 16 seconds for advance notice is selected. Alternatively, "N reach 1 for advance notice" may be selected. Here, in the "regular game" where the period of stay can be long while playing the game, the game situation that the player is most likely to encounter is the winning of loss A (symbol lottery rate of 95%).

Therefore, as a first effect, when a variation pattern with a low expectation degree is selected, a pre-read notice is not excessively displayed, and the player's expectation of winning is not unduly stimulated.
Moreover, as a second effect, when the operation-reserved ball related to the advance notice is used in a symbol variation display game, the expectation of winning due to the advance notice can be maintained for a long time. To be more specific, when generating a prefetch notice related to a short variation pattern such as normal variation 4s or normal variation 8s, the execution time of the symbol variation display game related to the operation pending ball that is the target of the prefetch notice is short, so Even the preview performance that was announced was not shown and ended quickly. In addition, if the execution time of the symbol change display game is short, a flashing white hold icon (suggesting a step-up hold change notice) may be displayed, or an occurrence that suggests a step-up hold change notice using hold K during game execution. It ends quickly without stirring up any sense of anticipation. Such a case leaves the player wondering, ``What on earth was the point of that pre-read notice?'' However, in the case of this embodiment, "16 seconds of normal variation for lookahead notice" and "N reach 1 for lookahead notice" belong to a long variation pattern (in the case of this embodiment, the longest normal variation). This can prevent problems from occurring.

In addition, although there is a difference between "16s of normal fluctuations for advance notice" and "16s of normal fluctuations" in terms of whether or not they are subject to advance notice, it is possible to configure the same effect to be executed during the symbol fluctuation display game for both. This is preferable (the same applies to the relationship between "N reach 1 for advance notice" and "N reach 1"). In other words, the "normal variation 16s" for non-prefetching notices and the "normal variation 16s" for prefetching notices with approximately the same (including the same) variation time as this, the same production mode for the production during symbol variation. No matter which variation pattern is selected, the player is made to recognize that the same variation pattern has been selected in terms of performance. In this way, by distinguishing the variation patterns that are the same in content but have different selection rates into those for non-pre-reading notices and those for pre-reading notices, in the event of a loss, a moderate amount of pre-reading notices can be made to prevent excessive pre-reading. By preventing the advance notice from being executed, it is possible to moderately arouse the player's expectation of winning (preventing the player from feeling stressed due to the appearance of excessive advance notice). ). It should be noted that the "same performance" as used herein preferably refers to the same performance mode, including at least the fluctuating display of decorative patterns (decorative design performance described later) and the preview performance; /Or the "preview performance" may be the same. However, in order to make it look like the same performance, it is preferable that the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is different, but the other effects are the same. Further, it is also possible to provide only one or more normal variation types for lookahead that have the same function as "normal fluctuation 16s for lookahead notice", or only N reach type for lookahead that has the same function as "N reach 1 for lookahead notice". One or more may be provided.

Furthermore, as already explained, "normal variation 16s" and/or "N reach 1" may be determined as the prefetched notice variation pattern. In this case, the appearance rate of the look-ahead notice is determined to be lower than the "normal variation 16 seconds for look-ahead notice" and/or the "N reach 1 for look-ahead notice". For example, regarding the appearance rate (execution rate) of pre-read notices, there is a relationship that satisfies "normal variation 16s<normal variation for pre-read notices 16 seconds" and a relationship that satisfies "N reach 1<N reach 1 for pre-read notices".

Although not shown in the figure, the variable pattern distribution table is provided with a variable pattern distribution table corresponding to the set values (settings 1 to 6). In other words, the probability that one or more specific variation patterns will be drawn may vary depending on the setting value, and for example, setting inference factors may be given based on differences in the appearance rate of effects related to the specific variation pattern. is now possible.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11 again, when the starting opening winning random number determination process in step S320 is finished, a "winning command" is created based on the command data determined in the starting opening winning random number determining process, and this is used for production control. 24 (step S321). In addition, if pre-reading is prohibited or if an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the pre-reading prohibited data "9FH" is maintained as is, and a winning command with "pre-reading prohibited data" is sent to the production control unit 24. It turns out. In this case, an appropriate value, for example, "B3H" is acquired as the value on the upper byte (MODE1) side, and a winning command (B39FH) that prohibits pre-reading is transmitted.

Next, a "pending addition command" that specifies the number of pending balls at the time of pre-reading determination is created (step S322), and transmitted to the effect control section 24 (step S323). This "pending addition command" consists of 2 bytes, including the upper byte (MODE) side that specifies whether the activated pending ball that is the target of pre-reading this time is on the special drawing 1 side or the special drawing 2 side, and the upper byte (MODE) side when winning a prize. and a lower byte (EVENT) side that specifies the number of pending pitches. The hold addition command is used by the performance control unit 24 to notify the hold display areas 76 and 77 of information regarding the current number of held balls when an active hold ball occurs, or when a pre-read preview effect is executed. is also used when displaying a pre-read notice regarding the pending notice.

When the above-mentioned winning command and pending addition command are transmitted from the main control unit 20, the performance control unit 24 that has received them sends a pre-read notice if the information included in the command is “other than the pre-read prohibition designation”. A lottery is held to determine whether or not the ball can be executed (a pre-read notice lottery), and if the lottery is won, a pre-read notice production scenario is created, and based on that scenario, the execution of the pre-read notice for the current pending ball is controlled. . On the other hand, if "pre-reading prohibition designation" is specified, the pre-reading notice lottery will not be executed, or the pre-reading notice lottery will be executed but the lottery result will be forcibly treated as a loss (not executing the advance notice effect), and the pre-reading notice lottery will be executed. Prohibit the occurrence of This embodiment is configured to send a winning command specifying that pre-reading is prohibited, either when pre-reading is prohibited or when an abnormal setting error occurs.The reason for this is as follows. .

In the case of this embodiment, even if a setting abnormality error occurs, the gaming operation is not forcibly stopped. The first reason for this is that, as explained above, setting abnormal errors can be resolved by changing settings, but changing settings during business hours is a matter of incitement to gambling from the perspective of legal requirements. There is a high possibility that it falls under the prohibited items. Second, if the game operation process is forcibly stopped immediately when an abnormal setting error occurs, the player will become distrustful of the sudden stop of the game. For example, if a symbol fluctuation display game in progress is executed during normal operation, or if a jackpot game is in progress, an abnormal setting error may occur and the game will be immediately disabled. If this happens, the profits that the player should have originally gained are lost, leading to a sense of distrust among the players. Taking these circumstances into consideration, when an abnormal setting error occurs, the error is only notified and the game itself is allowed to proceed, although there are conditions. The reason why I say "conditionally" is because if an abnormal setting error occurs, advance notice will be prohibited and the result of the symbol fluctuation display game will be forced to be a loss (see Figure 11). Step S317 (=5AH), refer to the processing route of Step S409 (=5AH) in FIG. 12, which will be described later).

As described above, the special figure 1 starting opening check process is exited, and subsequently, the special figure 2 starting opening checking process (step S302) is executed.

<12. Special symbol fluctuation start processing: Figure 12>
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) in FIG. 10 will be explained. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process.

In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls operated by special figure 2 is zero (step S401), and if the number of reserved balls operated by special figure 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), Processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) for the number of active pending pitches in FIG. 2 is executed. On the other hand, if the number of special figure 2 activated reserved balls is zero (step S401: YES), then it is determined whether the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is zero (step S402), and the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is determined. If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) targeting the number of special figure 1 action pending balls is executed. Through the processing of steps S401 and S402, the "priority" of which of the special figure 1 action reserved ball and the special figure 2 action reserved ball should be preferentially subjected to the variable display operation (which action reserved ball to be used) is determined. "Fluctuation rank" is determined. In this embodiment, when there are operation reservation balls in both the special figure 1 operation reservation sphere and the special figure 2 operation reservation sphere, the special figure 2 operation reservation sphere is preferentially extinguished.

In addition, when the number of active pending balls for both the special figure 2 active pending ball number and the special figure 1 active pending ball number is zero (step S401: YES, and step S402: YES), the state is "no active pending balls". becomes. This state of "no action pending ball" is when the special symbol is on standby and there is no pending memory. If the result is "no ball pending action", the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether the special symbol action status is "standby (00H)" indicating the state of "no ball pending action" ( Step S417).

If the special symbol operation status is "standby (01H)" when the above-mentioned "no operation pending ball" state is reached (step S417: NO) (processing during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 17A described later) (see step S472 in the middle), the special symbol operation status is switched to "standby (00H)" (step S418). Then, as a performance control command, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the performance control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited. When the performance control unit 24 receives the customer waiting command, it causes the customer waiting performance to appear, and then causes the "customer waiting performance (demonstration display)" to appear.

Furthermore, after the start of the customer waiting performance (demonstration display), if a predetermined transition condition (power saving mode transition condition) is satisfied, the performance control unit 24 ends the customer waiting performance and shifts to the "power saving mode". In the case of this embodiment, if a predetermined period of time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the customer waiting effect (demonstration screen) without any pending balls occurring and without switching to the menu screen (game setting screen). , the presentation mode is shifted to the power saving mode, a power saving screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, the words "Power saving" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen), and some or all of the decorative lamps 45 and other presentation LEDs are displayed. Control all lights to be turned off (power saving control).

If the number of special figure 1 operation reserved balls or the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. In addition, regarding the processing method of steps S403 to S416 explained below, the only difference is whether the target is the special figure 1 action reserved ball or the special figure 2 action reserved ball, and the contents are not substantial. is the same. Therefore, in order to avoid redundant description, unless there is a particular need, the explanation will be made without distinguishing which operation-holding ball the processing is intended for.

Proceeding to step S403, the number of pending balls on the special figure side to be used for the current variable display operation is subtracted by 1 (step S403), and a "holding subtraction command" including the information on the number of pending balls after the subtraction is sent to the production control unit 24. (step S404). When the effect control unit 24 receives this hold subtraction command, it performs effect processing regarding the shift display in the hold display unit.

Next, special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is data for specifying the special symbol type on the current variation start side, and if special symbol 1 is on the variation start side, it is "01H", and special symbol 2 is on the variation start side. If there is, "02H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the pending data stored in the pending storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the pending data stored in the pending storage area (pending 1 storage area) corresponding to the pending memory number n=1 is read out, and is stored in the random number storage area for judgment in the internal RAM. , the pending data stored in the pending storage areas corresponding to the pending n storage areas (n=2, 3, 4) are respectively stored in the pending storage areas corresponding to 'n-1' (step S406), and 4 storage area is cleared to provide a free space (step S407). As a result, the starting order of the special symbol fluctuation display game matches the order of the number of active pending balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the active pending ball acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is in any pending memory. It is specified whether the ball corresponds to the area, and it is possible to store a new operation-reserved ball.

Next, a game status information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the gaming state information transmission process, a "gaming state designation command" is transmitted to the production control section 24. The gaming state designation command here includes gaming state information that can specify the gaming state at the start of the game. When the production control section 24 receives this gaming state designation command, it grasps the current gaming state based on the information contained in this command, and sets the production mode in a manner that maintains consistency with the gaming state managed by the main control section 20 side. Manage. The gaming state information included in the gaming state designation command may be any minimum necessary information when performing the intended gaming process, for example, "internal gaming state (gaming state determination number YJ)" and/or "fluctuation pattern". The information may include "selection mode (Tcode)". In addition, as a gaming state specifying command, it is possible to send an "internal gaming information command" that can specify the gaming state determination number YJ and/or a "distribution mode specifying command" that can specify the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode). Good too. The gaming state information transmission process for transmitting such a gaming state designation command includes S477B, step S482, step S487, step S492, etc. during the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. 17B, which will be described later.

In addition, here, if necessary, if the time is in the time saving state, a "time saving number command (information regarding the special symbol time saving number counter)" that can specify the remaining time saving number is sent, and if in the variable probability state, the remaining ST number is transmitted. Sends an identifiable "ST number command (information regarding special symbol probability change number counter)". Based on the information included in these commands, the production control unit 24 grasps the remaining number of time reductions and the remaining number of STs, and displays a "remaining number display effect" that visually announces the remaining number of time reductions or the remaining number of STs. (In the case of this embodiment, the above-mentioned remaining time reduction number notification effect is displayed). If an infinite type of benefit is granted due to a jackpot or support time reduction, specifically, "infinite time reduction" with no limit on the number of time reductions, "infinite definite change", "infinite potential certainty" with no limit on the number of STs, or If an infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, or infinite potential is granted, which can be considered as an infinite number of times, in the gaming state during the benefit, time reduction number commands and ST number commands should not be sent in order to reduce the control burden. It can be configured as follows.

(Processing route when the setting value is normal: Processing route that follows S410)
Next, it is determined whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S409). If the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409:≠5AH), a setting value command is sent to the performance control unit 24, and then a random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is executed (step S410). In this special electric accessory actuation random number determination process, the random number for jackpot determination is used to execute a "winning/losing lottery at the start of variation" targeting the operation pending balls that will be used for the current variation display operation. The basic processing procedure of this process is the same as the random number determination process of step S318 in FIG. 11, which has already been described, so the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

(13. Random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessories: Figure 13)
FIG. 13 shows details of the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory (step S410).
In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first obtains the "hit random number determination table (FIG. 26)" corresponding to the current processing target side based on the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type information on the current fluctuation start side) ( Step S941). For example, if the current fluctuation is on the side of special figure 1, the "hit random number determination table for special figure 1" is acquired, and if it is on the side of special figure 2, the "hit random number determination table for special figure 2" is acquired. Next, the random number value for jackpot determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired (step S942), and the random number determination process based on the random number value for jackpot determination and the acquired random number determination table (win or loss at the start of fluctuation) is performed. (lottery) (step S943). The random number determination process in step S943 has the same processing content as the random number determination process in step S318 in FIG.

Then, a determination flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM in accordance with the random number determination processing result (win or loss determination result) (step S944). If the lottery result is a "big hit" win, the jackpot determination flag is set to "5AH", and if it is not a jackpot win, that is, a 'lose', the jackpot determination flag is set to "00H". Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the support time reduction is also subject to the lottery, if the winning/loss lottery result is a "support time reduction" win, the support time reduction determination flag is set to "5AH" (see FIG. 26). Therefore, if the current random number determination processing result (win/loss lottery result) is a jackpot win, the "jackpot determination flag = "5AH", support time saving determination flag = "00H"", and if the support time shortening win, the "jackpot determination flag = "00H"". = "00H", support time saving determination flag = "5AH", but if it is a loss, "jackpot determination flag = "00H", support time saving determination flag = "00H"" are stored.

Next, special stop symbol creation processing is executed (step S411). In this special stop symbol creation process, the "symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation" is executed using the winning/losing lottery result in step S410 and the random number value for special symbol determination. The basic processing procedure of this process is the same as the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) shown in FIG. 11 that has already been explained, so the explanation will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

In the special stop symbol creation process of step S411, first, with reference to the symbol table selection table shown in FIG. Based on this, symbol tables (jackpot symbol table, losing symbol table, support time-saving symbol table: see FIGS. 29 to 31) are obtained. For example, if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the jackpot determination flag is 5AH, that is, if the current fluctuation start side is the 'special figure 1 side' and the winning/losing lottery result is 'jackpot', then the 'special figure 1 jackpot symbol table” is selected. Then, the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired, a symbol lottery is executed based on the selected symbol table and the random number value for special symbol determination, and the special symbol determination result is the lottery result. The data and special stop symbol number are respectively stored in corresponding areas of the in-area RAM.

(Number of consecutive games counter (means for counting the number of consecutive games))
In addition, in the special stop symbol creation process, based on the result of the symbol lottery, a process of counting the number of consecutive wins regarding the above-mentioned variable probability mode is also performed. Here, when winning a winning type for which the number of consecutive wins is counted (for example, a probability-variable jackpot: see FIG. 5E (a)), the consecutive winnings counter is incremented by 1. This makes it possible to manage how many consecutive jackpot games will be executed after the current winning game. However, if all jackpots are to be counted as the number of successive wins, counting processing can also be performed based on the results of the winning/losing lottery. In this case, it can be performed, for example, in step S410, a random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessories (winning/losing lottery process). Specifically, in the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory, that is, in the winning/losing lottery, when a winning type that is to be counted is won, the consecutive winnings counter may be incremented by 1.

Note that instead of counting up the current number of consecutive games by incrementing the number of consecutive games counter by 1, a countdown method may be used in which the number of consecutive games is determined by decrementing from the initial value. Specifically, when transitioning to the normal state or clearing the RAM, the initial value of the consecutive game counter is set to "07H". Then, each time a winning type to be counted is won, the consecutive winnings counter is decremented by 1 until it becomes zero. In this case, if the value of the number of consecutive games counter is "06H", it indicates the first win (first consecutive game), and if it is "05H" to "00H", it means the second to seventh consecutive game. shows. Therefore, in the case of the countdown method, if the value of the consecutive winnings counter is "06H" to "04H" (1st to 3rd consecutive winnings) in the game state transition preparation process of step S412 described later, the probability variable mode 1 is selected. The data for transition is set in the buffer, and if it is "03H" to "01H" (4th to 6th consecutive shot), the data for transition to variable mode 2 is buffer set, and if it is "00H", Data for transitioning to variable probability mode 3 is set in the buffer (see the remarks column in FIG. 42).

It should be noted that the present invention does not have to be configured such that the game mode can be changed depending on the number of consecutive games, as in the probability variable mode shown in FIG. 7A. is not necessary. For example, there may be a case where there is only one game mode during a specific game mode, or a case where the game mode can be changed depending on the number of games to be executed as shown in FIG. 7A.

After finishing the special stop symbol creation process in step S411, a game state transition preparation process is executed (step S412). In this gaming state transition preparation process, necessary setting processing is performed to specify the gaming state to which the player will transition in the event of winning a jackpot or shortening support time.

(14. Game state transition preparation process: Figure 14)
FIG. 14 shows details of the gaming state transition preparation process (step S412).
In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the jackpot determination flag (step S911). When the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S911:=5AH), the process proceeds to the gaming state transition table acquisition process of step S915, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the jackpot determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S911:≠5AH), then the state of the support time saving determination flag is determined (step S912).

If the support time reduction determination flag is ON (00H) (step S912:≠5AH), that is, if you have not won the jackpot or won the support time reduction, you are in the gaming state without doing anything. Exit the migration preparation process. If the support time reduction determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S912: = 5AH), then it is determined whether the support time reduction activation prohibition state is in progress (whether the support time reduction activation prohibition condition is satisfied or not). Determination is made (step S914).

(About support time reduction activation prohibited state)
The above-mentioned "support time reduction activation prohibition state" refers to a prohibition state that prohibits the support time reduction state from occurring. Specifically, it means a case where the processing state managed by the main control unit 20 side is under a specific state, for example, one or more "specific internal gaming states (normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, At least one internal gaming state of the potential state), one or more specific functions related to the gaming state (at least one of the following: special symbol probability change function, normal symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol time saving function, opening extension function) One or more specific game modes (for example, electric support state, quasi-electric support state where the normal symbol probability change function is inactive in electric support state), one or more “specific game modes ( At least one game mode of the normal mode, time-saving mode, variable probability mode, and probability mode, one or more "specific variation pattern selection modes," during a specific game (for example, a ceiling game described below), etc. The state to be adopted as the state in which the activation of support time reduction is prohibited can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay.

In this embodiment, a case where the normal state is not in effect is defined as the above-mentioned "support time reduction activation prohibited state," and a case where the normal state is in the normal state is defined as a "support time reduction activation allowed state" in which support time reduction activation is permitted (step S914 reference). Specifically, the definite variable state, the time saving state (the time saving state after a jackpot, the support time saving state, the ceiling time saving state described below), and the potential state (if a potential state is provided) are called the "Support time saving activation prohibited state". Even if a support time reduction is won during these internal gaming states, the occurrence of the support time reduction state is prohibited (restricted) (the support time reduction state is not activated). However, if you win during the normal state, the support time reduction state is allowed to occur. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, a case other than the normal state will be described as a "support time reduction activation prohibited state", in other words, at least a normal state will be described as a "support time reduction activation permitted state". Therefore, in the control technology of the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, when a support time reduction is won during a time reduction state (including a jackpot time reduction state, a support time reduction state, and a ceiling time reduction state described below) and/or a variable probability state, A configuration example that allows the occurrence (activation) of the support time reduction state is included.

In FIG. 14, when the support time saving determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S912:=5AH), and when the current gaming state is not the normal state (step S914: NO), steps S915 to S916 described below are performed. The process (the process for specifying the destination gaming state in the case of a jackpot win or support time saving win) is skipped, and the game state transition preparation process is exited. As a result, even if the support time reduction is won when the player is not in the normal state (the support time reduction activation prohibited state), the time reduction state is prohibited from occurring.

On the other hand, if it is in the normal state (support time saving activation permitted state) (step S914: YES), it is assumed that the support time saving activation is not prohibited, and the game state transition table acquisition process in step S915 and the state buffer setting process in step S916 are executed sequentially.

In the above gaming state transition table acquisition process (step S915), data specifying the destination gaming state is generated according to the winning type (special symbol determination data) determined by the symbol lottery and the gaming state determination number (YJ). The "gaming state transition table" shown in FIG. 42 in which the groups are defined is obtained. Then, referring to the acquired gaming state transition table, various data are stored in the corresponding state buffer (step S916).

The gaming state transition table shown in FIG. 42 is provided with JTTBL-1, JTTBL-4 to JTTBL-6 for specifying each gaming state (gaming mode). As shown in the figure, JTTBL-1, JTTBL-4 to JTTBL-6 are defined with data specifying the internal gaming state, and various data for shifting to variable probability modes 1 to 3 and time saving modes 1 to 3. There is. In this embodiment, "JTTBL1" is used for 10R and 4R variable jackpots, "JTTBL-4" is used for 4R time-saving jackpots, "JTTBL-4" is used for support time-saving A, and "JTTBL-4" is used for support time-saving C. In the case of support time reduction C, "JTTBL-6" is referred to. This specifies the gaming state when a jackpot is achieved (the gaming state after the jackpot game) and the gaming state when the support time reduction is won. In addition, in the case of special electric non-activated support time reduction, the gaming state after the end of the current game (support time reduction winning game), and in the case of special electric activation type support time reduction, the gaming state after the support time reduction opening/closing game is specified. (For example, see FIGS. 4 and 42).

Note that JTTBL-1 is data for transitioning to the variable probability state (variable probability mode 1), but as shown in the remarks column in the figure, the fluctuation pattern vibration is In the minute designation number buffer, "01H" to "03H" are set as appropriate.

In the case of a jackpot, the value stored in the state buffer is read out in the jackpot end process (step S509) shown in FIG. It is read out in the winning state flag setting process (step S477A) and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 203 (flag storage area and counter storage area corresponding to each status buffer). This specifies the gaming state to which the player will move when winning a jackpot or shortening support time. In addition, in the case of special electric activation type support time saving, the game state after the support time saving opening/closing game is specified.

The roles of the various status buffers mentioned above are as follows.
(α) "General symbol opening extension transition state buffer, normal symbol time-saving transition state buffer, normal symbol probability change transition state buffer, special symbol time-saving state transition state buffer, special symbol probability change transition state buffer"
Designation data of ON (in operation)/OFF (inactive) of each function for designating the internal gaming state is set. Specifically, the normal symbol time-saving state flag specifies the operating state of the normal symbol time-saving function, the normal symbol time-saving state flag specifies the operating state of the normal symbol probability change function, and the normal symbol time-saving state flag specifies the operating state of the normal symbol probability change function. Data is set for the symbol probability changing state flag, the special symbol time saving state flag specifying the operating state of the special symbol time saving function, and the special symbol probability changing state flag specifying the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function.
(β) “Special symbol time saving number counter buffer”
Data for specifying the number of time reductions (electronic support number) (data for the special symbol time reduction number counter) is set (see steps S478 to S481 in FIGS. 17A to 17B). The special symbol time saving number counter functions as a remaining time saving number counting means for counting the remaining number of time saving times.
(γ) “Special pattern definite change number counter buffer”
Data for specifying the ST number (data for the special symbol probability change number counter) is set (see steps S483 to S486 in FIG. 17B). The special symbol probability variation number counter functions as a remaining ST number counting means for counting the remaining number of ST times.
(δ) “Special symbol variation counter 1-3 buffer”
Data (data for the special symbol variation number counter) for specifying the number of continuations of a specific variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is set.
(ε) “Fluctuation pattern distribution specification number 1-3 buffer”
When a predetermined update condition is satisfied, data (data for the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)) specifying the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) to be updated is set. The update conditions include, for example, when the jackpot is won (step S475 in FIG. 17A), when the time saving ends (step S481 in FIG. 17B), when the probability change ends (step S486 in FIG. 17B), and when the special symbol change number counter becomes zero. (Steps S490 and S491 in FIG. 17B), when the jackpot game ends (S509 in FIG. 21), and when the support time reduction is won (Step S477A in FIG. 17B).

Next, special symbol variation pattern creation processing is executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, the symbol lottery result (result of the special stop symbol creation process in step S411), variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), setting value information (obtained as necessary), and operation pending ball A fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to the number (the number of existing action-reserved balls, excluding the action-reserved balls used for the current fluctuation display operation, 0 to 3 (see step S403)) is obtained.

Then, referring to the fluctuation pattern distribution table, based on the fluctuation pattern lottery using the random numbers for fluctuation patterns (obtained in the process of step S314 in FIG. 10), the operation pending balls to be used for the current fluctuation display operation are targeted. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. Next, a "variation pattern designation command" that can specify the contents of the determined variation pattern is created and transmitted to the production control section 24 side. In addition, since the basic processing procedure of this process is the same processing procedure as the starting opening winning time random number determination process of step S320 of FIG. 11 which has already been explained, the explanation will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

The special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S413 includes the following processes (A) to (F).

(A) "Fluctuation pattern distribution table determination process at the start of fluctuation" for selecting (determining) the "fluctuation pattern distribution table" to be referred to this time;
(B) "Variation pattern determination processing" which refers to the "Variation pattern distribution table" determined in (A) above and determines a fluctuation pattern according to the random value for fluctuation patterns;
(C) Determine the fluctuation time (including the additional time required for pseudo-association) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern determination process, "Fluctuating time setting process" to be set to "
(D) A "command transmission process" for transmitting a "variation pattern designation command" capable of specifying the contents of the variation pattern obtained in (B) above to the effect control section 24. Note that the variation pattern determination process (B) is a process of acquiring command data of a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern.

At the start of the variation, unlike at the time of winning (at the time of pre-reading determination), the variation pattern distribution table can be selected in consideration of the number of pending balls (the number of pending balls at the start of the variation in step S403). Once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the command data for the upper byte side (MODE 2: specifying whether it is a hit or miss) and the lower byte side (EVENT: fluctuation pattern information) for configuring the "variation pattern specification command" is determined. . As a result, a fluctuation pattern designation command is determined, and the contents of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation are designated.

As the fluctuation pattern is determined, a fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is determined. In addition, this variation time becomes the game time (variation display time (performance time) of decorative symbols) of the decorative symbol variation display game that is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display game.

The information regarding the fluctuation pattern determined in this way includes at least the winning/losing lottery results (in the case of this embodiment, detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command), the current gaming state, and the fluctuation time. information, execution designation information of a specific preview performance (the presence or absence of a reach performance and its type, pseudo-link designation information), etc. The main control unit 20 transmits a “variation pattern specification command” whose contents can be specified to the production control unit 24, and the information included in this variation pattern specification command is used by the production control unit 24 to determine the current game. It is used when determining such performance scenarios (fluctuating displays of decorative patterns, various preview performances, etc.).

(Regarding fluctuation patterns related to support time reduction winnings while support time reduction activation is prohibited)
By the way, in this embodiment, even if the support time reduction is won during the support time reduction activation prohibited state (in the case of this embodiment, the time reduction state or the variable probability state), the winning flag (support time reduction determination flag = 5AH) is a special symbol. The winning flag is maintained without being cleared until the fluctuation pattern creation process (step S413) is finished, and the winning flag is cleared in the support time saving flag management process in step S422, which will be described later. In other words, if the support time reduction is won while the support time reduction activation is prohibited, the winning itself is not simply treated as invalid (treated as a loss) and the variation pattern related to the loss is selected, but the variation pattern related to the support time reduction win is selected. This makes it possible to expand the degree of freedom in terms of presentation and to provide a rich variety of presentations (variable presentations) during the game. However, if you select a variation pattern related to a short support time win without taking any measures, you will be notified that the current game result is a short support win even though the support time short state is not activated. Problems such as this may occur.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the support time reduction is won while the support time reduction activation is prohibited, an effect is displayed to notify that the final game result is a loss. For example, if you win the support time reduction B on the special map 2 side in the probability change mode 1 (for small rentals) in the probability change state, regardless of whether the support time reduction activation is prohibited, Direct hit reach 1 or direct hit reach 2 will be selected by referring to the "Win/Support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table", but in the case of a support time-saving win, the support time-saving win will be announced as the production result of the reach. Instead, it will notify you that you have lost.
To put it simply, the fluctuating performance related to the variation pattern that can be selected when the support time reduction is won while the support time reduction is prohibited (hereinafter also referred to as the "support winning variation pattern while the support time reduction is prohibited") and the effect when the support time reduction is not prohibited. This is a different performance from the fluctuating performance related to the fluctuating pattern that can be selected (hereinafter also referred to as "normal support winning fluctuating pattern"). For example, different reach effects are executed, the appearance rate of reach effects are different, one variation pattern executes a specific reach effect but the other variation pattern does not execute a specific reach effect, one variation pattern is specific For example, a normal variation of one pattern is selected, but a specific normal variation is not selected for the other variation pattern. Further, for example, the support winning variation pattern during activation prohibition may be configured such that a loss variation pattern related to the current gaming state can be selected (if it is in a time saving state, a loss variation pattern related to the time saving state is selected).
In particular, if Direct Reach 1, which is also selected when winning a jackpot, is selected, it is possible to create a tense reach performance that incites the winning of a jackpot and then announces the loss in the end. becomes. Further, the direct hit reach 2 which is not selected when winning a jackpot can function as a reach effect for diversifying the reach effect. Further, even in the case of selecting the variation pattern related to the support time-saving winning during the time-saving state shown in FIG. 40, the same event as the case of FIG. 34 described above may occur. In other words, regardless of whether or not the support time reduction activation is prohibited, the variation pattern related to the support time reduction winning in the current gaming state can be selected, and then depending on whether the support time reduction activation is prohibited, This is a variation pattern selection technique that changes the content of the performance. Since the current gaming state is known by the production control unit 24 through the gaming state specifying command, etc., even if the same fluctuation pattern specifying command is sent whether the support time reduction activation is prohibited or not. , it is possible to make different performance contents appear. Alternatively, the main control unit 20 side is configured to be able to transmit information (command specifying the support time saving activation prohibited state) that can specify whether or not the support time saving activation is prohibited to the production control unit 24 side. It's okay.

However, the present invention is not limited to the variation pattern selection technique described above, and may be applied to the following technique.
For example, in order to make it possible to select support winning fluctuation patterns while activation is prohibited, a dedicated fluctuation pattern distribution table (special fluctuation pattern distribution table) is separately provided, and when support time reduction activation is prohibited, the fluctuation pattern distribution is It is possible to configure one or more variation patterns to be selectable by referring to a table. If the support winning variation pattern is selected while activation is prohibited, a corresponding effect may be displayed, but in any case, since the activation of support time reduction is prohibited, even if support time reduction is won, the final On the target (game result), a performance content (a consistent performance) that informs that the support time reduction has not been won is displayed.

In addition, the support winning fluctuation pattern while activation is prohibited is, for example, a fluctuation that belongs to the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (FIG. 35, FIG. 37, FIG. 39, FIG. The variation pattern may be the same as one or more of the patterns. In this case, the support winning variation pattern while activation is prohibited may be either the reach variation pattern or the normal variation (no reach loss variation pattern), but from the point that even if the support time reduction state is won, the support time reduction state will not be activated. , preferably a normal variation. Although there is no particular restriction on what kind of variation time the normal variation has, it is preferable that the variation time be the shortest in consideration of the fact that the variation pattern is similar to that of a loss.
In addition, when selecting a supported winning variation pattern while activation is prohibited, if the current gaming state is in a variable probability state, select the loss variation pattern related to the variable probability state, and if the current gaming state is in a time saving state, select the losing variation pattern in the time saving state. Such a loss variation pattern may be selected. Further, when the support time saving activation is prohibited (during the probability variable state and the time saving state), a configuration may be adopted in which a loss variation pattern related to a specific gaming state is selected. As the "specific gaming state", for example, at least one of a time saving state, a variable probability state, and a normal state can be defined.
In addition, if the same variation pattern as the loss variation pattern related to the time-saving state or the variable probability state is configured to be selectable as the supported winning variation pattern while activation is prohibited, the variation pattern designation command shall be different from the said loss variation pattern. be able to. As a result, even if a variation pattern with the same content is selected, the performance control unit 24 side can grasp whether it is a supported winning variation pattern while activation is prohibited or a normal losing variation pattern, so each variation pattern It is possible to make a production (different production) corresponding to the

In addition, if the activation of support time reduction is not prohibited, and if the configuration is configured to allow the appearance of a preview performance that incites support time reduction winning (for example, support time reduction winning notification performance), the performance related to the support winning fluctuation pattern while activation is prohibited. (hereinafter also referred to as "specific support winning performance") preferably does not include support time-saving winning preview performance. As a support time-saving winning preview performance, multiple choice images are displayed (for example, "Support time-saving confirmed (high expectation of winning)", "Support time-saving?! (medium expectation of winning)", "Loss (low expectation of winning)" (e.g., multiple choice images that indicate the expectation of winning the support time reduction) are displayed on the screen), and depending on the content of the image that is finally selected from among them, the expectation of winning the support time reduction and the content of the support time reduction win will be displayed. Examples include suggestive performances. It is preferable that the specific support winning performance does not include such a support time-saving winning preview performance. Naturally, the performance result of the specific support winning performance does not notify the winning of the support time reduction.

Furthermore, if a pending activation ball related to a support time saving win occurs during the support time reduction activation inhibited state, it is preferable that at least a pre-read notice targeting the activation pending ball is not executed. In other words, even if the activation of support time reduction is prohibited, it is possible to configure the system so that the pre-read notice for the pending balls related to jackpot winnings and/or the pending balls of losers is not prohibited.

Note that FIGS. 34, 36, and 38 illustrate fluctuation pattern distribution tables for cases in which the variable probability state is in effect, and FIG. If the structure is such that the activation of support time reduction is not prohibited during the time reduction state or the time reduction state, the performance result at the time of support time reduction winning can be determined as being announced as the support time reduction winning.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process in step S413 is finished, the fluctuating flag corresponding to the current fluctuation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The above-mentioned "fluctuating flag" is a flag that indicates which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is fluctuating, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the special symbol is fluctuating. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, a "special symbol 1 fluctuating flag" corresponding to special symbol 1 and a "special symbol 2 fluctuating flag" corresponding to special symbol 2 are handled. For example, if the special symbol 1 side is the current processing target (fluctuation start side), the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag is set to ON, and the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag is set to OFF.

Next, a decorative symbol designation command that can specify the symbol lottery result information obtained in the special stop symbol creation process of step S411 is acquired, and this is transmitted to the performance control section 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command includes information regarding the special symbol type on the fluctuation side and the winning type (design lottery result). This decorative symbol designation command is mainly used to control the combination of decorative symbols when forming a ready-to-reach state (symbol types whose constituent elements are ready-to-reach symbols), the combination of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop symbols), It is used to determine the preview effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variation display game. When the performance control unit 24 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command, it determines the performance to be performed during the symbol fluctuation display game (fluctuation performance) based on the information included in these commands, and Start the decorative pattern variation display game.

Next, support time saving flag management processing is executed (step S422). In this support time-saving flag management process, if it is determined that the support time-saving is won in the random number determination process for determining the special electric accessory activation (step S410), the support time-saving flag management process Then, a process is performed to clear the support time reduction determination flag.

(15. Support time saving flag management process: Figure 15)
FIG. 15 shows details of the support time saving flag management process (step S422). This support time saving flag management process has two processing forms shown in FIGS.
In the support time-saving flag management process shown in FIG. 3A, the CPU 201 first determines whether the state is normal (whether the support time-saving activation is prohibited) (step S962). If it is not in the normal state (step S962: NO), the support time reduction determination flag is cleared as the win is in the support time reduction activation prohibited state (step S963), and if it is in the normal state (step S962; YES). ), the process is exited without doing anything, assuming that the user has not won while the support time reduction activation is prohibited.

On the other hand, in the support time saving flag management process shown in Figure (b), first. The state of the support time reduction determination flag is determined (step S960). If the support time saving determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S960:≠5AH), the process exits without doing anything. On the other hand, if the support time reduction determination flag is in the OFF state (5AH) (step S960: = 5AH), it is determined whether or not the normal state is present (step S962), as in the case of FIG. If (step S962: NO), the support time saving determination flag is cleared (step S963), and if the normal state is in effect (step S962; YES), the process exits without doing anything.

(Regarding special stop symbols related to support time reduction winnings while support time reduction activation is prohibited)
(Mangoku 11) In this embodiment, even if the occurrence of the support time reduction state is prohibited, the support time reduction winning information (support time reduction determination flag) is maintained until the support time reduction flag management process is executed. The above-mentioned special stop symbol number corresponding to the short-time winning is acquired in step S411. Therefore, even when the support time saving activation is prohibited, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b (7 segments) display not a special symbol corresponding to a loss, but a message corresponding to the winning support time saving type (support time saving A to C). The special symbol will be stopped and displayed. However, in this case, although it is possible to clearly notify that the support time reduction has been won, on the other hand, it will be announced that the support time reduction will not be activated even though the support time reduction has been won, so the special stop symbol type For players who know this, they will feel a sense of loss. Therefore, a special stop pattern corresponding to a loss (in the case of this embodiment, a special stop pattern corresponding to any of losses A to C) may be configured to stop for the special stop pattern during the support time reduction activation prohibited state. good. In addition, in this embodiment, losses A to C are defined for the special drawing 1 side and losing A is defined for the special drawing 2 side, so in the case of a short support time win for the special drawing 1 side, one of the losses A to C is determined. It is preferable to stop displaying the special stop symbol corresponding to , and in the case of a support time saving win on the special drawing 2 side, to stop display the special stop symbol corresponding to loss A.
In addition, the special stop symbol is the same in the case where the support time reduction is won while the support time reduction activation is prohibited, and when the support time reduction is won when the support time reduction activation is not prohibited (the support time reduction activation is allowed) ( (same), and the decorative stop patterns may be different. For example, during the support time saving activation prohibited state and during the support time saving activation permitted state, the special stop symbols (7 segments) of the special symbol display device are both stopped and displayed as "1.". On the other hand, regarding the decorative symbols, when the support time saving activation is prohibited, the "decoration stop pattern for losing" may be stopped and displayed, or the "decoration stop symbol for winning while the support time saving activation is prohibited" may be stopped and displayed. It's okay. In addition, while the support time saving activation is allowed, a decorative stop symbol corresponding to the support time saving win (for example, "Time ☆ Shorter" or "579", etc.) can be stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 6 and 77).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12, when the support time saving flag management process in step S422 is finished, the special symbol operation status is switched to "Fluctuating (02H)" as a fluctuation start time setting process (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), 00H is stored in the random number storage area for determination (cleared to zero) (step S416).

(Regarding the case where a setting abnormality error occurs: Processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the explanation of the determination process in step S409, if the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) in step S409, that is, if a setting abnormality error is occurring (step S409:=5AH), the special electric function in step S410 The random number determination process for object operation determination (winning/losing lottery) is skipped, and the special stop symbol creation process of step S411 is executed. That is, if a setting abnormality error occurs, the winning/losing lottery at the start of the variation is not executed, and the current winning/losing lottery result is always treated as a "loss" (forced losing control). In the case of an abnormal setting error, it is preferable to provide a variation pattern exclusively for errors and select this, but it may be configured such that an existing specific variation pattern is selected. When selecting an existing variation pattern, consider that a serious error called "setting abnormality error" has occurred, and select only the normal variation pattern type without selecting the reach variation type that will arouse the expectation of winning. It is preferable to select. Note that in a situation of forced loss, the game no longer makes sense, so it is preferable to select the long variation pattern type, and more preferably, the longest normal variation pattern (in this embodiment, the normal variation is 16 seconds). Select only. Further, in the case of an abnormal setting error, it may be configured such that the symbol variation display game itself is not started (symbol variation is not started) as "game continuation is not possible". In this case, the error notification continues until the gaming machine is powered off. Note that in this embodiment, the error notification continues even if the power is turned on again until the setting change process (step S023) shown in FIG. 8 is executed and the setting abnormality error is canceled.

As described above, when this special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the variable display of the special symbol is started. As a result, the process exits the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG.

<13. Special symbol fluctuation processing: Figure 16>
Next, the special symbol variation process (step S307) shown in FIG. 10 will be explained. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation process in FIG. 10.

In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, whether the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory operation timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the special symbol fluctuation time has not yet passed, that is, the special symbol is fluctuating, so do nothing and perform this special symbol fluctuation processing. Go through.

If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S451: YES), a "variation stop command" indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the production control unit 24 as a production control command (step S452). With this fluctuation stop command, the performance control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol fluctuation display game has ended after the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, and causes the decorative symbol currently being fluctuated to be stopped and displayed (determined display). As a result, the special symbol variation display game is ended, and the decorative symbol variation display game is also ended.

Next, as a setting process when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped, a special symbol confirmation signal output time (for example, 100ms) is stored in the special symbol confirmation timer of the RAM 203, and a confirmation display time (for example, 500ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. ), the special symbol operation status is changed to "Confirming (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special symbol fluctuation flag (step S454), and this Exit the process during special symbol fluctuation. The above-mentioned "special symbol confirmation signal output time" is the margin time to ensure the output time of the special symbol confirmation signal that notifies the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed. It is. Further, the "determined display time" is the time (stop display time) for maintaining the stop display when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbol ends. During this fixed display time, the decorative pattern is also fixedly displayed (mainly stopped) (for example, fixed display period CT in FIG. 44).

When the above-described special symbol fluctuation processing is completed, the special symbol display data update processing (step S309) in FIG. 10 is performed, the special symbol management processing is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management processing in step S095 in FIG. 9.

<17. Processing during special symbol confirmation time (processing when fluctuation stops): Figure 17A and Figure 17B>
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be explained. 17A and 17B are flowcharts showing details of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 10.

In FIGS. 17A and 17B, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol accessory action timer is zero (step S471). Here, a "confirmed display time" is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer (see step S454 in FIG. 16). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (step S471: NO), the process exits during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

If the special symbol accessory motion timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), the current special symbol fluctuation display game is assumed to have ended, and the special symbol motion status is switched to "standby (01H)" (special symbol motion 01H is stored in the status (step S472), and gaming status number YJ is stored (step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is acquired, and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the jackpot determination flag is ON)
If the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) in the determination at step S474 (step S474:=5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot symbol is stopped (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, the jackpot determination flag is set to the OFF state (00H), the condition device activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH), and the condition is set to "low probability + no electric support state" (general Object release extension flag, normal symbol time saving state flag, normal symbol probability change up value flag, special symbol time shortening state flag, special symbol probability change state flag, special symbol time reduction number counter, special symbol probability change number counter, special symbol variation number counter are in OFF state ( 00H)), set a predetermined value (for example, 00H) to the gaming status notification LED output number that specifies lighting/extinguishment of the gaming status notification LED (not shown), and set the support time reduction medium flag (described later) to the OFF status ( 00H)) to exit the process during this special symbol confirmation time.

Note that the above-mentioned "game status notification LED" is provided at an appropriate location of the gaming machine (for example, it may be provided as one of the display functions of the composite display device 38c, or a dedicated LED may be provided separately), This is a status notification means for notifying current gaming status information. The gaming status notification LED of this embodiment is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and indicates whether or not the game is in a time-saving state (special symbol time-saving state), whether it is in a support time-saving state, and whether it is in a ceiling benefit (for example, a ceiling time-saving state), which will be described later. It is used to notify whether or not the user is in a time saving state (hereinafter also referred to as a "ceiling time saving state"). The CPU 201 changes the notification mode of the gaming status notification LED according to the gaming status notification LED output number, and can notify the current gaming status information. The notification mode by the gaming status notification LED can be determined as follows.
(Italy 8) During the support time reduction state, the game status notification LED for support time reduction is turned on, and the right-hand hit notification LED (right-hand hit display device 39b) that is turned on during the jackpot time reduction state can be turned on or off. .
(Italy 93) During the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state, the ceiling/support time saving LED (combined LED) is turned on. In this case, the right hit notification LED (right hit display device 39b) that is turned on during the jackpot time saving state can be turned on or off. It becomes easy to identify whether the current gaming state is a ceiling time reduction state, a support time reduction state, or a jackpot time reduction state. In particular, the hall side can immediately grasp whether the gaming state at the time of recovery from a power failure is a support time reduction state, a jackpot time reduction state, or a ceiling time reduction state to be described later.
(Italy 94) The ceiling time saving LED is lit during the ceiling time saving state, and the support time saving LED is lit during the support time saving state. In this case, the right hit notification LED that is turned on during the jackpot time saving state can be turned on or off. It becomes easy to identify whether the current gaming state is a ceiling time reduction state, a support time reduction state, or a jackpot time reduction state. In particular, the hall side can immediately grasp whether the gaming state at the time of recovery from a power failure is a support time reduction state, a jackpot time reduction state, or a ceiling time reduction state to be described later.
(Italy 95) If you win the support time reduction during the ceiling time reduction state, if you want to end the ceiling time reduction state and control to a new support time reduction state, turn off the ceiling time reduction LED and turn on the support time reduction LED. let Even if a support time reduction is won during a ceiling time reduction state, it is easy to identify whether the current game state is in a ceiling time reduction state or in a support time reduction state.
(Italy 96) If the support time reduction state is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the support time reduction LED is turned on. Even if a support time reduction is won during a ceiling time reduction state, it is easy to identify whether the current gaming state is in a ceiling time reduction state or a support time reduction state.
(Italy 28) Light up the ceiling time saving LED during the ceiling time saving state. In this case, the right hit notification LED that is turned on during the jackpot time saving state can be turned on or off. It becomes easy to identify whether the current gaming state is in the ceiling time saving state or not.

(When the jackpot determination flag is OFF)
If it is determined in step S474 that the jackpot determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S474:≠5AH), then the state of the support time saving determination flag is determined (step S476). When the support time saving determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S476:=5AH), a support time saving winning state flag setting process is executed (step S477A). Here, as a transition process to the support time saving state, the values of each state buffer (see FIG. 42) set in the state buffer setting process (S916 in FIG. 14) during the game state transition preparation process (step S412) are Set in the flag area and counter corresponding to each status buffer. As a result, the time saving state (such as the number of working hours) corresponding to the type of support time saving won in this game is designated, and the support time saving state will occur after the confirmed display time has elapsed.

Next, various setting processes are performed when the support time saving symbol is stopped (step S477B). Here, the support time reduction determination flag is set to the OFF state (00H), the "Support time reduction medium flag", which specifies that the support time reduction state is in progress, is set to the ON state (5AH), and the gaming status notification LED output number is set to the ON state (5AH). A predetermined value (notification number during the support time saving state) is set, and each state buffer is cleared (00H is set). The above-mentioned support time reduction medium flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the support time reduction state is in progress. When the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that the support time reduction state is in progress; In the case of the state (00H), it indicates that the support time reduction state is not in progress.

Next, a game status information transmission process is executed (step S447C). Here, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control section 24. The gaming state designation command transmitted here includes information designating the start of the support time saving state. When the production control unit 24 receives this game state designation command, it understands that the current game will be shifted to the support time-saving state after the end of the current game, and changes the production mode to the production mode corresponding to the support time-saving state (in this example, the time-saving production mode ( For example, the transition is made to any of the time-saving production modes 1 to 4, or a production mode dedicated to the support time-saving state (not shown).As a result, the special symbol confirmation time processing is exited, and the special Execute symbol display data update processing.

In addition, if the configuration is such that the support time shortening state is caused immediately after the end of the fluctuation time, after the determination process in S451 of the special symbol fluctuation process in FIG. 16 (however, if the determination result is YES), (for example, step S452) and step S454), the determination process of step S476 is executed, and if the support time reduction determination flag is "00H" (≠5AH), the process of step S454 is executed, and the support time reduction determination flag is "=". 5AH'', the process of step S454 may be executed after executing the processes of steps S477A to S477C (at least steps S447A and S447B).

Returning to the explanation of step S476 above, when the support time saving determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S476:≠5AH), it is determined whether the special symbol time saving number counter (remaining time saving number) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time saving number counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

If the special symbol time saving number counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time saving number counter is decremented by 1 as the amount used for this game (variation display of the current special symbol) (step S479), and the special symbol after the subtraction is It is determined whether the symbol time saving number counter is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol time saving number counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of times the special symbol time saving state ends (prescribed time saving number) has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

If the special symbol time saving number counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), it is assumed that the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of game executions) has reached the number of times the special symbol time saving state ends (the prescribed number of time saving times has been exhausted), and the time saving is performed. Setting processing at the time of termination is executed (step S481). Here, as the setting process at the end of time saving, as shown in the figure, the function related to the time saving state is set to OFF state (no electric support), Tcode is set to "00H (normal medium)", and the gaming status notification LED output The number is set to a predetermined value (00H), and the transition setting process to the normal state is executed. Note that when the support time reduction state ends, the support time reduction flag is set to the OFF state (00H). Furthermore, in a configuration that employs a plurality of game modes depending on the number of consecutive games (see FIG. 7A), when the number of consecutive games is returned to zero upon completion of the time saving state, the consecutive game number counter is cleared. As a result, the gaming state is shifted to the normal mode (normal state), and in the next special symbol variation display game, a special symbol variation pattern related to the normal mode will be selected.

After completing the time saving end setting process in step S481, a game status information transmission process is then executed (step S482). The gaming state designation command sent here includes information that specifies the end of the time saving state, and also includes information that can identify the type of time saving state that has ended (such as jackpot time saving state or support time saving state). Can be done. When the performance control section 24 receives this game state designation command, it grasps that the time saving state has ended in the current game, and shifts the performance mode to the normal performance mode. At this time, a production control process can be performed to display a "launch position guidance production (left shot notification production)" that instructs to aim at the left downstream path 3b as the launch position (the probability change state described later ends). The same applies to the case (step S487)).

When proceeding to the process of step S483, it is determined whether the special symbol probability change number counter (remaining ST number) is zero (step S483). If the special symbol probability change count counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process advances to step S488. On the other hand, if the special symbol probability variation number counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation number counter is subtracted by 1 as the amount consumed in the current game (step S484), and the special symbol probability variation number counter after the subtraction is zero. It is determined whether there is one (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation number counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST number of times has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything.

When the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is assumed that the number of variations of the special symbol has consumed the prescribed ST number, and a setting process at the end of probability variation is executed (step S486). Here, as a setting process at the end of the probability change, as shown in the figure, the function related to the probability change state is set to OFF state, Tcode is set to "00H (normal medium)", and the consecutive winnings counter is cleared (00H). etc., execute the transition setting process to the normal state. As a result, the gaming state is shifted to the normal mode (normal state), and in the next special symbol variation display game, a special symbol variation pattern related to the normal mode is selected. In addition, when a definite state is provided, the number of STs is monitored in steps S483 to S485 in the same way as the process for a definite state, and a process for setting the end of a definite state is executed in the setting process at the end of this definite state. .

Further, as a jackpot, a "probable variable time-saving jackpot" can be provided in which the player is transferred to a time-saving state after the variable probability state ends, that is, after the ST number of times is completed. The number of time reductions may be a finite number of times (for example, 100 times or less, a number of time reductions exceeding 100 times (150 times, 200 times, etc.), or an infinite number of times, depending on the gameplay. It can be determined as appropriate. When providing such a "variable time-saving jackpot", it is preferable that the ST number be a finite variable type (ST number of 100 times, 50 times, etc.).The above-mentioned variable time-saving jackpot is It is not a "pure fixed variable jackpot (a jackpot that only grants fixed variables: 10R fixed variable jackpot or 4R fixed variable jackpot)" in that it is a jackpot that grants a variable state of ST number + time saving condition of a predetermined number of time reductions, but it is a real jackpot. In the specification, first of all, it is treated as belonging to a "probable variable jackpot" in that it shifts to a variable variable state.The variable variable jackpot includes a "probable variable jackpot" that does not give a time-saving state and/or a "probable variable time-saving jackpot" that can provide a time-saving state. ” may be included one or more times.

After completing the setting process at the end of probability change in step S486, the game status information transmission process is then executed (step S487). Here, as in step S482 above, a gaming state designation command is sent to the production control unit 24, but the gaming state designation command here includes information that designates the end of the high probability state (probability variable state or potential probability state). is included. When the production control section 24 receives this game state designation command, it grasps that the variable probability state (or potential state) has ended in the current game, and shifts the production mode to the normal production mode.

After completing the gaming state information transmission process in step S487, it is then determined whether the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S488). Here, the change timing of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) based on the number of variations of the special symbol (the number of game executions) is monitored.

If the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S488: YES), the process exits during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol variation counter is decremented by 1 as the current variation count (step S489), and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is It is determined whether it is zero (step S490).

If the special symbol variation number counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is assumed that it is not the update timing (update game) of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), and the process exits during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

If the special symbol variation number counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is assumed that the update timing of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) has arrived, and the gaming state update process (Tcode update process) is executed (step S491). .
For example, if infinite time saving is granted and the game mode is to be changed from "time saving mode 1 ⇒ working time saving mode 2 ⇒ working time saving mode 3" as shown in FIG. (Tcode=04H (value of variation pattern distribution designation number 1))" and the special symbol variation counter reaches zero, the value of Tcode is set to "04H" which specifies the current time saving mode 1. ” to “05H (value of variation pattern distribution designation number 2)” that specifies time saving mode 2, and sets the special symbol variation number counter to 100 times (the number of times set at update 1 in FIG. 42). Then, as the game progresses and the current time saving mode is "time saving mode 2" and the special symbol variation counter reaches zero, the value of Tcode is set to "05H" which specifies the current time saving mode 2. to "06H (value of variation pattern distribution designation number 3)" which specifies time saving mode 3, and sets the special symbol variation number counter to 65335 times (the number of times set at update 2 in FIG. 42). As a result, the game mode shifts from "time saving mode 1 to time saving mode 2 to time saving mode 3" in accordance with the number of game executions (number of symbol variations) during the time saving mode. Similarly, for other game modes, when the timing to update the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) arrives, the game state update process is performed to shift to the target game mode, and as a result, the process shown in FIG. The game mode transition shown in FIG. 7B and FIGS. 49A to 49B, which will be described later, is realized. The process of step S491 functions as a variation pattern mode updating means that updates (changes) the selection condition of the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition.

After completing the gaming state update process in step S491, a gaming state information transmission process is then executed (step S492). Here, as in step S482 above, a gaming state designation command is sent to the production control unit 24, but the information included in the gaming state designation command here is such that the updated variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be specified. Contains information. When the performance control section 24 receives this game state designation command, it shifts the current performance mode to a performance mode corresponding to the updated variation pattern selection mode (Tcode).

As described above, when the special symbol fluctuation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 8 is performed, the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited, and the special electric accessory management process of FIG. The process advances to (step S095).

[Second embodiment]
“Modified example of the first embodiment (first support time-saving installation type): Figures 18 to 20”
Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20, a modification of the special symbol variation start process (hereinafter also referred to as "second support time-saving installation type") according to the first embodiment (first support time-saving installation type) will be explained. explain.

In the first embodiment (first support time saving type), even if the support time reduction is won during the support time reduction activation inhibited state, the winning flag is cleared until the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) is completed. It has been explained that the winning flag is cleared in the support time saving flag management process (step S422). On the other hand, in this modification, if the support time reduction is won while the support time reduction activation is prohibited, the winning flag is cleared before the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process (step S413) is executed. There is. It should be noted that the contents already explained in the first embodiment regarding this modification will be omitted as appropriate to avoid redundant description. Further, substantially the same processing contents are given the same step numbers.

(18. Special symbol variation start process related to the second support time-saving loading type: Figure 18)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process according to this modification. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in the processing contents of the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory (step S410) and the game state transition preparation process (step S411) in FIG. The point is that the time saving flag management process (step S422) is not provided. Note that the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory according to this modification includes two determination processes 1 and 2 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B.

(19A. Random number determination process 1 for determining the operation of special electric accessories: Figure 19A)
First, with reference to FIG. 19A, a random number determination process 1 for determining the operation of a special electric accessory according to this modification will be described.

In FIG. 19A, the CPU 201 first obtains a hit random number determination table (step S941), obtains a random number for jackpot determination (step S942), and performs random number determination processing (step S943), similarly to S941 to S943 in FIG. . Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (whether it is in the support time reduction activation prohibited state) (step S945). If it is in the normal state (support time saving activation permitted state) (step S945: YES), a determination flag is set according to the determination result of the random number determination process (step S943) (step S944). On the other hand, if it is not in the normal state (support time reduction activation prohibited state) (step S953: YES), then it is determined whether or not the support time reduction has been won (step S946).

If the support time reduction award has not been won (step S946: YES), the process directly proceeds to step S944 without doing anything, and sets a determination flag according to the determination result of the random number determination process (step S943). However, if the support time reduction has been won (step S946: YES), the support time reduction determination flag is updated from winning (5AH) to non-winning (00H) (forced loss processing: step S947), and the updated result is A determination flag is set as the determination result of the random number determination process (step S943). That is, when the process of step S947 is performed, it is not a jackpot win or a support time reduction win, and it is processed as a loss.In other words, if the support time reduction activation is prohibited, the support time reduction activation is prohibited. Become.

(19B. Random number determination process 2 for determining the operation of special electric accessories: Figure 19B)
Next, with reference to FIG. 19B, random number determination processing 2 for determining the operation of special electric accessory objects according to this modification will be described.

In FIG. 19B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the normal state is in effect (whether the support time saving activation is prohibited state) (step S951).

If it is in the normal state (support time saving activation allowed state) (step S953: YES), based on the special symbol operation confirmation data, obtain the "normal lottery winning random number determination table" corresponding to the current processing target side. (Step S952). On the other hand, if it is not in the normal state (support time reduction activation prohibited state) (step S953: YES), "winning random number determination for special lottery" corresponding to the current processing target side is based on the special symbol operation confirmation data. table" (step S953). Then, similarly to S942 to S944 in FIG. 13, a random number for jackpot determination is obtained (step S942), a random number determination process is performed (step S943), and a determination flag is set according to the determination result (step S944).

FIG. 27 shows the "winning random number determination table for normal lottery" and the "winning random number determination table for special lottery." This is a random number determination table related to the "normal use" column of the determination table, and the "winning random number determination table for special lottery" is a random number determination table related to the "special use" column shown in the figure. Note that the notation ``permitted'' in the figure means a ``support time saving activation permitted state,'' and the notation ``prohibited'' in the drawings means a ``support time saving activation prohibited state.''

As can be seen from the diagram, in the normal lottery winning random number determination table (see the "Normal" column), if the random number for jackpot determination is in the range of "65405 to 65535", you will win a short support time (but , Figure (d) is the table for "No winnings for special drawing 2 side support time saving", and even if it is within the range, there will be no winning for support time saving), the winning random number judgment table for special lottery (for "special drawing") (see column), no matter which value the random number for jackpot determination is, it will not be possible to win the support time. In other words, if the activation of support time reduction is prohibited, the support time reduction will definitely not be won at the stage of the jackpot lottery (in this case, winning/losing lottery). In this determination process 2, depending on whether or not support time reduction activation is prohibited, different hit random number determination tables (separate dedicated hit random number determination tables for support time reduction activation permitted state and prohibited state) are used. Winner/non-winner is determined. As a result, if the support time saving activation is prohibited, the support time saving determination flag is always in the OFF state (00H), and the activation of the support time saving is prohibited.

In both determination processes 1 and 2 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, while the support time reduction activation is prohibited, the support time reduction is forcibly determined to be non-winning by a jackpot lottery (here, a winning/losing lottery). . Therefore, when the activation of support time reduction is prohibited, the result of the jackpot lottery is always treated as a "loss" unless there is a jackpot win (or a jackpot or small jackpot win if a small jackpot is provided). In this respect, in the first embodiment, even if the support time reduction is won during the support time reduction activation prohibited state, the winning flag is maintained without being cleared until the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) is completed. This is greatly different from the first embodiment described above.

(Figure 20. Game state transition preparation process: Figure 20)
Next, the game state transition preparation process (step S412A) related to the second support time saving type will be explained. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process related to the second support time saving type.

In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the jackpot determination flag (step S911). If the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S911:=5AH), the process advances to step S915, a gaming state transition table acquisition process. On the other hand, if the jackpot determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S911:≠5AH), then the state of the support time saving determination flag is determined (step S912).

If the support time saving determination flag is in the ON state (00H) (step S912:≠5AH), the game state transition preparation process is exited without doing anything. When the support time saving determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S912:=5AH), the gaming state transition table acquisition process of step S915 and the state buffer setting process of step S916 are sequentially executed.

The game state transition preparation process shown in FIG. 20 is different from the game state transition preparation process shown in FIG. 14, and does not require the determination process (step S914 in FIG. 14) as to whether or not the support time saving activation is prohibited. In this modification, it is determined during the pre-processing random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessories (step S410A) whether or not the support time reduction activation is prohibited, and accordingly, the support time reduction determination flag is in the ON state ( It is determined whether the winner is a winner (5AH)) or an OFF state (non-winner (00H)), and if the winner is in the support time reduction activation prohibited state, the support time reduction determination flag is always in the OFF state (00H). Because there is.

If determination processes 1 and 2 are adopted, even if the support time reduction is won during the support time reduction activation prohibited state (in this example, when not in the normal state), it will be treated as a loss, so the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process ( The variation pattern at the start of variation selected in step S413) is the variation pattern at the time of loss (loss variation pattern: see FIG. 35, FIG. 37, FIG. 39, FIG. 41, etc.). In addition, when it is processed as a loss, the loss pattern table is referred to in the symbol lottery process (special stop symbol creation process of step S411), and one of the losses A to C is determined. Therefore, in the case of this modification, the variation pattern at the time of winning support time reduction is selected without going through the complicated processing as in the first embodiment (regardless of whether support time reduction activation is prohibited or not). It is not necessary to change the content or execute a variation pattern selection process exclusively for winning support time reduction while the support time reduction activation is prohibited), or it can be a simple process such as simply performing the same process as for losing. Although this comes at the expense of diversifying the presentation, such as the format, it can be said that it has a great advantage in that it can reduce the control burden.

(Mangoku 30) Here, if you win the support time reduction in this game, the game state will be determined at the end of the game (for example, during the special symbol confirmation time after the confirmation display time has passed (Fig. 17A to 17B ), the configuration can be configured such that it is possible to determine whether or not to cause the support time-saving state.For example, if the support state activation prohibited state is determined to be the time-saving state, the current play state at the end of the game It is possible to determine whether or not is in a time-saving state, and based on the determination result, it can be determined whether or not to cause a support time-saving state.

(Mangoku 31) However, if you win the support time reduction in the final time reduction number, the processing form that executes the counting process of the remaining time reduction number at the start of symbol fluctuation (at the start of the game) (hereinafter "game start counting form") Whether or not a support time saving state occurs in a processing mode (hereinafter referred to as "game end counting mode") in which counting processing of the remaining time saving number is executed at the end of symbol variation (at the end of the game). are different. This will be explained in detail below. Note that the above-mentioned "counting process for the number of remaining time reductions" includes a process for terminating the time reduction state when the remaining number of time reductions reaches zero (corresponding to the setting process (step S481) at the end of time reduction in this embodiment). processing).

(Mangoku 32) In the case of the count mode at the start of the game, the normal state is at the end of the game, so if the support time reduction is won in the final time reduction count, the support time reduction state will definitely occur.

(Mangoku 33) However, in the case of the game end count mode, depending on the procedure of the processing content, the support time reduction state may or may not occur.
To be more specific, after the support time reduction corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined whether or not to cause the support time reduction state based on the current gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "support time reduction activation determination"), and then the remaining time reduction number is determined. In the case of a processing procedure such as performing a counting process (processing procedure 1), the gaming state at the time of determination of support time reduction activation is the "time reduction state" (support state activation prohibited state), so the support time reduction state does not occur. In other words, when the support time saving corresponding symbols are stopped and displayed, the gaming state is in the "time saving state", so the support time saving state is not caused.
(Mangoku 34) On the other hand, in the case of the processing procedure (processing procedure 2) in which the symbol corresponding to support time reduction is stopped and the support time reduction activation determination is performed after counting the remaining number of time reduction operations, the game at the time of support time reduction activation determination is performed. Since the state is a "normal state" (support state activation permitted state), a support time reduction state will occur. In other words, when the symbols corresponding to support time reduction are stopped and displayed, the game state is the "normal state", so that the support time reduction state is caused. In the case of this processing procedure 2 (same as in the case of the count form at the start of the game), the fluctuating effects and decorative stop symbols related to the time saving support win can be displayed only at the final time of the time saving number. Furthermore, for presentation purposes, it can be made to appear as if a new time saving state has occurred during the time saving state. For example, effects such as "Continue saving time!" or "Additional number of times saving time!" can be displayed.

(Mangoku 35) Although the explanation above focused on the final time reduction number, the same phenomenon occurs also in the final ST number. Specifically, the game start counting mode is a processing mode in which the number of STs is counted at the start of the game, and the game end counting mode is a processing mode in which the number of STs is counted at the end of the game. The process includes a process of terminating the variable probability state when the number of remaining STs becomes zero (processing corresponding to the setting process at the end of variable probability (step S486) of the present embodiment). In this case, similar to the phenomenon explained in the time saving state above, in the game start count form, if the support time reduction is won in the final ST number, the support time reduction state will always occur, and in the game end count form, the support time reduction state will always occur. If the time saving activation determination process is performed before the ST count process, the support time reduction state will not occur (when the support time reduction corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed, the gaming state is "each state"), but the support time reduction state will not occur. If the activation determination process is performed after the ST number counting process, a support time reduction state will occur (when the support time reduction corresponding symbols are stopped and displayed, the gaming state is the "normal state").

<18. Special electric accessory management process: Figure 21>
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG. 9 will be explained. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory management process in step S095. Here, we will explain the special electric accessory management process when special electric non-operation type support time reduction is provided.

In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first determines the ON/OFF state of the conditional device activation flag (step S502). If the conditional device activation flag is in the OFF state (step S502:≠5AH), that is, if the jackpot game is not in progress, this special electric accessory management process is exited without doing anything.

If the conditional device activation flag is in the ON state (step S502:=5AH), processing according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric accessory status branching process). The "special electric accessory operation status" is a status value that indicates the behavior of the special variable prize winning device 52, and this status value is changed according to the processing state, and is stored in the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM within the area. is stored in The special electric accessory operation status includes "Start processing in progress (00H)" which specifies that it is in a standby state before the start of a jackpot game, and "In operation start processing (00H)" which specifies that it is in a standby state before the start of a round game. 01H)", "In operation (02H)" to specify that the round game is in progress, and "Continuation judgment in progress (03H)" to specify that the next round game is being determined whether to continue or not. , "Jackpot end processing in progress (04H)" which specifies that end processing is in progress at the end of the jackpot game.

In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S503, the special electric accessory operation status values are "starting processing (00H)", "operation start processing (01H)", "operating (02H)", "continuing determination" ( 03H)" or "Jackpot end processing in progress (04H)", one of the processes in steps S505 to S509 is executed. These processes are processes for controlling the execution of jackpot games, and through the processes of steps S505 to S509, winning games corresponding to various winnings are realized. The processing contents of steps S505 to S509 will be explained below.

<Jackpot game control process (steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Jackpot start process)
The "jackpot start process" in step S505 will be explained. At the start of the jackpot game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to the initial value "starting process in progress (00H)". Therefore, when it becomes a "jackpot", this "jackpot start process" is executed first.

When entering the jackpot start process, the CPU 201 first sets the accessory continuous operation device activation flag to the ON state as a setting process (setting process at the time of start) necessary when starting the jackpot game. As a result, continuous operation (round game) of the special electric accessory is allowed. Then, the special electric accessory operation status is updated to "operation start processing in progress (01H)", and 01H, which designates the first 1R, is set in the "continuous number counter" that counts the number of rounds. Next, according to the winning type (special symbol judgment data) won this time, the "maximum number of rounds" corresponding to this jackpot is written in the corresponding area of the area RAM, and the "start interval time" is written in the special symbol accessory operation timer. Set. "Start interval time (start INT)" is the period from when the special symbol display time has elapsed (see step S471 in FIG. 17A) and the jackpot is confirmed until the special variable winning device 52 is activated (1R round This is the interval section (until the game starts), and refers to the time width that defines the opening performance section.

Next, a "jackpot start command" is sent to the production control section 24, and the jackpot start process is exited. Note that the "jackpot start command" includes information that can specify the type of jackpot this time and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When the performance control unit 24 receives this jackpot start command, a series of winning performances (opening performance, during the round, etc.) that are developed during the current jackpot game (during the start INT, between round games, during the round game, during the end INT, etc.) The opening performance is then started. Thus, the jackpot game and the jackpot performance are started.

(9-2. Special electric accessory activation process)
Next, the "special electric accessory actuation start process" in step S506 will be explained.

When entering the special electric accessory actuation start process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. The special symbol accessory operation timer here is set to the interval time before the start of the round. As this interval time, in the first round (1Rth), the "start interval time (start INT)" set in the above "jackpot start process (step S505)" is monitored, but from the 2nd round onwards, the main process When passing through (step S506), the "pre-release interval time", specifically, the interval time between rounds (R interval INT) from the end of the current round game to the start of the next round game, is determined. be monitored. Until this special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the current round game has not ended, so the special electric accessory operation start process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, the pre-release interval time (in the case of 1R, start interval time) has passed, the jackpot type (special symbol judgment data) and the current round number (consecutive number counter) The opening/closing operation pattern of the big winning opening 50 is set according to the value (big winning opening opening/closing operation setting process). Here, the big winning opening opening/closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the solenoid control data for controlling the big winning opening solenoid 52c (the big winning opening executed according to the number of rounds) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. (data for opening/closing operation pattern of the winning opening).

In addition, in conjunction with the operation to start opening the big winning hole, a big winning hole opening command is transmitted to the production control section 24. This "big winning opening opening command" includes current round number information, and is used by the performance control section 24 to display an in-round performance corresponding to the number of rounds. Then, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to "in operation (02H)" and the special electric accessory management process is exited. As a result, the grand prize opening 50 is opened to the upper limit of the above mentioned grand prize opening opening/closing operation time, and the current round game is started.

(9-3. Processing during special electric accessory operation)
Next, the "special electric accessory in operation process" in step S507 will be explained.

When entering the special electric accessory operation process, the CPU 201 first monitors whether the number of winning balls into the big winning hole 50 has reached the maximum number of winnings, and if it has reached the maximum number of winnings, the CPU 201 displays the special symbol role. Clear the object movement timer to zero. As a result, the timer value set in the above-mentioned "Special Electric Accessory Activation Start Process (Step S506)" is forcibly set to zero, and since the maximum number of prizes has been reached, the large prize opening 50 that is open will be closed. In addition, here, every time there is a prize in the big winning hole 50, a "big winning hole winning command" is transmitted to the performance control section 24. This grand prize opening command includes information on the occurrence of a winning in the grand prize opening and information on the number of prize balls (it may also include setting value information), and is used to notify that a prize has been won in the grand prize opening 50. In addition to being used for production, it is also used to control the appearance of setting suggestion production using winning production. For example, when there is an over-winning effect that exceeds the maximum number of wins, a special over-winning effect is displayed instead of the normal over-winning effect according to the appearance rate determined according to the set value.

Please do not do anything until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, that is, until the big winning opening opening operation time (maximum opening time) passes or the maximum number of winnings is reached. Exit the special electric accessory operation process.

When the maximum number of winnings is reached or the maximum opening time has elapsed and the special symbol accessory movement timer reaches zero, it is assumed that the current round game has ended and the special electric accessory movement status is changed to "Continuing judgment". (03H)" and stores the remaining ball ejection time (1980ms) in the special symbol accessory action timer. This "remaining ball ejection time" refers to the extra time to eject the remaining balls inside the grand prize opening after the grand prize opening is closed. In addition, with the closing of the big prize opening (end of the round game), an inter-round interval command is transmitted to the performance control section 24. This "interval interval command between rounds" includes round game end information and current number of rounds information, and is used by the performance control section 24 to display an inter-round INT performance during the inter-round INT. With the above, this special electric accessory is in operation process is exited.

(9-4. Special electric accessory operation continuation determination process)
Next, the "special electric accessory operation continuation determination process" in step S508 will be explained.

When entering the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the special symbol accessory operation timer here is set to the remaining ball ejection time (1980ms) after the closing of the grand prize opening (see step S507), it is determined whether or not this remaining ball ejection time has elapsed. be done. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, this special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited without doing anything.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (remaining ball discharge time elapsed), the value of the continuous number counter is acquired and it is determined whether the current number of rounds has reached the maximum number of rounds. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, as a process when continuing the round game, 1 is added (+1) to the continuous number counter, the "interval time before release" is stored in the special symbol accessory movement timer, and the special electric prize is activated. Switch the object operation status to "operation start processing in progress (01H)".

On the other hand, if the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, as a setting process at the end of the final round, "end INT (end interval time)" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory operation status is is switched to "termination processing in progress (04H)". The above-mentioned "end INT" is an interval section from the end of the final round game and the elapse of the remaining ball discharge time until the end of the jackpot game, and refers to the time width that defines the ending effect section.

Then, a "jackpot end command" instructing the start of the ending performance is transmitted to the performance control section 24, and the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited. As a result, the round game of the maximum number of rounds is ended. In addition, the jackpot end command includes information regarding the current jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning, that is, information that allows identification of the gaming state after the jackpot game. It is also used when deciding the production mode.

(9-5. Jackpot end processing)
Next, the "jackpot end process" in step S509 will be explained.

When entering the jackpot end process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the above-mentioned end interval time (end INT) is set in the special symbol accessory action timer here, it is determined here whether or not this end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, this jackpot ending process is exited without doing anything.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (end interval time elapsed), each value of the state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 10) is changed to correspond to the state buffer. Set each in the flag area and counter. This specifies the gaming state after the jackpot game. Note that when a ceiling function, which will be described later, is provided, an initial value (for example, the number of ceiling games (1000 games)) is set in a ceiling counter, which will be described later, in this process. This specifies the gaming state after the jackpot game.

Next, as various setting processes at the end of the jackpot, various data used during the jackpot game control process (for example, flags and counter values used in steps S505 to S509) are cleared, and the gaming status notification LED output number is updated. , the special electric accessory operation status is switched to "starting process in progress (00H)".

When the jackpot ending process is finished, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game are finished, and the current jackpot game is ended.

(About the case where special electric activated support time reduction is provided)
In the above embodiment, the description focused on the case where "special electric non-operation type support time saving" was provided. In the case of providing the special electric-operated type support time reduction, the support time reduction state by the special electric-operated type support time reduction may be controlled by the following configuration.

In the determination process of S476 in FIG. 17A, if the support time saving determination flag is in the ON state (5AH), the support time saving determination flag is turned OFF as various setting processes when the support time saving symbol is stopped, instead of the processes of steps S477A to S447C. The state (00H) is set, and the flag before the start of support time saving, which specifies the execution of the support time saving opening/closing game, is set to the ON state (5AH).

In the special electric accessory management process of FIG. 21, first, before the determination process of step S502, a process of determining the state of the support time reduction start flag is performed. If the support time saving start flag is in the OFF state, the processing from step S502 onwards is executed, and if the support time saving start flag is in the ON state, the process for executing the support time saving opening/closing game (support time saving special Electric accessory operation processing) and return. In the support time-saving special electric accessory activation process, first, at the start of the support time-saving opening/closing game, the "Support time-saving opening/closing game in progress flag" is set to the ON state (5AH), and the setting process necessary to execute the support time-saving opening/closing game is performed. I do. Then, when the support time-saving opening/closing game is completed, each value of the state buffer set in the above-mentioned "gaming state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12)" is set in the flag area or counter corresponding to the state buffer. Set the support time reduction mode flag, which specifies that the support time reduction mode is in effect, to the ON state (5AH), and set the support time reduction start flag and the support time reduction opening/closing game flag to the OFF state (00H). . In addition, in the case of special electric non-activated support time reduction, since the support time reduction opening/closing game is not used, the support time reduction will be started after the game in which the support time reduction is won (after the fixed display time has elapsed or after the variable time has ended). The medium flag is set to the ON state (see step S477B in FIG. 17A). Thereby, the game state (transition to the time saving state, number of time saving times) after the support time saving opening/closing game is specified. It should be noted that a "support time saving opening/closing game start command" is sent to the production control section 24 when the supporting time saving opening/closing game starts, and a "supporting time saving opening/closing game end command" is sent to the production control section 24 when the supporting time saving opening/closing game ends. These commands cause the performance control unit 24 to display performances during the support time saving opening/closing game (opening performance (performance during start INT), performance during opening/closing action game, ending performance (performance during end INT, etc.) Here, in the case of special electric activation type support time reduction, the support time reduction opening/closing game (in the case of small hit winning type support time reduction, the small winning game) is executed first, and then the time reduction state is granted. The question is whether or not the support time-saving state is a period that includes the support time-saving opening/closing game.In this case, depending on the gameplay, if the period including the support time-saving opening/closing game is treated as the support time-saving state. , The support time saving medium flag may be set to ON at the start of the support time saving opening/closing game, or if the period excluding the support time saving opening/closing game is treated as being in the support time saving state, the above support time saving flag may be turned on at the end of the support time saving opening/closing game. The medium flag may be set to ON state.

To summarize the preferred embodiments of the first embodiment, the following configuration examples 1A to 9A can be used.

[Configuration example 1A]
an acquisition unit (S314 in FIG. 11) that acquires multiple types of random numbers including at least a first random number and a second random number based on the establishment of a starting condition;
A win/loss determination means (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a win/loss determination regarding a predetermined winning based on the first random number value;
A symbol determining means (main control unit 20, S411 in FIG. 12) that determines the type of winning based on the result of the winning/losing determination and the second random number value;
A symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b, liquid crystal display device 36) that can perform a variable display operation of symbols and stop displaying the symbols in a display mode according to the determination result of the symbol determining means;
A special electric accessory (special variable winning device 52) configured to be able to open or enlarge the entrance of the grand prize opening;
Accessory continuous operation means (main control unit 20 (accessory continuous operation device), FIG. 21) capable of continuously operating the special electric accessory,
Game state control means (main control unit 20, S412 in FIGS. 4 and 12, S509 in FIG. 21, 42, FIG. 43),
The targets of the winning/losing judgment by the winning/losing judging means include:
A jackpot that triggers the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (for example, a 10R fixed-variable jackpot, a 4R fixed-variable jackpot, a 4R time-saving jackpot: Fig. 4), and a special time-saving that does not trigger the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (support time-saving A, Support time reduction B, support time reduction C: Figure 4) are included at least,
The gaming state control means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that when the special time saving is won, the game machine is controlled to the time saving state (FIGS. 4 and 42).

[Configuration example 2A]
Acquisition means (main control unit 20, S314 in FIG. 11) that acquires multiple types of random numbers including at least a first random number and a second random number based on establishment of a starting condition;
A win/loss determination means (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a win/loss determination regarding a predetermined winning based on the first random number value;
A symbol determining means main control unit 20 (S411 in FIG. 12) that determines the type of winning based on the result of the winning/losing determination and the second random number value;
A symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b, liquid crystal display device 36) that can perform a variable display operation of symbols and stop displaying the symbols in a display mode according to the determination result of the symbol determining means;
A special electric accessory (special variable winning device 52) configured to be able to open or enlarge the entrance of the grand prize opening;
Accessory continuous operation means (main control unit 20 (accessory continuous operation device), FIG. 21) capable of continuously operating the special electric accessory,
Game state control means (main control unit 20, S412 in FIGS. 4 and 12, S509 in FIG. 21, 42, FIG. 43),
The targets of the winning/losing judgment by the winning/losing judging means include:
A jackpot that triggers the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (for example, a 10R fixed-variable jackpot, a 4R fixed-variable jackpot, a 4R time-saving jackpot: Fig. 4), and a special time-saving that does not trigger the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (support time-saving A, Support time reduction B, support time reduction C: Figure 4) are included at least,
The gaming state control means includes:
If the special time saving is won, the time saving state is controlled until the number of fluctuating displays of the symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times,
The special time reduction includes multiple types of special time reduction (support time reduction A, support time reduction B, support time reduction C: FIG. 4) with different upper limit numbers,
The symbol determining means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the result of the win/loss determination is the winning of the special time saving, one of the plurality of types of special time saving is determined as the type of the winning (FIG. 4, FIG. 30).

[Configuration example 3A]
Acquisition means (main control unit 20, S314 in FIG. 11) that acquires multiple types of random numbers including a first random number and a second random number based on establishment of a starting condition;
A win/loss determination unit (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a win/loss determination regarding a win based on the first random number value;
If the result of the win/fail determination is a hit, a symbol determining means (main control unit 20, S411 in FIG. 12) capable of determining the type of hit based on the second random number value;
a symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of the symbol and is capable of stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the determination result of the symbol determining means;
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming state control means capable of controlling to a time-saving state in which the rate of performing the variable display operation of the symbols in a shorter varying time than in a normal state;
The symbol determining means is
If the result of the win or loss determination by the win or loss determination means is not a win, the second random number is used to perform a lottery regarding whether or not to grant the time saving state (FIGS. 26 to 31); A gaming machine characterized by:
In addition, the case where "the lottery result is not a win" means "at least a big hit (if a normal small win is provided, it may be a jackpot and a normal small win, or a normal small win") In this case, it means that the support time reduction was won (the same applies to configuration examples 4A and 5A described later).

[Configuration example 4A]
a lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings;
a symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of symbols and is capable of stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode according to a lottery result by the lottery means;
comprising a game state control means capable of controlling to a time-saving state in which the rate of performing the variable display operation of the symbols in a shorter variable time than in the normal state;
A gaming machine capable of controlling the time saving state until the number of times the symbol is displayed in a variable manner reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times,
The upper limit number of times the lottery result is a hit, the number of times the time saver is controlled (the number of time savers given by the time saver jackpot), and the upper limit number of times the lottery result is not a win, the number of times the time saver state is controlled (the number of times the time saver is supported) (time saving performance of 4R time saving jackpot (number of time saving times 100 times) ≠ Time saving performance of support time saving (number of time saving times given by support time saving B 200 times or infinite time saving by support time saving C (time saving A gaming machine characterized in that the number of times is 65,535 times)).

[Configuration example 5A]
a lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings;
A symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of symbols and is capable of stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode according to a lottery result by the lottery means;
comprising a gaming state control means capable of controlling to a time-saving state in which the rate of performing the variable display operation of the symbols in a shorter variable time than in the normal state;
A gaming machine capable of controlling the time saving state until the number of times the symbol is displayed in a variable manner reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times,
The lottery result is configured to be controllable to the time saving state depending on whether the lottery result is a win or not,
The upper limit number of times the lottery result is a hit, the number of times the time saver state is controlled (the number of time savers given by the time saver jackpot), and the upper limit number of times the lottery result is not a win, the number of times the time saver state is controlled (the number of time savers granted by the time saver jackpot). A gaming machine characterized in that the time saving performance of 4R time saving jackpot (number of time saving times 100 times) = time saving performance of support time saving (number of time saving times given by support time saving A 100 times)) is the same. .

[Configuration example 6A]
a lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings;
A symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of symbols and is capable of stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode according to a lottery result by the lottery means;
Variation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns including a reach variation pattern based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
symbol display control means for controlling a fluctuating display operation of the symbols in the symbol display means based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means;
A gaming machine comprising: a consecutive winning number counting means for counting the number of consecutive winnings in a specific gaming period on the condition that the winning is won;
The reach variation pattern includes a plurality of reach variation patterns with different variation times,
A gaming machine characterized in that the selection rate of a reach variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is higher after the number of consecutive games exceeds a predetermined number than before it exceeds a predetermined number of games (FIG. 35).

[Configuration example 7A]
a lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings;
A symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of symbols and is capable of stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode according to a lottery result by the lottery means;
Fluctuation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
symbol display control means for controlling a fluctuating display operation of the symbols in the symbol display means based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means;
A gaming machine comprising: a consecutive winning number counting means for counting the number of consecutive winnings in a specific gaming period on the condition that the winning is won;
The plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times,
A gaming machine characterized in that the selection rate of a normal fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is higher after the number of consecutive games exceeds a predetermined number than before it exceeds a predetermined number of games (FIG. 35).

[Configuration example 8A]
a lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings;
a symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of symbols and is capable of stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode according to a lottery result by the lottery means;
Fluctuation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
symbol display control means for controlling a fluctuating display operation of the symbols in the symbol display means based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means;
A gaming machine comprising: a consecutive winning number counting means for counting the number of consecutive winnings in a specific gaming period on the condition that the winning is won;
The plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times,
After the number of consecutive games exceeds the predetermined number of times than before, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result is not a win becomes relatively longer, but when the lottery result is a win, the fluctuation time is relatively longer. A gaming machine characterized in that the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected does not change (configuration of (T27) above, modification example of FIG. 34).
In addition, in the present configuration examples 8A and 9A, the case where "the lottery result is not a win" means "a jackpot (if a normal small win is provided, it may be a jackpot and a normal small win, or a jackpot excluding the normal small win)" This means that the winner is a "lose" who did not win either "Support time reduction" or "Support time reduction".

[Configuration example 9A]
a lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings;
a symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of symbols and is capable of stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode according to a lottery result by the lottery means;
Fluctuation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
symbol display control means for controlling a fluctuating display operation of the symbols in the symbol display means based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means;
A gaming machine comprising: a consecutive winning number counting means for counting the number of consecutive winnings in a specific gaming period on the condition that the winning is won;
The plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times,
If the lottery result is a hit, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected becomes relatively longer after the number of consecutive games exceeds the predetermined number of times than before it exceeds the predetermined number, but if the lottery result is not a win, the fluctuation time is relatively longer. A gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected does not change (configuration of (T26) above, modification example of FIG. 35).

<Fluctuating display movement of decorative patterns: Figures 44 to 45>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, a variable display effect of decorative symbols will be described. The decorative pattern fluctuation display performance is a series of pattern fluctuation display operation modes (decorative pattern fluctuation pattern) from the start of decorative pattern fluctuation to the stop display (in particular, final display), and here, the left pattern shown in FIG. , handles the symbol variation display mode of three decorative symbols, the middle symbol and the right symbol. The fluctuating display performance of decorative symbols is used as part of the performance during the fluctuating symbol display game. Note that unless otherwise required, the variable display performance of decorative patterns will be abbreviated as "decorative pattern performance."

Decorative design effects are used to notify reach status (ready-to-reach effects), the occurrence of pseudo-runs, final game results (jackpot lottery results), and to enliven preview effects (changing notices). It functions as important identification information to notify the start and end, and can be said to form the core of the decorative symbol variation display game. In other words, the decorative pattern effect not only enriches the variation of the effect through its display operation, but also makes it less stressful when the game ends in a loss, and makes it less likely that a fluctuating slump will occur. This is considered to be an important performance. Therefore, the present embodiment aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the performance effect of decorative pattern performance.

In this embodiment, we focus on the failures that many players encounter in the course of the game, and in order to enrich the production variations during symbol fluctuations and improve the player's hitting comfort, we focus on the "decorative symbol We have put some effort into the stopping action pattern (stopping action mode of decorative patterns).

(Summary of decorative pattern production)
An overview of decorative pattern production will be explained below. Here, first, an overview of a series of variable display operations of decorative patterns will be explained using FIG. 44. The details of the "decorative pattern stopping motion pattern" will be described later using FIG. 45.

FIG. 44 is a timing chart illustrating a decorative pattern effect (decorative pattern variation pattern) related to a certain normal variation (for example, normal variation 13s).

In the decorative pattern presentation, for example, as shown in "Stop action long" in FIG. The decorative pattern starts a "high-speed fluctuation state (hereinafter referred to as "high-speed fluctuation")" (at the time of 0.5 seconds). During this high-speed fluctuation, each decorative pattern is displayed in a difficult or unidentifiable display state, and the transmittance of the decorative pattern is higher than when the display is stopped. For example, the background image corresponding to the current production mode is displayed at high speed. It becomes distinguishable through the fluctuating decorative pattern. In addition, although FIG. 44 shows a state in which the three decorative symbols start variable display all at once from the stopped display state, as described above, the three decorative symbols start variable display separately and display high-speed variation. may be started. For example, the left symbol may be displayed with high-speed fluctuation after 0.5 seconds, the middle symbol after 0.7 seconds, and the right symbol after 0.9 seconds. In this case, all the symbols enter the high-speed fluctuation state after 0.9 seconds.

The above-mentioned "transmittance" means the degree to which other images existing behind the image can be seen through the image for which the transmittance is set, or the ratio thereof. Specifically, when the transmittance of an image is set to 0%, other images superimposed behind that image become completely invisible (unidentifiable state), but when the transmittance is set to 100%. If it is, it becomes completely transparent and only the other image can be seen. Therefore, if the transmittance is set to an appropriate value, a semi-transparent image will be displayed according to the transmittance (0%<transmittance A<99%). The transmittance of the decorative pattern during the above-mentioned high-speed fluctuations may be at least higher than the transmittance during the low-speed fluctuations described below (transmittance α% during low-speed fluctuations<transmittance β% during high-speed fluctuations). It is preferable that the display state is such that another image (background image) superimposed behind the decorative pattern has sufficient transparency to be discernible. In addition, various preview performances are also performed in response to the start of the variation of the decorative patterns.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 44 again, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop operation is performed in the order of "left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol" at 9 seconds, 10.5 seconds, and 12 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, respectively. Each symbol sequentially starts decelerating from high-speed fluctuation and enters a period of "low-speed fluctuation state (hereinafter referred to as "low-speed fluctuation")". This period of low speed fluctuation is a "slowdown display period (deceleration period)" in which the symbol gradually slows down and stops, and the transmittance is confirmed and displayed immediately after the start of the stop action (timing of the start of the stop action). The decorative pattern is reduced to approximately the same (including the same; the same shall apply hereinafter), and the decorative pattern is redisplayed in a distinguishable state. Therefore, during the low-speed fluctuation period, the transmittance of the decorative pattern is always lower than during high-speed fluctuation (transmittance α% during low-speed fluctuation <transmittance β% during high-speed fluctuation). The transmittance may be configured to gradually decrease as the time progresses.

When the above-mentioned period of "low speed fluctuation (slowdown display)" has elapsed, a period of "temporary stop state (hereinafter referred to as "temporary stop")" begins. In this example, each symbol sequentially enters this temporary stop period at 10.5 seconds, 11.5 seconds, and 12.5 seconds, respectively. During this temporary stop period, the symbols undergo "swaying fluctuations." The "temporary stop state" here is different from the temporary stop state of the decorative pattern related to the "pseudo-connection" (the temporary stop state before the re-fluctuation display operation of the decorative pattern). Note that the transmittance during temporary suspension is approximately the same as the transmittance during final display (transmittance γ% during final display = transmittance δ% during temporary suspension period = approximately 0%), and the pattern is fully visible. Displayed in an identifiable manner. Therefore, the player can clearly understand which symbol has stopped.

Then, when the temporary stop period has elapsed (at 13 seconds), the variation time (special symbol variation time) ends, and the decorative symbol is confirmed to be displayed (confirmed display period). That is, the current decorative symbol variation display game is ended. Note that this fixed display period is a time width that is set corresponding to the "fixed display time (see step S454 in FIG. 16)" that is set when the special symbol ends its fluctuation time, and finally It is used as a final display time to definitively notify the combination of decorative patterns that have been stopped and displayed. The next decorative symbol variation display game will be started after this fixed display period has passed.

Although not shown, to be precise, the speed of the decorative pattern becomes zero at the end of the low-speed fluctuation, and after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, stopped display for 0.3 seconds: pause period ), a temporary stop is initiated. That is, the flow of the basic variation display operation of decorative symbols in one symbol variation display game is precisely "high speed variation → slow variation → temporary stop → temporary stop → all symbols confirmed display". Therefore, when it is referred to as "the symbol that stops first", it means the symbol that finishes its low-speed fluctuation first or the symbol that temporarily stops first. In this specification, in order to simplify the explanation, "the first symbol to stop," "the second symbol to stop," and "the last symbol to stop" are respectively referred to as "the first symbol to temporarily stop." , ``the second symbol to be temporarily stopped'', and ``the last symbol to be temporarily stopped''.

In addition, for convenience of explanation, below, we will focus on the fact that the above-mentioned "low speed fluctuation period (slowdown display period)" is "the period from the start of the stop operation to the temporary stop", and we will refer to the low speed fluctuation period as "the period during the stop operation". Sometimes referred to as "period". Further, the performance during this stop operation period may be referred to as "performance during stop operation."

(About the stop movement pattern of decorative patterns: Figure 45)
The outline of the series of variable display operations of decorative patterns has been described above. Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the stopping operation pattern of the decorative pattern according to this embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 45 is a timing chart focusing on the stop motion pattern of decorative symbols (display mode during the stop motion period). Although the details will be explained later, this embodiment deals with three stopping operation patterns: "stopping action short", "stopping action middle", and "stopping action long" shown in FIGS. 45(a) to (c). In addition, in FIG. 45, the time t when the symbol to be stopped (temporarily stopped) starts the stopping motion for the first time is 0 seconds, and the temporal transition of each symbol in the stopping motion pattern of each symbol is shown. The relational expressions connected by , have almost the same meaning). Further, for convenience of explanation, each period regarding the decorative pattern production (fluctuating decorative pattern display operation) in FIG. 45 is expressed as follows.
(B) The period during the left symbol's stop motion is "Left stop motion period LMT"
(b) The period during the stop motion of the right symbol is “RMT during the right stop motion”
(c) The period during which the medium symbol is in stop motion is "CMT during medium stop motion"
(d) The temporary suspension period of the left symbol is "Left temporary suspension period LPT"
(e) The temporary suspension period of the right symbol is "Right temporary suspension period RPT"
(f) The temporary suspension period of the middle symbol is “Left temporary suspension period CPT”
(G) The confirmed display period (common to each decorative pattern) is the "Fixed display period CT"
(H) The left symbol's stop motion period (LMT+LPT) is the "left stop motion period LST"
(li) The stop motion period (RMT+RPT) of the right symbol is "Right stop motion period RST"
(NU) The stop movement period (CMT + CPT) of the medium symbol is "Medium stop movement period CST"

In this embodiment, regarding the stop motion pattern, the stop motion period (here, "left stop motion period LST") is defined as the time when at least one symbol first starts the stop motion until all the symbols are stopped (determined display). A plurality of stopping operation patterns with different values (equivalent) are provided. The plurality of stop operation patterns include at least stop operation patterns of a first period, a second period, and a third period, each having a different stop operation period (stop operation time). The stop operation period becomes longer in this order of the three periods. Among these, the stop operation pattern in the first period is called "stop action short", and the stop action pattern in the second period whose stop action period is longer than the first period is called "stop action middle", and the stop action pattern in which the stop action period is longer than the first period is called "stop action middle". A stopping operation pattern with a third period longer than the second period is referred to as a "stopping operation long". For example, in the relationship between the stop operation patterns (a) to (c) shown in FIG. 45, the stop operation pattern with the shortest (shortest time) stop operation period is the "stop operation short", and the stop operation pattern with the longest stop operation period is A stop action pattern with a period (maximum time) is a "stop action long", and a stop action pattern with a stop action period that is longer than a stop action short and shorter than a stop action long is a "stop action middle".

(Specific example of short circuit in stop operation: Fig. 45(a))
The "stop action short" will be explained with reference to FIG. 45(a).

As shown in the figure, the "stopping action short" according to this embodiment starts the stopping action (slowdown display) at approximately the same timing for all the symbols (left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) (at 0 seconds). , after a 0.5 second low-speed fluctuation period (period during stopping operation), all the symbols temporarily stop (temporarily stop) at approximately the same timing. Thereafter, after a 0.5 second temporary stop (shaking fluctuation), all the symbols are finally displayed (at 1 second). In the case of this stop action short, all the symbols perform the stop action at the same time and are displayed as confirmed after just one second, so it appears that they are stopped quickly.

(Specific example of middle stop action: Fig. 45(b))
Next, the "stopping operation middle" will be explained with reference to FIG. 45(b).

The "stop action middle" according to this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned stop action short, and the order of the stop actions of each symbol is different. Specifically, as shown in the figure, the stop operation (slowdown display) is started in the order of "left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol". In the case of this embodiment, after the left symbol to be stopped (temporarily stopped) enters the stopping motion, the right symbol and the middle symbol sequentially enter the stopping motion (0.5 seconds) during the stopping motion of the left symbol. , 1 second), each symbol sequentially enters a temporary stop in the order in which the stopping action is started (see the illustrated times of 1.5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 2.5 seconds). Then, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the last temporarily stopped middle symbol, all the symbols are finally displayed (at the time of 3 seconds). Therefore, in the case of the stop action middle, the stop action period (3 seconds) is longer than the stop action short (1 second), that is, each symbol appears to stop more slowly than the stop action short. However, in the case of middle stop action, the stop action is "during the stop action of the first symbol, other symbols will stop in sequence", so each symbol stops at a good tempo. It's easy to get the feeling that things are going away.

(Specific example of long stop action: Fig. 45(c))
Next, the above-mentioned "long stop operation" will be explained with reference to FIG. 45(c).

"Long stop motion" according to this embodiment, like the middle stop motion, starts the stop motion (slowdown display) in the order of "left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol" when the stop motion order of each symbol is "left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol". They are the same in that they do. However, they differ in the following points. In the case of a long stop motion, the left symbol first enters a stop motion, and then enters a temporary stop at the time of 1.5 seconds. On the other hand, the right symbol enters a stopping operation at 1.5 seconds when the left symbol enters a temporary stop, and then enters a temporary stop at 3 seconds. Further, the middle symbol enters a stopping operation at the time of 3 seconds when the right symbol enters a temporary stop, and enters a temporary stop at a time of 3.5 seconds. In other words, each time the symbol that started the stopping motion first in chronological order enters a temporary stop, the remaining symbols sequentially enter a temporary stop, and 0.5 seconds after the last temporarily stopped symbol, in other words, the left symbol 4 seconds after the start of the stop operation, all the symbols are displayed as confirmed. Therefore, when the long stop motion is applied, each symbol appears to stop more slowly than the middle stop motion. In addition, in the case of a long stop action, the feature is that the last symbol to be stopped (temporarily stopped) is stopped in a shorter time than other symbols.

Regarding each of the above-mentioned stop operation patterns (stop action short, stop action middle, stop action long), the relationship when focusing on each period (periods LMT, RMT, CMT, LPT, RPT, CPT, LST, RST, CST, etc.) is as shown in FIG. 45, and matters that can be derived from this (for example, the relationship between the length of the high-speed fluctuation period, the relationship between the length and shortness of the period during stop operation, the relationship between the high and low transmittance, the relationship between the length and shortness of the stop operation period) etc.) are obvious matters and are included within the scope of the technical idea of the present invention.

As described above, the short stop action, middle stop action, and long stop action can give different impressions in terms of performance because the stop action modes (presentation modes during stop motion) of the decorative symbols are different from each other.

<Processing on the production control unit side: Figures 22 to 25>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 25, the effect control processing on the effect control section 24 side of this embodiment will be described. The processing on the production control unit 24 side mainly includes a predetermined main process (production control side main processing: FIG. 22) and a timer interrupt process activated by a regular interrupt from the CTC (production control side timer interrupt processing: (FIG. 23) (the same applies to the third embodiment described later).

<16. Production control side main processing: Figure 22>
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the production control section side (production control side main processing). When power is turned on to the gaming machine main body from the outside, the production control unit 24 starts the main processing on the production control side shown in FIG. 22.

In the main processing on the performance control side, the performance control section 24 (CPU 241) first performs necessary initial setting processing before starting the gaming operation (step S1001). Here, the initial setting processing includes, for example, command reception interrupt setting, processing to return to the starting point of movable objects, initial setting of CTC, permission of timer interrupt, initial setting of register values inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

After the above initial setting process is completed, the main loop process of steps S1003 to S1012 is performed at predetermined time intervals (16 ms) as a process during normal operation, and at other times, the production software random number update process of step S1013 is repeatedly performed.

In the process of step S1002, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update counter and determines whether the main loop update cycle (counter value>15) that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S1002). The above-mentioned main loop update counter is a counter that is incremented during the production control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, which is executed every 1 ms (see step S1057 in FIG. 17). In this embodiment, main loop processing is performed approximately every 16 ms, and in the determination processing of step S1002, the main loop update counter value is determined, and if the value is greater than "15" (step S1002: YES), the execution timing of the main loop process has arrived, and the processes of steps S1003 to S1011 are executed; otherwise, the decorative pattern is Random numbers for various effects drawings used for drawings such as preview effects during the variable display game are updated (step S1012).

When the main loop update period has arrived (step S1002: YES), the main loop update counter is cleared to zero (step S1003), and then error processing is executed (step S1004). Here, a performance scenario for error notification during an error is set, and an error cancellation process is executed when the error is canceled. Note that errors related to the presentation means (movable accessory errors, audio IC errors, etc.) are monitored here.

Next, demonstration/power saving mode processing is executed (step S1005). In this demo/power-saving mode processing, a pre-waiting-for-customer presentation (demonstration start waiting display), a presentation while waiting for a customer (demonstration display), and a setting process necessary for the power-saving mode are executed.

Next, a production switch input process is executed (step S1006). In this production switch input process, the operating state of the operation means (production button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, production control processing is executed in accordance with the operation. The input state of the operating means is monitored in button input state update processing (step S1052) in FIG. 23, which will be described later.

Next, command analysis processing is performed (step S1007). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether a production control command is stored in the command reception buffer, and if a production control command is stored, this command is read out, and the production processing corresponding to the read production control command is executed. do. Note that when an interrupt occurs based on a strobe signal from the main control unit 20 side, a command reception interrupt process (not shown) is executed. Through this command reception interrupt processing, the production control command is acquired, and its data is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243.

For example, if at least a variation pattern specification command is received and stored in the reception buffer (in this embodiment, a variation pattern specification command and a decorative pattern specification command are received and they are stored in the reception buffer). case), in the command analysis process, one or more types of performance patterns are determined based on the information (fluctuation pattern information and winning information (or winning type information)) included in the command. The performance pattern determined here works as a "parts performance" as an element constituting the performance scenario. Next, a time schedule is determined for when and for how long the performance pattern (parts performance) determined above will appear, and based on this, a performance scenario is constructed and its The performance scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. A "performance scenario" in a broad sense is realized by developing various performance patterns (parts performance) incorporated in this performance scenario one after another or multiple at the same time.

After the command analysis process is finished, scenario update process is executed (step S1008). In this scenario update process, the contents of a timer necessary for executing the performance scenario are updated, and processing is executed to proceed with the performance scenario based on the timer value. A typical example of the timer is a performance scenario timer that manages a time schedule regarding the timing of production. For example, within a variable period in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (decorative pattern variable period), which is substantially the same period as a variable period in which a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (special pattern variable period), that time This timer manages the temporal schedule of what kind of performance pattern, time width, and what kind of performance means to appear on the axis. Such a performance scenario timer is also used in the LED drive data update process (step S1010) and the performance accessory motion update process (step S1053), which will be described later. Here, this performance scenario timer is monitored, and when the time for a certain performance arrives, sound data for the speaker 46 and a liquid crystal command for controlling the image display are created, and each is stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. . Note that the LED data for the optical display device is created in the LED drive data update process (step S1010) described later, and the motor control data for the movable accessory is created in the performance accessory operation update process (step S1053) described later. Ru.

Next, sound output processing is performed (step S1009). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S1009 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be played, the phrases, volume, etc. are adjusted based on the sound data set for each sound channel. The data is output to the sound control section (sound source LSI), and a sound effect is produced from the speaker 46 through the sound control section. As a result, sound production is realized in accordance with the production scenario.

Next, an LED drive data update process is executed (step S1010). In this LED drive data update process, LED data for optical display devices such as the decorative lamp 13 and various performance LEDs is created based on the performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer.

Next, LED output processing is executed (step S1011). In this LED output process, the LED data created in the LED drive data update process is output to the light display control section, and the light emitting means such as the decorative lamp section 45 and the performance LED are turned on and off through the light display control section. As a result, a light production in accordance with the production scenario is realized.

As described above, when the main loop process is completed, the production software random number update process of step S1013 is performed until the next main loop update cycle arrives.

<17. Performance control side timer interrupt processing: Figure 23>
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, timer interrupt processing on the production control side will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the production control side timer interrupt processing. This performance control side timer interrupt process is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (1 ms), and is executed by interrupting the execution of the performance control side main process.

In FIG. 23, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register to the stack area (step S1051), and then executes button input state update processing (step S1052). In this button input state update process, the input state of the operation detection signal from the operation means (production button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in the RAM 243 in a predetermined location. Store in area. This operation detection information is used in the scenario update process (step S1008) in FIG. 22 when displaying player participation type effects, menu screens, information related to menu items, and the like. In this embodiment, it is also possible to detect single presses, long presses, repeated presses, etc.

Next, performance accessory motion update processing is executed (step S1053). In this performance accessory motion update process, processing is performed to create motor control data for the movable accessory based on the performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer.

Next, SOL/MOT output processing is performed (step S1054). In this SOL/MOT output process, the control data for the movable accessory created in the performance accessory motion update process is output to the drive control section. The drive control unit outputs a control signal based on the control data to the movable accessory motor of the movable accessory to be operated, and controls the operation thereof. As a result, a movable performance using movable accessories (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90, etc.) in accordance with the performance scenario is realized.

Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S1055). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S1008) of FIG. 22, the liquid crystal command is sent to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU), and the image Executes display control. As a result, image performance is realized in accordance with the performance scenario.

Next, RTC information acquisition processing is executed (step S1056). In this RTC information acquisition process, date and time information (RTC information) timed by the RTC is acquired. This RTC information is used when presenting effects based on the RTC information.

Next, the main loop update counter is incremented (step S1057). This main loop update counter is reset in step S1003 during the main processing on the effect control side described above, and is incremented in this processing. Therefore, when step S1057 is executed, the main loop update counter value is one of 0 to 15.

When the process of step S1057 is finished, the saved contents of the register are restored (step S1058), the timer interrupt process is ended, and the main process on the effect control side is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<18. Contents of received command analysis processing: Figure 24, Figure 25>
24 and 25 show processes that are closely related to the present invention among the processes executed in the received command analysis process (step S1007 in FIG. 22). Hereinafter, the cases in which the "pending addition command" and the "decorative design designation command" are received will be explained respectively.

(Pending addition command reception process: Figure 24)
In FIG. 24, the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) first executes a winning command reception confirmation process (step S2201). When the production control unit 24 receives a winning command, it first analyzes the content of the winning command, obtains prefetching determination result information (prefetching variation pattern information, and stores the obtained information in the prefetching information storage area of the RAM 243). A winning command reception process (not shown) is performed to store the winning command, but here, a reception confirmation process is performed to confirm that the winning command has been correctly received and the information has been acquired. Similarly to the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 on the main control side, pre-read information storage areas corresponding to the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side are provided. A reservation 1 look-ahead information storage area to a reservation n look-ahead information storage area (in this embodiment, n=4) corresponding to the number of held balls are provided, and each can store look-ahead judgment result information for the maximum number of active pending balls. It becomes.

Next, it is determined whether the prefetching determination result information indicates that prefetching is prohibited (step S2203). If it is the pre-reading prohibition period (step S2203: YES), the process exits the pending addition command reception process without doing anything.

If pre-reading is not prohibited (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2204, and it is determined whether the "continuous notice counter" is zero (step S2204). This "continuous notice counter" is a counter for determining a prohibition period for prohibiting the occurrence of duplicate advance notice effects. Specifically, if the current pending ball is selected as the target of the pre-read notification performance by the pre-read notification lottery in step S2205, which will be described below, the current pending ball will be used until the current pending ball is used in the symbol variation display game. , is a counter to prevent a newly generated action pending ball from being targeted for execution of a look-ahead effect. Note that the "continuous notice counter" stores the value of the current number of pending pitches N for the above-mentioned reason (see step S2208, which will be described later).

If the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S2204: NO), it is determined that the pre-read notice lottery is prohibited, and the process exits the pending addition command reception process without doing anything. If the value of the continuous notice counter is zero (step 2204: YES), it is determined that the advance notice lottery is allowed, and a advance notice lottery process is performed (step S2205). In the pre-read effect lottery process, as a result of pre-reading the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give a pre-read notice based on the pre-read fluctuation pattern information. The "winning command" includes pre-read fluctuation pattern information, and the "pending addition command" includes information regarding the special symbol type, and these pieces of information are used for the pre-read preview lottery.

There are two types of pre-read notices according to this embodiment. One is a winning time-based advance notice (pending change notice) that is mainly generated when a game ball enters the starting hole and the starting condition is satisfied (that is, when winning or when the starting condition is satisfied). The other one is a look-ahead notice of a symbol change medium system (a look-ahead notice during variation) that occurs during a symbol change display game that is executed first in chronological order. Therefore, there are two types of pre-read preview lottery: a lottery to determine whether or not to give a pending change notice, and a lottery to determine whether to give a pre-read notice during fluctuations, and here, both are performed independently.

In the above pre-reading effect lottery process, a pre-reading notice is drawn (step S2205) using the pre-reading variation pattern information specified by the winning command and a pre-reading effect lottery table (not shown) (step S2205), and the result of the pre-reading effect lottery is Based performance information (information regarding the pre-read performance lottery results) is set (step 2206). This performance information is used when displaying a preview preview. The performance information set here includes (i) information specifying a pending change notice, for example, a performance scenario related to a pending change notice such as pending color and timing specification information of a pending change, (ii) a look-ahead notice during fluctuation. Specified information, for example, production scenario related to the fluctuating pre-read preview such as preview image type (thunder cloud image, rain image, lightning image) and execution number information, (iii) pre-read production lottery non-winning (loss) information (pre-read preview) (information not to be executed). In this example, the lottery for whether or not to give a pending change notice and the lottery to determine whether to give a look-ahead notice during change are conducted independently, so there are cases where only the pending change notice is executed. , There are cases in which only the look-ahead notice during change is executed, cases in which both look-ahead notices such as pending change notice and look-ahead notice during change are executed, and cases in which both pending change notice and look-ahead notice during change are executed. , the expectation of winning is higher than when the advance notice is executed alone.

When executing the pre-read notice of (i) and (ii) above, the production control unit 24 executes the pending change notice and/or the variation based on the production information (performance scenario related to the pre-read notice) based on the result of the pre-read production lottery. Performance control processing necessary for the medium preview is performed, thereby realizing the pre-read preview shown in FIG. 5B, for example. On the other hand, in the case of not winning the pre-reading effect lottery in (iii) above, the pre-reading notice is not executed, and the white pending in the normal pending display (normal pending display mode) is displayed in the corresponding pending display area (a1 to d1, a2 in FIG. 4). ~d2) will be displayed.

As a result of the above-mentioned pre-read effect lottery process, if a pre-read notice is to be executed, the value of the current number of active pending pitches is stored in the continuous notice counter (step S2208). As a result, the advance notice lottery for new balls with pending operation is prohibited for a certain period of time. Note that this counter value is decremented by 1 each time an old operation pending ball that occurs earlier is consumed in the decorative symbol designation command reception process shown in FIG. 25 (described later). reference). As mentioned above, by setting the value of the existing number of pending balls in the "continuous notice counter" when you win the pre-reading lottery, new pending balls will be added for the number of symbol changes corresponding to the number of pending balls. Even if a ball occurs, the lottery of the advance notice performance is prohibited for it (step S2204: NO route). For example, when the current number of balls on hold is three, the pre-read notice lottery is prohibited during three symbol changes corresponding to the number of pending balls, thereby preventing the occurrence of the pre-read notice. Note that the above-mentioned "continuous notice counter" can also be used as information regarding advance notice winnings. In other words, if the "continuous notice counter" is zero, it can be determined that the advance notice has not been won (the state of not executing the advance notice), and if it is a value other than zero, it can be determined that the advance notice has been won (the state of executing the advance notice). can.

(Decorative design designation command reception process: Figure 25)
Referring to FIG. 25, the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) first executes a fluctuation pattern designation command reception confirmation process (step S2301). When the production control unit 24 receives a variation pattern designation command, it first analyzes the contents of the command, obtains variation pattern information (variation pattern information at the start of variation), and stores the obtained information in the pre-read information storage area of the RAM 243. The variable pattern designation command reception process (not shown) to be stored is performed. Here, confirm that the fluctuation pattern designation command has been correctly received and the information has been acquired.

Next, the content of the decorative symbol designation command is analyzed to obtain symbol information regarding the special symbol type and winning type (design lottery result) (step S2302).

Next, a production scenario type lottery is executed (step S2303). Here, based on the current production mode (if a production stage is set, the current production stage) and fluctuation pattern information, one of the production scenarios in which the symbol is changing this time is selected by lottery from among multiple types of production scenarios. Determined by. The performance scenario includes various performance scenarios related to the preview performance to be executed during the current symbol change. Once the performance scenario is determined, the specific type of preview performance that belongs to the determined preview performance type is further determined. For example, there are performance scenarios A to C, where performance scenario A is a performance scenario related to a step-up performance type, performance scenario B is a performance scenario related to a player participation type performance type, and performance scenario C is related to a background change notice. In the case of a performance scenario, it is assumed that performance scenario A is determined by a performance scenario type lottery. This performance scenario A is a performance scenario related to step-up performance types (for example, step-up performance C that ends in one stage, step-up performance B that develops to two stages, and step-up performance A that develops to the final stage). , which of the step-up performances A to C belonging to the step-up performance type is to be executed is determined by a predetermined preview performance type lottery. The lottery probabilities for these step-up performances A to C are determined according to the variation patterns, and the higher the probability of winning is in the variation pattern, the more likely it is that step-up production C, which has a relatively high expectation of winning, will be drawn. ing. In addition, other effects (setting suggestion effects and non-advance effects) to be executed in conjunction with the execution of the step-up effect are also determined here.

Then, when a specific preview performance (here, one of step-up performances A to C) is determined, a variation pattern of decorative symbols related to the current performance scenario is determined. Step-up performances A to C have a predetermined performance execution time depending on the content of the performance. For example, step-up performance C for the 1st stage is 9 seconds, step-up performance B for the 2nd stage is 10 seconds, Step-up performance A, which develops to the final stage (3 stages), is set to last 12 seconds. Therefore, for example, if step-up performance C (performance execution time is 9 seconds) is determined by this preview type lottery, a decorative symbol performance with a long stop motion is determined as the decorative symbol performance, and a step-up performance is determined. If B (production execution time is 10 seconds) is determined, a decorative symbol production with a stop action middle is determined as the decorative symbol production, and if step-up production A (production execution time is 12 seconds) is determined. In this case, a decorative pattern presentation accompanied by a short stop motion is determined as the decorative pattern presentation. As a result, the decorative pattern effects shown in FIGS. 44 to 45 are realized. For example, if the current variation pattern is a normal variation of 13s, a decorative pattern effect as shown in FIG. 44 will be realized.

Next, a decorative pattern stop pattern lottery process is performed (step S2304). In this decorative pattern stopping pattern lottery process, based on the production scenario and pattern information, the temporary stopping pattern and the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern (combination of decorative pattern stopping pattern) to be finally stopped are determined by lottery. For example, if the content of the fluctuation pattern is that there is a winning fluctuation pattern specified by reach effect, and the winning type information is 10R probability variable jackpot, then in order to determine the combination of decorative symbols related to that jackpot, the left symbol is first determined by lottery. Then, a decorative symbol that can form a reach state with the left symbol is determined as the right symbol, and based on the determined left symbol and right symbol, the decorative symbol row related to the 10R probability-variable jackpot is finally stopped. Decide on the middle pattern as follows. Further, if the variation pattern is a normal variation pattern (for example, normal variation 13s), the combination of decorative symbols that will be finally stopped is determined so that the losing number is stopped and displayed. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols when the current decorative symbol fluctuation display game is completed is determined, and a series of fluctuating performances (preview performance scenario, decorative symbol performance scenario (decorative symbol fluctuation pattern) to be executed during the current symbol fluctuation are determined. A production scenario)) is determined. Then, scenario data regarding the determined fluctuating performance is set (step S2305).

Next, continuous preview performance management processing is executed (step S2306). Here, performance processing regarding the look-ahead notice during fluctuation is performed. For example, it performs the effect processing necessary for executing the fluctuating look-ahead notice, such as subtracting the continuous notice counter due to the execution of the current game, and displaying a notice image related to the fluctuating look-ahead notice.

When the continuous notice performance management process in step S2306 is finished, various setting processes at the start of decorative pattern variation (step S2307) are performed, and the process exits from the decorative pattern designation command reception process. Thereafter, a decorative symbol variation display game based on the above performance scenario will be started.

[Third embodiment]
In the first and second embodiments described above, the embodiments in which "support time saving" was provided were mainly described. In the third embodiment, which will be described next, an embodiment will be described in which a "ceiling function" that provides a predetermined profit status is provided as a relief function when the player becomes addicted to the game. Note that substantially the same components (including processes) as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment are given the same reference numerals. Furthermore, descriptions of components that are substantially the same as those in the first embodiment or the second embodiment will be omitted as appropriate to avoid redundant description.

(About ceiling function)
In order to facilitate understanding of this embodiment, first, the above-mentioned "ceiling function" will be explained.

In conventional gaming machines, the transition to the time saving state or variable probability state is limited to when a jackpot is won, and the game tends to become monotonous. Particularly, if the player encounters a big problem before winning the jackpot (for example, not winning the jackpot even after playing the game twice or more than the jackpot probability denominator), the player's desire to play will be significantly reduced. Therefore, a gaming machine that can shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player from an opportunity different from the opportunity to win a jackpot is desired. Therefore, in this embodiment, a gaming machine is provided which has a "ceiling function" that provides a predetermined profit status as a relief function when the player becomes addicted to the game. Thereby, it is possible to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player from an opportunity different from the opportunity to win a jackpot, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing significantly even if the player gets addicted to the jackpot.

The above-mentioned "ceiling function" is performed when a predetermined number of fluctuations (a predetermined number of games; hereinafter also referred to as "ceiling number of games") is reached without at least winning a jackpot, in other words, without winning a jackpot at least. This is an addictive relief function that grants a predetermined profit status (ceiling benefit) to the player when a predetermined number of games have been played. In this respect, it is different from time-saving support in which profits are awarded through a lottery. From the perspective of a stress relief function, the ceiling benefit is naturally at least in a more advantageous profit state than the normal state.

As mentioned above, the ceiling function has a strong meaning as a relief function for addicts, so basically it is not a gaming state where the probability of winning a jackpot is high, such as a variable probability state or a potential state, but a state where the probability of winning a jackpot is high. If a predetermined number of games are executed without winning a jackpot during a low probability gaming state (time saving state (time saving mode) and normal state (normal mode), preferably during the normal state (normal mode) It is preferable to activate (occur) when the number of games has been reached.

(About ceiling benefits)
The types of the above-mentioned "ceiling benefits" will be explained. As shown in the list of "Examples of Ceiling Benefits" in Note 2 of Figure 49B, the types of ceiling benefits include, for example, "Infinite Time Saving,""Limited Time Saving,""InfiniteVariable,""FiniteVariable," and " There are "infinite potential", "finite potential", "forced hit", etc. Broadly dividing these benefits, "infinite time saving" and "finite time saving" are "ceiling time saving types", "infinite definite variation" and "finite definite variation" are "ceiling definite variation types", and "infinite potential" and "finite potential" are "ceiling time saving types". ``Definite'' is a ceiling benefit that belongs to the ``ceiling potential type'', and ``forced hit'' is a ceiling benefit that belongs to the ``ceiling hit type''. Below, these ceiling benefit types will be explained one by one.

(Infinite time saving)
(A) "Infinite time saving" is a privilege that grants a time saving state until the next jackpot. In addition, in the case of infinite time saving, the number of time saving is "unlimited number of times (infinite)", but although the number of time saving is finite, it is actually the number of time saving until the next jackpot, for example, due to the jackpot lottery probability. , 10,000 times, 65,535 times, etc., there is no possibility of ending the time saving state by reaching the number of time saving times (it is safe to think that it is 0%), or it is impossible to finish the time saving state during the business hours of the pachinko hall. In the present invention, even when a specific number of time savings is given (for example, 5000 times), it can be treated as belonging to infinite time savings. The same applies to "infinite time reduction (infinite number of time reductions)" related to support time reduction.

(Limited time saving)
(B) "Limited time saving" means that a time saving state is granted up to a predetermined number of times in order to achieve an appropriate jackpot winning rate. This point is different from the above-mentioned infinite time saving, which has no limit on the number of times. A typical example of the number of time savings awarded is 100 times, which is the same number of time savings as the time saving jackpot (4R time saving jackpot), but it is not limited to giving the same number of time savings as the time saving jackpot; It's okay. For example, if the number of time savings due to the time saving jackpot is M times (for example, 100 times of the 4R time saving jackpot) and the finite number of time savings due to the ceiling bonus is N times, "Number of time savings N<Number of time savings M" (M = 100 times, N = 50 times, 75 times, etc.) or a number that satisfies "Number of time savings N>Number of time savings M" (M = 100 times, N = 200 times, 400 times, etc.). Note that the same can be applied to the number of time reductions related to support time reduction. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "infinite time saving", when the number of time saving times is "substantially until the next jackpot" is given, it can be said that it belongs to this finite time saving in that there is a limit on the number of times, but as mentioned earlier, the present invention In this case, it can be treated as belonging to the infinite shortening of time.

(Specific example of granting limited working hours)
Here, when granting limited time savings through ceiling benefits, the following grant forms (1) to (5) can be used. Note that although the explanation here focuses on the form of granting finite time savings, the concept does not completely exclude granting infinite time savings.

(Limited time saving form 1)
(1) If there are multiple types (number of types A) of the number of time reductions due to a jackpot (number of time reductions granted due to winning a jackpot (jackpot time reduction state)), the number of time reductions due to ceiling benefits (finite time reduction) (ceiling time reduction state) The number of types is determined to be fewer than that (number of types B). Specifically, it is configured to satisfy the relationship "number of types B<number of types A". For example, if two types (number of types A) are provided as the number of time reductions due to jackpots: 100 times (number of time reductions A) and 50 times (number of time reductions B), one type of number of time reductions due to ceiling benefits (for example, number of time reductions 100 (time saving number A)). Note that, as long as the relationship "Number of Types B<Number of Types A" is satisfied, a different number of time saving times (for example, 150 times) than the number of time saving times due to the jackpot may be given. In addition, if there are two or more types of time saving times (work time saving states) due to ceiling benefits (in the case of "2 ≦ number of types B < number of types A"), one of the number of working hours (working time saving states) will be determined by a predetermined lottery. ) can be configured to be decidable. Moreover, the above-mentioned "number of types A" may be the number of types of time reductions (finite time reductions) due to support time reduction. In addition, as an exception to this provision form, infinite time saving may be included as long as the relationship of "number of types B<number of types A" is satisfied. In addition, regarding the relationship between the number of time reductions due to the jackpot and the number of time reductions due to the ceiling benefit in this grant form, the "number of time reductions due to the ceiling benefit" should be read as "the number of time reductions due to support time reduction" as appropriate, and the number of time reductions due to the jackpot and the number of time reductions due to support. This can be applied in relation to the number of time reductions (the same applies to finite time reduction provision forms 3 to 5, which will be described later).

(Limited time saving form 2)
(2) If there are multiple types of time reduction times (ceiling time reduction state) due to ceiling benefits, one of the number of time reduction times (ceiling time reduction state) can be determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling benefit lottery).
If there are multiple types of time savings due to a jackpot, for example, if there are 50 time savings and 100 time savings, the same number of time savings (50 and 100) as the jackpot will be selected for the ceiling bonus lottery. can do. In this case, as a ceiling benefit, the number of time savings equivalent to the jackpot can be given. Of course, a plurality of times (for example, 100 times, 75 times, and 25 times) including times of time savings different from the number of times of time savings due to the jackpot may be subject to the ceiling privilege lottery. In this case, since the number of time savings that is different from the jackpot is given, it does not become an excessive ceiling benefit.
Of course, the number of time savings to be drawn can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay. It can also include the number of time reductions and, in exceptional cases, infinite time reduction. In addition, the ceiling bonus lottery may include a "loss" option in which the ceiling bonus is not awarded. When providing a loss, in the case of a ceiling benefit that includes infinite time reduction or a high number of time reductions (for example, 1000 times), it is suitable to reduce the ceiling benefit grant rate and prevent excessive ceiling benefits from being granted. .

Such a ceiling bonus lottery function can improve gameplay in that a fixed ceiling bonus is not given each time the ceiling is reached.

In addition, the lottery probabilities (selection rates) of the ceiling benefit types (here, multiple time saving times) that are subject to the ceiling benefit lottery may be the same or approximately the same, or may be different in whole or in part. Good too. Further, the lottery target may include a "ceiling benefit loss" in which no ceiling benefit is given. In the case where a ceiling award loss is involved, the ceiling award is not necessarily awarded even if the ceiling game is reached, but in this case, the "execution (execution right) of the ceiling award lottery" serves as a relief function for addicts.

Alternatively, a lottery probability may be determined according to the "set value", and the number of time reductions (time reduction state) may be determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling award lottery according to the setting value). For example, the configuration is such that as the set value becomes higher, a relatively larger number of time saving times (time saving state) is likely to be selected. In other words, the configuration is such that as the setting value increases, benefits with relatively high profit levels are more likely to be granted (the same applies to other ceiling benefits described later). Specifically, if "100 times, 75 times, and 50 times" are set as the types of time saving times, and these lottery probabilities are "setting 1", "25%, 35%, 40%", "setting" In the case of 6”, it is “45%, 30%, 25%”, etc. However, on the contrary, considering that the lower the set value is, the more likely it is to become addicted, the configuration may be such that the lower the set value is, the more likely a relatively large number of time saving times will be selected. In other words, the configuration is such that as the set value becomes lower, benefits with relatively higher profit levels are more likely to be granted (the same applies to other ceiling benefits described later). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which "a specific set value is determined when a specific ceiling benefit is granted." For example, if 25 time saving times are given, "setting 6 is confirmed", and if 75 times is given, "setting 4 or more is confirmed", etc. In this way, the ceiling benefit determination method related to the setting value can provide the player with useful information such as the setting estimation factor, and is therefore useful in increasing the motivation of players who are addicted to the game.

(Limited time saving grant form 3)
(3) When the average number of time savings due to jackpots is N and the average number of time savings due to ceiling benefits is M, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Formula 1) to (Formula 3).
(Equation 1) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of time reductions N<average number of time reductions M". For example, when there are 100 times and 75 times of time savings due to the jackpot, the average number of time savings N is 75 times, so the average number of time savings M due to the ceiling benefit is set to be a greater number of time savings. In this case, the ceiling benefit is relatively higher in profit than a normal jackpot win, so it is a nice benefit for players who are addicted to playing and have significantly decreased their desire to play. Note that the average number of time reductions M may be an infinite number of times. When the average number of time reductions M is set to an infinite number of times, it is equivalent to the case where the above-mentioned "infinite time reduction" is provided.
(Equation 2) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of time reductions N=average number of time reductions M". In this case, the degree of profit from the jackpot (the number of shortened hours) and the degree of profit from the ceiling privilege are the same.
(Equation 3) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of time reductions N>average number of time reductions M". In this case, the degree of profit from the jackpot is relatively lower than the degree of profit from the ceiling benefit, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being provided. Note that the average number of time reductions due to the ceiling benefit M can be read as the average number of time reductions M due to support time reduction, and this can be applied to the relationship between the average number of time reductions N due to the jackpot and the average number of time reductions M due to support time reduction.

(Limited time reduction grant form 4)
(4) Similarly to the above (Formula 3), the following (Formula 4) can be configured to be satisfied, with a focus on preventing excessive benefits from being provided.
(Equation 4) The system is configured to satisfy at least the following relationship: "Number of time savings due to ceiling bonus ≦ Maximum number of time savings due to jackpot". For example, if there are 100 times and 75 times of time savings due to the jackpot, the maximum number of time savings is 100 times, so the number of time savings due to the ceiling bonus is set to, for example, 100 times, 90 times, etc. Also, focusing on the minimum number of time savings due to a jackpot, the number of time savings may be the number that satisfies the relationship of "minimum number of time savings due to a jackpot≦number of time savings due to a ceiling benefit<maximum number of time savings due to a jackpot". For example, if there are 100 times and 75 times of time savings due to the jackpot, the number of time savings may be determined to satisfy the relationship "75 times ≦ the number of time savings due to ceiling benefits < 100 times".

(Limited time saving grant form 5)
Although there is no particular restriction on the number of time reductions in the finite time reduction, it is preferable to set the number of time reductions to a number that satisfies the following relationship.
(Mangoku 9) When the number of finite time savings is "Z" and the denominator of the jackpot lottery probability (1/M) at low probability is "M", the following relational expression (Red 7) is determined to be satisfied.
“0.4M≦Z≦3.8M (can be 3.8M to 4.0M)” (Red 7)
In the case of formula (red 7), for example, if the maximum number of time savings is about 4 times the probability denominator M, the possibility of winning the jackpot within that number of time savings is very high (the occurrence of non-winning). (approximately 2%), it can be said to be appropriate as a benefit for players who continue playing until the ceiling number of games. Note that the value of M may be based on the jackpot lottery probability of any of Settings 1 to 6. Preferably, the jackpot lottery probability with an intermediate setting of 3, more preferably with a minimum setting of 1 or a maximum setting of 6 is used as the standard. For example, referring to FIG. 4, if the jackpot lottery probability at low probability of setting 1 is used as the standard, "M = 200 (at low probability: 1/200)" is substituted into the above (formula 5), It can be said that it is preferable to adopt a time saving number that satisfies the relationship “80 times≦Z≦760 times”. For example, if the jackpot lottery probability at low probability of setting 6 is used as the standard, by substituting "M=180 (at low probability: 1/180)" into the above (formula 10), "72 times ≦ Z ≦ It can be said that it is preferable to adopt the number of time saving times that satisfies the relationship "684 times". Note that the above relationship (Equation 5) can also be applied to the number of time reductions related to support time reduction.

(infinitely variable)
(C) "Infinitely variable" is a privilege that grants a variable probability state until the next jackpot. In addition, in the case of infinite probability variation, the number of STs is "unlimited number of times (infinite)", but like the same event as the above "infinite time saving", the number of STs until the next jackpot (for example, 10,000 times) or 65,536 times).

(finite definite variation)
(D) "Finite probability variation" is different from the above-mentioned infinite probability variation, and is a state in which a probability variation state is provided within a predetermined number of STs in order to achieve an appropriate jackpot winning rate. In addition, in the above-mentioned "infinite definite variation", when the number of STs that are "substantially until the next jackpot" is given, it can be said that it belongs to this finite definite variation in that there is a limit on the number of times, but it is the same as the above-mentioned "infinite time reduction". It may be treated as belonging to infinite definite variation, as in the case of the elephant, or it may be treated as belonging to finite definite variation (the same applies to infinite definite variation, which will be described later).

(Specific example of adding finite definite variation)
Here, when granting a finite variable, the following ceiling benefit granting forms (finite variable granting forms) 1 to 5 are the same as those explained in finite time saving granting forms 1 to 5 of "finite time saving" above. It can be set to 4. In addition, in the following finite variable granting forms 1 to 5, the "time saving number" explained in the above "finite time saving granting forms 1 to 4" has been replaced with "ST number", "time saving state" has been replaced with "definite variable state", etc. as appropriate. Since the contents (concepts) are substantially the same, the contents will be omitted as appropriate in the description for convenience of explanation and to avoid duplication.

(Finite variable grant form 1)
(1) Number of STs due to jackpot (There are multiple types (number of types A) of ST numbers (variable state) given due to winning a jackpot, but the number of STs (variable state) due to ceiling benefits is smaller than that (number of types (variable state)). The number of types is B).In other words, the configuration is such that the relationship "Number of types B<Number of types A" is satisfied.

In the case of this embodiment, the number of STs (variable state) given due to the winning of the variable probability jackpot is one type of infinite number (65535 times), so for convenience of explanation, here, the number of STs is 100 times. The explanation will be given assuming that there are three types (number of types B) of variable probability jackpots that give out three types (number of types B): (probability variation A), 75 times (probability variation B), and 25 times (probability variation C). In this case, for example, the ceiling privilege is configured so that only one type of ST count of 100 (probability variable A) is awarded.

(Finite variable grant form 2)
(2) If there are multiple types of ST times (probability variable states) based on ceiling benefits, one of the ST times (probability variable states) is determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling benefit lottery). Regarding this point, it is substantially the same as the content explained in "(Limited time reduction granting form 2)" in the above finite time reduction, where the "number of time reductions" is replaced with "ST number", "time reduction state" is read as "variable state", etc. as appropriate. It is.

(Finite variable grant form 3)
(3) When the average number of STs due to variable probability jackpots is N, and the average number of STs due to ceiling benefits is M, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Formula 4) to (Formula 6). Regarding these (Formula 4) to (Formula 6), the wording of "Number of time saving" in (Formula 1) to (Formula 3) explained in "(Finite time saving provision form 3)" in the above finite time saving is changed to "ST number of times". ” is substantially the same as the other words.
(Equation 4) It is configured to satisfy the relationship “average number of STs N<average number of STs M”. Note that the average number of STs M may be an infinite number of times. When the average number of STs M is set to infinite, it is equivalent to the case where the above-mentioned "infinite probability variation" is applied.
(Equation 5) It is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of STs N=average number of STs M".
(Equation 6) It is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of STs N>average number of STs M".

(Finite variable grant form 4)
(4) Focusing on the point of not giving excessive benefits, the number of STs is determined to satisfy at least the relationship "Number of STs due to ceiling benefits ≦ maximum number of STs due to jackpot". For example, if the number of STs due to a jackpot is 100 times (probable variable A), 75 times (probable variable B), and 25 times (probable variable C), the maximum number of STs is 100 times (probable variable A) or less, for example, 100 times, It can be set to 90 times, etc. Further, focusing on the minimum number of STs, the number of STs may be the number of STs that satisfies the relationship of "minimum number of STs due to jackpot ≦ number of STs due to ceiling privilege < maximum number of STs due to jackpot". For example, the number of time reductions is set to satisfy the relationship "25 times ≦ the number of STs with ceiling benefits < 100 times".

(Finite variable grant form 5)
Although there is no particular restriction on the number of STs of finite probability variation, it is preferable to determine the number of time saving times that satisfies the following relationship.
(5) If the ST number of finite probability variable is "Y" and the denominator of the jackpot lottery probability (1/N) at high probability is "N", then "0.4N≦Y≦3.8N (3.8N ~ It is preferable that the following relational expression is satisfied. Note that the value of N may be based on the jackpot lottery probability of any of Settings 1 to 6. Preferably, the jackpot lottery probability with an intermediate setting of 3, more preferably with a minimum setting of 1 or a maximum setting of 6 is used as the standard.

(infinite potential)
(E) "Infinite Potential" is a privilege that gives you a potential status until the next jackpot. In addition, in the case of infinite potential, the number of STs is "unlimited (infinite)", but as with the infinite time shortening and infinite probability variations above, even if you give the number of STs that will essentially reach the next jackpot. good.

(finite potential)
(F) "Finite potential" differs from the above-mentioned infinite potential, and gives a potential state up to a predetermined number of STs in order to achieve an appropriate winning rate. In this embodiment, a potential jackpot that triggers a transition to a potential state is not provided, but if a part of the probability variable jackpot is a potential probability jackpot, the finite probability variable grant form 1 explained in finite probability variable It is possible to use the same configuration as in 4 to 4 (configuration related to assigning the ST number of times). Regarding this point, the content is essentially the same as that of finite definite variation (the wording of "definite variable state" is replaced with the wording of "potential state" as appropriate), so detailed explanation will be omitted to avoid duplication. .

(per force)
(G) "Forced win" means a forced jackpot win, regardless of the jackpot lottery. "Unrelated to the jackpot lottery" means that the jackpot lottery itself is not executed, or even if the jackpot lottery is executed, the result is treated as invalid, and it means that the jackpot lottery is completely unrelated. Not limited to meaning. Note that the jackpot may be a variable jackpot or a time-saving jackpot.

The above-described ceiling benefit is useful as an addiction relief function because it can provide a profit equal to or different from the profit degree given by the jackpot lottery result.

After the ceiling privilege is awarded, the game state (gaming mode related to the ceiling privilege) related to the ceiling privilege is controlled until the ceiling privilege is consumed or at least until a jackpot is won. Specifically, if it is a "finite benefit" such as finite time saving, finite variable probability, or finite potential, it is possible that the specified time saving number or ST number ends without winning the jackpot, or at least if the jackpot is won. If the player wins, the benefit state is terminated, and the ceiling benefit is not granted until the ceiling activation opportunity (ceiling game) arrives again. On the other hand, if it is an "infinite type benefit" such as infinite time saving, infinite probability change, or infinite probability, the benefit state will continue until the next jackpot, and the privilege state will end at least when the jackpot is won.

(931. Types of gaming machines with ceiling function)
Although the details will be explained later, gaming machines with a ceiling function (ceiling function equipped type) can be roughly divided into ``Thoroughbred type machines that have a ceiling function and do not have support time saving'' (Tenki A, Tenki A below). There are two types: ``a type that belongs to machine B)'' and a ``hybrid type (type that belongs to machine C and D below)'' that has a ceiling function and a support time reduction.
(Tenki A) A type of "game start activation type" in which the ceiling function is activated at the start of the ceiling game (start of symbol fluctuation display) (ceiling activation at game start + support not installed type).
(Tenki B) Ceiling function is activated when the game ends (variable time elapses, fixed display time elapses, or fixed display time ends at a predetermined timing). Ceiling activation + support not installed type).
(Tenki C) A type that has support time reduction in Tenki A (ceiling activation at the start of the game + support time reduction type installed).
(Tenki D) A type that has support time reduction in Tenki B (ceiling activation at the end of the game + support time reduction type).
The above types of "Tenki C" and "Tenki D" are used when the support time reduction is won in the ceiling game, that is, when the ceiling function activation condition and the support time reduction state activation condition overlap. Types that prioritize functions (granting ceiling benefits) (Tenki C1, Tenki D1: Ceiling priority activation type) and types that prioritize support time reduction states (granting support time reduction states by winning support time reductions) (Tenki C1, Tenki D1: ceiling priority activation type) C2, Tenki D2: Support time-saving priority activation type).

Therefore, in the ceiling priority activation type, the ceiling time reduction state is controlled regardless of whether the support time reduction is won or not in the ceiling game. In the support time reduction priority activation type, if the support time reduction is won, the support time reduction state is controlled, and if it is a loss, the support time reduction state is controlled to the ceiling time reduction state. In addition, in both the ceiling priority activation type and the support time reduction priority activation type, if you win a jackpot in the ceiling game, after the ceiling game ends, you will be given an advantageous state based on the jackpot (in this embodiment) via the jackpot game. , time saving state, variable probability state). In this embodiment, unless otherwise specified, the explanation will be given as a ceiling priority activation type.

Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the above-mentioned Tenki A to Tenki D2 may be referred to as follows.
(1) Type of Tenki A is “non-equipped with ceiling activation support at the start of the game”
(2) Type of Tenki B is “non-equipped with ceiling activation support at the end of the game”
(3) Type of Tenki C is “equipped with ceiling activation support at the start of the game”
(3α) The type of Tenki C1 is “equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the start of the game”
(3β) Change the type of Tenki C2 to “Equipped with ceiling non-priority activation support at the start of the game”
(4) Type of Tenki D is “equipped with ceiling activation support at the end of the game”
(4α) The type of Tenki D1 is “equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the end of the game”
(4β) Change the type of Tenki D2 to “Equipped with ceiling non-priority activation support at the end of the game”
(5) Activate the ceiling function at the start of the ceiling game The above types of "Tenki A, Tenki C, Tenki C1, Tenki C2" are summarized as "Ceiling activation type at the start of the game"
(6) The ceiling function is triggered when the game ends. The above types of "Tenki B, Tenki D, Tenchi D1, and Tenki D2" are combined into "ceiling activation type at the end of the game".

(About the number of ceiling games)
Next, the number of ceiling games (the number of ceiling activation games) will be explained. The number of ceiling games according to this embodiment is at least 1000 addictive games in a gaming state with a low probability state. For example, "1000 addictive games in a gaming state with a low probability state" include: (1) reaching the ceiling game (1000th game) without winning a jackpot during the normal state (or a gaming mode belonging to the normal mode); and (2) the case where the ceiling game (1000th game) is reached without winning the jackpot during the normal state or the time saving state, but either case may be adopted. . In the former case (1), the number of games executed during the normal state is counted as the number of ceiling games, and in the latter case (2), the number of ceiling games is the number of games executed in the normal state and the time-saving state. This is the form that will be counted. In this embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, an example in which the former (1) is adopted will be mainly described. Note that the latter (2) will be described later (see the low-probability game count form (grant form (β)) described below).

It should be noted that although the value to be set for the ceiling number of games can be determined as appropriate, it is preferable to set the number of games such that the following relationship is satisfied.
(Mangoku 8) When the number of ceiling games is "H" and the denominator of the jackpot lottery probability (1/M) at low probability is "M", it is preferable that the following relational expression (Formula 10) is satisfied.
“2.5M≦H≦3.0M” (Formula 10)
The reason for doing this is that if the number of ceiling games is within 2.5 to 3 times the probability denominator, the probability of getting addicted to it is about 8% to 5%. This is because players can win the jackpot by the time they reach the maximum number of games, and secondly, it prevents players from playing games blindly aiming for the ceiling number of games (suppressing the desire for gambling). Note that the value of M may be based on the jackpot lottery probability of any of Settings 1 to 6. Preferably, the jackpot lottery probability is based on an intermediate setting of 3, more preferably a minimum setting of 1 or a maximum setting of 6 (Italy 45). For example, referring to FIG. 4, if the jackpot lottery probability at low probability of setting 1 is used as the standard, "M = 200 (at low probability: 1/200)" is substituted into the above (formula 10), It can be said that it is preferable to adopt a ceiling game number that satisfies the relationship "500 times≦H≦600 times". For example, if the jackpot lottery probability at low probability of setting 6 is used as the standard, "M = 180 (low probability: 1/180)" is substituted into the above (formula 10), and "450 times ≦ H ≦ It can be said that it is preferable to adopt a ceiling number of games that satisfies the relationship "540 times."

(About the game mode and variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode (variable pattern selection mode): Figure 76)
In the case of this embodiment, since a ceiling function is provided, unlike the first embodiment, a game mode and a variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) as shown in FIG. 76 can be provided. Types with ceiling functions include the above-mentioned Tenki A, Tenki B, Tenki C (Tenki C1, C2), and Tenki D (Tenki D1, D2), but depending on each type, A different game mode, a variable pattern selection mode (Tcode), etc. may be provided as appropriate.

Although the details will be described later using FIGS. 49A and 49B, the "general mode" and the "premonition mode" are game modes that belong to the normal mode, and the "general mode" is different from the "general mode" in the first embodiment. The game mode corresponding to the "normal mode" and the "foreshadowing mode" are positioned as special game modes when the game has a ceiling function. In addition, there are "ceiling mode" and "heaven mode" as special game modes when the game has a ceiling function. "Ceiling mode" is a game mode that occurs in the ceiling game (1000th rotation), and includes ceiling mode α and ceiling mode β. The ceiling mode α is a game mode that occurs when the ceiling game starts, and the ceiling mode β is a game mode that occurs when the ceiling game starts. The "heaven mode" is a game mode mainly related to ceiling benefits. It should be noted that substantially the same game modes as in the first embodiment can be employed for "variable probability modes 1 to 3" and "time saving modes 1 to 3".

Regarding the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to each of the above gaming modes, FIG. )'', and FIG. 73 shows the ``hit/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table (for ceiling and heaven)'' that is referred to when a jackpot or support time-saving win occurs in the ceiling mode or heaven mode (heaven time-saving). Further, FIG. 74 shows a "loss variation pattern distribution table (general use)" that is referred to when a loss occurs in the general mode. The "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (general use)" shown in FIG. 74 has substantially the same table configuration as the "normal medium loss fluctuation pattern distribution table" shown in FIG. 33 of the first embodiment. Further, FIG. 75 shows a "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (for omen, ceiling, and heaven time saving)" that is referred to when there is a loss in the omen mode, ceiling mode, and heaven mode.

<30. Game mode transition form: Fig. 49A, Fig. 49B>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 49A and 49B, the contents of the "gaming mode" related to the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) regarding the gaming machine provided with the ceiling function, and the transition between each gaming mode (between each gaming state) The control and the production mode related to the game mode will be explained. FIGS. 49A and 49B are game flows outlining each game mode and the production mode related thereto.

In FIGS. 49A and 49B, for convenience of explanation regarding various game modes, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is of the above-mentioned "hybrid type (type belonging to Tenki C or Tenki D)". The game flow related to this is shown. Note that the variable probability mode and the time saving mode are the same as those in the first embodiment, so their details will be omitted to avoid redundant description.

As shown in the figure, the game modes can be roughly divided into ``normal mode'', ``ceiling mode'', ``heaven mode'', ``time saving mode'', and ``probability mode'', and the game can be played under these game modes. progress is controlled. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the player follows an advantageous hitting method according to the game state, and unless otherwise specified, in the case of left-handed hitting (normal state), "Special Figure 1 Side Symbol Fluctuation Display Game 1" is used. is executed, and when the right-hander is advantageous (probability variable state, time saving state), the description will be made assuming that "symbol variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side" is executed.

(30-1. Regarding “normal mode”)
The normal mode is a gaming mode in which the internal gaming state is related to the normal state (YJ = 00H), and this normal mode is the initial gaming mode. Migrated when RAM is cleared.

The normal mode of this embodiment includes a "general mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "00H" and a "precursor mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "08H". Basically, it is possible to shift from the normal mode to another game mode (variable probability mode or time saving mode) upon winning a jackpot or winning a support time saving, or upon reaching a ceiling and receiving a ceiling benefit.

(30-1A. About general mode)
During the above-mentioned "general mode", the controller stays in the "normal performance mode (air combat mode: FIG. 7B(b))(c)" which provides a performance related to the normal mode (general mode). This point is the same as the first embodiment.

(30-1A-1. Special effects during normal mode)
(Italy 51) In the normal mode, especially in the general mode, it is possible to execute an information preview regarding the existence of the "ceiling function". This "information notice" is a special effect that does not belong to either a notice effect that announces the degree of expectation of winning or a setting suggestion effect.To put it simply, it is a form of effect that reports information about the specifications of the gaming machine. ing. Therefore, the content of the performance in the information notice is to inform players, such as beginners and players who are seeing the game for the first time, that the game machine is equipped with a ceiling function (relief function). is installed, information regarding the number of games until reaching the ceiling (number of ceiling games), information regarding the number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling (remaining number of ceiling games), etc., are notified by this information notice. In addition, the information notice may appear as part of the winning presentation related to the jackpot game, may appear while waiting for the customer (at least a part of the presentation before the customer is waiting, and during the period of the customer waiting presentation), or may appear during the game settings. It can be made to appear on the screen or as an effect during a symbol variation display game. In any case, the information notice can be displayed at an appropriate time, but since it is not an effect that indicates the level of expectation of winning or suggests settings, it is necessary to display the information notice during periods other than during the game (while waiting for customers, when the game settings screen is displayed) It is preferable to make it appear during the middle period, etc.).

(30-1B. About the omen mode)
The above-mentioned "foreshadowing mode" is a game mode that is shifted to when the ceiling game is almost reached. Specifically, it is provided as a game mode to execute a "premonitory effect" that notifies you that the ceiling is almost reached. In this embodiment, during the general mode, the transition is made when a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning at least a jackpot. Specifically, if you get addicted to the 989th game during the normal mode, you will be transferred to the omen mode from the 990th game (see the block frame of "normal mode" in Fig. 49A and the block frame (α) of "omen mode" in Fig. 49B). ).

(30-1B-1. Regarding production during omen mode)
During the omen mode, the mode is shifted to the "omen performance mode" which performs an effect related to the omen mode (omen performance). During the omen production mode, a background image different from the normal production mode related to the general mode (for example, from the "day background image (background image for general mode)" with the shining sun in the normal production mode) to the "night background image (background image for general mode)" with shining stars) The background image for the omen mode)") is switched and displayed to notify that the omen mode is in progress. In the case of this embodiment, the normal production mode and the omen production mode differ only in the background image color, and basically the production related to the "air battle mode" shown in FIGS. 7B (b) and (c) appears. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, during the omen effect mode, for example, a "countdown display" is executed as an effect (remaining ceiling number display effect) that can identify the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached (remaining number of times the ceiling is reached) (the omen mode shown in FIG. 49B). (see block frame (δ)). In addition, the remaining ceiling number display effect does not display the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached, but can also be used as a presentation mode that can notify information about reaching the ceiling, such as "Preparing for the ceiling..." good. This remaining ceiling number display performance may be made to appear during a part of the period in the precursor mode, and for example, the remaining ceiling number display performance may be started (countdown display starts) from the 996th game, which is close to the ceiling. Specifically, considering the maximum number of pending memories of 4, it is possible to display a countdown (for example, suggest a count of zero in a ceiling game) between 996 games and 999 games or between 995 and 1000 games including ceiling games. can. If the number of games until the ceiling is known, there is a performance advantage in that if there are balls on hold, the player can prevent unnecessary hits until the ceiling is reached.

Furthermore, during the portent effect mode, at least a hold display mode (hold icon) different from that in the general mode is displayed. For example, in the normal production mode, the pending display format is based on a simple "round icon" as shown in Figure 5, but in the precursor production mode, a dedicated pending display format based on the "character icon" is displayed. (See the block frame (ε) of the precursor mode in FIG. 49B, and FIG. 50 described later). In general mode, one or more pending displays that exist immediately before the transition to portent mode (989th game) will be changed all at once to a dedicated pending display (character icon) after the transition to portent mode (990th game). Alternatively, only the pending display to be consumed during the sign mode may be changed to a dedicated pending display. To explain the latter configuration in detail, for example, in the case where there are 3 active pending balls while the 988th game is being executed, the pending display for the 989th game to the 991st game will be changed to ``'Round icon (in general mode)''. ``Character icon (Pending consumption target during portent mode: 990th game)'' ``Character icon (Pending consumption target during portent mode: 991st game)''. In addition, from the start of the harbinger production mode until the predetermined number of games are played, the same hold display (round icon) as in the normal production mode is displayed, and when the ceiling is almost reached (for example, considering the maximum number of pending memories of 4, 996 game to 999 game), the display may be switched to a hold display (character icon) dedicated to the omen. Further, during the omen effect mode, the above-mentioned "remaining ceiling number display effect" and/or "hold display exclusively for omen" may be displayed.

(About fluctuation patterns related to precursor mode)
If we pay attention to the "precursor mode ("precursor"column)" of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. It is set to be in a fluctuating state (during the normal mode, the game mode with the fastest average consumption time). This is done in consideration of the player's state of mind. Many players are thought to have a strong desire to ``I want to reach the ceiling as soon as possible'' or ``I want to get the ceiling benefit as soon as possible'' when they get close to the ceiling. Therefore, in this embodiment, the average digestion time during the precursor mode is increased. Furthermore, in the case of this embodiment, when winning a jackpot in the precursor mode, as shown in FIG. 72, the same winning fluctuation pattern distribution tables FB1 to FB6 as in the general mode are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a winning fluctuation pattern distribution table dedicated to the precursor mode may be provided. For example, a "variation per omen" can be provided as a win variation exclusively during the omen mode (see note 4 "variation per omen" in FIG. 72).

Note that the number of ceiling games (remaining number of ceiling games) is monitored by a "ceiling counter" whose function is the main control unit 20. Based on the value of this ceiling counter, it is possible to control the transition to the portent mode and the corresponding performance mode.

(Case where omen mode is not provided: case where omen mode is treated as a game mode that belongs to the general mode)
(Option 1) Although the foreshadow mode and the general mode of this embodiment have been described as game modes with different variable pattern selection modes (Tcodes), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the portent mode may be defined as a game mode belonging to the general mode. Specifically, the omen mode uses the same variable pattern selection mode (Tcode = 00H) as the general mode, but the effects are different between the omen mode and the general mode (for example, different background effects). Configure it as follows. In this case, it is not possible to select the fluctuation pattern exclusively for the above-mentioned portent mode, but it is possible to perform a background effect and a display effect for the number of remaining ceiling games that are different from those in the normal mode (the number of remaining ceiling games can be grasped by the ceiling counter). ), there are no particular problems. Furthermore, since there is no need to provide a fluctuation pattern distribution table dedicated to the precursor mode, there is an advantage that the control burden can be reduced.

(30-2. About ceiling mode)
Next, the "ceiling mode" will be explained with reference to FIG. 49B. In this embodiment, as already explained, a "ceiling function" is provided as a relief function in case of a serious jam. The number of ceiling games in this embodiment is set as the 1000th addictive game in the normal mode (normal state), and the ceiling mode is a game mode that occurs at the 1000th game (1000th rotation), and is limited to one game. (limited to one rotation) game mode.

Note that the ceiling mode is a game mode in which the internal gaming state is related to a time-saving state or a variable probability state, depending on the ceiling benefit. The following description assumes that a state (finite time saving of 1000 time saving times) is given. Hereinafter, the ceiling benefit according to this embodiment will also be referred to as "ceiling time reduction."

(About the activation timing of ceiling benefits)
““Ceiling activation type at the start of the game” and “Ceiling activation type at the end of the game””
Here, there are two types of ceiling function-equipped types that have different activation timings of ceiling benefits (ceiling time reduction) when reaching the ceiling game.
The first is "ceiling activation type at game start (Tenki A, Tenki C, Tenki C1, Tenki C2)" which activates the ceiling function at the start of the ceiling game.
The second type is the ``ceiling activation type at the end of the game (Tenki B, Tenki D, Tenki D1, and Tenki D2)'' that activates the ceiling function when the ceiling game ends. Which type to adopt can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay.

If the former "ceiling activation type at the start of the game" is adopted, the ceiling time reduction is given at the start of the ceiling game, so the ceiling mode (during the ceiling game) is a game mode related to the time reduction state (YJ = 02H). (ceiling mode α). On the other hand, in the case of the latter ceiling activation type at the end of the game, ceiling time reduction is given at the end of the ceiling game, so the ceiling mode (during the ceiling game) is the game mode (ceiling mode) related to the normal state (YJ = 00H). β).
No matter which method is adopted, when the ceiling game is reached, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to the dedicated "09H" in order to select a variation pattern dedicated to the ceiling, and the game mode itself is changed to "ceiling mode". ” (see Note 3 in FIG. 49B and ceiling mode α and ceiling mode β in the Tcode column of FIG. 76). However, regarding the ceiling activation type at the end of the game, at least if the ceiling game is reached during the normal state (normal mode), the ceiling time shortening state will occur at the end of the ceiling game. The game following the ceiling game may function as the above-mentioned "ceiling mode" in consideration of the fact that there is often a ceiling game. In this case, the ceiling game (ceiling function activation trigger game) is the same as the 1000th game, but regarding the game mode, during the ceiling game (1000th game), "normal mode (general mode belonging to normal mode or portent mode)" The game following the ceiling game (the 1001st game) can be made to function as a "pseudo ceiling mode". In other words, the game following the ceiling game can function as a game mode or production mode for ceiling activation notification (special ceiling mode form). However, in this case, instead of setting the 1001st game to "ceiling mode", from the viewpoint of reducing the control burden, the game mode is directly shifted to the game mode related to the ceiling time saving state, in the case of this embodiment, "heaven mode". . In other words, this is a form in which no ceiling mode is provided. In addition, in this case, in the fluctuating performance of the ceiling mode (1001st game), it is possible to perform a performance (for example, a ceiling collision notification performance) that notifies a ceiling intrusion (ceiling activation) (for example, in Figures 91 to 91 described later). (See Figure 92). In this respect, the game following the ceiling game is called a "pseudo ceiling mode."

Such a special ceiling mode configuration allows the 1001st rotation to function as a pseudo ceiling mode or ceiling effect mode, even though the 1000th game is actually a ceiling game. In particular, in the case of the ceiling activation type at the end of the game, the ceiling time shortening state occurs at the end of the ceiling game, so from the viewpoint of presentation, it is considered preferable to position the 1001st rotation as a pseudo ceiling game.

The special ceiling mode form may be the following game mode transition form (Bird 1) or (Bird 2).
(Bird 1) "General mode (normal state) → Omen mode (normal state) → Heaven mode (ceiling time shortening state)".
(Bird 2) “Normal mode (general mode (normal state)) → Heaven mode (ceiling time saving state)”

In addition, in the ceiling activation type at the end of the game, if the ceiling function is activated not after the fixed display time has elapsed but after the variable time has elapsed, the time-saving state will occur before the fixed display time has elapsed. Therefore, strictly speaking, the time saving state will occur before the fixed display time has elapsed and the ceiling game is completed (in the middle of the ceiling game), but in this embodiment, the above-mentioned "ceiling activation type at the end of the game" treated as belonging to.

(Italy 87) The above-mentioned "ceiling activation type at the end of the game" is that the time saving state (ceiling time saving) occurs upon the end of the current game (ceiling game), and the timing of the occurrence of the time saving state is "special electric non-activation type". This is the same as "Save support time." As already explained, in the special electric non-operation type support time saving, a time saving state occurs upon completion of the current game (support time saving winning game) (for example, see steps S476 to S477B in FIG. 17A). On the other hand, the ceiling activation type at the start of the game differs greatly from the special electric non-activation type support time reduction in that a time reduction state occurs upon the start of the current game (ceiling game). Therefore, the appropriate execution timing of the time-saving entry notification effect to notify that the time-saving state has entered is as follows.
(1) "Special electric non-activation type support time reduction" is executed at the end of the game (executed at the timing of symbol stop display).
(2) "Special electric activation type support time saving" is executed at the end of the game (executed at the symbol stop display timing, or at a predetermined timing between the start and end of the support time saving opening/closing game. Preferably, the support time saving opening/closing game starts. (executed at times).
(3) "Ceiling activation type at end of game" is executed at the timing of the end of the game (executed at the timing of symbol stop display).
(4) “Ceiling activation type at game start” is executed at the start of the game.
becomes.

(Italy 89) Also, the appropriate execution timing for the right-handed batting instruction performance is as follows.
(1) "Special electric non-activation type support time reduction" is executed at the end of the game (executed at the timing of symbol stop display).
(2) "Special electric activation type support time saving" is executed at the game end timing (symbol stop display timing, or at a predetermined timing during the period from the start to the end of the support time saving opening/closing game. Preferably, it is executed at the start of the supporting time saving opening/closing game).
(3) "Ceiling activation type at end of game" is executed at the timing of the end of the game (executed at the timing of symbol stop display).
(4) “Ceiling activation type at game start” is executed at the start of the game.
becomes.
(I90-1) In summary, the "ceiling activation type at the end of the game" and the "shortened support time" can have the same execution timing for the right-handed hitting instruction performance. Note that the right-handed hitting instruction performance may be the same performance mode or may be a different performance mode.
(I90-2) "Ceiling activation type at game start" and "Support time reduction" can be executed at different timings for the right-handed hitting instruction performance. Note that the right-handed hitting instruction performance may be the same performance mode or may be a different performance mode.

(About performance information)
(Italy 46) As described above, the internal game state during the ceiling game is different between the "ceiling activation type at the start of the game" and the "ceiling activation type at the end of the game." Therefore, regarding the performance information, in the case of the ceiling activation type at the start of the game, it is measured as a normal state until the symbol variation display game in the ceiling game is started. On the other hand, in the case of the ceiling activation type at the end of the game, a ceiling time shortening state occurs when the symbol variation display game in the ceiling game ends, so measurement is interrupted at the timing when the variation time or the fixed display time has elapsed.

(About the jackpot lottery in the ceiling game)
In the ceiling game (1000th game), the jackpot lottery is executed as usual. For this reason, especially in the case of the "hybrid type" of this embodiment, if you win a jackpot or support time reduction in the ceiling game, you will have to decide whether to give priority to the ceiling benefit (in this example, ceiling time reduction) or not. The question is whether to prioritize it. In addition, since the jackpot and the support time reduction cannot be won at the same time, the problem is that in the ceiling game, there are cases where the jackpot win and the ceiling function activation (ceiling benefit grant) overlap, and the case where the support time reduction is won. This is a case in which there is overlap between the above and the activation of the ceiling function.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the jackpot lottery of the ceiling game is defined as follows.
(I73-1) If you win a jackpot, the activation of the ceiling function is prohibited (restricted) (the ceiling activation prohibition condition is satisfied), and the processing of the jackpot win is prioritized (the After the game ends, execute the jackpot game). Note that the priority given to the processing of jackpot wins is the same even for thoroughbred players.
(I73-2) Even if you win support time reduction, activation of the ceiling function is not prohibited (the activation of the ceiling function is allowed), but the ceiling function is activated with priority (ceiling benefits are given rather than support time reduction processing) ). For example, even if a support time reduction is won in a ceiling game, this is treated as invalid, the activation of the ceiling function is allowed, and a ceiling benefit (ceiling time reduction) is granted. In this embodiment, a type (ceiling priority activation type) is adopted in which the ceiling function of the above-mentioned "Tenki C1" or "Tenki D1" is activated preferentially.
(Italy 73-3) In the case of the hybrid type, there is no particular restriction as to which of the support time reduction and the ceiling benefit should be activated with priority, but it is preferable to give priority to the one that is more advantageous to the player. For example, if a ceiling benefit has a higher degree of profit than shortened support hours, it is determined that priority is given to granting the ceiling benefit. In this embodiment, support time reductions A to C are provided, but if only support time reduction D (number of time reductions 50 times) is provided, ceiling time reduction (number of time reductions 1000 times) is better for players. It is highly profitable for In such a case, if priority is given to short-term support winnings, the significance of providing such generous ceiling benefits will be lost. Therefore, in order to fully demonstrate the role of the rescue function, even if support time reduction D is won in the ceiling game, the winning is treated as invalid and the activation of the ceiling function is allowed, and priority is given to the ceiling time reduction (1000 times of time reduction). be granted. Comparison of profits may be performed based on the number of time saving times, but as another comparison factor, the normal power open game mode related to the time saving state may be considered (described later (the same applies to Italy 74). For example, If the normal power opening game mode during the support time saving state is different from the normal power opening game mode during the ceiling time saving state (time saving state due to ceiling time saving) (for example, when the opening/closing operation pattern of the lower starting port 35 is different), the number of time saving times It is preferable to decide whether to prohibit or allow the activation of the ceiling function by taking into account the normal electricity open game mode, rather than just comparing only.In addition, if the profitability of the support time reduction and the ceiling benefit are the same or almost the same. Since there is no disadvantage to the player no matter which one is given priority, it is free to decide which benefit to give priority to.

In addition, in the case of a hybrid type, it can be configured as shown below (Italy 74) or (Italy 75).
(Italy 74) If you win the support time reduction in the ceiling game, the activation of the ceiling function is prohibited and the processing of the support time reduction win is given priority (the support time reduction state is granted without giving the ceiling benefit). This form is a type (support time reduction priority activation type) that preferentially activates the support time reduction state due to the above-mentioned (Tenki C2) or (Tenki D2) support time reduction win. In this form, the ceiling benefit is granted in the case of a "lose" case where neither the jackpot nor the support time reduction is won. In addition, when the won support time saving is "special electric actuated support time saving", the support time saving opening/closing game is executed after the end of the ceiling game, and the support time saving state is controlled after the support time saving opening/closing game is finished. If the winning support time reduction is "Special electric non-activation type support time reduction", after the ceiling game ends, the support time reduction state is controlled.
(Italy 75) If the degree of profit related to the shortening of support time is different between the special drawing side 1 and the special drawing side 2, the special drawing side that has a higher degree of advantage for the player will process the winning of support time reduction rather than the process of granting ceiling benefits. On the other hand, on the special drawing side, which has a low profit level for the player, it is possible to give priority to the process of granting ceiling benefits over the process of winning support time-savings. The degree of profit related to the support time reduction of this embodiment is higher on the special map 2 side than on the special map 1 side (see the support time reduction winning type and its symbol lottery rate in FIG. 4). Therefore, if the support time reduction on the special drawing 2 side (support time reduction B or support time reduction C: see Figure 4) is won, activation of the ceiling function is prohibited and priority is given to processing the support time reduction winning, while special drawing 1 If the support time reduction on the side is won (Support time reduction A to C: see FIG. 4), activation of the ceiling function can be allowed and priority can be given to the process of granting the ceiling time reduction. Note that one special map side may prohibit the activation of the ceiling function, and the other special map side may allow the activation of the ceiling function. For example, if the support time reduction is provided on the special map 1 side and the support time reduction is not provided on the special map 2 side (for example, see the special map in Figure 26 (B)), the special map 1 side will activate the ceiling function. The system can be configured to prohibit the winning of support time reduction and give priority to the processing of support time reduction winnings, and to activate the ceiling function and award ceiling benefits since there is no support time reduction win on the special map 2 side.

In addition, when a normal small win is provided, it is preferable that even if the player wins the normal small win in the ceiling game, the ceiling function is not prohibited and a ceiling benefit is provided. This is because, in the case of a small hit, there is usually no internal game state transition control and the profit level is low.

(About the conditions for ending the ceiling time reduction state)
(Italy 52) The condition for ending the ceiling time reduction state according to this embodiment is when the number of time reductions is exhausted (when the total number of fluctuations of special map 1 and special map 2 reaches the specified number of time reductions), or when there is a jackpot. It is designed to end if you win. In this embodiment, the support time reduction activation prohibition condition prohibits activation of the support time reduction state during a gaming state other than the normal state even if the support time reduction state is won (see FIGS. 14, 19A, and 19B). During the ceiling time reduction state, the support time reduction state does not occur. However, if support time reduction is not prohibited during the time reduction state, the ceiling time reduction state may be terminated when the support time reduction is won.
Also, other termination conditions may be adopted. Examples include the following (End 1) to (End 5).
(End 1) When the fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times),
(End 2) When the normal open game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times),
(Final 3) If you win the regular small win a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) (when the small win game based on the normal small win is executed a predetermined number of times),
(Final 4) When the variable display of one special figure (either special figure 1 or special figure 2) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times),
(End 5) If you win a specific support time reduction among multiple support time reductions.
(Italy 55) Note that one or more termination conditions may be provided. Thereby, the conditions for ending the ceiling time saving state can be varied, broadening the range of playability and improving the fun of the game.

(Timing for setting end conditions for ceiling time reduction)
(I53-1) After the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to set conditions for ending the ceiling time reduction (can be set during the jackpot end processing (step S509) in FIG. 21). In this case, the following gameplay can be created. For example, in a case where there are multiple jackpots 1 to 4, if you win jackpot 1, the ceiling time is reduced to 100 times, and if you win jackpot 2, the ceiling time is reduced to 200 times, and jackpot 3 is reached. If you win, you can set a ceiling time reduction of 1200 time reductions, and if you win the jackpot 4, you can set a ceiling time reduction of 0 time reductions (actually, there is no ceiling benefit). The feature of this configuration is that depending on the type of jackpot, the conditions for ending the ceiling time reduction can be changed, and the degree of advantage of the ceiling benefit (the content of relief when the ceiling is reached) can be changed. This greatly expands the range of playability due to the ceiling function and improves the fun of the game.
(I53-2) When the ceiling time reduction is activated, the end conditions for the ceiling time reduction can be set. For example, if the ceiling time reduction is of the "ceiling activation type at the start of the game", the ending condition for the ceiling time reduction can be set using the start of the ceiling game as an opportunity. If the ceiling time reduction is of the "ceiling activation type at the end of the game", the ending condition for the ceiling time reduction can be set using the end of the ceiling game as an opportunity. In this case, when setting the end conditions for the ceiling time reduction, the above-mentioned "ceiling benefit lottery" can be used to determine what kind of end conditions the ceiling time reduction is to be granted. For example, one of the following ceiling time reductions can be determined by lottery: a ceiling time reduction of 100 time reductions, a ceiling time reduction of 200 time reductions, a ceiling time reduction of 1200 time reductions, and a ceiling time reduction of 0 time reductions. . The feature of this configuration is that the conditions for ending the ceiling time reduction are changed when the ceiling function is activated (in other words, when the ceiling benefit is granted), and the degree of advantage of the ceiling benefit can be changed. It is possible to do so. This greatly expands the range of playability due to the ceiling function and improves the fun of the game.
(Italy 53-3) It is possible to set an end condition for ceiling time reduction when RAM is cleared. In this case as well, as in (I53-2) above, clearing the RAM will trigger one of the ceiling time reductions (at least one with different time saving performance). can be determined by lottery. The feature of this configuration is that the conditions for ending the ceiling time reduction are changed when the RAM is cleared, and the degree of advantage of the ceiling privilege can be changed. This greatly expands the range of playability due to the ceiling function and improves the fun of the game.

(About fluctuation patterns related to ceiling mode: Figures 73 and 75)
When the ceiling mode (1000th rotation) fails, in order to secure the production time width of the "ceiling effect" described later, a specific variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (ceiling variation pattern: "ceiling variation" in Figure 75) is used. is now selected. As this ceiling variation pattern, a variation pattern with a variation time longer than at least N reach is selected, but there is no particular restriction as long as the production time width of the "ceiling production" can be secured. For example, the variation pattern may have a variation time longer than the SP reach in the normal mode (at least longer than the pseudo-unless SP reach).

In addition, in the ceiling mode, in the case of a loss, a common ceiling variation pattern (ceiling variation) is selected, regardless of the "special pattern type and number of active pending balls" (see Figure 75). ). In the case of this embodiment, since there are a plurality of loss types, "ceiling fluctuation" is selected regardless of the "special symbol type, operation pending ball number, and loss type". The reason for doing this is as follows. First, when giving a ceiling benefit, it is important to notify this, so it is preferable to execute a common ceiling effect regardless of the special symbol type or action pending ball.Secondly, ceiling game 1 For the game only (one rotation only), it is necessary to prepare multiple variable pattern distribution tables according to the special symbol type and operation pending balls, and to execute various effects based on these tables, it would be an unnecessary control burden. This is because it increases the amount of noise, which is undesirable from the viewpoint of reducing the control burden. In addition, in the case of a win, the common "win variation in the ceiling" is selected from the viewpoint of performance and control burden reduction, as in the case of "loss" described above (" (See “Ceiling” column).

(Italy 103) In addition, if the support time reduction is won, as a fluctuating effect (effect that can appear during the game) related to the winning fluctuation, after once notifying the loss via reach (reach loss), the support time reduction It is possible to perform a ``support time-saving winning effect'' such as announcing the winning of a person. However, in the fluctuating performance related to the ceiling fluctuation when giving the ceiling benefit, it is preferable not to perform the performance of granting the ceiling benefit (starting to shorten the ceiling time) after losing the reach, or to not perform the reach performance itself. The reason for this is that ceiling benefits are not based on the concept of "winning" through a jackpot lottery, but rather are awarded based on the number of games played. However, when executing the above-mentioned "ceiling bonus lottery", since a "lottery" is involved, a reach effect is executed as a performance related to the ceiling fluctuation, and after the reach loss, it is announced that you have won the ceiling bonus lottery. It is preferable to configure the system to be able to execute a "ceiling benefit winning presentation" such as this.

(Variation example related to fluctuation pattern selection processing: Fluctuation pattern forced overwriting processing)
(Italy 42) In addition, in the ceiling game, a variation pattern is selected by the usual processing with reference to the variation pattern distribution table (Fig. 72, Fig. 74 to Fig. 75) related to the general mode or omen mode, It may also be configured to forcibly overwrite the variation pattern designation command depending on the winning type. For example, if the jackpot lottery result in the ceiling game is a loss, refer to the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to the precursor mode (or general mode) shown in FIG. Therefore, here, we refer to the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to the precursor mode even in the ceiling game: refer to one of FH70 to FH73 depending on the lottery result, the number of active pending pitches, etc.), the first fluctuation pattern ( However, in the case of a ceiling game, the fluctuation pattern is forcibly updated to a specific fluctuation pattern, for example, the fluctuation pattern designation command "A014H" (ceiling fluctuation), and the corresponding fluctuation is selected. Make sure to set the time. Even in this manner, it is possible to determine a specific variation pattern in the ceiling game. In this case, it is possible to select the ceiling variation and execute the effect related to it without changing the program as much as possible. In addition, in the above, it was explained that the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to the precursor mode is referred to in the ceiling game, but in the case of a configuration that does not provide the precursor mode, for example, the normal mode (game mode belonging to the normal mode (for example, the general mode )) may be referred to. Furthermore, it is also possible to refer to a variable pattern distribution table related to a specific game mode, such as not only the normal mode but also a time saving mode or a variable probability mode.
(Italy 43) In addition, in the case of a jackpot or shortened support time (including the normal small hit if a normal small hit is provided), after performing the normal fluctuation pattern selection process, a specific You may overwrite the winning variation pattern (specific variation pattern designation command).

(30-2-1. Regarding production during ceiling mode)
During the ceiling mode, a transition is made to a "ceiling presentation mode" in which a presentation is made to notify that the vehicle has reached the ceiling. This ceiling presentation mode is a presentation mode exclusively for the ceiling (1000th game), and in the case of this embodiment, is a presentation mode for only one game (one rotation only). An example of a performance in the ceiling performance mode is, for example, "ceiling rush notification performance (ceiling activation notification performance) 781" shown in Note 1 of FIG. 49B. As this ceiling entry effect 781, for example, the decorative pattern at the time of the ceiling (ceiling decorative pattern) is displayed in a form that includes at least a different decorative pattern from the normal mode (number patterns 1 to 9). There is. The reason why it is said to be "at least a decorative pattern that is different from the normal mode" is that the ceiling will be reached when you encounter a big hit in normal mode (normal state), and the decorative pattern that has been appearing in normal mode for a long time will reach the ceiling. This is because it is appropriate to display a different decorative pattern to notify that the ceiling has been reached.

Specifically, the decorative pattern for the ceiling is a dedicated pattern (decorative pattern for ceiling) that displays a special character, item, or text, and is preferably a pattern that has a strong impact in terms of presentation. For example, Fig. 49B This is the decorative pattern 785 (decorative patterns of "Heaven", "☆", and "Well") shown in Note 1 of . Although there are usually three decorative pattern rows: a right pattern, a middle pattern, and a left pattern (see FIG. 49B), the ceiling decorative pattern row does not necessarily have to be three pattern rows. For example, there may be four symbol rows of "heaven," "well," "reach," and "tatsu," or two symbol rows of "heaven" and "well." Furthermore, in order to emphasize that the object has reached the ceiling, a huge decorative pattern with a larger display area than a normal decorative pattern or a pattern with a predetermined effect image may be used. In addition, regarding decorative patterns related to ceiling games, when displaying a variable display, normal decorative patterns are used (all or part of the same decorative pattern), and only the decorative pattern that is to be stopped at the end (decoration stop pattern) is used as a ceiling decorative pattern. Good too. Further, a dedicated character image 777 appears as a background display of the decorative pattern. This character image 777 shows the same character image as the one that won the support time reduction (see Figure 6 (a)), but even if it is a special character image (special effect) that appears only in the ceiling game. good.

In addition, in the illustration, the same text image 778 that says "We will enter into a time reduction" as when the support time reduction is won is displayed, but this is meant to indicate that a time reduction state will occur due to ceiling time reduction during the ceiling game. This is because it is preferable to notify (the same applies when infinite time saving, finite definite change, or infinite definite change is given as a ceiling benefit). The ceiling entry performance 781 can be said to be one aspect of the above-mentioned "time-saving entry notification performance" in that it notifies that the ceiling time will be reduced.

On the other hand, if the ceiling time reduction is the above-mentioned "ceiling activation type at the start of the game", the time reduction state will be triggered by the start of the ceiling game (1000th game), so it is necessary to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage. Therefore, it is preferable to use the start of the game as an opportunity to display a "right-handed batting instruction performance (launch guidance notification performance)" that encourages right-handed batting (immediately informing that right-handed batting is advantageous at the start of the game) (The same applies if infinite time reduction, finite definite change, or infinite definite change is granted as a benefit).

In addition, when granting a gaming state with an electric support state as a ceiling benefit (especially when a ceiling activation type at the start of the game is adopted), at least a part of the period during the omen mode (for example, just before the ceiling game) In the game (the last time in the omen mode (999th rotation)), it is preferable to display a "pre-launch guidance notification effect" that notifies you in advance that the game will soon be shifted to a "game state advantageous for right-handed players." In order to bring out the ``pre-launch guidance notification effect'', a configuration can be adopted in which a specific variation pattern (the final precursor variation) can be selected when the final game in the precursor mode is a "lose" (see Figure 75). (See Note 1 “Final fluctuation of precursors”).

The above-mentioned "pre-launch guidance notification performance" is a performance that instructs "how to shoot" in a game before the game in which the electric support state occurs. In this respect, conventional launch guidance notification effects such as instructing to ``fire right'' when an electric support situation occurs, or instructing ``to fire to the left'' when a state of no electric support occurs, are different. In other words, the character is different from the notification effect that instructs how to call when there is actually a presence or absence of electric support. In this respect, the pre-launch guidance notification performance is a performance unique to gaming machines equipped with a ceiling function.

The above-mentioned "pre-launch guidance notification performance" is unique as a performance unique to gaming machines equipped with a ceiling function, but the following unique performances can also be produced.
(Italy 35) When the ceiling function is activated (in this example, when the ceiling time shortening is given), the activation is suspended after the ceiling fluctuation (see the "Ceiling" column in Figure 75) ends (after the symbol is confirmed) If there is no ball, a "wait performance after reaching the ceiling" can be displayed as a performance before waiting for the customer. This "standby performance after reaching the ceiling" is a performance that informs the user that the ceiling has been reached and a ceiling benefit is in progress (in the heaven time shortening state), and is a performance form that belongs to the performance before waiting for customers. Further, the waiting effect after reaching the ceiling can be made to appear redundantly during the customer waiting effect (demonstration display).
(Italy 36) Furthermore, when the ceiling function is activated, after the ceiling variation ends (after the symbol is confirmed and displayed), if there is no pending ball, a right-handed hitting instruction performance can be displayed. In this case, the right-hitting instruction performance can continue to appear at least during the appearance period of the pre-waiting-for-customer presentation, but may continue to appear between the pre-waiting presentation and the waiting-for-customer presentation. The right-handed hitting instruction performance may be a dedicated right-handed hitting instruction performance (right-handed hitting instruction performance while waiting for a customer) that is different from other right-handed hitting instruction performances.

Further, when the ceiling function is activated in the symbol variation display game of the ceiling game (1000th game), it is preferable not to display a specific preview effect. For example, at least the highly anticipated preview performance does not appear, or at least one of the pseudo-link, reach-to-reach performance, and player participation type performance does not appear. The reason for this is that when the ceiling function is activated, there is no need for an exaggerated preview performance that will stir up expectations of winning the jackpot. However, this does not apply when a pseudo-run, a reach effect, a player participation type effect, or the like is provided as a preview effect exclusively for the ceiling mode (ceiling game). However, in any case, when the ceiling function is activated, it is preferable not to display a preview effect that will blindly arouse expectations of winning, and instead to display a preview effect such as a pseudo-link, a reach effect, or a player participation type effect. If so, it is preferable to use a presentation mode exclusively for the ceiling, which is different from presentation modes that appear in other presentation modes.

Furthermore, a setting suggestion effect may be displayed as a bonus for reaching the ceiling. For example, it is possible to display a setting suggestion effect exclusively for the ceiling. This is because providing players with useful information such as setting estimation factors is useful in increasing the motivation of players who are addicted to the game. In addition, when the setting suggestion effect is made to appear at the ceiling, the appearance rate may be set to 100%, or it may be made to appear based on a predetermined lottery probability. Further, although it is possible to decide as appropriate what kind of setting suggestion effect to appear, it is preferable that the appearance rate is at least higher than in the normal mode (general mode, omen mode). Further, it is preferable to display a setting suggestion effect with a high setting inference factor (for example, a setting suggestion effect such as confirmation of setting 4 or more, confirmation of setting 6, denial of setting 1, etc.).

(Italy 44) On the other hand, if you happen to win a jackpot in the ceiling game (1000th game), the effect related to the ceiling effect mode will not appear, but the effect associated with winning the jackpot will be displayed in the normal effect mode. (during general performance mode or omen performance mode), time-saving performance mode, or variable probability performance mode may be configured to appear. For example, if you want to display the same performance as in the normal performance mode, refer to the "hit/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table (general, for omen)" shown in FIG. The same winning variation pattern as in mode) can be selected (see notes in remarks column 5 of FIG. 73). This is because even when a jackpot is achieved in a ceiling game, if a ceiling effect appears, it becomes unclear whether it is a jackpot or a ceiling privilege is given, which confuses the player.

(Italy 63) Also, if you happen to win a jackpot in the ceiling game (1000th game), the ceiling rush effect 781 (Note 1 in Figure 49B) does not appear, but a winning effect for winning the jackpot is performed. It is preferable. This is because a contradiction arises in that a time-saving rush is announced even though it is a jackpot. However, if you want to make a so-called "resurrection effect" type effect appear, in which you pretend to lose and then announce the winning effect, after appearing the ceiling rush effect 781, which is common to when the ceiling is activated, the winning effect will be performed. You can also make it appear. In this case, it is suitable to use a performance that arouses the player's sense of tension by keeping the activation of the ceiling function or winning the jackpot hidden until the middle of the ceiling game.

In addition, in the case of this embodiment, a variation pattern exclusively for winning (winning variation during the ceiling) is configured to be selectable (see the "Ceiling" column in FIG. 73), and a performance exclusively for the ceiling hit related to the variation pattern is configured to be selectable. is now possible to appear. If support time reduction is provided, it may be configured such that different fluctuation patterns can be selected for when a jackpot is won and when support time reduction is won (see "Ceiling support time reduction winning variation" in Note 5 of FIG. 73). Furthermore, in order to reduce the control burden, a common variation pattern (mid-ceiling winning variation) may be configured to be selectable between the jackpot winning and the support time shortening winning. In this case, if the support time saving activation priority type is used, it is preferable to display different performance contents in order to notify the winning type. The winning type can be grasped by the decorative design designation command, and even if a common variation pattern is configured to be selected, different effects can be executed.

(30-3. About heaven mode)
Heaven mode is a game mode that is entered after the ceiling game ends (after the 1000th rotation) or in the next game (1001st game) after the ceiling game, and the internal game state changes to a time-saving state or a definite change state depending on the ceiling privilege. It becomes a game mode related to the state etc. In this embodiment, an example is explained in which "ceiling time saving (1000 times of time saving)" is given as a ceiling privilege, so the ceiling mode according to this embodiment is a game related to the time saving state (YJ=01H). mode. In addition, when shifting to this heaven mode, it is in the case of ceiling benefits other than "forced per" (finite time saving, infinite time saving, infinite definite variable, finite definite variable, infinite potential definite, finite potential definite, etc.).

In addition, during heaven mode, the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to a dedicated "0AH" in order to select a fluctuation pattern dedicated to heaven (here, the fluctuation pattern selection mode dedicated to the time saving state due to ceiling time reduction) (updated to (Tcode)).

The heaven mode is terminated at least when a jackpot is won, or, in the case of the above-mentioned finite ceiling privilege, when a prescribed number of time reductions or ST times are completed without winning a jackpot. Here, the ceiling privilege is explained as "Limited time saving (1000 time saving times)", so heaven mode is activated when 1000 time saving times are completed or when a jackpot is won while the time saving number is used up. It will be terminated. When the heaven mode ends, the mode is shifted to the normal mode (transitioned from the time saving state to the normal state). In addition, if the ceiling benefit is finite probability variable or finite potential, it will end when the ST number ends or if you win the jackpot within the ST number. In this case, the game will be terminated if the jackpot is won.

(7-5-2. About the production during heaven mode)
During the heaven mode, a transition is made to a "heaven production mode" which makes a production related to the heaven mode (a production for heaven). This heaven production mode is a production mode that is transferred to after the end of the ceiling game or is exclusive for the next game or later (1001st game or later), and is ended at the end of the heaven mode. During this heaven production mode, the background display is switched to a special background display different from other game modes (for example, a "space background image" expressing outer space) to notify that the heaven mode is in progress. Furthermore, it is possible to perform the remaining time reduction number notification effect even during the heaven mode.

Note that when a finite time saving or infinite time saving is given as a ceiling benefit, it may be a time saving effect mode exclusive to heaven, or a time saving effect mode (for example, any of the time saving effect modes 1 to 4). In any case, the production mode corresponding to the game mode may be used.

(Out of heaven mode production)
(Italy 64) In this embodiment, a time-saving state with 1000 working-time savings is granted as a ceiling benefit, but if a working-time-saving state with a relatively small number of working hours, such as 100 working hours, is granted, There is a high possibility that the number of time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction will be used up without winning the jackpot (for example, with setting 1, the probability of winning the jackpot within 100 time reductions is about 39%). On the other hand, even if the number of time savings is 1000, it does not necessarily mean that you will win the jackpot within that number of times (the probability of winning the jackpot within 1000 time savings is about 99%). In any case, if the player passes through the ceiling time reduction state, he or she becomes addicted to the game and feels strongly disappointed that he or she was unable to take advantage of the ceiling time reduction. Therefore, the final fluctuation related to the ceiling time shortening state does not have a flashy effect, and furthermore, the final fluctuation related to the ceiling time shortening state is not a random long fluctuation pattern, but for example, the shortest fluctuation time in the case of a loss. It is preferable to make the normal fluctuation selectable (the selection rate may be 100%) so as to act as if nothing happened and quietly slip away.

(About the control form of support time reduction (lottery processing method) during the time reduction state)
The issue here is whether or not to transition to the support time reduction state during the time reduction state (ceiling time reduction state and/or jackpot time reduction state) (whether to prohibit activation of the support time reduction state during the ceiling time reduction state). Become. For example, in a jackpot lottery during a time-saving state, there are issues such as whether or not the support time reduction is included in the jackpot lottery, and if the support time reduction is included in the jackpot lottery, whether the winning is treated as valid or invalid. Become. Therefore, depending on the gameplay, the following lottery formats (Italy 76) to (Italy 80) can be adopted.
(Italy 76) At least during the ceiling time reduction state, support time reduction is excluded from lottery targets (for example, see FIGS. 19B and 27). Specifically, as in the lottery format shown in FIG. 19B, by holding a jackpot lottery that excludes the support time reduction from the lottery target, the support time reduction is treated as invalid, and the support time reduction state is not granted during the ceiling time reduction state (support time reduction state (not controlled by) In the case of this configuration, when the profit state (advantage degree) of the support time reduction is lower than the ceiling time reduction, it is suitable when you want to avoid the downward transition of "transition from the ceiling time reduction state to the support time reduction state" (as described below). 77) as well).
(Italy 77) At least during the ceiling time reduction state, a jackpot lottery including support time reduction will be held, but even if a support time reduction is won, the winning will be treated as invalid and the support time reduction state will not be granted. For example, the support time-saving flag management process (step S422) of FIG. 12 described in the first embodiment is provided, and the winning of the support time-saving is treated as invalid and the support time-saving state is not given, or the lottery form of FIG. 19A is adopted to provide support. Even if the time saving is won, the winning can be treated as invalid and the support time saving state can not be granted.
(Italy 78) Contrary to the above-mentioned (Italy 77) and (Italy 78), at least during the ceiling time reduction state, a jackpot lottery including support time reduction is held, and if you win the support time reduction, this is It will be treated as valid and will be transferred to a time-saving state by reducing the support time. In this case, the support time reduction state can be granted during the ceiling time reduction state, and for example, when the support time reduction has a higher profit state (advantageous degree) than the ceiling time reduction, it is possible to “transfer from the ceiling time reduction state to the support time reduction state”. This is suitable when you want to perform a promotion transition.
(Italy 79) During the ceiling time reduction state, a jackpot lottery including support time reductions is held, and the number of time reductions granted by the winning support time reduction is greater than the number of time reductions granted by the ceiling time reduction or the remaining number of time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state. If there are many, the system shifts to a time-saving state based on the winning support time reduction. In this case, only in the situation where "Remaining number of time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state < Number of time reductions due to support time reduction", the number of time reductions for the winning support time reduction will be updated (overwritten) with the remaining number of time reductions in the current ceiling time reduction state, It is possible to give the player an advantageous time saving number.
(Italy 80) The jackpot lottery target on the special map 1 side has one or more types of support time reduction, but the jackpot lottery target on the special map 2 side does not have any type of support time reduction, and even during the ceiling time reduction state, support time reduction can be won. shall be treated as valid. As in this embodiment, when there is no electric support, it is advantageous for left-handed players (it is advantageous for the player to receive the lottery on the special map 1 side), and when there is no electric support, it is advantageous for right-handed players (on the special map 2 side). In a game machine in which it is advantageous for a player to receive a lottery, it is possible to make it difficult to win a support time reduction during a ceiling time reduction state in which right-handed players are advantageous. During the ceiling time reduction period, the main game is to receive the jackpot lottery on the special drawing 2 side, where the support time reduction is not subject to the drawing, so unless there is a special drawing 1 action pending ball due to irregular winnings, etc., the support Don't get elected quickly. In this case, the special map 1 side performs the jackpot lottery targeting the support time reduction and its winning processing (granting the support time reduction state), and during the normal state (left-handed player advantage), the support time reduction acts as a relief function for addicts. On the other hand, during the ceiling time reduction state (right-handed player advantageous), this is suitable when it is desired to avoid that the time reduction state is substantially extended due to the support time reduction win or that the ceiling time reduction ends due to the support time reduction win.

In addition, if winning a support time reduction during a ceiling time reduction state is to be treated as valid, that is, when it is possible to grant a support time reduction state during a ceiling time reduction state, the following (Italy 81) to (Italy 83) should be applied. It can be configured as follows.
(I81-1) If the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the number of support time reduction is added to the above-mentioned "special symbol time reduction number counter (remaining time reduction number counting means)". In this case, since the time-saving state can be extended, the degree of freedom in playing the game can be expanded, and an advantageous situation can be created for the player.
(I81-2) If the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the counting (subtraction) of the remaining number of time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state is interrupted, and the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction is used preferentially. When the number of time reductions due to support time reduction is exhausted (when the support time reduction state is ended due to the number of time reductions being exhausted), the configuration is such that counting of the remaining number of time reductions in the suspended ceiling time reduction state can be restarted. In this case, a first counting means (ceiling time reduction remaining number counter) for counting the remaining number of time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state and a second counting means (remaining support time reduction number counter) for counting the remaining number of time reductions in the support time reduction state are provided. times. In addition, as another counting method, the remaining number of time reductions during the ceiling time reduction state is temporarily saved (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, and the number of time reductions due to the winning support time reduction is set in the special symbol time reduction number counter. Then, after the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction is exhausted, the number of time reductions during the ceiling time reduction state that was evacuated is set to the special symbol time reduction counter and the count is started again (in this case, the special symbol The time saving number counter serves as both a ceiling time saving remaining number counter and a support time saving remaining number counter). According to this configuration, by preferentially extinguishing the number of times of support time reduction, the time reduction state can be substantially extended. Further, since the remaining number of time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state is not updated to the number of time reductions due to support time reduction, both the benefit of ceiling time reduction and the benefit of winning support time reduction can be given to the player.
(Italy 82) If you win a support time reduction during the ceiling time reduction state, the use of the number of time reductions due to the winning support time reduction (execution of the support time reduction state) is put on hold (stock state), and first, the number of time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction is suspended. Digest preferentially. Then, when the number of time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction is exhausted (when the ceiling time reduction state ends due to the number of time reductions being exhausted), the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction that was in the stock state is exhausted (stock release). According to this configuration, even if the ceiling time reduction state is exited without winning any jackpot, if the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the time reduction due to the support time reduction after the ceiling time reduction state ends. Since the state starts, the time saving state can be substantially extended. In addition, because the remaining number of time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state is not updated to the number of time reductions due to support time reduction due to the support time reduction win, it is possible to give the player both the benefit of the ceiling time reduction and the benefit of the support time reduction win. . In addition, the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state are not executed alternately; in other words, the ceiling time reduction state in progress is interrupted, the support time reduction state is started, and after the support time reduction state ends, the interrupted support time reduction state is not executed. Since there is no need to restart the ceiling time saving state, the control process does not become complicated, and it is possible to determine whether the current time saving state was given as a ceiling time reduction or as a support time reduction. can be made easy.
(Italy 83) In a case where there is a ceiling time reduction remaining number counter and a support time reduction remaining number counter, if the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the support time reduction remaining number counter is also set in parallel with the ceiling time reduction remaining number counter. It can be digested. In this case, if the value of the support time reduction remaining number counter is greater than the value of the ceiling time reduction remaining number counter, the time reduction state is substantially extended, and if the value of the support time reduction remaining number counter is less than the value of the ceiling time reduction remaining number counter. For example, the ceiling time reduction state can be ended as usual. According to this configuration, if the player wins the support time reduction at a good time without impairing the benefit of the ceiling time reduction, the time reduction state is substantially extended, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

(Mangoku 10) In addition, in the above-mentioned (Italy 76) to (Italy 80) and (Italy 81) to (Italy 83), "in a ceiling time saving state" may be replaced with "in a jackpot time saving state". In addition, ``when the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state'' may be changed to ``the case where the support time reduction is won during the jackpot time reduction state'' or ``the case where the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state and the jackpot time reduction state''. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a means that can count the remaining number of times in the jackpot time saving state.

In addition, in the above (Italy 82), if you win a support time reduction during the ceiling time reduction state, the number of time reductions due to the won support time reduction will be used as a stock state, and after the number of time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction is used as a priority (the ceiling time reduction state ends) (After), an example of exhausting the number of time reductions due to support time reduction (starting the support time reduction state: stock release) was explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following stock release forms (Mangoku 20) to (Mangoku 23) can be adopted.
(Mangoku 20) If a support time reduction is won during the jackpot time reduction state, the number of time reductions due to the winning support time reduction is used as a stock state, and after the number of time reductions due to the jackpot is prioritized (after the jackpot time reduction state ends), the stock state is The number of time reductions due to the reduction in support hours, which had been planned, will be completed.
(Mangoku 21) If a support time reduction is won during the support time reduction state, the number of time reductions due to the won support time reduction will be used as a stock state, and the number of time reductions related to the support time reduction state in progress will be prioritized (after being After the support time reduction state ends), the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction that was in the stock state is used up.
(Mangoku 22) If a support time reduction is won during a variable probability state, the number of time reductions due to the winning support time reduction is used as a stock state, and after the ST number due to the probability variable state is used preferentially (after the probability variable state ends), the stock state is The number of time reductions due to the reduction in support hours, which had been planned, will be completed.
(Mangoku 23) If a support time reduction is won during a potential state, the number of time reductions due to the won support time reduction will be used as a stock state, and after the ST number of times in the relevant state is prioritized (after the potential state ends) , The number of time reductions due to support time reduction that were in stock status will be used up.
According to (Mangoku 20) to (Mangoku 23) above, if the support time reduction is won during a specific advantageous state (here, time saving state, variable probability state, potential state, etc.), that advantageous state has ended. Later, since a time-saving state is started due to the support time reduction related to winning, both the benefit of the advantageous state and the benefit of the support time-saving win can be given to the player. In addition, the advantageous state and the support time reduction state are not executed alternately, that is, the advantageous state in progress is interrupted, the support time reduction state is started, and after the support time reduction state ends, the interrupted advantageous state is There is no need to restart the state, and control processing does not become complicated.
(Mangoku 24) In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned configuration that does not create a stock state, the activation of the support time reduction state is treated as valid, and after the end of the support time reduction winning game, the advantageous state in progress is ended, and the support time reduction state is activated. Alternatively, the activation of the support time saving state may be treated as invalid and the support time saving state may not be caused, and the advantageous state in progress may be continued as is.
(Mangoku 25) Furthermore, one or more of the above-mentioned configurations (Ita 82), (Mangoku 20) to (Mangoku 23) can be adopted. The configuration to be adopted can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay. For example, if all of the configurations (Italy 82), (Mangoku 20) to (Mangoku 23) are adopted, the time saving state, the variable probability state, or the potential state (in this embodiment, the potential state Even if the support time reduction is won during any of the advantageous conditions (if the advantageous state is set), the execution of the support time reduction state will be considered as a stock condition, and after the advantageous condition ends, the support time reduction state will occur (stock release) can be done. For example, if you do not want to make the stock state only during the high certainty state, you can adopt the configurations (I82), (Mangoku 20), and (Mangoku 21) to provide support during the variable probability state or the potential state. If you win a time reduction, it will not be in a stock state and the winning will be treated as invalid, but if you win a support time reduction during a time reduction state, it will be in a stock state and a support time reduction state will not occur after the time reduction state ends. can.

In (Italy 82) and (Mangoku 20) to (Mangoku 23) above, we explained the configuration example in which the support time was shortened while in an advantageous state. It may be configured as follows: stone 40) to (mangoku 44).
(Mangoku 40) If you reach the ceiling game during the jackpot time reduction state (when the ceiling activation opportunity arrives), the number of time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction (execution of the ceiling time reduction state) will be in the stock state, and the number of time reductions due to the jackpot will be After priority consumption (after the jackpot time saving state ends), the number of time savings due to the ceiling time reduction that was in the stock state is used up.
(Mangoku 41) If the ceiling game is reached during the support time reduction state, the number of time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction is used as a stock state, and after the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction state is prioritized (after the support time reduction state ends), the number of time reductions is used as a stock state. Use the number of time reductions due to ceiling time reduction.
(Mangoku 42) If you reach the ceiling game while in a definite variable state, the number of time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction will be used as a stock state, and after the ST number due to the relevant variable state is prioritized (after the definite variable state ends), the ceiling that was in the stock state Exhaust the number of time reductions due to time reduction (Mangoku 43) If you reach the ceiling game while in the potential state, the number of time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction will be used as a stock state, and after the ST number of the relevant potential state is prioritized (After the state ends), the number of time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction that was in the stock state is used up (Mangoku 44) If the ceiling game is reached during the ceiling time reduction state (reaching the ceiling for the second time or later), the number of time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction is used up. The system is put into a stock state, and after the time saving times related to the ceiling time saving state that is being executed are used up preferentially (after the ceiling time saving state that was executed earlier ends), the number of time saving times due to the ceiling time saving that was in the stock state is used up.
According to (Mangoku 41) to (Mangoku 44) above, if the ceiling game is reached during a specific advantageous state, the ceiling time shortening state starts after the advantageous state ends, so the benefit of the advantageous state and It is possible to provide the player with both the benefits of winning support in a short amount of time. In addition, the advantageous state and the support time reduction state are not executed alternately, that is, the advantageous state in progress is interrupted, the support time reduction state is started, and after the support time reduction state ends, the interrupted advantageous state is There is no need to restart the state, and control processing does not become complicated.
(Mangoku 45) In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned configuration where the stock state is not used, the activation of the ceiling time reduction state is treated as valid, and the running advantageous state is ended after the ceiling game ends, and the ceiling time reduction state is generated. Alternatively, the activation of the ceiling time reduction state may be treated as invalid, so that the ceiling time reduction state does not occur, and the advantageous state in progress may be continued as is.
(Mangoku 46) Furthermore, one or more of the above-mentioned configurations (Mangoku 41) to (Mangoku 44) can be adopted. The configuration to be adopted can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay. For example, when all the configurations (Mangoku 41) to (Mangoku 44) are adopted, the time reduction state, the variable probability state, or the probability state (in this embodiment, if the probability state is provided) ), even if the ceiling game is reached during any of the advantageous states, the activation of the ceiling time reduction state becomes a stock state, and after the end of the advantageous state, the ceiling time reduction state can be generated (stock released). For example, if you do not want to make the stock state only during the high certainty state, you can adopt the configurations (Mangoku 42) and (Mangoku 43) and reach the ceiling game during the variable probability state or the potential state. In this case, the activation of the ceiling time reduction state is disabled (prohibited) without setting it in the stock state, but if the ceiling game is reached during the time reduction state, it becomes the stock state and the ceiling time reduction state is generated after the time reduction state ends. Can be done.

(About the ceiling time saving general power opening game and the jackpot general power opening game)
The ceiling time saving state and the jackpot time saving state are the same time saving state, but the operation mode of the normal power opening game related to the ceiling time saving state (hereinafter abbreviated as "ceiling time saving general power opening game") and the jackpot normal power opening game are different. The relationship can be configured as follows.
(Italy 24) At least the ceiling time saving general power release game and the jackpot general power release game are common. In addition, the ceiling time-saving general power release game, the jackpot general power release game, and the support time-saving general power release game may be the same or different. By making the ceiling time saving general electricity release game and the jackpot electricity release game common, the number of programs related to the general electricity release game can be reduced. Also, at the development stage, it becomes easy to calculate the ball payout rate during the electric support state. Furthermore, depending on how the performance is presented, it can be made difficult for the player to understand whether the game is in a ceiling time reduction state or a jackpot time reduction state.
(Italy 25) At least the ceiling time saving general power release game and the jackpot general power release game are different. In this case, the advantage level (profit state) of the jackpot general electricity release game may be lower or higher than that of the ceiling time saving general electricity release game. From the point of view of the big addictive relief function, it is preferable that the ceiling time saving general electricity release game has a higher degree of advantage (higher ball payout rate) than the jackpot general electricity release game. In the case of this configuration, even if the time saving state is the same, the winning rate can be made different between the ceiling time saving state and the jackpot time saving state, so that the gameplay is improved. In addition, the jackpot general power release game, the ceiling time saving general power release game, and the support time saving general power release game may be different from each other. Further, the jackpot general electricity release game, the ceiling time saving general electricity release game, and the support time saving general electricity release game may be the same.

(About the ceiling time-saving power supply opening game and the support time-saving power supply opening game)
Although the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are the same time saving state, the relationship between the ceiling time saving power switch opening game and the support time saving power switch opening game can be configured as follows.
(Italy 91) At least the ceiling time-saving general power opening game and the support time-saving general power opening game are common. It should be noted that the ceiling time saving general electricity release game, the support time saving general electricity release game, and the jackpot general electricity release game may be the same or different. By making the ceiling time-saving general power release game and the support time-saving general power release game common, the number of programs related to the general power release game can be reduced. Also, at the development stage, it becomes easy to calculate the ball payout rate during the electric support state. Furthermore, depending on how the performance is presented, it can be made difficult for the player to understand whether the game is in a ceiling time reduction state or a support time reduction state.
(Italy 92) At least the ceiling time-saving general power opening game and the support time-saving general power opening game are different. In this case, the advantageous degree (profit state) of the support time-saving power supply opening game may be lower or higher than that of the ceiling time-saving power supply opening game. From the viewpoint of a major addictive relief function, it is preferable that the ceiling time-saving utility power release game has a higher degree of advantage than the support time-saving utility power release game. In the case of this configuration, even if the time saving state is the same, the winning rate can be made different between the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state, so that the gameplay is improved. In addition, the jackpot general power release game, the ceiling time saving general power release game, and the support time saving general power release game may be different from each other. Further, the jackpot general electricity release game, the ceiling time saving general electricity release game, and the support time saving general electricity release game may be the same.

(About decorative patterns during ceiling time saving state)
The display mode of the decorative pattern in the support time saving state can be configured as follows.
(Italian 28) At least a decorative pattern (e.g., arithmetic numerals) during the ceiling time-saving state and a decorative pattern (e.g., Chinese numerals) during the normal state or a decorative pattern (e.g., Roman numerals or Chinese numerals) during the jackpot time-saving state. and have different decorative designs. In this case, since the decorative symbols are different depending on the game state, the effects become more diverse. Furthermore, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the player is in the ceiling time reduction state. In addition, since decorative patterns can be displayed while waiting for a customer (for example, during a performance before a customer is waiting), when a player selects a game machine, they can easily confirm that the ceiling time is being reduced by simply checking the display screen. can be identified.
(Italy 29) At least the decorative pattern (for example, arithmetic numerals) in the ceiling time saving state is different from the decorative pattern (for example, Chinese numerals) in the normal state. In addition, the decorative pattern during the jackpot time saving state may be the same as either the decorative pattern during the ceiling time saving state or the decorative pattern during the normal state, or may be different from each other (for example, when the decorative pattern is different during the jackpot time saving state). The decorative pattern may be Roman numerals). In this case, since the decorative symbols are different depending on the game state, the effects become more diverse. In addition, since decorative patterns can be displayed while waiting for a customer (for example, during a performance before a customer is waiting), when a player selects a game machine, they can simply check the display screen to check whether the ceiling time is being shortened or not. can be easily identified.
(Italy 30) At least the stop display eye of the decorative pattern after the power failure is restored during the ceiling time saving state and the stop display eye of the decorative pattern after the power failure is restored during the normal state are different stop display eyes. When players and hall personnel check the state of a game machine first thing in the morning, they can easily understand whether it is in a ceiling time saving state or in a normal state. In addition, either the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the ceiling time reduction state or the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the normal state is the same as the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the support time reduction state. The stop display may be the same as the stop display and/or the stop display after the power is restored during the jackpot time saving state, or it may be a different stop display. According to this configuration, when players and hall personnel check the state of the game machine first thing in the morning, they can easily understand whether it is in the ceiling time saving state or in the normal state. In addition, either the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the ceiling time reduction state or the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the normal state is the same as the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the support time reduction state. The stop display may be the same as the stop display and/or the stop display after the power is restored during the jackpot time saving state, or it may be a different stop display.

(About decorative patterns during the ceiling time-saving state and decorative patterns during the support time-saving state)
Although the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are the same time saving state, the display mode of the decorative pattern can be configured as follows.
(Italy 97) A decorative pattern (for example, arithmetic numerals) during the ceiling time saving state and a decorative pattern during the support time saving state are made a common decorative pattern. The decorative pattern during the jackpot time saving state may be a common decorative pattern or may be a different decorative pattern (for example, Roman numerals). In this case, even if the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state, there is no need to change the decorative pattern each time, and a common decorative pattern can be used, so the player may feel that it looks strange or uncomfortable. It can make it difficult to give pleasure. It also contributes to reducing the control burden.
(Italy 98) At least the decorative pattern (for example, arithmetic numerals) during the ceiling time saving state is different from the decorative pattern (for example, Chinese numerals) during the support time saving state. In addition, the decorative pattern during the jackpot time saving state, either the decorative pattern during the ceiling time saving state or the decorative pattern during the support time saving state may be the same, or each may have a different decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern during the jackpot time saving state). The decorative pattern inside may be Roman numerals). In this case, since the decorative symbols are different depending on the game state, the effects become more diverse. In addition, since decorative patterns can be displayed while waiting for a customer (for example, before a customer is waiting), when a player selects a game machine, they can simply check the display screen to display the time-saving state type (at least during the ceiling time-saving state). or in the support time reduction state).
(Italy 99) At least the stop display eye of the decorative pattern after power failure recovery during the ceiling time reduction state and the stop display eye of the decorative pattern after power failure recovery during the support time reduction state are common stop display eyes. In this case, if the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are the same production mode, when the player selects a game machine first thing in the morning, it is not possible to check whether the player is in the ceiling time saving state or not by simply checking the display screen. Since it is not possible to identify what is inside the hall, it is necessary to actually play the game, which can contribute to the occupancy rate of the hall. In addition, the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the ceiling time reduction state is the same stop display as the stop display in the normal state after the power is restored and/or the stop display during the jackpot time reduction state after the power is restored. It may be a display eye or a different stop display eye.
(Italy 100) At least the stop display eye of the decorative pattern after the power failure is restored during the ceiling time saving state and the stop display eye of the decorative pattern after the power failure is restored during the support time saving state are different stop display eyes. According to this configuration, when players and hall personnel check the state of the game machine first thing in the morning, they can easily understand whether it is in the ceiling time reduction state or the support time reduction state. In addition, either the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the ceiling time reduction state or the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the support time reduction state is the same as the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the normal state. The stop display may be the same as the stop display and/or the stop display after the power is restored during the jackpot time saving state, or it may be a different stop display.
In addition, in this configuration, in the case where the jackpot time saving state and the ceiling time saving state have a common stop display and are in a common time saving production mode, it is at least possible to identify whether or not the support time saving state is in progress. be. In addition, if the jackpot time saving state and the support time saving state have a common stop display and a common performance mode, it is possible to at least identify whether or not the player is in the ceiling time saving state.
Note that the normal state is the "normal performance mode", so if you look at the background image etc., you can identify that you are in the normal state even if the stop display eyes are the same. Of course, if there are time-saving effect modes with different time-saving states, it is possible to understand which time-saving state the mode is based on, for example, the background image related to the effect mode.

(About the hold display mode during the ceiling time reduction state and the hold display mode during the support time reduction state)
Although the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are the same time saving state, the hold display mode (hold icon) can be configured as follows.
(Italy 101) At least the hold display mode during the ceiling time reduction state and the hold display mode during the support time reduction state are different. In this case, the hold display can be made different depending on the game state during the ceiling time reduction and during the support time reduction, so that the variations in performance become more diverse. Further, since the hold display changes between the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state, it becomes easier for the player to identify which time saving state is in effect.
(Italy 102) At least the hold display mode during the ceiling time reduction state and the hold display mode during the support time reduction state are common. Even if the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state and the state shifts to the support state, there is no need to change the hold display each time, leading to a reduction in control burden.

(About advance notice during ceiling time reduction state and advance notice during support time reduction state)
Although the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are the same time saving state, the pre-read notice can be configured as follows.
(Italy 66) A look-ahead notice that indicates the expectation of winning the support time reduction, and a look-ahead notice performance that notifies in advance that a ceiling benefit (in this embodiment, a ceiling time saver) will be given to the suspended ball for the number of ceiling games. This is a different style of performance. The reason for the different performance mode is that it is known that ceiling benefits are awarded for a predetermined number of games, whereas for support time reduction, the winnings are determined through a jackpot lottery, and they are awarded for a predetermined number of games. This is because it is not given in numbers. It should be noted that the look-ahead preview that suggests the expectation of winning the support time reduction and the look-ahead notice that suggests the expectation of winning the jackpot may have a common performance mode, or may have different performance modes.
(Italy 104) A common look-ahead notice is configured to be executable during the ceiling time reduction state and during the support time reduction state. A common look-ahead notice can be executed during the ceiling time reduction state and during the support time reduction state, leading to a reduction in control burden. If diversification and diversification of performances is important, a configuration may be configured such that different pre-read notices can be executed during the ceiling time reduction state and during the support time reduction state. Note that the pre-read notice during the ceiling time reduction state and/or the support time reduction state and the pre-read notice during the jackpot time reduction state may be the same or may be different.
(Italy 105) Before entering the ceiling mode (before reaching the ceiling game: before 1000 games), the first predetermined number of games (corresponding to the advance notice in a part of the period of the omen mode) and the winning operation hold ball to shorten the support time occur. The second predetermined number of games after the second predetermined number of games can be set as a pre-read notice prohibition period in which execution of the pre-read notice is prohibited. In this case, "first predetermined number of games = second predetermined number of games" (for example, four times, which is the same as the maximum number of pending memories), or a different number of games (for example, the first predetermined number of games is one time, The second predetermined number of games may be 4, etc.).
(Italy 106) For the first predetermined number of games before entering the ceiling mode (corresponding to the advance notice in a part of the period of the precursor mode), the execution of the advance notice is prohibited (for example, see Figure 50 described later), and the support time is shortened. Such suspended balls do not prohibit advance notice.
(Italy 107) Balls with pending operation related to ceiling fluctuations prohibit the execution of advance notice (see FIG. 50 described later), and balls with pending operation related to short support winnings do not prohibit advance notice.

(About setting suggestion effect during ceiling time reduction state)
(Italy 26) A plurality of setting suggestion performances can be executed, and during the ceiling time reduction state, execution of some or all of the plurality of setting suggestion performances is prohibited (restricted). Alternatively, the execution probability can be set to be different when compared with other gaming states. These include the following (Italy 26-1) to (Italy 26-4).
(Italy 26-1) During the ceiling time reduction state, the execution probability of the setting suggestion performance can be lowered than in the normal state. In this case, the probability of executing one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be lowered.
(Italy 26-2) During the ceiling time reduction state, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects can be made higher than in the normal state. In this case, the appearance rate of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be increased.
(Italy 26-2) During the ceiling time reduction state, execution of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be prohibited (restricted). There is no particular restriction on the specific setting suggestion effects, but for example, if the settings suggestion effects shown in (a) to (b) above can be executed, execution of at least one setting suggestion effect may be prohibited. can. Specifically, during the ceiling time shortening state, execution of setting suggestion performances that have low usefulness as setting guessing elements, such as the even number setting suggestion performance in (g) above and the odd number setting suggestion performance in (y) above, is prohibited. It is preferable.
(Italy 26-3) There is one or more setting suggestion effects that appear only during the ceiling time reduction state. For example, only during the ceiling time saving state, the setting N confirmation effect described in (me) above, which is highly useful as a setting guessing element, can appear.
According to this configuration, the appearance rate of setting suggestion notices can be varied depending on the gaming state. Further, only in a specific gaming state (ceiling time saving state), a specific setting suggestion performance can be made to appear. Thereby, the effects can be varied and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Regarding the hold display area related to the ceiling time reduction state)
(Italy 31) End of the ceiling game (here, at the end of the symbol fluctuation time related to the ceiling fluctuation (see Figure 67), during the final symbol display time, or when the symbol final display time has elapsed (FIGS. 68A to 68B) Refer to )), the reservation display area 77 (the reservation display area on the special drawing 2 side) can be displayed in the above-mentioned manner (priority). When displaying the reservation display area 77 in an emphasis manner, As already explained, the hold display area 77 may be displayed preferentially, the hold display area 77 may be displayed in a large size, the hold display area 76 may be hidden.
If you win the short support time in the symbol fluctuation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side, it is preferable to change the priority of the pending display from the special figure 1 side to the special figure 2 side at the timing when the winning game ends ( During the support time reduction state, right-handed hitting is advantageous and the symbol fluctuation display game on the special map 2 side becomes the main one). By changing the priority of the pending display at the timing when the game on the special map 1 side ends, before the first symbol fluctuation display game on the special map 2 side starts during the support time shortening state, The reserved display of special figure 2 can be displayed preferentially.

(About the production mode during the ceiling time reduction state and the production mode during the support time reduction state)
Although the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are the same time saving state, the production mode can be configured as follows.
(Italy 108) The presentation mode related to the ceiling time reduction state and the presentation mode related to the support time reduction state can be made into a common presentation mode. For example, both can be set to heaven production mode, or both can be set to time saving production mode. When setting the time-saving production mode, it may be any of the time-saving production modes 1 to 4, or it can be started from the time-saving production mode 1, and then changed according to the number of games. The mode may be changed to ``production mode 3'' (see FIG. 7B). By using the same production mode for the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state, the control burden can be reduced.
(Italy 109) The performance mode related to the ceiling time reduction state and the performance mode related to the support time reduction state can be different production modes. For example, as shown in FIGS. 49A and 49B, the performance mode related to the ceiling time-saving state can be set to "heaven performance mode", and the performance mode related to the support time-saving state can be set to "time-saving performance mode". The time-saving production mode may be any of the time-saving production modes 1 to 4, or it may start from the time-saving production mode 1 and change from "time-saving production mode 1 ⇒ time-saving production mode 2 ⇒ time-saving production mode 3" according to the number of games. (See FIG. 7B). By setting different performance modes, it is possible to make various performances.

(About the management form of ceiling time reduction state and jackpot time reduction state)
Although the ceiling time saving state and the jackpot time saving state are the same time saving state, the internal game state can be configured as follows.
(Italy 32) As the internal gaming states managed on the main control unit 20 side, at least the ceiling time shortening state and the jackpot time saving state can be configured to be manageable as one winning easy state (electronic support state). In this case, the flag indicating that the ceiling time-saving state is in effect and the flag indicating that the jackpot time-saving state is in effect may be managed by a "common flag (second specific time-saving state flag)". By using a common flag for both, the RAM capacity can be reduced. In addition, data to the effect control section 24 and its transmission processing can be easily shared, and the program capacity and data capacity can be reduced.
(Italy 33) As the internal gaming states managed by the main control unit 20 side, at least the ceiling time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be configured to be manageable as different winning easy states. For example, the gaming state determination number YJ relating to the ceiling time saving state may be set to 04H, the gaming state judgment number YJ relating to the jackpot time saving state may be set to 07H, etc., and these may be managed as different internal gaming states. According to this configuration, since the ceiling time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be managed with separate flags, the main control unit 20 side can easily grasp each gaming state. Further, it becomes easy to execute processing according to the gaming state depending on the gaming situation. For example, different information can be transmitted to the performance control unit 24 regarding the ceiling time reduction state and the jackpot time reduction state. Thereby, on the performance control section 24 side, it becomes possible to shift to different performance modes or easily execute different performances during the ceiling time reduction state and the jackpot time reduction state.
(I61) As an internal gaming state managed on the main control unit 20 side, the ceiling time saving state is configured to be manageable as being different from other internal gaming states. Specifically, if the gaming machine 1 is capable of executing the definite variable state, the probable state, the time saving state, and the normal state (four states) as internal gaming states other than the ceiling time saving state, none of these four states is possible. To manage a ceiling time saving state as a different internal game state. That is, the ceiling time saving state is managed as the fifth internal game state. In other words, if the gaming machine 1 is capable of executing one or more internal gaming states other than the ceiling time saving state, the ceiling time saving state is configured to be manageable as an internal gaming state different from any of them. In this case, there are the following advantages.
(A) Based on winning a jackpot during the ceiling time saving state, for example, the start INT and/or end INT during the jackpot game are different from other time saving states (for example, jackpot time saving state and support time saving state). Jackpot games with different time widths can be executed. In particular, if you hit a jackpot during the ceiling time reduction state, it is treated as a "first hit" in the same way as if you won a jackpot during the normal state, so the ceiling time reduction state is managed as a separate internal gaming state from other internal gaming states. This is because it is preferable to be able to do so. The reason for this is, for example, if you treat the ceiling time-saving state in the same way as other time-saving states (for example, the jackpot time-saving state), you will judge it as a jackpot during the time-saving state, when in reality it is the "first hit". This is because the problem arises that the property is treated as a multi-family property. This is also because it is necessary to distinguish the jackpot in the ceiling time-shortening state from the jackpot time-shortening state when counting the number of consecutive games or when producing a result effect. In addition, the time saving state includes a jackpot time saving state due to a time saving jackpot, a time saving state after exiting the variable state due to a variable time saving jackpot (time saving state after the ST number is exhausted), a support time saving state, etc., and this configuration is a ceiling time saving state. This has a great advantage when you want to treat it as a time-saving state different from these time-saving states.

(About the management form of ceiling time reduction state and support time reduction state)
Although the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are the same time saving state, the internal game state can be configured as follows.
(Italy 110) As the internal gaming states managed on the main control unit 20 side, at least the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state can be configured to be manageable as one winning easy state (electric support state). In this case, the flag indicating that the ceiling time reduction state is in effect and the flag indicating that the support time reduction state is in effect may be managed by a "common flag (third specific time reduction state flag)". By using a common flag for both, the RAM capacity can be reduced. In addition, data to the effect control section 24 and its transmission processing can be easily shared, and the program capacity and data capacity can be reduced.
(Italy 111) As the internal gaming states managed by the main control unit 20 side, at least the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state can be configured to be manageable as different winning easy states. For example, the game state determination number YJ related to the ceiling time reduction state may be set to "04H", the game state determination number YJ related to the support time reduction state may be "05H", etc., and these can be managed as different internal gaming states. According to this configuration, since the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state can be managed with separate flags, the main control unit 20 side can easily grasp each gaming state. Further, it becomes easy to execute processing according to the gaming state depending on the gaming situation. For example, different information can be transmitted to the production control unit 24 regarding the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state. Thereby, on the production control section 24 side, it becomes possible to shift to different production modes and easily execute different productions during the ceiling time reduction state and during the support time reduction state.
(Italy 112) As the internal gaming state managed on the main control unit 20 side, either the ceiling time reduction state or the support time reduction state can be configured to be manageable as a winning easy state common to the jackpot time reduction state. In this case, like the above (Italy 111), the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are managed as different winning easy states (internal game states), so there is the same advantage as the above (Italy 111).

(Regarding performances after power outage recovery)
(Other 1) If the gaming machine loses power and returns before reaching the ceiling game (before entering heaven mode) (the number of remaining ceiling games will not be cleared by a simple power outage, but will be cleared by RAM clearing processing) ), it is possible to perform an effect (notification effect when power is restored) according to the number of remaining ceiling games. For example, even if the mode is the same at the time of power outage and when the power is restored, it is now possible to perform a power outage recovery notification effect (for example, a different background effect) depending on the number of remaining ceiling games. Can be configured. Specifically, the number of remaining ceiling games is 1 to 300 (first remaining ceiling game number section), 301 to 600 (second remaining ceiling game number section), and 601 to 999 (third remaining ceiling game number section). Executes notification effect when power is restored. Note that the remaining ceiling game number section can be determined as appropriate. According to this configuration, when a player selects a game machine first thing in the morning, it is possible to provide an advantageous situation to the player in that he can select a machine with games close to the ceiling. On the other hand, since the hall side can easily see which machines are close to the ceiling games, they can try to adjust the profits of the hall by clearing the RAM of the machines close to the ceiling (clearing the number of remaining ceiling games) or leaving them as they are. becomes possible.

(Other 2) Note that the power failure recovery notification effect may be executed only for a predetermined period of time after the power is restored (for example, until a customer waiting effect (demonstration display) is executed or until a predetermined time elapses). Further, the above-mentioned "gaming status notification LED" may be changed depending on the number of remaining ceiling games (a gaming status notification LED exclusively for notifying the number of remaining ceiling games may be provided).

(Other 3) Furthermore, at least in the first game (first rotation) after the power is restored, a power failure recovery notification effect may be executed in accordance with the number of remaining ceiling games. In this case, the player who first starts a game on that gaming machine can be given an estimate of the number of remaining ceiling games. Note that since it is not desirable to blindly give an element of estimating the number of remaining ceiling games, it is appropriate to execute the power failure recovery notification effect only for the first game after the power is restored.

(7-5-1. Fluctuation status related to heaven mode)
Here, during the heaven mode, any of the above-mentioned high-speed fluctuation states, medium-speed fluctuation states, and low-speed fluctuation states can be adopted. However, it is preferable to determine the fluctuation state during heaven mode according to the ceiling benefit type. For example, when the ceiling privilege is limited time saving or infinite time saving, it is preferable to position it as a game mode that emphasizes the gameplay such as "enjoying the performance", as in the time saving mode. However, in consideration of the fact that there is no limit to the number of time reductions when infinite time reduction is granted, a special high-speed fluctuation state (for example, a fluctuation state in which the game completion speed is faster than or equal to time reduction mode 3 or fixed variable mode 1) Good too. In addition, in this embodiment, taking into account that the heavenly time saving is a finite time saving, the same fluctuation pattern as the time saving mode 2 can be selected, and it is determined that the fluctuation state is approximately the same ("Heaven" in FIG. 75). (Refer to the distribution rate of the fluctuation pattern in the ``Time Saving)'' column). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be the fastest changing state among all game modes. Further, it may be the same as any of the time saving modes 1 to 4.

On the other hand, in the case of finite probability variation or infinite probability variation, the jackpot lottery probability is high in addition to the electric support state, so it is the same as the fastest variation state of all game modes or the fast variation state of probability variation mode 1. Alternatively, it is preferable that the fluctuation state be substantially the same. On the other hand, when infinite potential or finite potential is granted, the jackpot lottery probability is high, but since it is controlled without electric support, it is difficult for balls to be activated to occur as in the normal state. . Considering this point, when infinite latency or finite latency is applied, the fluctuation state is the same or almost the same as the normal mode, or at least the fluctuation state slower than time saving mode 3 (time saving medium high speed fluctuation state) (average It is preferable to set the state to a fluctuating state that takes a relatively long time.

(Heaven mode benefits)
During the heaven mode, in order to increase the desire of the addicted player to play, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects may be made higher during the heaven mode than in other game modes. In other words, the heaven mode may function as a "setting suggestion appearance chance zone" in which the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects is varied with high probability. For example, the heaven mode changes the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects (particularly setting suggestion effects that may appear during the symbol variation display game) at a higher probability than at least the normal mode (general mode and/or omen mode).

(Variation example of heaven mode)
(Other 4) In addition, in the game of the first rotation in the heaven mode, a specific loss variation pattern (variation when entering heaven: see note 2 in FIG. 75) can be configured to be selectable. This fluctuation at the time of entering heaven is determined as a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern longer than at least the longest losing fluctuation pattern: here, 36 seconds), and this fluctuation time is used. Then, in the first rotation after entering heaven mode (preferably triggered by the start of the game in the first rotation (symbol change display start)), at least a right-handed hitting instruction performance, or at least a time-saving entry notification performance that includes a right-handed hitting performance. can be executed. In addition, since many players are thought to start hitting right after seeing this effect, it is possible to save the activated balls on the special map 2 side by using the long fluctuation time of the fluctuation when entering heaven. (It is possible to avoid the lottery on the special map 1 side, which has a lower advantage). Note that this example is suitable when a ceiling activation type ceiling time reduction at the end of the game is adopted.

(Other 5) Also, if you happen to win a jackpot in the first game in the first spin in heaven mode (if the support time reduction is included as a jackpot lottery target, this includes the case where the support time reduction is won), The winning variation pattern (winning variation when entering heaven: see note 6 in FIG. 73) can be configured to be selectable. As a performance related to winning fluctuations when entering heaven, for example, after executing a performance that is common to a part of the time-saving entry notification performance (a performance that is partially common to the time-saving entry notification performance and the performance related to the jackpot), It is possible to execute a performance related to winning (for example, a performance notifying that it is a jackpot). As a result, even if you win a jackpot in the first spin of the game in heaven mode, the same effect will be performed until the middle of the game for jackpots and losses, and after that, the jackpot and loss will be the same. Since different performances are executed in the game, it is possible to prevent the player from easily realizing whether he won or lost during the game (for example, immediately after the game starts). In addition, at least when the winning fluctuation upon entry into heaven is selected, a right-hitting instruction performance (firing guidance notification performance) may be performed with the game start as an opportunity. Of course, it is also possible to perform a performance that immediately makes it clear whether the game is a success or a loss. For example, in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot performance may be performed without executing the time-saving rush notification performance.

<9. Regarding the function of prohibiting specific preview performances during the omen mode: Figure 50>
Here, in this embodiment, a specific preview performance prohibition function (specific preview performance prohibition means) operates during the sign mode. In detail, we will focus on the fact that the omen mode is a game mode related to the notification that the ceiling is near, and the fact that the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the granting of ceiling benefits. mode) prohibits the appearance of specific preview effects. In the case of this embodiment, the prohibition function is provided with a "pre-read notice prohibition means (specified pre-read notice prohibition means)" which prohibits the execution of pre-read notice. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 50, the ``means for inhibiting advance notice in advance'' will be described in detail.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where a pre-read notice is prohibited by the pre-read pre-notice prohibition means. In FIG. 50, an explanation will be given of a form in which "pending change notice" is treated as a prohibited object by the look-ahead notice inhibiting means, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prohibited object is "pending change notice" and/or "fluctuation change notice". It can be used as a "pre-reading notice."

(A. Configuration in which no means for inhibiting advance notice during warning signs is provided (normal case): Figure 50 (a))
The "normal case" will be explained with reference to FIG. 50(a). This "normal case" refers to a configuration in which a means for inhibiting advance notice during a sign is not provided, and a configuration in which a means for inhibiting advance notice during an omen (see figure 1) and 2 is provided, which will be described later. ) is shown as a comparative example. Note that the shown hold icon 770 is a “normal hold display (white hold)”, the hold icon 771 is a “high expectation hold display” of the special hold display (normal hold change notice), and the hold icon 772 is a “high expectation hold display”. indicates "ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice)". In addition, the reservation icon 771 here indicates a "rainbow reservation (this reserved reservation display)" that may appear when a jackpot is won among the special reservation displays.

In addition, for convenience of explanation, in Figure (A), when there are currently three activated suspended balls from games 997 to 999, the activated suspended ball related to the 1000th game (ceiling game) is used as the fourth activated suspended ball. (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling game held ball") is a representative example of a case where this occurs.

In the case of the comparative example shown in Figure (A), since the configuration does not include the "pre-reading notice prohibition means", the presence or absence of the special hold display (hereinafter referred to as "normal hold change notice") before the ceiling game is reached depends on the configuration. Regardless, execution of the ceiling suspension display (ceiling suspension change notice) is permitted for the 1000th game suspension display. Here, "allowing" the ceiling hold display means that it may always appear or it may appear only when a person wins a predetermined lottery (described below). ) (The same applies to Ha-1) (Ha-2)). Therefore, in the case of this comparative example, even if there is a notice of change in the hold of the third rainbow-colored hold (this secured hold), the hold display of the fourth ceiling game hold ball is changed to Fujimaru-kun's hold icon 772 (for the ceiling). (on hold display).

However, if a jackpot is won before reaching the ceiling, the ceiling function will not be activated (the number of ceiling games will be reset), so it can be said that there is little need to execute the ceiling pending display. In addition, if a pending change notice (special pending display) that foretells the winning expectation level and a pending change notice for the ceiling (ceiling pending display) that foretells that it is a ceiling game are displayed at the same time, the notices have different characteristics. The displays will appear at the same time, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, a means for inhibiting a pre-read notice during a sign is provided to solve these problems.

(B. Example of a configuration in which a means for inhibiting advance notice during a sign is provided: Figure 50 (B), (H-1), (H-2))
Hereinafter, an example of a configuration in which the above-mentioned "pre-predicting notice inhibiting means" is provided will be described. There are two forms of this: ``a case in which ordinary advance notice is executed with priority'' as shown in Figure (B), and ``a case in which priority is executed in advance with ceiling advance notice'' shown in Figures (Ha-1) and (Ha-2). be.

(Case where normal advance notice is executed with priority: Figure 50 (b))
Figure 50 (b) shows a case in which the normal pre-read notice is executed with priority, and specifically, a case in which the pre-read notice for the ceiling is prohibited when there is a fixed hold before reaching the ceiling game (ceiling game held ball). Cases in which advance notice is prohibited for Here, similar to the case shown in FIG.

In this example, if the current hold exists before the ceiling game is reached, the hold display for the 1000th game (ceiling game) is not changed to the ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice) but becomes the "normal hold display". appears. In other words, the configuration is such that the "pre-reading prohibited target suspension" by the pre-reading notice prohibition means is made into "ceiling game pending ball".

The reason why the suspension subject to look-ahead prohibition is referred to as the "ceiling game suspension ball" is as follows. If this reserved hold exists before the ceiling game, the jackpot will be won before the ceiling function is activated (before the ceiling benefit is granted), so there is little need to display the hold display for the ceiling. In addition, if the configuration is such that the ceiling hold display is prohibited when the current secured hold exists, if the hold display for the 1000th game remains the normal hold display, there is an inference factor that ``this secured hold is present before the ceiling game is reached.'' There is also a performance advantage in that a player who knows this can prevent unnecessary hits until the ceiling is reached. However, if the reserved retainer exists, ceiling display is not prohibited at all, but if the retainer change notice (rainbow reservation) related to the secured retainer is not displayed, in other words, the pre-reading for the reserved retainer is not prohibited. If the preview lottery results in a "lose", a ceiling pending display may be displayed (allowed). If the reservation change notice related to the reserved hold is not displayed, the player will not be able to know that the reserved hold exists before reaching the ceiling game, but even if the hold display for the ceiling has appeared. However, if the jackpot is won before the ceiling game is reached, it will not be particularly disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of prohibiting the appearance of the ceiling hold display when a hold change notice (rainbow hold) related to the reserved hold is displayed, a high expectation hold change notice or higher (for example, green hold or higher) is prohibited. It may also be configured to prohibit the appearance of the ceiling suspension display when the suspension change notice of is displayed.

(Case where pre-read notice for ceiling is executed with priority: Figure 50 (Ha-1) (Ha-2))
Next, a "case where ceiling pre-read notice is executed with priority" will be described.

Figure 50 (Har-1) is an example of “a case where ceiling pre-read notification is executed with priority”.
(α) A configuration example in which “during the precursor mode, some normal look-ahead notices are prohibited, while ceiling pending change notices (ceiling pending display) are allowed”;
(β) This shows a configuration example in which “during the precursor mode, normal look-ahead notices are completely prohibited, while ceiling pending change notices (ceiling pending display) are allowed.”
In the configuration example shown in this diagram (H-1), instead of setting the target suspension for which look-ahead is prohibited as the "ceiling game suspended ball" as shown in the above diagram (B), the suspension target for which look-ahead is prohibited is set to "the ball that is suspended during the precursor game". This is an example of a configuration in which the ceiling game pending balls are excluded from the prohibited targets.

In (α) above, "prohibiting a part of the normal look-ahead notice" means, for example, among the normal pending change notices (special pending display), while allowing the appearance of low expectation pending change notices, The configuration is such that the appearance of notice of changes in pending expectations is prohibited. Specifically, the following configurations 1 and 2 are used.
(Configuration 1) Appearance of reservation change notices below yellow reservation (blue reservation and yellow reservation) is allowed, and reservation change notices of green or higher that have higher winning expectations than the yellow reservation (green reservation, red reservation, and rainbow color) are allowed. A configuration that prohibits the appearance of (reserved).
(Configuration 2) A configuration that allows the appearance of a pending change notice (a pending display other than rainbow-colored pending) that indicates something other than correct, but prohibits the appearance of a pending change notice that indicates a correct.

The above-mentioned "Configuration 1" prohibits only high expectation reservation change notices such as green, red, and rainbow colors in the case of the reservation reservation. On the other hand, the above-mentioned "Configuration 2" prohibits only the "Rainbow color reservation" of the reservation reservation display among the high expectation reservation change notices. Therefore, in the case of configuration 2, the occurrence of reservation change notices other than "rainbow reservation" indicating accuracy is allowed.

"Completely prohibiting advance notices" in (β) above means that normal advance notices (here, pending change notices) are completely prohibited, and the appearance of ceiling pending change notices (ceiling pending display) is prohibited. The configuration is that it is allowed. Therefore, in the case of the configuration (β) above, no normal pre-read notice is displayed during the precursor mode, and only the appearance of the ceiling pending change notice (ceiling pending display) is allowed.

The reason for doing as shown in Figure (C-1) ((α) or (β) above) is as follows. If the normal hold change notice (special hold display) is allowed to appear, the normal hold change notice and the ceiling hold display will be displayed at the same time, and the player (especially the This may cause confusion for players (beginners to the game). In particular, if the high expectation level pending change notice and the ceiling pending change notice are mixed, the degree of confusion among the players increases. Therefore, it is preferable to prohibit the look-ahead notice itself or at least prohibit the high-expectation pending change notice. Additionally, if some or all of the advance warnings are prohibited during the precursor mode, the player may not know that the current reservation exists or is likely to exist before the ceiling game is reached. This is because, even if a high expectation pending change notice indicating that the player has not reached the ceiling, it will not be particularly disadvantageous to the player if he wins the jackpot before reaching the ceiling game. Furthermore, if the advance notice itself is completely prohibited during the precursor mode, it will also lead to a reduction in the production control burden.

Figure (H-2) is a configuration example in which, unlike the above-mentioned Figure (H-1), a part of the period in the precursor mode is defined as a look-ahead prohibited section, thereby preferentially executing the pending change notice for the ceiling. As a representative example, Figure (H-2) shows an example in which the maximum number of reserved pitches before the ceiling game (section of the 996th to 999th games) is set as the look-ahead prohibited section. In the case of this example, any advance notice is prohibited in the section of the 996th to 999th games. However, instead of prohibiting all advance notices in this section, it may be configured to "prohibit part of advance notices" as shown in (α) in the above figure (C-1).

In addition, in all of (a), (b), (c-1), and (c-2) in Figure 50, the number of ceiling games is determined by specific notification effects such as the above-mentioned "countdown display (remaining ceiling number display effect)". The number of games remaining until the end of the game can be notified. Here, the countdown display itself does not foretell the degree of expectation of winning, but merely informs of remaining ceiling games, and does not perform a notice function like a pre-read notice. However, it is also possible to foretell the degree of expectation of winning using a countdown display, that is, to notify the possibility of the existence of the reserved spot. For example, in the case of preferentially executing the pre-read notice for the ceiling as shown in Figures (Ha-1) or (Ha-2), the suspended balls (1 to 2) that occurred chronologically earlier than the current secured bullet (3rd bullet) A special countdown display (for example, a difference in display color or a difference in display size) that differs from the normal countdown display (the display format when the corresponding reservation does not exist) is performed each time the number (item) is consumed, and the result is confirmed. It may also indicate the existence of a reservation. For example, if a normal countdown display uses white number images, a special countdown display may change the number image to a color other than white (red) or make the number image larger. be.

(Hope 2) In addition, above, we have explained the specific notice performance prohibition function (specific notice performance prohibition means) in the omen mode, but the case mentioned above that the omen mode is not provided (the case where the omen mode is treated as a game mode belonging to the general mode) )", it may be configured such that a specific preview performance prohibition function (specific preview performance prohibition means) is activated when the number of remaining ceiling games reaches a predetermined number of games during the general mode (the number of remaining ceiling games is , can be grasped from the ceiling counter).

This embodiment can include, for example, the following configuration regarding the pre-read notice.
Acquisition means (S301, S302 in FIG. 10, S314 in FIG. 11) that acquires predetermined game information based on the establishment of a starting condition (triggered by the detection of a game ball by the starting means);
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a lottery regarding winnings based on the gaming information acquired by the acquisition means;
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) that performs a symbol fluctuation display operation and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to a symbol stop display mode;
Reservation storage means (retention storage area of RAM 203) that stores the game information acquired by the acquisition means on hold up to a predetermined maximum number of storage items until the game information is displayed in a variable display operation of the game symbols on the symbol display means. , S311 to S314 in FIG.
A look-ahead determination means (S320 in FIG. 11) that looks ahead and determines at least the lottery result by the lottery means before the variable display operation of the game symbols based on the suspended memory is executed;
A look-ahead notice performance control means (performance control unit 24, FIG. 24) configured to be able to execute and control a look-ahead notice that notifies information related to the look-ahead determination result by the look-ahead determination means;
a pre-read notice prohibition control means (FIG. 50) that prohibits execution (display) of the above-mentioned pre-read notice based on predetermined prohibition conditions;
Ceiling benefit control means (FIG. 49B, S420, S421, S412 in FIG. 63, FIGS. 64 to 66, etc.) that grants a ceiling benefit that is more advantageous than the normal state based on predetermined grant conditions (controls execution of the ceiling benefit) and,
The above-mentioned ceiling benefit is granted (for example, the ceiling game is close, or the ceiling benefit is granted within the existing number of active pending balls, or the symbol fluctuation display game related to the target active pending balls is a ceiling privilege advance notice control means for controlling the execution of a pre-ceiling notice presentation (for example, the ceiling pending change notice (ceiling pending display) in FIG. 50) that notifies in advance that a ceiling privilege will be granted if executed , and can be configured to be able to control multiple types of gaming states (gaming modes). The above-mentioned pre-read notice prohibition means prohibits execution of the above-mentioned pre-read notice during the entire period or a part of the period in a specific game mode (FIG. 50 (b) (c-1) (c-2)). The specific game mode is, for example, a game mode before reaching the ceiling game (before shifting to ceiling mode), and specifically corresponds to a precursor mode immediately before reaching the ceiling game (game mode immediately before shifting to ceiling mode). In addition, the above-mentioned ceiling privilege control means specifically operates after a predetermined starting condition is established (for example, when an electric support service ends, or when a jackpot game ends, or when a game state with a low probability state is entered. The number of symbol changes (number of games) executed during a gaming state with a low probability state (at least during a normal state) without a winning game occurring (without winning a jackpot) is a predetermined number. When the upper limit number of games (ceiling number of games) is reached, it functions as a functional unit that controls the ceiling privilege (privilege gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.In addition, "during a gaming state with a low probability state" may be only during the normal state, or during both the normal state and the time saving state.

(Game mode related to potential state)
In addition, when providing a potential state, for example, as shown in FIG. What is necessary is to provide a "potential mode" as a mode, and a "potential mode" as a presentation mode related to the mode.

In addition, in FIGS. 49A and 49B, as the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the above-mentioned "hybrid type (type belonging to the above-mentioned Tenki C or Tenki D)" gaming machine has been mainly explained, but the above-mentioned "Thoroughbred" gaming machine The game flow regarding the type (type belonging to the above-mentioned Tenki A or Tenki B) is basically the same as the content shown in FIG. 49B. Furthermore, regarding the variable pattern distribution tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 40, the table excluding the variable pattern distribution table related to support time reduction is the same as the variable pattern distribution table for the thoroughbred gaming machine (equipped with only the ceiling function). The content is essentially the same. In addition, since the ceiling function and the support time saving function basically perform independent functions, each configuration example (example) explained above will not work unless there are special circumstances (for example, Circumstances such as the configuration examples that can only be realized if the above-mentioned "hybrid type") can also be applied to the "thoroughbred type".

<Processing on the main control unit side (ceiling function equipped type): Figures 51 to 70>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 70, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of this embodiment (ceiling function installed type) will be described. Note that components (processing contents) that are substantially the same as those of the first embodiment (first support time-saving installation type) or the second embodiment (second support time-saving installation type) are given the same reference numerals (step numbers). However, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned types of top machines A, B, C1, C2, D1, and D2 are used as the ceiling function-equipped type (see "931. Types of gaming machines with ceiling function" above). ). Below, as an explanation of the gaming operation processing on the side of the main control section 20, the above-mentioned types of Tenki A, B, C1, C2, D1, and D2 will be sequentially explained. Note that in FIGS. 51 to 70, when the processing contents are substantially the same, the same step numbers are assigned, and the processing contents will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

[Configuration example A]
“Tenki A: Type without ceiling activation support at the start of the game”
First, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side related to the type of Tenki A, that is, the "type without ceiling activation support at game start" will be described.

Regarding the game processing on the main control unit 20 side related to the type of Tenki A, the "main processing on the main control side" in FIG. 8 described in the first embodiment, the "timer interrupt processing on the main control side" in FIG. The basic processing contents of "Special symbol management processing" in 10, "Special symbol 1 start opening check processing" in Fig. 11, and "Special electric accessory management processing" in Fig. 21 are substantially the same processing. It's the content. Therefore, a detailed explanation of these processing contents will be omitted. Here, there are differences from the first embodiment, specifically, the "special symbol fluctuation start process (step S306)" and the "special symbol confirmation time process (step S308)" during the special symbol management process shown in FIG. )” will be mainly explained.

<21A. Special symbol fluctuation start processing related to Tenki A: Figure 51>
With reference to FIG. 51, the special symbol variation start process (step S306 in FIG. 10) regarding Tenki A will be explained. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process.

In FIG. 51, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls operated by special figure 2 is zero (step S401), and if the number of reserved balls operated by special figure 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), Processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) for the number of active pending pitches in FIG. 2 is executed. On the other hand, if the number of special figure 2 activated reserved balls is zero (step S401: YES), then it is determined whether the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is zero (step S402), and the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is determined. If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) targeting the number of special figure 1 action pending balls is executed.

If the number of operation pending balls for both the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls and the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the process advances to step S417, and the special symbol operation status is It is determined whether or not the state is "on standby (00H)" indicating the state of "no ball pending operation" (step S417).

If the special symbol operation status is "Waiting (01H)" (Step S417: NO), the special symbol operation status is switched to "Waiting (00H)" (Step S418), and the above-mentioned "Customer Waiting" command is executed. (BA04H)" is sent to the production control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited.

If the number of special figure 1 operation reserved balls or the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. Note that, similarly to the first embodiment, unless there is a particular need, the process will be described without distinguishing which operation-holding ball is targeted.

Proceeding to step S403, the number of action pending balls on the special figure side to be used for the current variable display operation is subtracted by 1 (step S403), and the above-mentioned "pending subtraction command" is transmitted to the production control unit 24 (step S404).

Next, special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405).

Next, the pending data stored in the pending storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407).

Next, a game status information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the gaming state information transmission process, a "gaming state designation command" is transmitted to the production control section 24. The gaming state designation command here includes gaming state information that can specify the gaming state at the start of the game. When the production control unit 24 receives the gaming state designation command, it grasps the gaming state based on the information included therein, and manages the production mode in a manner that maintains consistency with the gaming state managed by the main control unit 20 side. do. In addition, here, as necessary, a "time saving number command" including information regarding the special symbol time saving number counter (time saving number information) and an "ST number command" including information regarding the special symbol probability changing number counter (ST number information) are provided. It is transmitted and used by the performance control unit 24 when displaying the remaining time reduction count notification performance. In addition, when infinite ceiling benefits are granted, specifically, "infinite time saving" where there is no limit on the number of time reductions, "infinite probability change" and "infinite potential" where there is no limit on the number of STs, or When an infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, or infinite potential is granted, which can be considered an infinite number of times, in the gaming state (heaven mode) related to the benefit, the time reduction number command and ST number command will not be sent in order to reduce the control burden. It can be configured not to.

Further, the above-mentioned "remaining number of times display performance" can be configured to be able to appear in any of the game modes, such as the time saving mode, variable probability mode, and heaven mode. As for the remaining number of times display effect related to the infinite series, as already explained, it is preferable that the effect is such that it is possible to notify that the remaining number of times is infinite. For example, if it is an image display performance, it may be "infinite times remaining" or "continue until the next jackpot".

(About the remaining ceiling number display effect)
In addition, in the gaming state information transmission process of step S408, a "ceiling number command" including information regarding the number of remaining ceiling games (information regarding a ceiling counter to be described later) is also transmitted. The performance control unit 24 grasps the number of games remaining until reaching the ceiling based on the information included in the ceiling number of times command, and controls display of the above-mentioned "remaining number of ceiling times display performance". In the case of the present embodiment, this remaining ceiling number display effect appears in the form of a countdown display during the omen mode (omen effect mode).

The above-mentioned "remaining ceiling number display performance" can appear during all or part of the monitoring target (counting target) period of the ceiling game. In this embodiment, it can appear in normal mode ("in general mode" and/or "in portent mode"). Further, when displaying the remaining ceiling number display effect in the normal mode, the effect mode can be different between the general mode and the omen mode. For example, during general mode, a small display area in the corner of the LCD screen indicates the number of remaining ceilings (the countdown display is displayed small), and during precursor mode, a large display area in the center of the LCD screen indicates the number of remaining ceilings. It is possible to notify (display a large countdown display).

(Processing route when the setting value is normal: Processing route that follows S420)
Next, it is determined whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S409). If the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409:≠5AH), the above-mentioned "setting value command" is transmitted to the production control section 24, and then ceiling function management processing is executed (step S420).

(13A. Ceiling function management process: Figure 52)
The ceiling function management process (step S420) will be explained. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing details of the ceiling function management process. This ceiling function management process is mainly a process for managing the number of remaining games up to the ceiling number of games.

In FIG. 52, the CPU 201 first determines whether the ceiling count is prohibited (whether the ceiling count prohibition condition is being satisfied) (step S900). The "ceiling counting prohibited state" means a specific game section (during a specific control state) in which counting of the number of ceiling games (updating of a ceiling counter to be described later) is interrupted (also referred to as stopping or prohibited). For example, a specific internal gaming state, a specific gaming mode, a specific variation pattern selection mode, etc.

In the case of this embodiment, as already explained, the target of counting the number of ceiling games is the number of executed games in a gaming state with a low probability state. Therefore, there are cases in which ceiling counting is prohibited during gaming states other than the normal state, and cases in which ceiling counting is prohibited during gaming states other than the normal state and time saving state, but in this embodiment, the former is mainly used. handle. Note that during the jackpot game, the symbol fluctuation display is interrupted and the number of games itself is not counted, so this does not correspond to the ceiling count prohibition state here.

If the ceiling count is prohibited (step S900; YES), the ceiling function management process is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, if the ceiling count is not prohibited (step S900; NO), then it is determined whether the "ceiling counter" is zero (step S901). Here, the above-mentioned "ceiling counter" will be explained.

(ceiling counter)
Whether or not the ceiling game has been reached is monitored by the "ceiling counter (specific game number counting means)" which is a functional part of the main control unit 20. This ceiling counter functions as a counter for managing (monitoring) whether or not the ceiling game has been reached.In other words, it manages the number of remaining ceiling games (the number of games that triggers the setting of data regarding ceiling benefit granting). (See steps S903 to S904 (turning on the ceiling flag) to be described later, the ceiling activation management process at the start of the game (step S421) in FIG. 51, and FIG. 53 showing the details thereof).

(Italy 40-1) In the case of this embodiment, the timing at which the initial value is set to the ceiling counter is when the RAM is cleared (step S031), when the jackpot game ends (step S509 in FIG. 21), and when the ceiling is reached (described later). Step S923) in FIG. 53, etc. In addition, if the initial value is set to the ceiling counter when the RAM is cleared, for example, whether the pachinko hall should continue with the number of remaining ceiling games at the close of business the previous day today, or whether the ceiling counter should be cleared. You can select whether to set the remaining ceiling number of games to the initial value (1000 games). Note that a ceiling counter clearing switch may be provided to clear only the ceiling counter.
(Italy 40-2) However, the timing to set the initial value for the ceiling counter is not limited to the above-mentioned timing, but the initial value may be set based on what kind of gaming period is to be counted for the number of ceiling games. It is possible to determine the conditions (timing) for For example, if at least the time saving state is to be excluded from the counting target, the initial value can be set at the end of the time saving state (step S481 in FIG. 53B). In addition, when excluding a specific time saving state from the counting target, an initial value can be set during that specific time saving state. Note that "in a specific time saving state" can be at least one time saving state of a jackpot time saving state, a support time saving state, and a ceiling time saving state. Moreover, when excluding at least the variable probability state from the counting target, the initial value can be set at the end of the variable probability state (step S486 in FIG. 53B). In addition, depending on the period for which the number of ceiling games is to be counted, such as when a support time saving opening/closing game ends, when transitioning from another game mode to normal mode, when transitioning from another internal gaming state to normal state, etc. , the timing for setting the initial value can be determined as appropriate. In the case of this embodiment, since the ceiling counter counts the number of remaining ceiling games in a countdown format, the initial value to be set is 1000 times. However, when counting the number of remaining ceiling games in a count-up format, "0 (zero times)" may be set as the initial value.

The above-mentioned "ceiling counter" functions as a counting means for counting the number of times a specific event is executed, the number of times it is established, or the number of times it occurs, and functions as a functional unit for monitoring the arrival of a ceiling activation trigger (a ceiling privilege granting trigger). The "specific events" mentioned here include, for example, execution of a symbol fluctuation display game (execution of symbol fluctuations), winning a jackpot, winning a small hit, winning a loss, winning a short support time, transition to a specific gaming state (execution of a symbol variation), (transition to a gaming mode, transition to a specific variation pattern selection mode, transition to a specific internal gaming state, etc.), execution of a jackpot game, small win game, execution of a support time-saving opening/closing game, and the establishment of specific conditions regarding the game. (For example, the number of times a specific flag is turned ON). In addition, "execution of the symbol variation display game" includes the execution of the game of special pattern 1 and/or special pattern 2, the execution of winning variation and/or loss variation of at least one of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, etc. You can also use it as

In this embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter is monitored to determine whether an opportunity to activate the ceiling function has arrived. Note that a plurality of ceiling counters can be provided as necessary. This makes it possible to deal with cases where there are multiple specific events to be monitored. For example, there are multiple types of monitoring targets, such as a ceiling function that is activated when either the number of executions of the symbol fluctuation display game reaches a predetermined number or the number of small winnings reaches a predetermined number. It can also be used in cases where

Returning to the explanation of step S901. If the ceiling counter is zero (step S901: YES), the ceiling function management process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the ceiling counter is not zero (step S901: NO), the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 as the number of games to be counted this time (step S902), and the ceiling counter after the subtraction is determined (step S903).

If the ceiling counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S903: NO), it is determined that the ceiling game has not been reached, and the ceiling function management process is directly exited.

If the ceiling counter after subtraction is zero (step S903: YES), it is assumed that the ceiling game has been reached, and the ceiling flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S904). This "ceiling flag" is a flag for specifying whether or not the ceiling game has been reached (whether or not the ceiling activation opportunity has arrived), and if the flag is in the ON state (5AH), the ceiling is activated. This indicates that a trigger has arrived, and when the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that a ceiling activation trigger has not arrived. With the above steps, the ceiling function management process is exited.

(Red 1. Configuration example including determination process of ceiling activation prohibited state)
In addition, in a configuration in which step S901 is not provided, in the determination process of step 903, if the ceiling counter after subtraction is zero (step S903: YES), the activation of the ceiling function (granting of ceiling benefits) is prohibited. A determination process is provided to determine whether the ceiling activation is prohibited (whether the ceiling activation prohibition conditions are met), and if the ceiling activation is prohibited, the ceiling activation management process is performed without doing anything. If the ceiling activation is not prohibited, the process of step S904 may be executed. As the ceiling activation prohibition state, for example, appropriate prohibition conditions such as a specific game state or a specific game period can be defined. In this case, even if the ceiling is reached, the ceiling flag can be prevented from being set to the ON state. In other words, it is possible to prohibit the granting of ceiling benefits (see step S920 in FIG. 53). In this case, for example, if a certain advantageous state is set as a ceiling activation prohibited state, the value of the ceiling counter remains zero and the advantageous state continues.

Note that when the ceiling activation is prohibited, the ceiling counter may be set to an initial value (1000 games), and the ceiling flag may not be turned on. In this case, the following gameplay can be created. For example, if we take as a representative example a case in which the jackpot time-saving state (here, the number of time-savings is assumed to be 1100 times) is set as a ceiling activation prohibition state, when the remaining number of time-savings in the jackpot time-saving state is 101, the ceiling game In this case, the ceiling time reduction state is not activated in the ceiling game, but the initial value "1000 games" is set in the ceiling counter. After that, if you play the remaining 100 time-saving games and reach the ceiling game without winning another jackpot (ceiling counter reaches zero), the ceiling game at this time is "100 games in time-saving state + normal state" This is when you have played 900 games. That is, the player can aim for the ceiling game after receiving the benefit of the time saving state for 100 games.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 51 again, when the ceiling function management process in step S420 is finished, a random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessory is executed (step S410). The contents of this random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory object are as described in FIG. 13.

Next, ceiling activation management processing at the start of the game is executed (step S421). In this ceiling activation management process, it is monitored whether or not the ceiling function is activated, and when the ceiling function is activated, processing related to the granting of ceiling benefits is performed.

(14A. Ceiling activation management process at game start: Figure 53)
The ceiling activation management process at the start of the game (step S421) will be explained. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing details of the ceiling activation management process at the start of the game.

In FIG. 53, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the ceiling flag (step S920). If the ceiling flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S921:≠5AH), it is assumed that the ceiling activation opportunity has not arrived, and the process exits the ceiling activation management process without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the ceiling flag is in the ON state (step S921:=5AH), then the "ceiling game state transition table" shown in FIG. 71 is obtained (step S921). FIG. 71 shows JTTBL-10 to JTTBL-15 (limited time reduction, infinite time reduction, finite probability variation, infinite probability variation, finite potential probability, and infinite potential probability) as ceiling game state transition tables corresponding to various ceiling benefits. Table) is shown as an example. In reality, a necessary ceiling game state transition table may be prepared depending on the ceiling benefit type. Note that the notations "* (times)" and "* (H)" in FIG. 71 are arbitrary data values, meaning that appropriate values can be set according to the playability and design values.

(Italy 39-1) In addition, "infinite (times)" in infinite shortening of time, infinite definite variation, and infinite potential refers to the number of times that can be treated as a virtually infinite number of times (for example, 65,535 times, 5,000 times), etc. It can be set as an infinite benefit.
(Italy 39-2) In addition, in the control process of this embodiment shown in FIGS. 204A and 204B, which will be described later, "0 (times)" is set, and the privilege state (time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) is set until the next jackpot is won. It can be made into an infinite type benefit where the (potential state) does not end. To explain in detail how this becomes "infinite (times)" when "0 (times)" is set, with reference to FIGS. If "0 (times)" is set, when the determination process of step S478 in FIG. ) is skipped, so the time saving state does not end unless a jackpot is won (see S474 to S475A in FIG. 204A). That is, infinite time saving control is realized in which the time saving state does not end until the next jackpot. Further, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) may also not be changed (setting the special symbol variation number counters 1 to 3 buffers to 0 so that the determination result in step S488 follows the processing route of YES). Infinite probability variation and infinite potential probability variation are the same phenomenon, and if the special symbol time saving probability variation counter is set to "0 (times)", when the judgment process in step S483 of FIG. 204B is executed, the judgment result will be Since the answer is always "YES" and the setting process (step S486) at the end of the variable probability in FIG. 204B is skipped, the variable probability state or the probability state will not end unless the jackpot is won (S474 to Step S475A in FIG. 204A). reference). That is, infinite probability variation control is realized in which the probability variation state or potential probability state does not end until the next jackpot. Similarly, regarding the probability change state due to the jackpot and the setting of the number of time reductions due to support time reduction (Fig. 42), when realizing infinite probability change or infinite time reduction, the special symbol probability change number counter buffer of JTTBL1 shown in Fig. 42 or JTTBL4 It is sufficient to set "0 (times)" in the special symbol time saving number counter buffer of ~6) (see steps S478 to S490 in FIGS. 17A to 17B).

In the case of this embodiment, since ceiling time reduction (finite time reduction: 1000 times of time reduction) is taken as a representative example and is explained as a ceiling benefit, in the process of step S921, data for realizing ceiling time reduction (number of time reduction of 1000 times) is used. "JTTBL-10 (for finite time saving)" is acquired.

Next, data defined in the acquired ceiling game state transition table (here, JTTBL-10) is set in each state flag and counter (step S922). As a result, a gaming state related to the ceiling privilege occurs at the start of the game. In this embodiment, a "ceiling time reduction state (1000 time reductions)" occurs as a ceiling benefit.

Next, various setting processes at the time of ceiling activation are executed (step S923). Here, the ceiling flag is set to the OFF state (00H), the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH), the ceiling counter is set to "1000 games", which is the next number of ceiling games, and the gaming state is Set the LED output number indicating the ceiling time saving state as the notification LED number. The above-mentioned "ceiling activation flag" is a flag that specifies whether or not the ceiling benefit is in effect (in the present embodiment, in the ceiling time shortening state), and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), the ceiling privilege is activated. If the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the ceiling privilege is not in progress.

Next, a game status information transmission process is executed (step S924). In the game state information transmission process here, a game state designation command that designates that the ceiling time reduction state starts is transmitted to the production control section 24. When the production control section 24 receives this game state designation command, the production mode is shifted to the ceiling mode. As a result, when the current game (ceiling game) starts, the ceiling time shortening state is controlled, and in the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413), a special symbol variation pattern based on the ceiling mode is selected, and the production under the ceiling production mode is controlled. will appear. With the above, the ceiling activation management process at the start of the game is exited.

(Red 2. Configuration example including determination process of ceiling activation prohibited state)
Note that, before the determination process in step S920 during the ceiling activation management process at the start of the game, a determination process is performed to determine whether the ceiling activation is prohibited (whether the ceiling activation prohibition condition is satisfied or not). However, if the ceiling activation is prohibited, the ceiling activation management process may be exited without doing anything, and if the ceiling activation is not prohibited, the process may proceed to the determination process in step S920. The "ceiling activation prohibited state" here refers to a case where the result of the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory in step S410 is a jackpot win (jackpot determination flag=5AH). In this configuration example, in the case of a jackpot win, it is determined that the ceiling activation is prohibited, and the ceiling time saving state (ceiling privilege) is not provided. However, in this case, since the ceiling time shortening state does not occur at the start of the game, there is a risk that the fact that the current game is a jackpot win will be discovered early (it will be discovered first). Therefore, in the case of the ceiling activation type at the start of the game, as shown in FIG. 53, it is preferable to cause the ceiling time shortening state to occur even if the jackpot is won. However, in the case of a jackpot win, the jackpot game starts after the ceiling game ends, so the ceiling time shortening state is limited to this game (only for one game). However, even if the ceiling time is shortened for only one game, the user can benefit from the electric support until the current symbol variation display game ends. Specifically, it becomes easier to enter the lower starting slot 35, and it becomes easier for the special drawing 2 side to hold the ball, and it is possible to give the player a chance to win the lottery right on the special drawing 2 side, which is advantageous to the player. , there is an advantage. In addition, when providing a gaming state with an electric support state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state as a ceiling privilege, it is preferable that a right-handed hitting instruction effect be displayed during the ceiling game.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 51 again, when the ceiling activation management process in step S421 is finished, a special stop symbol creation process is executed (step S411), and then a gaming state transition preparation process is executed (step S412C).

(15A. Game state transition preparation process related to Tenki A: Figure 54)
The above gaming state transition preparation process (step S412C) will be explained. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing details of the gaming state transition preparation process.

As shown in the figure, in the game state transition preparation process of step S412C, when a jackpot is won, data for specifying the destination gaming state (see FIG. 4) after the jackpot game is stored in a predetermined buffer (state buffer). (steps S915 to S916), and the contents of the process are the same as those of steps S915 to S916 in FIG. 14 above. In the case of the "type without ceiling activation support at the start of the game" treated here, the configuration does not have support time reduction, so steps S912 and S914 related to support time reduction are removed from the processing content shown in FIG. 14 above. ing.

After completing the game state transition preparation process in step S412, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is then executed (step S413). Here, the desired fluctuation pattern distribution table (see Figures 72 to 75) is obtained based on the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode), jackpot lottery results, special symbol type, number of active pending balls, etc., and the obtained fluctuation pattern A fluctuation pattern is determined based on the distribution table and the random number for the fluctuation pattern.

Next, the fluctuation flag corresponding to the current fluctuation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414).

Next, a decorative symbol designation command that can specify the symbol lottery result information obtained in the special stop symbol creation process of step S411 is created, and this is sent to the performance control section 24 (step S415).

Then, as a fluctuation start setting process, the special symbol operation status is switched to "Fluctuating (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the random number storage area for judgment (cleared to zero) (step S416 ).

As described above, when the special symbol variation start process is completed, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the variable display of the special symbol is started. Thereby, the process exits the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG.

<26A. Processing during special symbol confirmation time related to Tenki A (processing when fluctuation stops): Figure 55A and Figure 55B>
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308 in FIG. 10) will be explained. 55A and 55B are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time processing related to Tenki A.

In FIGS. 55A and 55B, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol accessory operation timer (determined display time) is zero (step S471). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process exits from this special symbol confirmation time process without doing anything.

If the special symbol accessory motion timer reaches zero (determined display time has elapsed) (step S471: YES), the special symbol motion status is switched to "standby (01H)" (01H is stored in the special symbol motion status). (Step S472), and stores the current gaming state information in the gaming state determination area of the RAM (Step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is acquired, and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the jackpot determination flag is ON)
If the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) in the determination at step S474 (step S474:=5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot symbol is stopped (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, the jackpot determination flag is set to the OFF state (00H), the condition device activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH), and the condition is set to "low probability + no electric support state" (general Object release extension flag, normal symbol time saving state flag, normal symbol probability change up value flag, special symbol time shortening state flag, special symbol probability change state flag, special symbol time reduction number counter, special symbol probability change number counter, special symbol variation number counter are in OFF state ( 00H)), and a predetermined value (00H) is set to the gaming status notification LED output number that specifies whether the gaming status notification LED (not shown) should be turned on or off. Further, the ceiling counter, ceiling flag, and ceiling activation flag related to the ceiling function are each set to the OFF state (00H). This exits the process during the special symbol confirmation time.

(When the jackpot determination flag is OFF)
If it is determined in step S474 that the jackpot determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S474:≠5AH), the processes in steps S478 to S492 are executed depending on the processing state. As shown in the figure, the processing contents of steps S478 to S492 shown in FIG. 55B are substantially the same as the processing contents of steps S478 to S492 of FIG. 17B, so a description thereof will be omitted. However, in the setting process at the end of time saving in this example (step S481A), when the ceiling time saving state ends, the ceiling activation flag is set to the OFF state (00H).

(Specific mode transition management process: Step S494)
Further, in this example, a "specific mode transition management process" in step S494, which is not provided in FIG. 17B, is provided. I will explain about it.

In the specific mode transition management process, transition control from "warning mode to ceiling mode" is performed based on the value of the ceiling counter. Here, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter N is the number of games that trigger the transition to the portent mode. In the case of this embodiment, in order to enter the portent mode from the 990th game in the general mode (see FIGS. 49A and 49B), the ceiling counter N of the current game indicates the 989th game (the number of games immediately before the portent mode). If it is the value (ceiling counter N=11), the current Tcode is updated to "08H" which specifies the portent mode (precursor mode transition setting process). This causes the system to enter portent mode. To be precise, the transition to the precursor mode is triggered by the end of the current game (the 989th game), and the fluctuation pattern under the precursor mode will be selected from the next game (the 990th game). Furthermore, at the end of the 989th game, the transition to the omen mode has already been completed, so even if the next game, the 990th game, is not executed, the production will first be in the omen production mode, and the background image will be changed to the background image for the omen mode. You may switch to an image (air battle mode night background image).

In addition, when the target of counting the number of ceiling games is a game executed in the normal state (normal mode) and the time-saving state (time-saving mode), the value of the ceiling counter N indicates the 989th game (the number of games that trigger the transition to the portent mode). There may be cases where the game mode of the value is the time saving mode. For example, when a time-saving jackpot with a time-saving number of 999 times is provided (when the time-saving number of jackpot time-saving states is 999 times), the 989th game in the jackpot time-saving state becomes the time-saving mode. In this case, the time saving mode may shift to the precursor mode.

Regarding the transition to the omen mode, if the configuration is such that the transition to the omen mode is only allowed from the general mode, it is necessary to check whether the value of the ceiling counter is the number of games that trigger the omen mode transition, and whether the current gaming mode is The configuration is such that it is possible to determine whether or not it is the general mode. Specifically, only when the value of the ceiling counter N is a value indicating the 989th game (the number of games triggering the transition to the precursor mode) and the current game mode is the general mode, the transition to the precursor mode is made.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 50 (Har-2), when the 996th game to 999th game is set as the look-ahead prohibited section, if the ceiling counter value is a value indicating the 996th game to 999th game, the current It can be determined that the game is in the look-ahead section. In this case, the determination processing result of step S316 (determination process of whether or not special drawing 1 pre-reading is prohibited) shown in FIG. A command will be created and prefetch notifications will be prohibited.

In addition, in the specific mode transition management process, it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter N is the number of games that triggered the transition to the ceiling mode (in this example, the value of the ceiling counter is zero), and the value of the ceiling counter N is the number of games that triggered the transition to the ceiling mode. If the value indicates , it is updated to "09H" which specifies the ceiling mode (ceiling mode transition setting process). This shifts to ceiling mode. To be precise, the transition to the ceiling mode is triggered by the end of the current game (the 999th game), and the fluctuation pattern under the ceiling mode is selected for the next game (the 1000th game). Furthermore, at the end of the 999th game, the transition to the ceiling mode has already been completed, so even if the next game's ceiling game (1000th game) is not executed, the production will first be in the ceiling production mode and the background image will be changed. You may also switch to a background image for ceiling mode. However, since the ceiling function is actually activated in the next game, the 1000th game, it is not preferable to display effects that mislead the player. Therefore, it is preferable to make the player wait in the portent effect mode at the end of the 999th game, and shift to the ceiling effect mode when the next game starts.

Further, the specific mode transition management process includes a gaming state information transmission process, and transmits a gaming state designation command to the performance control section 24 in conjunction with the gaming mode transition. In the game state information transmission process here, when transitioning to portent mode, a game state designation command including information specifying transition to portent mode is transmitted, and when transitioning to ceiling mode, a game state designation command is sent that specifies transition to ceiling mode. Send a gaming state specification command. Upon receiving these game state designation commands, the production control section 24 grasps that the mode has been shifted to the portent mode or the ceiling mode, and causes the mode to shift to the production mode corresponding to the game mode.

After completing the specific mode transition management process in step S494, the process exits from the special symbol confirmation time process, performs the special symbol display data update process (step S309) in FIG. 10, and exits from the special symbol management process (step S093). Then, the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG.

In this example, the "ceiling time saving state" will occur at the start of the ceiling game, but the gaming mode during the ceiling game is not the time saving mode (Tcode = 04H to 07H) but the ceiling mode (Tcode = 09H). It is said that After the ceiling game ends, the mode is shifted to heaven mode (Tcode=0AH) and heaven performance mode. The data of the ceiling game state transition table "JTTBL-10 (see FIG. 71)" acquired in step S921 of FIG. Variation number counter 1 indicates "1 time (ceiling mode specified for one game only)", variation pattern distribution specification number 2 indicates "0AH (heaven mode specification)", and special symbol variation number counter 2 indicates "1000 times (time saving number ends)""00H" should be set for the variation pattern distribution specification number 3, and "0 times" should be set for the special symbol variation number counter 3. In addition, if you do not specify heaven mode until the time saving number of 1000 times is completed and you specify a transition to another game mode, please enter the purpose in special symbol fluctuation number counters 2 to 3 and fluctuation pattern distribution designation numbers 2 to 3, respectively. It is sufficient to set an appropriate value.
[Configuration example B]
“Tenki B: Not equipped with ceiling activation support at the end of the game: Figures 56 to 58”
Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side related to the type of Tenki B, that is, the "type without ceiling activation support at the end of the game" will be described.

In the above-mentioned type of Tenki A, a mode in which the ceiling function is activated at the start of the ceiling game has been explained. On the other hand, the type of Tenki B is such that the ceiling function is activated at the end of the ceiling game. Therefore, the major difference between Tenki B and the above-mentioned Tenki A is the processing contents of "special symbol management processing" and "special symbol confirmation time processing" shown in FIG. Therefore, the description will focus on these different processing contents, and the description of other processing will be omitted to avoid redundant description.

<21B. Special symbol fluctuation start processing related to Tenki B: Figure 56>
First, with reference to FIG. 56, the special symbol variation start process (step S306 in FIG. 10) regarding Tenki B will be explained. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process related to Tenki B.

As shown in Figure 56, the type of Tenki B is a type that activates the ceiling function at the end of the game, so during the special symbol fluctuation start process, there is a "ceiling activation at game start" function to activate the ceiling function at the start of the game. Management processing (step S421)" does not exist, and the processing in steps S401 to S420 is the same as in FIG. 51. Tenki B is provided with a "ceiling activation management process at the end of the game (see step S496 in FIG. 57A described later)" for activating the ceiling function at the end of the game during the special symbol confirmation time process.

<26B. Processing during special symbol confirmation time related to Tenki B (processing when fluctuation stops): Figures 57A and 57B>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57A and 57B, the special symbol confirmation time processing related to Tenki B will be described. 57A and 57B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) in FIG. 10.

As shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, the process during the special symbol confirmation time related to Tenki B is the same as that shown in FIGS. The processing content is the same as the processing during the special symbol confirmation time related to Tenki A in FIG. 55B.

Specifically, in step S474, if the jackpot determination flag is in the OFF state (step 474:≠5AH), then the state of the ceiling flag is determined (step S495). If the ceiling flag is in the OFF state (step S495:≠5AH), it is assumed that the ceiling activation opportunity has not arrived, and the processes from step S478 onwards are executed. However, if the ceiling flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S495: = 5AH), it is assumed that a ceiling activation opportunity has arrived, and the ceiling activation management process is executed at the end of the game (step S496), and the process during the special symbol confirmation time is executed. Get out.

(13B. Ceiling activation management process at end of game: Figure 58)
The ceiling activation management process at the end of the game (step S496) will be explained. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing details of the ceiling activation management process at the end of the game.

Steps S921 to S924 shown in FIG. 58 are the same as the processing contents of steps S921 to S924 in FIG. 53. However, in the case of this example, after steps S921 to S924 of the ceiling activation management process at the end of the game are executed during the special symbol confirmation time process, the special symbol confirmation time process is directly exited. As a result, at the end of the current game (ceiling game), control is performed during the ceiling time shortening state, the game mode is shifted to heaven mode (Tcode=0AH), and the production mode is shifted to heaven production mode. The data of the ceiling game state transition table "JTTBL-10 (see FIG. 71)" acquired in step S922 of FIG. 58 includes, for example, "0AH (heaven mode designation)" for fluctuation pattern distribution designation number 1; Special symbol variation number counter 1 is "1000 times (heaven mode is specified until the time saving number of 1000 times is completed)", special symbol variation number counters 2-3 are "0 (times)", variation pattern distribution designation number 2- 3 may be set to "00H". In addition, if you do not specify heaven mode until the time saving number of 1000 times is completed and you specify a transition to another game mode, please enter the purpose in special symbol fluctuation number counters 2 to 3 and fluctuation pattern distribution designation numbers 2 to 3, respectively. It is sufficient to set an appropriate value.

[Configuration example C1]
“Tenki C1: Equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the start of the game: Figures 59 to 63B”
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63B, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side related to the type of Tenki C1, that is, "equipped with ceiling priority activation support at game start" will be described.

As explained above, this type of Tenki C1 is a "hybrid type" that has a ceiling function and a support time reduction function, and even if the support time reduction function is won in the ceiling game, the It is a type that prioritizes and activates "Grant)", and its ceiling function is "activated at the start of the ceiling game". Therefore, basically, the above-mentioned "first support time-saving equipped type (see Figs. 8 to 17B, especially Figs. 12 to 17B)" which has a support time-saving function and the "game start" of the above-mentioned Tenki A which has a ceiling function It has a configuration that combines a type without ceiling activation support (see Figures 51 to 55B). Correspondingly, the processing contents of the special symbol fluctuation start processing (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) in FIG. The processing content is different from that of . The details will be explained below.

<21C. Special symbol variation start process related to Tenki C1: Figure 59>
First, with reference to FIG. 59, the special symbol variation start process (step S306 in FIG. 10) related to the sky machine C1 will be explained. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process related to the sky machine C1.

Here, among the processes shown in FIG. 59, steps S401 to S410, S420 (ceiling function management process), S411 (special stop symbol creation process), S413 (special symbol variation pattern creation process) to S415 (decorative design designation command Transmission processing) and S416 (fluctuation start time setting processing) have substantially the same processing content as in FIG. 51.
However, this configuration example (Tenki C1) has a short support time, and the contents of the "ceiling activation management process at the start of the game" in step S421A and the "gaming state transition preparation process" in step S412D are as shown in FIG. The "game start ceiling activation management process" in step S421 is slightly different from the "gaming state transition preparation process" in step S412C.
In addition, this configuration example (Tenki C1) has a ceiling function, and the "support time saving flag management process" in step S422A shown in FIG. 59 is different from that shown in FIG. This is slightly different from the "support time saving flag management process" in step S422 described above.
Hereinafter, in order to avoid duplicate description, FIG. 59 will explain the above-mentioned "game start ceiling activation management process" in step S421A, which differs from the special symbol fluctuation start process shown in FIGS. 51 and 12, and step S412C. The explanation will focus on the "gaming state transition preparation process" and the "support time saving flag management process" in step S422A.

(14C1. Ceiling activation management process at game start: Figure 60)
Referring to FIG. 60, the ceiling activation management process at the start of the game for Tenki C1 (step S421A in FIG. 59) will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing details of the ceiling activation management process at the start of the game related to Tenki C1.

As shown in FIG. 60, steps S920 to S922 and S924 have substantially the same processing contents as those in FIG. 53 already explained, and the processing contents of "various setting processing when ceiling is activated" in step S923A shown in FIG. Only that is different. Specifically, when the ceiling function is activated, a new process has been added to set the support time reduction flag to the OFF state (00H). In this configuration example, if the support time reduction is won in the ceiling game, the ceiling time reduction state will be activated with priority, and if the ceiling game is reached during the support time reduction state, the ceiling time reduction state will be activated with priority. It has become. For this reason, in step S923A, "various settings processing when ceiling is activated," a process is performed in which the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) and the support time reduction flag is set to the OFF state (00H). When the ceiling game is reached during the support time saving state, the currently occurring time saving state is designated to be the ceiling time saving state rather than the support time saving state.

(15C1. Game state transition preparation process: Figure 61)
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the game state transition preparation process (step S412D in FIG. 59) related to Tenki C1 will be explained. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process related to Tenki C1.

In this configuration example, if the support time reduction is won in the ceiling game, the ceiling function is activated with priority.In other words, the ceiling time reduction state is given priority, so if the support time reduction is won in the ceiling game, the support Prohibits the activation of short-time state. Therefore, in the game state transition preparation process related to Tenki C1, as shown in FIG. 61, the game state transition preparation process shown in FIG. Judgment processing has been added.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61, when the jackpot determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S911:≠5AH) and the support time saving determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S912:=5AH), That is, if the support time reduction is won and the ceiling activation flag is ON (step S913:=5AH), the processing of steps S915 to S916 for causing the support time reduction state to occur is skipped (the support time reduction state is not activated). the preparation process itself is prohibited). This prohibits activation of the support time reduction state in the ceiling game. Note that the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state in the "various settings process when the ceiling is activated (step S923A)" in the ceiling activation management process (step S421A) at the start of the game described above (FIGS. 59 and 60). reference).

By the way, in a configuration in which the ceiling time reduction state occurs at the start of the game, as in this configuration example (Tenki C1), the ceiling time reduction state transition process is executed in the ceiling activation management process at the start of the game (step S421A). (Steps S915 to S916). Therefore, before the special symbol fluctuation starts, that is, before finishing the special symbol fluctuation start process, is the gaming state treated as "in a time saving state" or as "in a normal state" because the fluctuation has not started? The question is: In a configuration in which the determination process of step S913 described above does not exist, in a case treated as being in a normal state, if the support time reduction is won, the determination process results of step S912 and step S914 will be "YES", and steps S915 to S916 The transition preparation process for the support time reduction state is executed, which may cause problems. However, in this configuration example, a determination process in step S913 is provided, and if it is determined that the ceiling is activated (step S913:=5AH), is it treated as "in a time saving state" before finishing the special symbol fluctuation start process? , or whether it is handled as "in the normal state", the transition processing of steps S915 to S916 is skipped, so no particular problem occurs. Note that the reason for providing the determination process in step S961 in the support time saving flag management process (step S422A) shown in FIG. 62, which will be described later, is the same as the reason for providing the determination process in step S913 described above.

(15C1.Support time saving flag management process related to Tenki C1: Figure 62)
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the support time saving flag management process (step S422A) related to Tenki C1 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing details of the support time saving flag management process.

In this configuration example, as in the first embodiment (first support-equipped type), even if the occurrence of the support time-saving state is prohibited, the support time-saving winning information (support time-saving determination flag) is not displayed in the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process ( Since it is maintained without being cleared until step S413) is completed (see FIG. 59), the support time reduction flag is The winning information will be cleared.

In this configuration example, even if the support time reduction is won in the ceiling game, the ceiling time reduction state is given priority, so if it is a ceiling game, in other words, if the ceiling time reduction state is granted, the support time reduction It is necessary to clear the winning information (support time reduction determination flag ←00H). Therefore, in this configuration example, as shown in FIG. 62, the determination process in step S961 is added to the processing contents in FIGS. It has become. Specifically, when the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state (step S961:=5AH), the support time reduction determination flag is set in the OFF state (00H).

<26C1. Processing during special symbol confirmation time related to Tenki C1 (processing when variation stops): Figures 63A and 63B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 63A and FIG. 63B, the process during the special symbol confirmation time related to the sky machine C1 will be explained. 63A and 63B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) in FIG. 10.

As shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, the process during the special symbol confirmation time related to Tenki C1 is different from FIGS. The processing contents of ``various setting processing when jackpot symbol stops'' and ``setting processing when time saving ends'' in step S481B are different, and other processing is substantially the same processing contents.
Since this configuration example has a ceiling function, in the "various setting processing when jackpot symbol stops (step S475B)", the processing contents of step S475 in FIG. 17A include a ceiling counter, a ceiling flag, and a ceiling activation flag related to the ceiling function. A process to clear each has been added. Furthermore, in the "setting process at the end of time saving (step S481B)", a process of clearing the ceiling activation flag is added to the process content of step S481 in FIG. 17B.

[Modified example of configuration example C1: FIG. 64]
The above-mentioned Tenki C1 has a configuration that combines the above-mentioned Tenki A which has a ceiling function and the above-mentioned "first support time-saving mounting type (Figs. 8 to 17B, especially Figs. 12 to 17B)" which has a support time-saving function. It was explained as follows. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the above-mentioned "first support time-saving mounting type", a configuration (Tenki C1 (Modified example) may also be used. This modification and the above-mentioned Tenki C1 are different in the special symbol variation start process (step S306 in FIG. 10), and other processes are substantially the same.

FIG. 64 shows details of the special symbol variation start process of this modification (Tenki C1 modification). As shown in FIG. 64, the special symbol fluctuation start process of this modification example is such that the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory (step S410) during the special symbol fluctuation start process shown in FIG. The special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process (step S410A) shown in FIG. The difference is that the game state transition preparation process (step S412A) shown in FIG. 20 is replaced, and the "support time saving flag management process" in step S422A shown in FIG. 59 is removed.

Regarding the random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessory objects (step S410A) according to this modification, the determination process of step S945 shown in FIG. 19A and the determination process of step S951 shown in FIG. 19B are "support time reduction activation prohibited state". This refers to a gaming state other than the normal state and a case where the ceiling activation flag is ON (5AH). In this modification, as with the event already described in the second embodiment, during the pre-processing random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory (see step S410A, FIG. 19A, and FIG. 19B), the support time reduction activation prohibition state If the support time saving determination flag is always in the OFF state (00H), the process of steps S915 to S916 in the gaming state transition preparation process (step S412A) shown in FIG. In this case, the process for specifying the destination gaming state) is skipped (step S912:≠5AH), and the game state transition preparation process is skipped. As a result, even if the support time reduction is won when the support time reduction activation is prohibited, the time reduction state is prohibited from occurring (the preparation process for the support time reduction state itself is prohibited).

[Configuration example C2]
“Tenki C2: Equipped with ceiling non-priority activation support type at game start (not shown)”
Next, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side related to the type of Tenki C2, that is, the "type with ceiling non-priority activation support at game start" will be described.

As explained above, this type of Tenki C2 is a "hybrid type" that has a ceiling function and a support time reduction function, and if the support time reduction function is won in the ceiling game, the "ceiling function (ceiling privilege granting)" It is a type that prioritizes support time reduction and activates it rather than '', and if the support time reduction is not won, the ceiling function is ``activated at the start of the ceiling game''.

Although the processing flow related to Tenki C2 is not illustrated, it has substantially the same processing content as Tenki C1 described above, except that when the support time reduction is won in the ceiling game, the support time reduction is activated with priority. be. Regarding the random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessory (step S410), the process content (first embodiment) shown in FIG. 13 may be adopted, or the process content (first embodiment) shown in FIG. 19A or 19B may be adopted. Embodiment 2) may also be adopted.

(Problems with Tenki C2)
Here, the following problem may occur in Tenki C2. If you win the support time reduction in the ceiling game, if you completely prohibit the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction state at the start of the game, the ceiling time reduction state will not occur at the start of the game, so this game is a support time reduction win. There is a risk that it will be found out early (it will be found out first) (the same problem as when winning the jackpot explained in "Red 1. Example of configuration including determination process of ceiling activation prohibited state" above may occur). Therefore, even if you win the support time reduction, the ceiling time reduction state is controlled during the ceiling game (occurrence (activation) of the ceiling time reduction state is allowed), and the support time reduction state is controlled after the ceiling game ends (ceiling time reduction It is preferable to terminate the state and cause (activate) a support time reduction state. In this case, the ceiling time saving state functions as a "time saving state for only one ceiling game".

[Configuration example D1]
“Tenki D1: Equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the end of the game: Figures 65 to 69”
Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 69, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side related to the type of Tenki D1, ie, "equipped with ceiling priority activation support at end of game" will be described.

As explained above, this type of Tenki D1 is a "hybrid type" that has a ceiling function and a support time reduction function, and even if the support time reduction function is won in the ceiling game, the "ceiling function (ceiling benefit It is a type that prioritizes and activates ``Grant)'', and its ceiling function is configured to ``activate at the end of the ceiling game''. In this respect, it is greatly different from the above-mentioned Tenki C1, which is "equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the start of the game".

Therefore, basically, the above-mentioned "first support time-saving equipped type (see Figs. 8 to 17B, especially Figs. 12 to 17B)" which has a support time-saving function, and the above-mentioned Tenki B which has a ceiling function, "Game End" It has a configuration that combines a type without ceiling activation support (see Figures 56 to 58). Correspondingly, the processing contents of the special symbol fluctuation start processing (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) in FIG. The processing content is different from that of . The details will be explained below.

<21D. Special symbol variation start process related to Tenki D1: Figure 65>
First, with reference to FIG. 65, the special symbol variation start process (step S306 in FIG. 10) regarding the sky machine D1 will be explained. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process related to the sky machine D1.

Here, among the processes shown in FIG. 65, steps S401 to S410, S420 (ceiling function management process), S411 (special stop symbol creation process), S413 (special symbol variation pattern creation process) to S415 (decorative design designation command Transmission processing) and S416 (variation start time setting processing) have substantially the same processing content as in FIG. 56.
However, in this configuration example (Tenki D1), the content of the "gaming state transition preparation process" in step S412F is slightly different from the "gaming state transition preparation process" in step S412C shown in FIG. 56 in that the support time is shortened.
In addition, this configuration example (Tenki D1) has a ceiling function, and the "support time saving flag management process" in step S422B shown in FIG. 65 is different from that shown in FIG. This is slightly different from the "support time saving flag management process" in step S422 described above.
Hereinafter, in order to avoid duplicate description, FIG. 65 differs from the contents of the special symbol fluctuation start process shown in FIGS. The explanation will focus on "support time saving flag management processing".

(15D1. Game state transition preparation process: Figure 66)
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the game state transition preparation process (step S412D in FIG. 59) related to Tenki D1 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process related to Tenki D1.

In this configuration example (Tenki D1), as with Tenki C1 above, if the support time reduction is won in the ceiling game, the ceiling function is activated with priority, so if the support time reduction is won in the ceiling game, the support Prohibits activation of short time state. Therefore, in the game state transition preparation process related to Tenki D1, as shown in FIG. 66, the game state transition preparation process (shown in FIG. The determination process of S917 is added.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66, when the jackpot determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S911:≠5AH) and the support time saving determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S912:=5AH) That is, in the case where the support time reduction is won, if the ceiling flag is in the ON state (step S913:=5AH), the processing of steps S915 to S916 for generating the support time reduction state is skipped. This prohibits activation of the support time reduction state in the ceiling game. Note that the ceiling flag is set to the ON state (5AH) when the ceiling game is reached during the ceiling function management process (step S420) (see step S420 in FIG. 65 and FIG. 52 showing details thereof). In the case of this configuration example (Tenki D1), the ceiling activation flag is in the OFF state at this stage, so unlike the case of Tenki C1 (determining the ceiling activation flag), the state of the ceiling flag is determined. ing.

(15D1. Support time saving flag management process related to Tenki D1: Figure 67)
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the support time saving flag management process (step S422B) related to Tenki D1 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing details of the support time saving flag management process.

In this configuration example, as in the first embodiment (first support-equipped type), even if the occurrence of the support time-saving state is prohibited, the support time-saving winning information (support time-saving determination flag) is changed to the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process ( Since it is maintained without being cleared until step S413) is completed (see step S410 in FIG. 65, details of which are shown in FIG. 13), the "support time saving flag management process" ( In step S422B), the support time saving winning information is cleared.

In this configuration example, even if the support time reduction is won in the ceiling game, the ceiling time reduction state is given priority, so if it is a ceiling game, in other words, if the ceiling time reduction state is granted, the support time reduction It is necessary to clear the winning information (support time reduction determination flag ←00H). Therefore, in this configuration example, as shown in FIG. 67, the determination processing of step S961A is added to the processing contents shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b). Specifically, when the ceiling flag is in the ON state (step S961A:=5AH), the support time reduction determination flag is set in the OFF state (00H).

<26D1. Processing during special symbol confirmation time related to Tenki D1 (processing when fluctuation stops): Figure 68A and Figure 68B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 68A and FIG. 68B, the process during the special symbol confirmation time related to the sky machine D1 will be explained. 68A and 68B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) in FIG. 10.

As shown in FIGS. 68A and 68B, the process during the special symbol confirmation time related to Tenki D1 is different from that in FIGS. The processing contents of "various setting processing when jackpot symbol stops", "setting processing when time saving ends" in step S481B, and "ceiling activation management processing at the end of game" in step S496A are different, and step S476 related to support time saving, The difference is that S477A to S477C are provided. Other processing is substantially the same processing content.

In this configuration example (Tenki D1), since the support time is shortened, in the "various setting processing when jackpot symbol stops (step S475B)", the process of clearing the support time shortening flag is added to the processing content of step S475A in FIG. 57A. has been added. Furthermore, in the "setting process at the end of time reduction (step S481B)", processing for clearing the support time reduction flag is added to the processing content of step S481A in FIG. 57A.

Regarding the "ceiling activation management process at the end of the game" in step S496A, please refer to FIG. 69, and as shown in the figure, the "various setting process when the ceiling is activated" in step S923 in FIG. 58 described in the above Tenki B. This includes the addition of a process to clear the support time reduction flag. Other processing contents (steps S921 to S922, S924) are substantially the same as those in FIG. 58.

Furthermore, the processing contents of steps S476 and S477A to S477C regarding the support time reduction are the same as steps S476 and S477A to S477C in FIG. 17A described in the first embodiment (first support mounted type).

In the special symbol confirmation time processing related to this configuration example (Tenki D1), in step S495, if the ceiling flag is in the OFF state (step S495:≠5AH), it is determined that the ceiling activation opportunity has not arrived, and the process continues. Then, it is determined whether the support time saving determination flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, whether or not the support time saving determination flag has been won (step S476). If the support time saving determination flag is in the ON state (step S476:=5AH), the process of S477A to S477C is executed and the special symbol confirmation time process is exited. If the support time saving determination flag is in the OFF state (step S476:≠5AH), the process from step S478 onwards is executed, and after executing the specific mode transition management process of step S949, the process exits from the special symbol confirmation time process.

[Modified example of configuration example D1: FIG. 70]
The above-mentioned Tenki D1 has a configuration that combines the above-mentioned Tenki B which has a ceiling function and the above-mentioned "first support time-saving mounting type (Figs. 8 to 17B, especially Figs. 12 to 17B)" which has a support time-saving function. It was explained as follows. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the above-mentioned "first support time-saving mounting type", a configuration (Tenki D1 (Modified example) may also be used. This modification and the above-mentioned Tenki D1 are different in the special symbol variation start process (step S306 in FIG. 10), and the other processes are substantially the same.

FIG. 70 shows details of the special symbol variation start process of this modification (Tenki D1 modification). As shown in FIG. 70, the special symbol variation start process of this modification is such that the random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessories (step S410) during the special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 19B (step S410A) is replaced with the random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessories (step S410A) (the same process content as S410A in FIG. 18), and the game state transition preparation process (step S412F, see FIG. 66). , the difference is that the game state transition preparation process (step S412A) shown in FIG. 20 is replaced, and the "support time saving flag management process" in step S422B shown in FIG. 65 is removed.

Regarding the random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessory objects (step S410A) according to this modification, the determination process of step S945 shown in FIG. 19A and the determination process of step S951 shown in FIG. 19B are "support time reduction activation prohibited state". This refers to a game state other than the normal state and a case where the ceiling flag is in the ON state (5AH). In this modification, as with the event already described in the second embodiment, during the pre-processing random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory (see step S410A, FIG. 19A, and FIG. 19B), the support time reduction activation prohibition state If the support time saving determination flag is always in the OFF state (00H), the processing of steps S915 to S916 in the gaming state transition preparation processing (step S412A) shown in FIG. 20 is skipped (step S912:≠ 5AH), the game state transition preparation process can be exited. As a result, even if the support time reduction is won when the support time reduction activation is prohibited, the time reduction state is prohibited from occurring (the preparation process for the support time reduction state itself is prohibited).

[Configuration example D2]
“Tenki D2: Equipped with ceiling non-priority activation support type at the end of the game (not shown)”
Next, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side related to the type of Tenki D2, that is, the "equipped ceiling non-priority activation support type at the end of the game" will be explained.

As explained above, this type of Tenki D2 is a "hybrid type" that has a ceiling function and a support time reduction function, and if the support time reduction function is won in the ceiling game, the "ceiling function (granting ceiling benefits)" It is a type that prioritizes support time reduction and activates it rather than "Support time reduction", and if the support time reduction is not won, the ceiling function is "activated at the end of the ceiling game".

Although the processing flow related to Tenki D2 is not illustrated, it is substantially the same as Tenki D1 described above, except that when the support time reduction is won in the ceiling game, the support time reduction is activated with priority. Regarding the random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessory (step S410), the process content (first embodiment) shown in FIG. 13 may be adopted, or the process content (first embodiment) shown in FIG. 19A or 19B may be adopted. Embodiment 2) may also be adopted.

(Counting form of ceiling games)
Note that the above ceiling counter can function as shown below (Italy 38), (Italy 71), and (Italy 72). Which counting form to adopt can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay.

(Italy 38) When clearing the RAM (see step S031 in FIG. 8), the timing to set the initial value to the ceiling counter is determined by the startup process of the "main control unit side timer interrupt process" shown in FIG. 9 (step S036 in FIG. 8). It is preferable to set this at a stage earlier than CTC setting). Specifically, the initial value is set before the main control unit-side interrupt process including the process related to game progress is started (before step S036 in FIG. 8). If the initial value is set after the main control unit side timer interrupt processing starts, there is a risk that the game will start before the initial value is set, making it impossible to count the correct number of ceiling games, and making control more complicated. This can be a difficult process. Therefore, it is preferable to set the initial value before the main control unit side interrupt processing is activated.

Further, the ceiling counter according to the present embodiment may function as shown below (I71) and (I72) depending on the gaming state.
(Item 71) At least during the support time reduction state, the value of the ceiling counter is not updated (counted) (the value of the ceiling counter is maintained). In this case, since the value of the ceiling counter is not updated during the support time reduction state, it is possible to prevent the ceiling function from being activated during the support time reduction state. This configuration example is suitable for the following cases, for example. If the number of time reductions for support time reduction is greater than the number of time reductions for ceiling time reduction (for example, when the number of support time reduction = 200 times, the number of ceiling time reduction = 100 times, etc.), when the ceiling time reduction is granted, the remaining number of time reduction for support time reduction will be the ceiling time reduction. There may be cases where the number of time reductions is greater than the number of times. In this case, if a ceiling time reduction is granted, there is a possibility that the player will suffer an unexpected disadvantage. Therefore, in the case of a game where such a case may occur, the value of the ceiling counter during the support time reduction state is not updated, and after the support time reduction ends, updating of the ceiling counter is resumed. Thereby, the ceiling privilege can fully demonstrate its role as a relief function.
(I72-1) However, at least during the support time reduction state, the value of the ceiling counter may be updated. In this case, the number of games executed during the support time reduction state is counted as the number of ceiling games. That is, the player can aim to reach the ceiling while benefiting from the electric support state during the support time reduction state. However, there is a possibility that the ceiling function will be activated during the support time reduction state, and when the number of ceiling games reaches the maximum number of games during the support time reduction state, it is necessary to decide whether to prioritize the current support time reduction state or end the support time reduction state. Control processing is required depending on whether the ceiling function is activated or not. For example, if the ceiling is reached during the support time reduction state, should priority be given to the ceiling time reduction (the current number of remaining support time reductions is updated (set) to 1000 ceiling time reductions), or should activation of the ceiling function be prohibited ( It is necessary to establish a policy that prohibits the granting of ceiling benefits during support time reduction conditions. Also, if ceiling benefits are allowed to be granted during the support time reduction state, should the current remaining number of time reductions be updated to 1000 times due to ceiling time reduction, or should it be added to the current number of time reductions (+1000 times)? can be determined as appropriate.

(Variation example of fixed display time)
Here, it has been explained that the final display time according to the present embodiment is set to 500 ms (normal final display time: see FIG. 16), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different fixed display times can be set depending on the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, it is possible to set a final display time that satisfies the following relationships (Italy 84-1) to (Italy 86).
(Italy 84-1) At least in the case of loss fluctuations related to normal mode (especially general mode), the normal 500ms is set as the confirmation display time, but in the case of loss fluctuations related to other game modes, the normal confirmation display time is set. It is possible to set a fixed display time that is different from the display time. The other gaming modes may be one or more specific gaming modes. For example, ceiling fluctuations (see the ceiling column in Figure 75; especially ceiling fluctuations related to the ceiling activation type at the end of the game (same for (Italy 84-2) to (Italy 86) described below), support time shortening winning fluctuations (for example, For one or more of the following fluctuation patterns: (see note 3 in Figure 72), final sign fluctuation, and ceiling entry fluctuation (first rotation of heaven mode), the final display time (for example, 500 ms) is different from the normal final display time. You can set a longer fixed display time.

Here, ceiling time reduction and support time reduction are those that give the same time reduction state, but ceiling time reduction is a profit state that is activated when the ceiling number of games is reached, and support time reduction is a profit state that is activated after the jackpot lottery. There is a big difference in this point, and therefore, the contents of the effects related to ceiling fluctuations and support time-saving winning fluctuations are also different. In addition, while the support time saving state occurs when the game ends, the ceiling time saving state may occur at the start or end of the game, so it is possible to create an appropriate effect depending on the timing of the time saving state. desired. Therefore, there are cases where it is appropriate to effectively utilize the final display time as the performance execution period.
Focusing on this point, the fixed display time related to the ceiling fluctuation and the fixed display time related to the short support time winning fluctuation can be set in the following relationship (Italy 84-2) to (Italy 86).
(Italy 84-2) At least the confirmed display time V of the ceiling fluctuation and the confirmed display time W of the support time-saving winning fluctuation are different (determined display time V≠determined display time W).
(Italy 85) At least the confirmed display time V of the ceiling variation is longer than the confirmed display time W of the support time-saving winning variation (confirmed display time W<confirmed display time V).
(Italy 86) At least the fixed display time V of the ceiling variation is longer than the fixed display time W of the support time-saving winning variation (confirmed display time V<confirmed display time W).
According to (Italy 84) to (Italy 86) above, an appropriate time-saving rush notification effect is displayed using each symbol stop period (determined display time). It is possible to perform a time-saving rush notification effect.

(About control example of ceiling time reduction state)
In this embodiment, the ceiling time is controlled to be shortened each time the ceiling is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the following control forms (feather 1) to (feather 3) can be adopted (feather 1) After reaching the ceiling for the first time and controlling to the ceiling time shortening state (first ceiling time shortening state), if the next ceiling is reached (second ceiling reaching) without at least winning the jackpot, the ceiling time shortening state (second ceiling time shortening state) control is not performed during the ceiling time reduction state). In other words, after reaching the ceiling game (1000th game) and entering the ceiling time saving state, if you reach the ceiling game (2000th game) again without winning the jackpot, the first ceiling time saving state will be be terminated. Further, when the first ceiling time reduction ends, the state shifts to the normal state.
(Feature 2) In the case of (Feature 1) above, the ceiling counter is set to 1000 times when reaching the ceiling from the second time onward, and the ceiling counter counts, but at least the ceiling counter reaches zero without winning the jackpot. Even if this happens, it will not be controlled to the ceiling time shortening state. Further, when the first ceiling time reduction ends, the state shifts to the normal state.
(Feather 3) In (Feature 1) and (Feature 2) above, "at least without winning a jackpot" may be replaced with "without winning either a jackpot or a support time reduction."

(Example 1 of control in support time reduction state)
(Feature 4) Concerning the control of the support time reduction state, when the jackpot lottery probability is high (potential state and/or probability variable state), if the support time reduction is won, the support time reduction state is not controlled and the jackpot lottery probability is When winning the support time reduction during low probability (time reduction state and/or normal state), the support time reduction state can be controlled.

(Example 2 of control in support time reduction state)
In this embodiment, a potential state is not provided, but if a potential state (high probability + no electric support state) is provided, the following configurations (feather 5) and (feather 6) may be used. good.
(Feature 5) If the support time shortening is won during the potential state, control is performed to the support time shortening state. In other words, by winning the support time reduction, the potential state shifts to the time reduction state.
(Feather 6) If the support time reduction is won during the probability state, control is performed to the probability variable state. In other words, the game state is promoted from "high probability + no electric support state" to "high probability + electric support state" by winning the short support time.

(About the end conditions of the time saving state)
Regarding the jackpot time saving state, the ceiling time saving state, and the support time saving state, the following time saving end conditions (feature 7) to (feature 9) can be determined.
(Feather 7) The jackpot time-saving state occurs when the number of time-savings due to a jackpot ends, when you win a jackpot, or when you reach the ceiling game (when the ceiling time-saving state is activated: however, only if it has a ceiling function). This can be set as a time-saving termination condition.
(Feature 8) In the ceiling time saving state, when the number of time savings due to the ceiling time saving ends, or when winning a jackpot, can be determined as the time saving termination condition.
(Feather 9) The support time reduction state is activated when the number of time reductions due to support time reduction ends, when you win a jackpot, when you reach the ceiling game, when the ceiling time reduction state is activated (However, only if it has a ceiling function) , can be set as a time-saving termination condition. In addition, regarding the support time saving state, a case where the support is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the normal symbol variation display game may be added as the time saving end condition. In this case, the advantageousness of the support time-saving state, the jackpot time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state, or the jackpot time-saving state can be made different.

(About performance in time saving state)
In each of the embodiments described above, an example has been described in which the "time saving state" deals with a gaming state in which the special symbol time saving function, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the opening extension function operate. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each time-saving state of the jackpot time-saving state, ceiling time-saving state, and support time-saving state can be set to the following time-saving states (feature 10) to (feature 12).
(Feather 10) In the jackpot time-saving state, the special symbol time-saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time-saving function, and opening extension function operate, but in the ceiling time-saving state or support time-saving state, the special symbol time-saving function, normal symbol time-saving function function, and the open extension function only. The advantage of the time saving state focusing on the operating state of each function is the relationship of "ceiling time saving state or support time saving state (low advantage) < jackpot time saving state (high advantage)".
(Feather 11) In the hybrid type, in the jackpot time-saving state and the support time-saving state, the special symbol time-saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time-saving function, and opening extension function operate, but in the ceiling time-saving state, the special symbol time-saving function , the normal symbol time saving function, and the opening extension function only operate. The advantage of the time saving state focusing on the operating state of each function has the relationship of "ceiling time saving state (low advantage) < jackpot time saving state and support time saving state (high advantage)".
(Feather 12) In the hybrid type, in the jackpot time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state, the special symbol time-saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time-saving function, and opening extension function operate, but in the support time-saving state, the special symbol time-saving function , the normal symbol time saving function, and the opening extension function only operate. The advantage of the time-saving state focusing on the operating state of each function is the relationship of "support time-saving state (low advantage) < jackpot time-saving state and ceiling time-saving state (high advantage)".

[Modification example 1 of privilege grant form: Figure 84]
In the above embodiment, a configuration has been mainly described in which a ceiling benefit is given when a predetermined number of games are played without winning a jackpot during the normal mode (at least when the internal gaming state is in the normal state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to, for example, the following application forms (α) to (ζ).

<Assignment form (α): Figure 84 (a)>
(α) The number of games executed is counted regardless of the gaming mode or internal gaming state, and the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without at least winning a jackpot. (See FIG. 84(a)). In this case, the timing to set the initial value to the ceiling counter is when a jackpot is won. Specifically, it is set at the end of the jackpot game (set during the jackpot end process (step S509) in FIG. 21).
In the case of this configuration, the number of games executed not only in the normal state (normal mode) but also in the time saving state (time saving mode) and in the variable probability state (variable probability mode) is counted. Therefore, ceiling benefits can be given purely depending on how many games the player has become addicted to since winning the jackpot this time.

<Assignment form (β): Figure 84 (b)>
(β) A form in which the number of games executed during a "gaming state with a low probability state (hereinafter also referred to as a "low probability gaming state")" is counted for the number of ceiling games is a "low probability game counting form". ” is also called. Here, the "gaming state with a low probability state" corresponds to the "normal state" or "time saving state" when focusing on the internal gaming state, and the "normal mode" or "time saving state" when focusing on the gaming mode. "Mode" is applicable.

Therefore, the ``low-probability game count form'' includes a count form that ``can give a ceiling benefit based on the ceiling counter reaching a predetermined value during the ceiling time reduction state'', and a count form that ``can give ceiling benefits based on the ceiling counter reaching a predetermined value during the jackpot time reduction state''. At least one count form is included: a count form in which a ceiling benefit can be granted based on reaching a predetermined value, and a count form in which a ceiling benefit can be granted based on a ceiling counter reaching a predetermined value during the support time reduction state. .

Therefore, in this example, the number of games executed during a gaming state involving a high probability state (high probability gaming state) is excluded from the count.

FIG. 84(B) typically shows the 4R time saving jackpot (support time reduction may be included) (time saving state with 100 time reductions: hereinafter referred to as "time saving A") and the ST number of 100 times (not shown). The ST numbers are different: definite variable jackpot 1, definite variable time saving jackpot 2 (not shown) of "25 ST times + 75 time saving times", and definite variable time saving jackpot 3 (not shown) of "25 ST times + 75 time saving times" This shows a case where this example (granting form (β)) is applied to the jackpot. In the illustration, in order to make it easier to compare the three, all three are shown as "a jackpot that grants 100 electric support points." For each jackpot, the required number of games (referred to as "required number of games X" in this example) from the end of the electric support (101st game) to the ceiling game (1000th game) is as follows.

Referring to FIG. 84(b), in the case of a jackpot that grants time saving A, the game is transferred to a time saving state in which the number of time reductions is 100 after the end of the jackpot game, and these 100 time reductions are counted. Therefore, the required number of games X is "900 games" (see "Time Saving A" in FIG. 84(B)).
On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving variable jackpot, the number of games from the end of the electric support until the ceiling is reached differs depending on the number of STs.

“ST25”, “ST75”, and “ST100” in FIG. 84(b) indicate cases in which the above-described variable time-saving jackpot 3, variable time-saving jackpot 2, and variable time-saving jackpot 1 are won, respectively.
(A) In the case of ST25 (25 times of ST + 75 times of time saving), the 75 times of time saving after the end of ST25 are counted, so the required number of games X is "925 games".
(B) In the case of ST75 (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving), the 25 times of time saving after the end of ST75 are counted, so the required number of games X is "975 games".
(C) In the case of ST100 (100 STs), the probability is variable for 100 games until the end of the electric support, so these 100 games are excluded from the count. Therefore, the required number of games X is 1000 games. In other words, the relatively lower the profit level of the time-saving variable jackpot, the smaller the number of games required from the end of the electric support to the ceiling number of games.

To summarize the relationships shown in the figure, regarding the above-mentioned "number of required games In other words, the more you move to a gaming mode with a relatively lower profit level (internal gaming gaming state), the more the required number of games from the end of the electric support until reaching the ceiling (the number of required games during normal mode (normal state)). This is a unique relationship in which it decreases. This "reducing the number of games required to be played in normal mode (normal state)" can be said to be a relief function that is different from the ceiling benefit.

(If RAM is cleared)
(Italy 48) In this example (assignment form (β)), the number of games in the gaming state (normal state and time saving state) with low probability states is counted as the number of ceiling games. , a case where RAM clear is executed will be explained. When RAM clearing is executed, the current value of the ceiling counter (the current number of remaining ceiling games) is cleared, and the initial value of the number of ceiling games (1000 games) is reset to the ceiling counter. Further, after the RAM is cleared, the internal gaming state is set to the initial state "normal state" and the gaming mode is set to "normal mode (general mode)". Therefore, after clearing the RAM, the ceiling will be reached when 1000 games are played in the normal state. On the other hand, when going through a time-saving jackpot (for example, 4R time-saving jackpot with 100 time-savings), the ceiling number of games is set to 1000 games in the jackpot game, but in this case, "100 games in the time-saving state + 900 games in the normal state" ” If you digest it, you will reach the ceiling.

In other words, the number of games to reach the ceiling in the normal state will be different depending on the case where you clear the RAM and the case where you go through the 4R time saving jackpot (the number of games to be completed in the normal state is reduced by the number of time savings, and (The number of ceiling games will fluctuate). In this case, the following problem arises. When the RAM is cleared, the number of ceiling games is set to the initial value, so if you play first thing in the morning, you will always play under disadvantageous conditions to reach the ceiling, which may affect the customer attraction rate first thing in the morning. be. However, since there is a possibility of clearing the RAM by changing the settings, expectations for higher settings by changing the settings increase, but in the case of gaming machines that do not have a setting function, the above problem still remains. Therefore, it can be said that it is preferable to count the number of games in the normal state as the number of ceiling games as in this embodiment.

Further, as a means to solve the above problem, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of ceiling games that is advantageous when clearing the RAM can be set. For example, when clearing the RAM, 800 games is set as the first initial value, and if the initial value is set under other conditions, in this embodiment, after the end of the time saving state, after the end of the variable probability state, after the end of the jackpot game, There may be cases such as after the end of the support time reduction, but if a ceiling game is set based on these setting triggers, 1000 games is set as the second initial value. In other words, the number of ceiling games is set that satisfies the relationship of "first initial value (set when RAM is cleared)<second initial value (when set at a timing other than when RAM is cleared)". In this way, when playing for the first time after clearing the RAM, the game will not be played under unfavorable ceiling reaching conditions, and it is thought that the customer attraction rate first thing in the morning can actually be improved. Note that, as described above (I53-3), when the RAM is cleared, one of the multiple ceiling time reductions can be determined by lottery.

(Italy 54) The following can be done depending on the case where the player reaches the ceiling after clearing the RAM and the case where the player reaches the ceiling after hitting the jackpot.
(Italy 54-1) The fluctuation pattern distribution table to be referred to is common (selectable fluctuation patterns are common).
(I54-2) The confirmed display times are the same.
(Italy 54-3) The time-saving rush notification effect is common when playing the first rotation of the ceiling game (ceiling mode) or heaven mode.

(Variation example of ceiling count in grant form (β))
(Italy 113) In this example (assignment form (β)), the number of games in a game state with a low probability state is counted as the number of ceiling games (low probability game count form), but in the time saving state If the ceiling counter reaches zero during the process, the ceiling flag is turned OFF without executing the ceiling flag ON state (5AH) process (step S904) in the "ceiling function management process" shown in FIG. It is possible to maintain the current state, keep the ceiling counter at zero, and control not to execute the ceiling activation preparation process (processing route of steps S915 to S917 and S914 during the gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 66). In this case, even if the ceiling is reached during a time-saving state such as during a support time-saving state, the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) only for ceilings will not be changed, and the ceiling function will not be activated (ceiling privileges will not be granted). ) can be prevented from happening.
(Italy 114) In the above low-accuracy game count form (which may include the configuration of (Italy 113) above), resetting the initial value after the ceiling counter reaches zero during the time saving state is not necessary in the normal state. In case of migration.
(Italy 115) In a low-reliability game count mode (which may include the configuration of (Italy 113) or (Italy 114) described above), even if the ceiling counter reaches a predetermined value during the time saving state, the pre-read notice is prohibited as an area. Configure it to avoid being judged. For example, in the case of this embodiment, as already explained, the 996th game to 999th game in the precursor mode is set as the look-ahead prohibited period, but at this time, the value of the ceiling counter is checked, and the 996th game to 999th game It is determined whether or not it is the 999th game. Therefore, the system is configured so that the prefetched notice is not determined as a prohibited section even though it is not in the precursor mode, and the prefetched notice is not prohibited during the time saving state (for example, during the support time saving state).
(Italy 117) In a low certainty game count mode (which may include the configurations of (Italy 113), (Italy 114) or (Italy 115) described above), a variation pattern is selected even if the ceiling counter reaches zero during the time saving state. The mode (Tcode) is configured not to be updated (the fluctuation pattern table is not changed). For example, when the ceiling counter is updated during the support time reduction state, if the ceiling counter reaches a predetermined value (zero), the support time reduction state During this process, processing related to ceiling mode, ceiling activation preparation processing, and activation of ceiling functions (granting ceiling benefits) can be prevented from being executed.
(Italy 65) In the low-precision game count mode (which may include the configurations of (Italy 113), (Italy 114), or (Italy 115), and (Italy 117) described above), the ceiling counter is updated during the jackpot time saving state. However, the ceiling counter update process can be configured not to be performed during the ceiling time saving state. During the jackpot time reduction state, the ceiling time reduction has not yet been activated, so the ceiling counter is updated. On the other hand, while in the ceiling time reduction state, the ceiling time reduction is already activated, so the update of the ceiling counter is interrupted, and each time the ceiling counter reaches zero, the ceiling function is activated (ceiling benefit is granted) and the ceiling time reduction is looped. It is possible to prevent this from happening.
(Italy 118) In the low-accuracy game count form (which may include the above-mentioned configurations of (Italy 113), (Italy 114), (Italy 115), (Italy 65) or (Italy 117)), during the support time reduction state, Although the ceiling counter is updated, it can be configured such that the ceiling counter is not updated during the ceiling time saving state. During the support time reduction state, the ceiling time reduction has not yet been activated, so the ceiling counter is updated. On the other hand, while in the ceiling time reduction state, the ceiling time reduction is already activated, so the update of the ceiling counter is interrupted, and each time the ceiling counter reaches zero, the ceiling function is activated (ceiling benefit is granted) and the ceiling time reduction is looped. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

<Grant form (δ)>
Also, instead of counting the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display game is executed (the number of variations of the special symbol), (δ) "the number of times the regular symbol fluctuation display game is executed (the number of fluctuations of the regular symbol)" is counted. Good too. In this case, it is preferable to count the "number of fluctuations of normal symbols" during a gaming state with a low probability state (normal state and/or time saving state). For example, if the number of executions of the normal pattern fluctuation display game in the normal mode (normal state) is counted and a predetermined number of games (for example, the 2000th game) is reached, a ceiling benefit can be given.

<Grant form (ε)>
(ε) It is also possible to count the number of wins of "small wins" in which the conditional device does not operate, and to give a ceiling benefit when the number of wins reaches a predetermined number without winning a jackpot. For example, if the probability of winning a small winning is set to 1/100, and the winning of a small winning reaches 10 times, a ceiling benefit is given. In addition, instead of the number of winnings of the "small winning", the number of times the special electric accessory is operated (the number of times the small winning game is executed) when winning the small winning may be counted. Note that this example can also be applied to short winning support time reduction.
Alternatively, a plurality of types of winning times may be provided (for example, 7 times, 8 times, 9 times, 10 times), and any one of the winning times may be determined by lottery (ceiling shift winning number lottery). In this case, the higher the setting value, the easier it is to select a relatively smaller number of wins (for example, 7 times), and the lower the setting value, the easier it is to select a relatively larger number of wins (for example, 10 times). If the lottery probability for each number of winnings is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to grant the benefit of the ceiling privilege, or conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to grant the benefit of the ceiling privilege. Further, depending on the number of games reaching the ceiling, it is possible to give a set guess factor to the player (the same applies to the "giving form ζ" described below).

<Grant form (ζ)>
(ζ) Furthermore, the number of winnings of "assistance winnings" is counted, and when a predetermined number of winnings is reached, a ceiling benefit can be given. In this case, it is preferable to count the number of wins at least in a gaming state (normal state and/or potential state) with a low probability state (normal symbol probability changing function not activated) in which the lottery probability of winning the assistance is low. In addition, instead of the number of winnings of the "assistance win", the number of times the general electricity release game is executed may be counted.

The awarding forms (ε) and (ζ) described above are characterized in that the conditions for awarding the ceiling benefit do not depend on the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (the number of symbol variations).

<Special grant form 1>
(Italy 50) When the number of time reductions due to ceiling time reduction is N and the number of ceiling games (initial value of the ceiling counter) is M, it is possible to have a configuration that satisfies the relationship "M<N".
If the number of ceiling games is counted even if the game is in the ceiling time reduction state (case where the ceiling counter is updated during the ceiling time reduction state), if the above relationship "M <N" is satisfied, even if it is a finite time reduction, It becomes possible to generate ceiling time reduction (permanent time reduction) which is essentially the same as infinite time reduction. To be more specific, if the number of ceiling games is 1000 (M = 1000) and the number of time savings due to ceiling time reduction is 1200 (N = 1200), 1200 ceiling time savings will be granted by reaching the ceiling for the first time. Become. Then, the number of ceiling games is counted again from the first ceiling game number (1000th game), so before the 1200th game, which is the end of the ceiling time reduction state, the ceiling is reached again (the second (reaching the ceiling), a second ceiling time reduction of 1,200 times is granted, and so on, unless the conditions for ending the ceiling time reduction are satisfied, the time reduction state is repeatedly provided. According to this configuration, even if a limited ceiling time reduction is granted, the time reduction state continues forever, so the ceiling time reduction state does not end without winning the jackpot. According to this configuration, if the ceiling time saving is granted even once, the time saving state can be maintained until the jackpot is won, so the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

<Special grant form 2>
(Italy 58) In this embodiment, one ceiling game has been described, but a plurality of ceiling games may be defined.
In detail, if you reach the first ceiling number of games without winning the jackpot, the first ceiling time reduction will be granted (activation of the first ceiling function), and if you exit without winning the jackpot during the first ceiling time reduction state. After that, when the second ceiling number of games is reached without winning a jackpot, a second ceiling time reduction is given (activation of the second ceiling function). According to this configuration, since there are a plurality of ceiling games that serve as triggers for ceiling activation, a major feature is that ceiling benefits can be awarded in stages.
Note that the first ceiling game number and the second ceiling game number may be the same or different. Moreover, the first number of time reductions related to the first ceiling time reduction and the second number of time reductions related to the second ceiling time reduction may be the same or may be different. Moreover, the performance of the first ceiling time saving and the performance of the second ceiling time saving may be the same or different. The "ceiling time saving performance" here means the degree of profit (ball payout performance) due to the operation mode (opening/closing operation pattern of the movable wing pieces 47) of the general electricity release game.

In the case of this configuration, from the viewpoint of providing ceiling benefits in stages to relieve players from addiction, it is preferable that "the number of second ceiling games<the number of first ceiling games". If the player becomes addicted to the game, the player's desire to play can be prevented from decreasing significantly by giving the ceiling bonus earlier than the previous time. Moreover, it is preferable that the advantageous degree of ceiling time saving is set as "first ceiling time saving <second ceiling time saving". This is to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing significantly by providing a ceiling benefit with a higher profit level than the previous time if the player becomes addicted to the game.

(Example of production in ceiling game: Figures 77 to 83)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 83, examples of effects in the ceiling game will be described.

FIGS. 77 and 78 illustrate examples of the fluctuating performance during the ceiling game. FIG. 77 shows a production example A (support time saving priority) related to a gaming machine of the type Tenki C2 (equipped with ceiling non-priority activation support at the start of the game) or Tenki D2 (equipped with ceiling non-priority activation support at the end of the game). FIG. 78 shows a production example A) related to the activation type, and FIG. 78 is a gaming machine of a type belonging to Tenki C1 (equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the start of the game) or Tenki D1 (equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the end of the game). This figure shows production example B related to (production example B related to ceiling priority activation type).

(Example A of production during ceiling game related to support time reduction priority activation type: Figure 77)
First, with reference to FIG. 77, an example A of performance related to the support time reduction priority activation type will be described. Note that (A) to (F1), (F2), or (F3) shown in the illustration in presentation example A show the transition of the presentation in chronological order. Hereinafter, this production example will be explained in chronological order with reference to FIG. 77.

FIG. 77(A) shows a state in which variable display of symbols has started. Then, when the production scenario progresses and the reach timing arrives, a specific reach production (for example, a reach production for a ceiling game) is started, and the decorative pattern 801 is placed in a small decorative pattern 801a in the retreat area at the left corner of the screen. It is displayed (retracted display) (FIGS. 77(B) and (C)). The reach effect here is an example of a reach effect including a player participation type effect having a narrative nature.

This player participation type performance is a so-called "command type performance" in which a mission (strategy) is presented to the player, and as a result of this performance, the result of the current game (jackpot lottery result) is announced. The content of the performance is that the performance is revealed.

When the reach effect is started, a title effect presenting a predetermined mission (strategy) appears, as shown in FIG. 77(C). Here, a character image 912 that reads "Shoot down the disc!" is displayed to the player, and a super electromagnetic guided cannon 913 (your character) faces off against the target disc (enemy character) 911. Displayed. After that, although not shown, an "attack preparation production" that depicts the electromagnetic guided cannon 913 and the disc 911 confronting each other while preparing for an attack appears, and prompts the user to press the production button 13. A button operation effect (pre-operation effect) is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the performance button 13 in response to the button operation performance or the button validity period has elapsed, an attack is performed in which an electromagnetic guided wave 915 is emitted toward the enemy character's disk 911, as shown in FIG. 77(D). A performance (post-operation performance) appears.

In the attack performance, the emitted electromagnetic guided wave 915 approaches the disc 911 as the performance time passes, and ends just before hitting the disc. Therefore, during this performance, it is still unclear whether the result of this game is a jackpot win, ceiling activation (ceiling time shortening state activated (lose win)), or support time shortening win (support time shortening state activated) . In other words, the attack performance functions as a pre-result performance before the result of the current game is derived, and as an inciting performance to increase the player's sense of tension. In other words, it is possible for a part of the fluctuating production to appear as a common production, and in the case of this production example, from the start of the variation to the attack production (see Figures 77 (A) to (D)), a common production can appear. The performance is now possible.

When the attack performance ends, the "success or failure performance" shown in FIGS. 77 (E1) to (E3) appears as a result performance (first result performance) after emitting the electromagnetic guided wave 915, depending on the jackpot lottery result. It can be done. The branching of the later effects in FIG. 77(D) indicates that there are multiple types of reach effect scenarios. Which scenario will be executed is determined by a predetermined performance lottery based on the variation pattern information (information on the variation pattern designation command) and decoration stop symbol information (information on the decoration symbol designation command).

In the above success/failure performance, if the "defeat performance (success performance)" shown in FIG. 77 (E1), which represents the electromagnetic guided wave 915 hitting and destroying the disk 911, occurs, the subsequent result performance (second result performance) As shown in FIG. 77 (F1), a blessing performance 751 appears that definitively announces that the result of this game is a "jackpot" (FIG. 77 (F1)). , a text information image 173 reading "Mission Complete" is displayed, and along with this, a decorative stop symbol 801d (for example, "777") corresponding to winning the jackpot is stopped and displayed.As a result, the result of the current game is "Jackpot". ” will be announced.

However, in the success/failure performance, if the "avoidance performance (failure performance)" shown in FIG. As a result effect), it is announced that the result of this game is ``ceiling activation'' or ``support time reduction win''. In the case of this production example, two avoidance productions are prepared: "Avoidance A production (Fig. 77 (E2))" and "Avoidance B production (Fig. 77 (E3))" in which the modes of avoidance movement of the disc 911 are different. In the case of "Avoidance A performance", a time-saving entry notification performance 780 appears as a result performance to notify that "Support time-saving win" has been achieved (FIG. 77 (F2)). . In addition, in the case of "Avoidance B effect", a ceiling rush notification effect 781 appears as a result effect to notify that "ceiling activation" is performed (FIG. (F3)). In addition, when the support time saving is won, as shown in FIG. 77 (F2), the first decorative stop symbol 801e and the second decorative stop symbol 802a corresponding to the support time short win are stopped and displayed, and when the ceiling is activated, as shown in FIG. 77 (F3). As such, the first decorative stop symbol 801f and the second decorative stop symbol 802b corresponding to ceiling activation are stopped and displayed. Note that the first decorative stop pattern 801e and the first decorative stop pattern 801f are a combination of number-based decorative patterns (main decorative patterns) that are normally used, and the second decorative stop pattern 802a and the second decorative stop pattern 802b. is used as a sub-decorative stop pattern, and is a combination of special decorative patterns (sub-decorative patterns) that are not used in normal decorative patterns. In this production example, by using the sub-decoration pattern, the display mode is such that it is easy for the player to understand that the support time-saving win or the ceiling is activated.

It should be noted that until the above-mentioned avoidance performance is completed, it is not necessarily announced that it is a ceiling activation or support time shortening win, and if it is a "jackpot", it will be shown at a predetermined appearance rate as shown in Figure 79. A so-called "resurrection performance" as shown in (H) is now appearing. In this revival effect, after the avoidance effect (Fig. 79 (X)) appears, the "pursuit effect" shown in Fig. 79 (Y), which depicts pursuing the disc 911, appears, and finally , a "destruction effect (FIG. 79 (Z))" similar to that shown in FIG. 79 (E1) appears, and the effect is such that the winning of the jackpot is definitively announced.

(Production scenario type in production example A: Figure 81)
FIG. 81 shows the production scenario types related to production example A. Figure 81 (A) shows the case of "Jackpot", Figure 81 (B) shows the case of "Support Time Shortening Winning", and Figure 81 (C) shows the case of "Ceiling Activation". This is a scenario. Note that from the start of the fluctuation in Figure 77 (A) to the title performance in Figure 77 (C), the effects are the same or almost the same for "Jackpot", "Support Time Shortening Winning", and "Ceiling Activation", so they are omitted here. be.

As shown in Figure 81, regarding the attack performance, a common performance (common performance scenario) can be selected regardless of whether the jackpot lottery result is "Jackpot", "Support Time Shortening Winning", or "Ceiling Activation". There is. Note that the effects of "light attack," "medium attack," and "heavy attack" shown in the attack effect column each have different effects. For example, as shown in FIGS. 79 (D1) to (D3), electromagnetic induction The thickness of the emitted beam of the wave 915 is different. Which attack effect will appear can be determined by a predetermined effect lottery (see the remarks column in FIG. 81).

Furthermore, the performance types may include unique performances (performance scenarios that are not selected in other game results) corresponding to each of "Jackpot", "Support Time Shortening Winning", and "Ceiling Activation". Specifically, these are a common performance A when winning a jackpot, a common performance A when winning a support time reduction, and a common performance A when a ceiling is activated. These attack performances have different performance modes. For example, referring to FIGS. 79 (D4) to (D6), the attack performance shown in FIG. 79 (D4) is a "jackpot confirmed attack performance" that is selected only when winning a jackpot, and the attack performance shown in FIG. 79 (D5) The attack performance shown in FIG. 79 (D6) is a "ceiling activation guaranteed attack performance" that is selected only when the ceiling is activated.

Furthermore, the "common performances C, D, F, G, I, and J" that are selected at the time of winning the jackpot are performance scenarios that include the above-mentioned "resurrection performance". Specifically, "Avoidance A→pursuit and defeat" and "Avoidance B→pursuit and defeat" in the success/failure performance column of FIG. 81(A) correspond to the "resurrection performance" shown in FIG. 80(H).

Note that it is free to determine which of the various performance types shown in FIGS. 81(A) to (C) to be selected. For example, if the effect type shown in FIG. 81(D) is set as the selection target, a effect similar to the effect example A shown in FIG. 77 will be displayed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 77, when the result effect is finished, the fluctuating effect related to the current game is ended. After that, if the current game result is a jackpot, a jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot type is started, and if the support time reduction win is achieved, a support time reduction state corresponding to the support time reduction type occurs. In addition, in the case of ceiling activation, if Tenki C2 is "equipped with ceiling non-priority activation support at the start of the game", the current game will end with the ceiling time shortening state activated at the start of the game, and Tenki D2's If it is "equipped with ceiling non-priority activation support at the end of the game", the ceiling time shortening state will occur with the end of the current game.

In addition, in the above, an example of a production in which at least a part of the fluctuating productions related to "when winning a jackpot", "when winning a support time reduction", and "when a ceiling is activated" in a ceiling game is a common production has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in Figures 80 (a) to (b), completely different fluctuating effects (dedicated fluctuating effects) are displayed for "when winning a jackpot," "when winning a short support time," and "when a ceiling is activated." It may also be configured so that it can be displayed (the same applies to Production Example B, which will be described later). Further, the configuration may be configured so that only these dedicated performances can be displayed without using the performance scenario types shown in FIG. 81, or the configuration may be configured such that these dedicated performance scenarios can be selected together with the performance scenario types shown in FIG. 81. You may. In addition, since the "jackpot" and "support time saving" are determined through a jackpot lottery, it is preferable that the "exclusive performance for winning a jackpot" and/or "performance exclusive for winning a support time reduction" shown in the diagram include a reach performance. (It doesn't necessarily have to be a reach performance). On the other hand, since ceiling benefits are granted based on the number of games played (number of symbol changes), it is preferable that the "effects exclusive to ceiling activation" do not include reach effects ((B) (C) in Figure 80(C)). )reference).

(Example B of production during ceiling game related to ceiling priority activation type: Figure 78)
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, performance example B related to the ceiling priority activation type will be described. Note that the same elements as those in production example A related to the support time reduction priority activation type shown in FIG. 77 are given the same reference numerals. Further, in order to avoid redundant descriptions of contents that are substantially the same as those explained using FIGS. 79 to 81 above, the description will be omitted as appropriate, and the explanation will focus on the different points.

The production example B shown in FIG. 78 differs from the above-described support time reduction priority production example A (FIG. 77) in that it is a ceiling priority type production example (FIG. 77).
In the ceiling priority activation type, even if the support time reduction is won in the ceiling game, the support time reduction state is not activated, so there is no need to display an effect to notify that the support time reduction has been won. Therefore, in production example B, there is no production that notifies the winner of the shortened support time. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78, presentation example B is not provided with a presentation scenario including the result presentation (F2) in FIG. Note that the other performances are substantially the same.

Here, in the ceiling priority activation type, such as Tenki C1 or Tenki D1, even if the support time is shortened, the winning information is not cleared until the execution of the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process (step S413) is completed. (For example, see FIGS. 59 and 61), a modified example of the top machine C1 (see FIG. 64), or a modified example of the top machine D1 (see FIG. 70), the random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessory ( The effect during fluctuation during the ceiling game can be made different depending on the type that performs the process of not generating winning information of support time reduction in step S410A, FIG. 19A, FIG. 19B).

As already explained, in the former type, the support time-saving winning information is not cleared until the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) is completed, so even if the support time-saving state is not activated, the fluctuation pattern related to the support time-saving winning can be selected, and an effect related to the variation pattern can be displayed. For example, with reference to FIG. 82 illustrating the performance scenario types related to performance example B, as shown in FIG. Can be done. However, as the result effect does not activate the support time saving state, the ceiling rush notification effect 781 will appear, similar to FIG. 78(D), (E2) and (F3), and the solid line section in FIG. 78(D), (E3), and (F3)). It should be noted that it is free to decide which of the various performance types shown in FIGS. 82(A) to (C) to be selected. For example, if the effect type shown in FIG. 82(D) is set as the selection target, an effect similar to the effect example A shown in FIG. 78 will be displayed.

On the other hand, in the latter modification type, the support time-saving winning information is cleared before the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) is executed, so the variation pattern related to the support time-saving winning cannot be selected. For example, as shown in FIG. 83, it is possible to select effects that correspond to the jackpot winning or ceiling activation, and the number of types of effects is smaller than in the case of FIG. This has the advantage of reducing the burden. In addition, in FIG. 83, the avoidance A effect for the time-saving support shown in FIGS. Only the avoidance B effect is selected. Note that it is free to decide which one of the various performance types shown in FIGS. 83(A) and 83(B) to be selected. For example, if the effect type shown in FIG. 83(D) is set as the selection target, an effect similar to effect example B (the effect route indicated by the solid line) shown in FIG. 77 will appear (see FIG. 78(D). ) (E1) (F1) and the performance route shown in the solid line section in Fig. 78 (D) (E3) (F3)).

The embodiment described above can have the following configurations (1) to (6). Note that although the parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) A launching means (launching device 13, FIG. 3) capable of launching a game ball into a gaming area (gaming area 3a in FIG. 2);
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 66) that performs a lottery for a plurality of types of winnings, triggered by the detection of a game ball by the starting means (starting ports 34, 35);
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, a winning game execution control means (FIG. 21) that controls the execution of the winning game;
A gaming machine comprising symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b) that displays symbols in a variable manner and displays the lottery results by the lottery means according to a stop display mode of the symbols,
Game state control means capable of controlling a low probability game state with a low probability state in which the lottery probability of winning is a predetermined normal probability, and a high probability game state with a high probability state in which the probability of winning is higher than the normal probability. (Fig. 4, Fig. 7A, Fig. 7B, etc.) and
After the predetermined start condition is established, the winning game execution control means does not generate the winning game, and the number of symbol variations executed in the low probability gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000 times). a bonus game state control means (FIG. 61B (ceiling mode, heaven mode column)) that controls the bonus game state (ceiling bonus) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state when the game reaches the bonus game state;
A gaming machine characterized by:
(2) Advantageous gaming state control means (see Fig. 6 (time saving mode column)),
The advantageous gaming state control means is configured to be able to control the advantageous gaming state after the winning game.
The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that:
(3) The above-mentioned bonus gaming state and the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state have different advantages for the player (for example, a case where the number of time reductions due to ceiling time reduction is different from the number of time reductions due to jackpot or support time reduction),
The gaming machine according to (2) above, characterized in that:
(4) The above advantageous gaming state control means is
Depending on the winning type won by the lottery means, at least a first advantageous gaming state (for example, 100 time savings) and a second advantageous gaming state (for example, 200 time savings) that is higher in advantage than the first advantageous gaming state (for example, 200 time savings). ) and configured to be at least controllable,
The gaming machine according to (2) above, characterized in that:
(5) The above-mentioned bonus game state control means:
Controlling to the first advantageous gaming state as the bonus gaming state (for example, in the case where Heaven Time Saving is 100 time saving times),
The gaming machine according to (4) above, characterized in that:
(6) The above-mentioned bonus game state control means:
Controlling to the second advantageous gaming state as the bonus gaming state (for example, in the case where the national time saving is 200 times);
The gaming machine according to (4) above, characterized in that:
(7) Further comprising a performance control means (performance control unit 24) capable of controlling a plurality of types of performance modes related to the gaming state, the performance mode related to the bonus gaming state and the performance mode related to the advantageous gaming state are different. is a production mode (for example, time-saving production mode (FIG. 61A), heaven production mode (FIG. 63B)),
The gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above, characterized in that:

(Variations regarding model type)
The gaming machine according to the present invention may be a model in which the transition form of the gaming state is determined as follows, for example, a simultaneous fluctuation type model as described below.

(Machine 1) “Simultaneous fluctuation type”
It may be a so-called "simultaneous variation type" that is configured to be able to perform the variable display of special figure 1 and the variable display of special figure 2 in parallel. For example, it is a so-called "simultaneous variable machine" disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-171527. In the simultaneous fluctuation machine, the target of monitoring the number of ceiling games is the total number of fluctuations (total number of games executed) of the number of fluctuations displayed for special map 1 (number of games executed) and the number of fluctuations displayed (number of games executed) for special map 2. In this case, when one special figure wins a normal small hit and the other special figure is forced to stop losing, the special figure that is forced to stop losing is also counted as one fluctuating display.

<About the outer end signal>
Next, the outer end signal output from the frame external terminal board 21 will be explained. The frame external terminal board 21 is provided with a plurality of channels for external output. The connector corresponding to each channel and the connector on the data counter DT or hall computer HC side are connected by a cable. Each connector (information terminal) outputs one signal to the outside.

The outer end signals output to the outside of the gaming machine through the information terminal of the frame external terminal board 21 according to the present embodiment include, for example, the following (1) to (10) as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-058433. There's a signal.

(1) "Special symbol confirmation signal (information terminal 1)" that is output when the variable display of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 stops. Output for 100ms after fluctuation stops.
(2) A "starting port signal (information terminal 2)" that is output when the starting port sensors 34a, 35a detect passage of a game ball. Output for 100ms from the time the passage of the game ball is detected.
(3) "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal (Information Terminal 3)" which is output when the special symbol time saving function (special symbol time saving state flag) is in operation (during electric support state) and during the jackpot game. In this embodiment, when the special symbol time-saving function is in operation, it is synonymous with being in the electric support state, so the general electric accessory opening extension state flag and special symbol time-saving state flag specifying the presence or absence of electric support, and other electric power support functions are used. If the support state can be specified, another flag may be provided, and it may be determined whether the power support state is in progress based on the ON/OFF state of the flag. Further, whether or not a jackpot game is being played can be determined based on the ON/OFF state of the condition device activation flag and the accessory continuous activation device activation flag.
(4) “Jackpot signal (information terminal 4)” output while the accessory continuous operation device is in operation. Output when the accessory continuous operation device activation flag is in the ON state.
(5) "Special symbol 1 starting port signal (information terminal 5)" that is output when the upper starting port sensor 34a detects a game ball. Output for 100ms from the time when the upper starting port sensor 34a detects the game ball.
(6) "Special symbol 2 starting port signal (information terminal 6)" that is output when the lower starting port sensor 35a detects a game ball. Output for 100ms from the time when the lower starting port sensor 35a detects the game ball.
(7) "Special symbol 1 confirmation signal (information terminal 7)" that is output when the variable display of special symbol 1 stops. Output for 100ms after special symbol 1 fluctuation stops.
(8) "Normal symbol starting port signal (information terminal 8)" that is output when the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a detects a game ball. Normal symbol starting port sensor 37a Output for 100ms from the time of game ball detection.
(9) When there is a prize in the winning slot, the number of prize balls is added up, and each time the total value becomes 10 or more, 10 is subtracted from the total value, and the main prize ball signal (information terminal 9 )”.
(10) When RAM is cleared (output for 30,000 ms after RAM is cleared), when fraudulent winnings are detected for the big prize opening 50 or lower start opening 35 (output for 30,000 ms after cancellation from the time of fraudulent winning detection), when fraudulent magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor (Output for 30,000ms after cancellation from magnetic detection), When fraudulent radio waves are detected by the radio sensor (Output for 30,000ms after cancellation from radio wave detection), When fraudulent winnings are detected for the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a (Unauthorized winnings for the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a) A security signal (information terminal) that is output when an event related to fraud occurs, such as detection (200ms continuous ON detection) and output for 30,000ms after release), or when a vibration sensor detects unauthorized vibration (output for 30,000ms after release from unauthorized vibration detection). 10)"

Note that the main control unit 20 outputs the corresponding outer end signals from the information terminals 1 to 10 for a predetermined time (for example, for 100 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing when the output trigger for each signal arrives, but the output signals are not continuous. The output is performed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 100 ms). Furthermore, the external terminal signals of information terminals 1 to 8 are output from external terminal port 1 (8-bit output port (not shown)). (corresponding to the information terminals 9 and 10, respectively), and the external terminal signals of information terminals 9 and 10 are output from external terminal port 2 (8-bit output port (not shown))) (bit 0 of external terminal port 2 corresponds to information terminal 9, bit 1 corresponds to information terminal 10, and bits 2 to 7 correspond to unused bits).

The data counter DT described above is currently installed at each gaming machine in most pachinko halls, and the hall computer HC is an essential computer for the hall that manages the operating status of the gaming machines in the pachinko hall. For example, when the data counter DT receives the above-mentioned "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" that are output during a jackpot, it notifies that a jackpot has occurred. , update the number of jackpots. This not only notifies the player of the occurrence of a jackpot, but also informs surrounding players and hall staff that the machine is in the process of winning a jackpot, making it easier to identify the occurrence of a jackpot. . The hall computer HC calculates the ball output status of each gaming machine (calculates the base according to difference ball information and playing status, the base (number of special prizes) during jackpot, etc.) and the operating status (symbol pattern) based on various external terminal signals. You can monitor the execution of variable display games, the number of times they are played, the number of jackpots, etc.) in real time, monitor whether the gaming machine is operating normally (monitor for cheating and errors), and share the necessary information exclusively. Display on monitor. Data counter DT and hall computer HC generally monitor the signal input status, such as from non-reception (no input) to reception (input present) or from reception (input) to non-reception (no input) of the outer end signal. (monitoring ON/OFF edges of signals) to grasp the gaming situation and notify necessary information.

(Regarding the judgment of first hit and consecutive hits during the ceiling time shortening state: Figure 94)
Here, when the above-mentioned "ceiling time saving" is provided, if the outer end signal is output in the same way as before, there will be a problem that the external devices (data counter DT, hall computer HC) will not be able to determine the "first hit". It can occur. For example, when the data counter DT reports the number of consecutive wins, it cannot be determined whether the current jackpot is in a consecutive winning state. The "first hit" used in FIG. 94 refers to a jackpot win during the normal state or a jackpot win during the ceiling time reduction state. The above problem will be explained using FIG. 94.

<Conventional case: Case where the jackpot was won during normal conditions>
Referring to FIG. 94(A), in the conventional case, the method of determining whether the external device has won the "first hit" or "successful win (winning the jackpot during the electric support state)" is as follows. .

(Wave 1-1) When transitioning from the normal state to jackpot (jackpot game), the above two signals, "jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" Output. Therefore, on the external device side, the "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal (Information Terminal 3)" and "Jackpot Medium Signal (Information Terminal 4)" transition from the state of no reception (no input) to the state of reception (with input). When this happens, it is determined that the player has won a jackpot during the normal state, that is, the "first hit."
(Wave 1-2) Also, from the state where the "Jackpot signal (Information terminal 4)" is not received and the "Jackpot/Fluctuation shortening signal (Information terminal 3)" is received, the "Jackpot/Fluctuation shortening signal (Information terminal 3)" is received. When the ``terminal 3)'' and ``jackpot signal (information terminal 4)'' transition to the received state, it is a jackpot won during the electric support state, that is, the current jackpot is a jackpot during the ``continuous winning''. I judge that. In addition, the notation of "time saving exit" shown in the figure means that the number of time saving times due to the jackpot time saving state has been exhausted and the state has shifted to the normal state.

<Conventional case: Case in which a jackpot was achieved during the ceiling time reduction state>
(Wave 2) However, with the conventional method of judgment, a problem may occur if a jackpot is hit during the ceiling time shortening state. During the ceiling time-saving state, it is a special figure time-saving state (during electric support state), so as shown in the diagram, the above-mentioned "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal (Information Terminal 3)" is output, and "Jackpot Medium Signal (Information Terminal 4)" is output. is not output (the same signal output state as during the jackpot time saving state). In this state, if a jackpot is won, as in the above (wave 1-2), the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" is not received, and the "jackpot / fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is received. From this state, the "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal (Information Terminal 3)" and "Jackpot Medium Signal (Information Terminal 4)" will transition to the state in which it is received, even though this jackpot is the "first hit". Instead, he concludes that he has hit the jackpot during a series of successive games. In this case, for example, there is a risk that the data counter DT may not function properly (for example, it may not be able to correctly notify that the player is playing consecutive games or the number of consecutive games).

<Case of this embodiment: Case in which the jackpot was achieved during the ceiling time reduction state>
(Wave 3) Therefore, in this embodiment, a new information terminal X is provided (for example, unused bit 3 of external terminal port 2 is assigned to information terminal Configure so that an identifiable signal (ceiling signal) can be output. This makes it possible to specify whether or not the player is in the ceiling time reduction state, and to determine whether or not there is a jackpot during the ceiling time reduction state.

Specifically, from "a state in which at least the 'ceiling signal (information terminal When the state changes to "reception state", it can be determined that the "big hit signal (information terminal 4)" is due to "first hit (jackpot in ceiling time saving state)". This makes it possible to solve the above problem (the problem of determining the first hit as a jackpot in a series of games). As for whether or not to output the ceiling signal, it is sufficient to check the ON/OFF state of the above-mentioned "ceiling activation flag", and if the flag is in the ON state, output the ceiling signal.

(Italy 21, Italy 22) Please note that the external device receives information regarding the ceiling time reduction state (for example, whether the current gaming state is in the ceiling time reduction state, the base during the ceiling time reduction state, the number of game executions during the ceiling time reduction state) , the number of times ceiling time reduction is executed (the number of times the ceiling function is activated), etc.), the outer end signal will not be output even if the ceiling time reduction state occurs (even if the ceiling activation flag is ON). It may be configured as follows. Further, as described above (wave 2), it may be common to the signal related to the time saving state after the jackpot (jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)).
(Italy 57) Also, in FIG. 94(C), the ceiling signal is output during the ceiling time saving state, but if the external device has limited necessary information regarding the ceiling time saving state (for example, When the ceiling function activation is only notified to the data counter DT, or when there is no need to distinguish between the jackpot time reduction state and the ceiling time reduction state, etc., the ceiling signal is output for a predetermined period of time only when the ceiling time reduction state occurs. It's okay. For example, when the ceiling activation flag is turned on, it is output for 100ms.

(Regarding the judgment of first hit and consecutive hits during support time reduction state: Figure 95)
In the case where the above-mentioned "support time reduction" is provided, even if the outer end signal is output in the same way as before, is the jackpot during the support time reduction state the "first hit" as in the ceiling time reduction state described above? There is a problem in that the external device (data counter DT, hall computer HC) cannot determine whether or not this is the case. The "first hit" used in FIG. 95 refers to a jackpot win during the normal state or a jackpot win during the support time reduction state.

The above problem will be explained using FIG. 95. 95(A) to (C) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 94(A) to (C) above, in which the notation of ceiling time reduction (ceiling time reduction state) is replaced with support time reduction (support time reduction state). Therefore, in FIGS. 95(A) to 95(C), content that is substantially the same as that in FIG. 94 will be omitted to avoid redundant description. Here, a description of FIG. 95(A) will be omitted, and FIGS. 95(B) and 95(C) will be described focusing on the differences from FIGS. 94(B) and (C).

<Conventional case: A case where a jackpot was achieved during a short support time period>
(Similar 1) If a jackpot is hit during the support time reduction state, a problem may arise with the conventional judgment method (FIG. 95(B)). To be more specific, during the support time saving state, the special figure time saving state (electric support state) is in progress, and as shown in Figure (B), the above-mentioned "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is output, and the "jackpot Medium signal (information terminal 4) is not output. In this state, if a jackpot is won, the "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal" is not received and the above-mentioned "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal (Information Terminal 3)" is received, then the "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal" is received. (Information terminal 3)" and "Jackpot signal (Information terminal 4)" transition to the received state, so similar to the ceiling time reduction state explained in FIG. 94, the current jackpot is the "first hit". Despite this, he concludes that he has hit the jackpot during a series of successive games.

<Case of this embodiment: Case where the jackpot was achieved during the support time reduction state>
(Similar 2) Therefore, in this embodiment, a new information terminal Y is provided (for example, unused bit 3 of external terminal port 2 is replaced with information terminal Y (information terminal 11 ), and is configured to be able to output a signal (signal during support time reduction) that can specify that the support time reduction state is in progress. This makes it possible to determine whether or not it is a jackpot during the support time reduction state.

Specifically, from "a state in which at least the 'Support Time Reduction Medium Signal (Information Terminal Y)' has been received," the "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal (Information Terminal 3)" and the "Jackpot Medium Signal (Information Terminal 4)" When the state transitions to the receiving state, it can be determined that the "big hit signal (information terminal 4)" is due to the "first hit (jackpot winning during the support time saving state)". This makes it possible to solve the above problem (the problem of determining the first hit as a jackpot in a series of games). As for whether or not to output the support time reduction signal, it is sufficient to check the ON/OFF state of the "support time reduction flag" and, if the flag is in the ON state, output the support time reduction signal.

(Italy 1, Italy 2) Please note that the external device side receives information regarding the support time reduction state (for example, whether the current gaming state is in the support time reduction state, the base during the support time reduction state, the number of game executions during the support time reduction state) , the number of executions of support time reduction (number of times support time reduction has been won), etc.), the outer end signal is not output even if the support time reduction state occurs (even if the support time reduction flag is ON). It may be configured as follows. Further, as in the above (similarity 1), it may be used in common with the signal related to the time saving state after the jackpot (jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)).
(Italy 16) In addition, in FIG. 95(C), the support time reduction signal is output during the support time reduction state, but if the external device has limited necessary information regarding the support time reduction state ( For example, when the support time reduction win is only notified to the data counter DT, or when there is no need to distinguish between the jackpot time reduction state and the support time reduction state), when the support time reduction state occurs, or when the support time reduction winning game When the period ends (when the variable time has elapsed), a support time reduction signal may be output for a predetermined period of time. For example, when the flag during support time reduction is turned ON, or when the variable time of the support time reduction winning game has elapsed (see S454 in FIG. 16), the output is output for 100 ms.

(Regarding the judgment of first hit and consecutive hits when ceiling time shortening occurs during support time shortening state: Figure 96)
Next, using FIG. 96, when at least "Jackpot" and "Support Time Reduction" are provided as the winning type, and "Ceiling Time Reduction" is provided as the ceiling benefit, what will happen if the ceiling time reduction occurs during the support time reduction state. I will explain how to judge the first hit and consecutive wins. The "first hit" used in FIG. 96 refers to a jackpot win during the normal state, a jackpot win during the support time reduction state, or a jackpot win during the ceiling time reduction state.

When a support time reduction and a ceiling time reduction are provided, at least three internal game states belonging to the time reduction state may occur: a support time reduction state, a ceiling time reduction state, and a jackpot time reduction state. In order to distinguish between these three states, it is preferable to configure the system to be able to output at least the support time reduction signal (first time reduction corresponding signal) and the ceiling signal (second time reduction corresponding signal). In the illustrated example, the support time saving medium signal (information terminal Y; first time saving corresponding signal) and the ceiling medium signal (information terminal An example is shown in which an outer end signal (information terminal 3: third time saving signal) capable of specifying a jackpot time saving state can be output.

Regarding the information terminals according to this example, for example, unused bits 3 and 4 of external terminal port 2 may be assigned to information terminal X (information terminal 11) and information terminal Y (information terminal 12), respectively. In this case, if the technical matters explained in FIGS. 94 and 95 are applied, the current gaming state can be changed to It becomes possible to determine whether the game is in the current state, in the ceiling time-saving state, or in the jackpot time-saving state. For example, when a ceiling time reduction state occurs during a support time reduction state, and a jackpot during the ceiling time reduction state is determined to be a "first hit," refer to FIG. 96(A). (Information terminal・If the "Fluctuating Shortening Signal (Information Terminal 3)" and "Jackpot Signal (Information Terminal 4)" transition to the received state, this will be determined as a win during the ceiling time shortening state and will be treated as a "first win". can be processed. Although not shown in the figure, there is a way to determine that a support time reduction occurs during a ceiling time reduction state and a jackpot during that support time reduction state is a "first hit". Y)" is received (a state in which "Support time reduction medium signal (information terminal (Information terminal 3)" and "Jackpot signal (Information terminal 4)" transition to the received state, this can be determined as a win during the support time saving state and treated as a "first win." can.

(Italy 67, Italy 68) Note that if the external device side does not particularly need information regarding the ceiling time-saving state, it may be configured so that the "ceiling signal" is not output. If not, the configuration may be such that the "support time reduction signal" is not output. In other words, depending on the performance of the external device (what kind of information the external device needs), it is possible to configure the external device to output at least one of the "ceiling signal" and "support time reduction signal". can. Moreover, at least one of the "ceiling signal" and the "support time reduction signal" may be a common outer end signal with the "jackpot/fluctuation reduction signal."

(Modified example of outer end signal output form: Fig. 96(B))
Next, a modification of FIG. 96(A) will be described using FIG. 96(B).

The characteristic point of the modified example shown in FIG. 96(B) is that, as can be seen from FIG. It is not output during the jackpot and during the jackpot time shortening state (see information terminal 3 (jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal α) in Figure (B)).

In the case of this modification, regarding signals related to the time saving state, only the dedicated "support time saving signal (information terminal Y)" is output during the support time saving state, and the dedicated "ceiling signal (information terminal Y)" is output during the ceiling time saving state. Terminal Therefore, when the external device determines the "first hit", the "jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" change from the state of no reception to the state of reception. If the transition occurs, it can be determined that the "big hit signal (information terminal 4)" is due to the "first hit". In addition, from the state where the "Jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" is not received and the "Jackpot/Fluctuation shortening signal (Information terminal 3)" is received, the "Jackpot/Fluctuation shortening signal (Information terminal 3)" and " When the jackpot signal (information terminal 4) transitions to the received state, the current jackpot can be easily processed as a jackpot in a "successive win".

In addition, the above modification (FIG. 96(B)) includes the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" shown in FIG. 94(C) and the "jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" shown in FIG. 95(C). 3) can be applied to any of the above. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 94(C), the "jackpot/fluctuation reduction signal (information terminal 3)" is not output during the ceiling time reduction state, but is output during the jackpot and jackpot time reduction state. It is. In addition, in the case of FIG. 95(C), the "jackpot/fluctuation reduction signal (information terminal 3)" is not output during the support time reduction state, but is output during the jackpot and jackpot time reduction state. be.

(Stone 1) When this modification (Fig. 96 (B)) is applied to the case of Fig. 94 (C), the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is not output during the ceiling time shortening state, so the figure Using the same method as in 94(A), it is possible to determine whether it is a "first hit" or a jackpot during a "consecutive winnings." Specifically, when the "jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" transition from the state of no reception to the state of reception, the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" changes from the state of no reception to the state of reception. It can be determined that the information terminal 4) is due to the "first hit (jackpot win during ceiling time reduction state)". In addition, from the state where the "Jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" is not received and the "Jackpot/Fluctuation shortening signal (Information terminal 3)" is received, the "Jackpot/Fluctuation shortening signal (Information terminal 3)" and " When the jackpot signal (information terminal 4) transitions to the received state, it can be determined that the jackpot signal (information terminal 4) is due to a jackpot in consecutive games.

(Stone 2) Also, when this modification is applied to the case in Figure 94(C), the "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal (Information Terminal 3)" is not output during the support time shortening state, so the case in Figure 95(A) Using the same method, it is possible to determine whether it is a "first hit" or a "long hit" jackpot. Specifically, when the "jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" transition from the state of no reception to the state of reception, the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" changes from the state of no reception to the state of reception. It can be determined that the information terminal 4) is due to the first hit (jackpot win during the support time saving state). In addition, from the state where the "Jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" is not received and the above-mentioned "Jackpot / fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is received, the "jackpot / fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and " When the jackpot signal (information terminal 4) transitions to the received state, it can be determined that the jackpot signal (information terminal 4) is due to a jackpot in a series of games.

The configuration of FIG. 96(B) described above makes it possible to determine which time-saving state is the time-saving state without increasing the control burden on the external device side, even when there are multiple time-saving states. As a result, even if there are multiple time-saving states, it is possible to distinguish between the first hit and a jackpot during a consecutive game, count the number of jackpots during a consecutive game including the first hit, and calculate the base in each time-saving status. Processing etc. are not complicated, and it can contribute to reducing the control burden on the external device side.

[Example of production when entering the ceiling time reduction state from a certain gaming state: Figures 85 to 90]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 to 90, an explanation will be given of an example of a performance when a ceiling function is activated by reaching the ceiling from a certain gaming state and a ceiling privilege state is entered. Here, a case will be described in which a ceiling activation type at the start of the game (FIGS. 85 to 87) and a ceiling activation type at the end of the game (FIGS. 88 to 90) are adopted as types having a ceiling function. Here, a typical example will be explained in which the count form is the above-mentioned "low-certain game count form", the number of ceiling games is 1000, and the ceiling bonus is a ceiling time reduction (the number of time reduction is 1000) (see Fig. 86 described later). ~Figure 90 is the same)

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the ceiling time reduction state (ceiling activation type at the start of the game)>
(Italy 119-120) FIG. 85 shows an example of the effect in a case where the ceiling is activated at the start of the game and the ceiling is reached consecutively.

Referring to FIG. 85, here, the first time shows a case where the ceiling is reached from a normal state, and the second time shows a case where the ceiling is reached from a ceiling time saving state. If the ceiling is reached continuously, it is preferable to use the following effect.

(When reaching the ceiling for the first time)
In the case of the ceiling activation type at the start of the game, as already explained, the ceiling function is activated at the start of symbol variation (game start) in the ceiling game (1000th rotation), and a ceiling time shortening state occurs (for example, See FIG. 55 (Tenki A), FIGS. 59 to 63B (Tenki C1), and FIG. 64 (Modified example of Tenki C1). Therefore, when the game starts at the 1000th rotation, a ``effect screen transition effect'' appears. This effect screen transition effect is a effect that appears when the game mode is transitioned, and includes, for example, a blackout effect or a so-called "shutter effect" that changes the background image before and after the shutter display to notify the game mode transition. ” etc. are applicable. Further, with the activation of the ceiling function, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (step S923 in FIG. 53, step S923A in FIG. 60). When the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state, it outputs a ceiling inside signal as the outer end signal (step S099 in FIG. 9). As a result, the fact that the ceiling time is being shortened is sent to an external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT).

Then, when the performance screen transition performance is finished, a performance screen for the ceiling performance mode is displayed, and the reaching of the ceiling is notified (ceiling entry notification shown in the figure). At this time, along with a predetermined fluctuating performance (for example, a performance including the ceiling-rushing performance 781 in Note 1 of FIG. 49B), a large message such as "⇒ Hit the right!" or "Oh! The production image and character image of "Mookaaajii!" are displayed in a large scale (the right-handed hit notification (large) shown), and a small "⇒" is displayed in the right corner of the LCD screen as the second right-handed instruction production. is displayed (right-handed hitting notification (small) shown), and the right-handed hitting notification LED (right-handed hitting display device 39b) lights up. As a result, the player understands that he has entered a state in which he is advantageous to playing right-handed, and starts playing right-handed. Note that the first right-handed hitting instruction performance (right-handed hitting notification (large)) does not need to be displayed extensively forever, so it is ended in the middle of the game, and the second right-handed hitting instruction presentation (right-handed hitting notification (small) ) will be continuously notified. Further, the right-handed hit notification LED (right-handed hit display device 39b) remains lit until the power support state ends.

When the ceiling game ends, the game mode is shifted to "heaven mode", and the performance under the heaven performance mode is displayed. In addition, there is a "remaining number of ceiling games display effect (remaining number of ceiling games shown)" that visually informs the number of remaining ceiling games until the next number of ceiling games, and/or a "remaining time reduction display that visually informs the remaining number of time reductions." "Number of times notification effect (not shown)" may or may not be executed (the same applies to FIGS. 86 to 90, which will be described later). Furthermore, in this example, the series of effects that appear in the ceiling game are effects based on, for example, "ceiling fluctuations (see the "ceiling" column in FIG. 75)" (the same applies to FIGS. 86 to 90, which will be described later).

(When reaching the ceiling for the second time)
As the game progresses, the player reaches the 2000th spin, that is, the second ceiling game, without winning a jackpot, and the ceiling function is activated again to provide a ceiling time reduction. In this second ceiling game, the effects related to the ceiling time shortening, such as the "effect screen transition effect" that appeared in the first ceiling game and the first right-handed instruction effect that displays a large "right-handed hit →" image, are Since it has already been done, it will not appear again. Instead, a "ceiling continuation notification effect (ceiling continuation notification shown in the figure)" may be displayed to notify that the ceiling time saving state continues. Further, the newly updated number of time saving times may be notified by the above-mentioned remaining ceiling number of games display effect (notification of the number of remaining ceiling games shown). Note that neither of the ceiling continuation notification performance and the remaining ceiling count display performance may be performed, or at least one of them may be performed.

In this way, the performance during the second and subsequent ceiling games is different from the performance during the first ceiling game, but according to this configuration, by performing the performance according to the progress of the game, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable. The feature is that it can be prevented from being given. In addition, the number of consecutive games when the ceiling function is activated (reaching the ceiling) is managed by the main control unit 20 side, and the information can be sent to the performance control unit 24 side, so that the number of consecutive games can also be managed on the performance control unit 24 side. (The same applies to the production example shown in FIG. 88, which will be described later).

(Modified example: I121)
In the above, it has been explained that the performance during the second and subsequent ceiling games is different from the performance during the first ceiling game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes effects executed during the first ceiling game (when reaching the ceiling from the normal state) and during the second consecutive ceiling game (when reaching the ceiling from the ceiling time shortening state). ) may perform a common (same) performance with the performance performed in . According to this configuration, the player can easily understand that the ceiling number has been reset again, that is, that the ceiling function has been activated again and the ceiling benefit has been awarded. The same ceiling fluctuation is selected for the first time and the second and subsequent times, and the effects based on this are also the same, leading to a reduction in control burden. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in terms of the jackpot lottery probability, reaching the ceiling from the second time onwards is considered to be a very rare case. In such a case, it is considered that there is no particular problem even if the same effect is performed every time when the ceiling is reached repeatedly. Note that this example (Italy 121) also applies to FIG. 88, which will be described later.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time reduction state (in case of ceiling activation type at the start of the game)>
(Italy 122) The production example shown in FIG. 86 shows a case where the player reaches the ceiling during the jackpot time saving state and a ceiling time saving state of the ceiling activation type at the start of the game is activated as a ceiling benefit. Note that content that is substantially the same as that explained in FIG. 85 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Referring to FIG. 86, when the 1000th rotation ceiling game is started, the above-mentioned "effect screen transition effect (shutter effect)" appears with the start of the game as an opportunity. Further, as the ceiling function is activated, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state. When the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state, it outputs a ceiling inside signal as the outer end signal (step S099 in FIG. 9). This point is similar to the case in FIG. 85.

However, in the case of this example, before the ceiling time reduction occurs, the "easy winning flag" that specifies that the electric support state is in effect is in the ON state, and based on this flag, the outer end signal is used to indicate the jackpot time reduction. A "jackpot time saving signal" indicating the state is output (ON state = output, OFF state = output stop). The easy-to-win flag may be a general electricity accessory opening extension state flag or a special symbol time saving state flag that specifies whether there is an electricity support state, or it may be a separately provided flag to specify whether or not the electricity support state is present. There may be. As a result, the fact that the jackpot time saving state is in progress is sent to an external device (hole computer HC or data counter DT). In addition, at the timing when the ceiling function is activated (for example, when the ceiling activation flag is ON), the jackpot time saving signal and the easy winning flag are turned OFF, but the easy winning flag remains ON and the jackpot is not activated. It may be configured such that only the time saving signal is not output. Further, even if the winning easy flag remains in the ON state, the jackpot time saving signal may not be outputted on condition that the ceiling activation flag remains in the ON state.

If you reach the ceiling during the jackpot time saving state and the ceiling time saving state occurs, you are already in the power support state of "right-handed hitting" before reaching the ceiling, so "right-handed hitting notification (small) + right-handed hitting LED" will be activated. This continues, and there is no need to announce again the situation that "right-handed players have an advantage" (see "Right-handed players notification (small) + right-handed players LED" shown in the figure). Therefore, in this example, the above-mentioned "first right-handed hitting instruction effect (right-handed hitting notification (large))" is not executed.

(Italy 123) When the jackpot time saving state and the ceiling time saving state are not a common production mode but are composed of separate production modes (for example, time saving production mode and ceiling production mode), it is not possible to indicate that the ceiling has been reached. In order to make it easier for players to recognize, effects such as effect screen transition effects and ceiling entry effects are performed. In addition, when reaching the ceiling, a dedicated fluctuation pattern table ("FH90" shown in Figure 75: see the "Ceiling" column in the same figure) is used, and a time-saving fluctuation pattern table (Fig. 40, Figure 41) is not used. If the jackpot time saving state and ceiling time saving state are in a common production mode, the production mode may be continued. Although the illustration shows an example in which the production mode during the jackpot time-saving state is the "time-saving production mode," the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. may be provided.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the support time shortening state (when the ceiling function is activated at the start of the game)>
(Italy 124) The production example shown in FIG. 87 shows a case where the player reaches the ceiling during the support time saving state, and a ceiling time saving state of the ceiling activation type at the start of the game is activated as a ceiling benefit. Note that content that is substantially the same as that explained in FIGS. 85 and 86 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Referring to FIG. 87, as can be seen from the content shown, the performance during the 1000th rotation ceiling game is such that the jackpot time saving state shown in FIG. 86, the content is substantially the same as that described with reference to FIG. 86. Similarly, regarding the 999th rotation immediately before the ceiling, the content is substantially the same as that described with reference to FIG. 86, except that the jackpot time saving state shown in FIG. 86 is replaced with the support time saving state. Therefore, in order to avoid redundant description, the illustrated outer end signals will be mainly described here.

In this example, before the ceiling time reduction state occurs, the support time reduction medium flag is in the ON state, and based on this flag, the "support time reduction medium signal" indicating the support time reduction state is output as the outer end signal. has been done. As a result, a message indicating that the support time is being shortened is sent to an external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT). In addition, at the activation timing of the ceiling function, the support time reduction medium signal and the support time reduction medium flag are turned off, but the support time reduction medium flag is maintained in the ON state, and the configuration is such that only the support time reduction medium signal is not output. You may. Further, even if the support time reduction flag remains in the ON state, the support time reduction signal may not be outputted on condition that the ceiling activation flag remains in the ON state.

(Italy 124) In addition, if the support time saving state and ceiling time saving state are not a common production mode but are composed of separate production modes (for example, time saving production mode and ceiling production mode), when the ceiling is reached In order to make it easier for players to recognize this, effects such as effect screen transition effects and ceiling entry effects are performed. In addition, when the ceiling is reached, a dedicated fluctuation pattern table ("FH90" shown in Figure 75: see the "Ceiling" column in the figure) is used, and a time-saving fluctuation pattern table (Fig. 40, Figure 41) is not used. If the support time saving state and the ceiling time saving state are in a common production mode, the production mode may be continued. Although the illustration shows an example in which the performance mode during the support time-saving state is the "time-saving performance mode," the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. may be provided. This (I124) is also the same in FIG. 90, which will be described later.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the ceiling time shortening state (in case of ceiling activation type at the end of the game)>
FIG. 88 shows an example of the effect in the case where the ceiling is triggered at the end of the game, and the ceiling is reached continuously, similar to FIG. 86 described above. Note that content that is substantially the same as that explained in FIGS. 85 to 87 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

(When reaching the ceiling for the first time)
In the case of the ceiling activation type at the end of the game, as already explained, the ceiling function is activated at the end of the confirmed display time (game end) of the ceiling game (1000th rotation), and a ceiling time shortening state occurs (for example, Fig. 56 ~See Figure 58 (Tenki B), Figures 65 to 69 (Tenki D1), and Figure 70 (Modified example of Tenki D1). Therefore, regardless of whether the next game is started or not, after the ceiling game ends (after a predetermined symbol confirmation display time has elapsed), the ceiling time reduction state is entered (see after the symbol stop period shown in the figure has elapsed). Therefore, in this example, a unique effect system is executed that is not available in the ceiling activation type at the start of the game. Note that this production example shows an example in which the above-mentioned "special ceiling mode form" is adopted.

In the case of the ceiling activation type at the end of the game, focus on the point that the ceiling time shortens state occurs at the end of the ceiling game, and if the symbol fluctuation time of the ceiling game (1000th rotation) has elapsed (for example, the symbol fluctuation time elapsed) time to a predetermined timing before the final display time elapses), that the ceiling function will be activated (that the ceiling function will be activated in the future (ceiling activation advance notification)), or that the ceiling function is activated (during the ceiling time shortening state) A "ceiling activation effect (which may be a ceiling rush notification effect 781)" is executed that can notify the user of the current situation.

As shown in the figure, the ceiling activation effect can be executed until the next game starts. As a result, even if the number of balls on hold is zero at the end of the ceiling game and the player is waiting for a customer, the ceiling activation effect is still being executed, so the player is informed that the ceiling time reduction state will be entered at the end of the current game. can be notified to. The ceiling activation effect is suitable for the ceiling activation type at the end of the game because even if the right-handed hitting instruction effect has not appeared, it can notify that the situation is substantially advantageous for right-handed hitting. . In this example, as shown in the figure, even if the ceiling function is activated, if the number of pending balls is zero, the production screen under normal mode will remain in the waiting state until the next game starts. ing. In such a case, if a ceiling activation effect is displayed, the player can easily understand that the ceiling time is being shortened even if the player is waiting for a customer.

Note that the end of the ceiling game can also be used as a trigger to start a right-hitting instruction performance (which may be executed simultaneously (overlappingly) with the above-mentioned ceiling activation performance). In this example, as shown in the figure, after the symbol stop period of the ceiling game has elapsed, that is, after the confirmed display time has elapsed, the above-mentioned "first right-hitting instruction performance (right-handed hitting notification (large))" appears, and the right-handed hitting An example of notifying a player of an advantageous situation is shown. It is preferable that the first right-handed instruction performance can be displayed even during customer waiting performance (demonstration display). Moreover, when performing the first right-handed instruction performance, the above-mentioned ceiling activation performance does not need to be performed.

Further, as the ceiling game ends, the ceiling function is activated and the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (step S923 in FIG. 58, step S923A in FIG. 69). When the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state, it outputs a ceiling inside signal as the outer end signal (step S099 in FIG. 9). As a result, a message indicating that the ceiling time is being shortened is sent to an external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT).

If an action pending ball occurs, the game for the 1001st rotation is started. As can be seen from the figure, the effects during the 1001st rotation of the game are substantially the same as the effects of the 1000th rotation shown in FIG. 86 (effect screen transition effect, ceiling crash notification, etc.). Therefore, the description will be omitted here to avoid redundant description.

When the ceiling game ends, the game mode is transferred from the ceiling mode to the "heaven mode", and the performance under the heaven performance mode is displayed (same as the example of performance in FIG. 86).

(When reaching the ceiling for the second time)
As the game progresses and the player reaches the 2000th rotation, that is, the second ceiling game without winning a jackpot, the ceiling function is activated again and a ceiling time reduction is provided. In this second ceiling game, the same effect as explained in FIG. Instructions and performance will not appear again. Instead, a "ceiling continuation notification effect (ceiling continuation notification shown in the figure)" may be displayed to notify that the ceiling is continuing.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time reduction state (in case of ceiling activation type at the end of the game)>
The production example shown in FIG. 89 shows a case where the player reaches the ceiling during the jackpot time saving state and the ceiling time saving type that activates at the end of the game is activated as a ceiling benefit. This example shows a case where there is a suspended ball in the 1000th rotation ceiling game. Note that content that is substantially the same as that explained in FIGS. 86 and 88 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Referring to FIG. 89, at the end of the symbol stop display period of the 1000th rotation of the ceiling game (at the end of the variable time or when the symbol fixed display time elapses), the ceiling function is activated and a ceiling time shortening state occurs. In the case of this example, a case is explained in which there is an operation-suspended ball at the end of the 1000th rotation, so the ceiling time reduction state is already in place when the next game starts. What should not be confused here is that in the case of the ceiling activation type at the end of the game, just because there is a pending ball during the ceiling game, the ceiling time shortening state will occur in the next game (the ceiling function will be activated). isn't it. The ceiling time shortening state only occurs at the end of the ceiling game. In terms of processing, after the fixed display time in the ceiling game has elapsed, for example, during the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIGS. 68A to 68B, the ceiling activation management process at the end of the game in FIG. 69 is executed, and the ceiling function is activated. Therefore, if there is an operation pending ball at the end of the ceiling game, to be more precise, after the ceiling time shortening state occurs at the end of the ceiling game, in the next 4ms later interrupt processing, the oldest operation pending ball in chronological order The special symbol management process (S092 in FIG. 9) is executed, and symbol variation display is started, that is, the next game is started. Therefore, the ceiling time shortening state will not occur at the start of the next game; for example, if there are no pending balls at the end of the current game and no pending balls occur for a while, the ceiling time shortening state will continue to occur. , if the state enters the customer waiting state (pre-customer waiting performance), or if the time-saving rush notification performance can be executed, the ceiling time-saving state remains in place and the special electric power non-operating support time-saving state shown in FIG. 47 or FIG. It can be configured to follow the same transition of performance as described in the time-saving rush notification performance of No. 48.

Note that the presentation content during the 1001st rotation game is substantially the same as the presentation example shown in FIG. 86. Further, the outer end signal is also substantially the same as in FIG. 86. Therefore, these descriptions will be omitted here to avoid redundant description.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the support time reduction state (in case of ceiling activation type at the end of the game)>
The production example shown in FIG. 90 shows a case where the player reaches the ceiling during the support time reduction state and a ceiling time reduction type that activates at the end of the game is activated as a ceiling benefit. Note that content that is substantially the same as that described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Referring to FIG. 90, as can be seen from the diagram, regarding the 1001st rotation performance, even if the jackpot time saving state shown in FIG. The contents are essentially the same as those in FIG. Similarly, regarding the 1000th revolution just before the ceiling, the contents are substantially the same as shown in FIG. 89, except that the jackpot time saving state shown in FIG. 89 is replaced with the support time saving state. Therefore, in order to avoid redundant description, the illustrated outer end signals will be mainly described here.

In this example, before the ceiling time reduction state occurs, the support time reduction medium flag is in the ON state, and based on this flag, the "support time reduction medium signal" indicating the support time reduction state is output as the outer end signal. has been done. As a result, a message indicating that the support time is being shortened is sent to an external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT). What should not be confused here is that in the case of the ceiling activation type at the start of the game in Figure 87, the activation timing of the ceiling function is at the 1000th rotation of the game "at the start", and the ON timing of the ceiling activation flag is also 1000 rotations. In contrast, in the case of the ceiling activation type at the end of the game in this example, the activation timing of the ceiling function is at the end of the 1000th game, and the ON timing of the ceiling activation flag. is also the point at the end of the game at the 1000th rotation. Note that, like the ceiling activation type at the start of the game in FIG. 87, in this example, the support time reduction medium signal and the support time reduction medium flag are turned OFF at the activation timing of the ceiling function, but the support time reduction medium flag is in the ON state. may be maintained, and only the support time reduction signal may be configured not to be output. Further, even if the support time reduction flag remains in the ON state, the support time reduction signal may not be outputted on condition that the ceiling activation flag remains in the ON state.

Also, in this example, like the ceiling activation type at the start of the game in FIG. In order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the player has reached the ceiling, a performance screen transition performance, a ceiling rush performance, etc. are performed. In addition, when the ceiling is reached, a dedicated fluctuation pattern table ("FH90" shown in Figure 75: see the "Ceiling" column in the figure) is used, and a time-saving fluctuation pattern table (Fig. 40, Figure 41) is not used. If the support time saving state and the ceiling time saving state are in a common production mode, the production mode may be continued. Although the illustration shows an example in which the performance mode during the support time-saving state is the "time-saving performance mode," the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. may be provided.

(Modification 1: Figure 91)
The production example shown in FIG. 91 shows a case where the player reaches the ceiling during the normal state and a ceiling time reduction of the ceiling activation type at the end of the game is activated as a ceiling benefit. Note that content that is substantially the same as that described in FIGS. 88 to 90 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

The production example in FIG. 91 shows a case where the ceiling is reached during the normal state, similar to the first time the ceiling is reached in FIG. be. However, the major feature of this example is that when the ceiling time reduction is activated during the normal state (normal mode), the game mode related to the ceiling time reduction state is transferred directly to the ceiling time reduction state without going through the ceiling mode. In this example, the above-mentioned ceiling activation performance is executed without using a dedicated variation pattern or a dedicated variation pattern distribution table in the ceiling game. In detail, the normal mode is up to the 1000th rotation, and the variation pattern distribution table (for example, FIG. 72, FIG. 74) related to the normal mode is referred to. However, since the 1001st rotation is already in the ceiling time saving state, the fluctuation pattern distribution table (for example, FIGS. 73 and 75) related to the heaven mode is referred to here.

As described above, this example has the following features (Specialty 1) to (Specialty 4) because it does not go through the ceiling mode.

(Special 1) The production time width of the ceiling activation production is set to be less than or equal to the shortest variation time among all variation patterns defined in the variation pattern distribution table related to heaven mode. In the case of this example, referring to FIGS. 73 and 75, the normal fluctuation is 3 seconds or less.
The reason for this determination is as follows. First, the variation pattern selected at the 1001st rotation differs depending on the number of pending pitches at that time. Second, if there is a special figure 2 operation pending ball at the start of the variation of the 1001st rotation, the symbol variation display game on the special figure 2 side will be started with priority, and the symbol variation display game on the special figure 1 side will not necessarily be started. It doesn't necessarily mean it will start. In view of these circumstances, the above-mentioned ceiling activation effect will be completed at least by the end of the current game, and the fluctuations that will be referenced will be made in order to clearly notify the player that the ceiling time reduction has been activated. Even if the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation patterns set in the pattern distribution table (Heaven mode in this case), the ceiling activation effect will now end within that variation time. This is to do so. Furthermore, at the start of the 1001st rotation, there is a high possibility that the symbol variation display game on the special figure 1 side will start, so the one with the shortest variation time among all the variation patterns related to special figure 1 is set as the standard. Alternatively, it may be determined based on the one with the shortest variation time among all the variation patterns related to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Note that the reference fluctuation pattern is preferably a loss fluctuation pattern. This is because if by chance the 1001st spin results in a jackpot win, there is no need to execute the ceiling activation effect, and it is sufficient to execute the fluctuating effect related to the jackpot win as usual.
(Special 2) Triggered by the end of the ceiling game (triggered by the elapse of the fixed display time), the main control unit 20 sends a special performance control command (hereinafter referred to as (also referred to as a "ceiling activation performance execution trigger command") is transmitted. As already explained, since the fluctuation pattern of the 1001st rotation is indeterminate, a ceiling activation effect that depends on the contents of the fluctuation pattern is not displayed, and apart from this, the ceiling activation effect execution trigger is When the command is transmitted and the effect control section 24 receives the ceiling activation effect execution trigger command, the ceiling activation effect is executed. As a result, the same ceiling activation performance can be displayed at the same timing (ceiling activation timing (ceiling time saving state generation timing)) regardless of the selected fluctuation pattern (variation pattern designation command type). In addition, in the case of a winning variation pattern, there is no need to make a ceiling activation effect appear.
(Special 3) During the ceiling activation performance, the decorative symbols are displayed in a retracted manner (for example, see the display positions of 801e and 801f in FIG. 77 (F2) (F3)), and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the retracted display area. As a result, the ceiling activation effect is displayed conspicuously (highlighted) (decorative symbol retreat display (mini symbol fluctuation) as shown).In addition, during the ceiling activation effect, the decorative symbols are always displayed in a retreat manner. After the completion of the ceiling activation effect, the retreat display of the decorative symbols is canceled and the fluctuation display is performed normally (see, for example, FIG. 7B, FIG. 77(A), (B), etc.), and the predetermined fluctuation is Start the medium effect (normal decorative pattern variation shown). At this time, the predetermined background effect and decorative pattern effect related to the ceiling time saving state (whether for ceiling effect mode or heaven mode) Good) is displayed (ceiling mode production screen shown).
(Special 4) Also, during the ceiling activation performance, the remaining ceiling number display performance is not executed, but is executed after the ceiling activation performance ends (notification of the number of remaining ceiling games shown in the figure). However, the remaining ceiling count display effect does not have to be executed at least in the current game.

In addition, during the ceiling time saving state, "right-handed hit notification (small) + right-handed hit LED" is executed as shown in the figure. Further, in the above, although the performance time width of the ceiling activation performance is set within the shortest variable time, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a performance mode that is executed over a plurality of games.

Further, in this example, when the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state, it outputs a "ceiling activation signal" as the outer end signal. Further, the ceiling activation flag is set to ON state, and the special game flag is set to ON state. The above-mentioned "ceiling activation signal" is a signal that is output for a short period of time (100 ms), and is a signal indicating that the ceiling function has been activated. This ceiling activation signal allows an external device to know that the ceiling has been activated. Further, the "special game flag" is a flag that monitors the gaming period from the start of the ceiling time saving state until the jackpot is won (or may be until the jackpot game is started). When the CPU 201 confirms that the jackpot has been won, the CPU 201 sets the special game flag to the OFF state. Incidentally, "winning the jackpot" can be ascertained by, for example, monitoring the ON/OFF state of the conditional device activation flag. Note that the ceiling activation signal can be output when either the ceiling activation flag or the special game flag is in the ON state.

(Modification 2: Figure 92)
The production example in FIG. 92, like FIG. 91, shows a case in which the ball reaches the ceiling during the normal state, but shows a case in which there is no action pending ball in the ceiling game. The feature point of the production example of FIG. 92 is the same as that of FIG. 91 described above, but here, there is no operation holding ball.

In the case of the ceiling activation type at the end of the game, focus on the point that the ceiling time shortening state occurs when the ceiling game ends, and as shown in the figure, the fixed display time of the ceiling game (1000th rotation) has elapsed and the player is waiting for customers. If this happens, a ceiling activation effect will be executed.

The ceiling activation effect is executed when the effect control unit 24 receives the above-mentioned "ceiling activation effect execution trigger command" as in the case of FIG. 91. Further, the performance time width of the ceiling activation performance is the same as that explained with reference to FIG. 91. In other words, regardless of whether or not there is an activation pending ball at the end of the ceiling game, the ceiling activation performance with the same performance time is executed.

Also, during the ceiling activation effect, the decorative patterns are displayed in a retreat manner, similar to the case shown in FIG. 91. Here, we are dealing with a case where there is no activation hold ball, so the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to ceiling activation (for example, "931" shown in FIG. 77 (F3)) will be stopped and displayed in the evacuation display area. become. This combination of decorative symbols may be the one determined and displayed at the end of the ceiling game, or may be a different combination, but in any case, it is a decorative stop diagram corresponding to the activation of the ceiling. In addition, the retreat display of the decorative pattern continues at least until the ceiling activation effect ends. After the ceiling activation effect ends, the retreat display of the decorative symbols may be canceled and the combination of decorative symbols compatible with the ceiling activation may be stopped and displayed in the normal display area, or the combination of decorative symbols that correspond to the ceiling activation may remain displayed. .

After the ceiling activation effect ends, the display is switched to a predetermined background effect (ceiling mode effect screen shown) related to the ceiling time saving state. After that, if a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed without any action pending ball occurring, a menu display possible notification effect 811 (for example, see FIG. 47 (δ)) is displayed, and game environment settings such as volume adjustment are displayed. (The menu display possibility notification effect 811 is executed at the same or almost the same timing as the switching display timing of the background effect without waiting for a predetermined time (5 seconds). ). It should be noted that the display screen after the completion of the ceiling activation effect, including the display of the right hit notification (small), will be in a display state as shown in FIG. 47 (δ), for example. Note that the performance display after the completion of the ceiling activation performance may be, for example, the normal performance before waiting for customers (for time saving mode) 890, similar to FIG. 47(δ). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the standby state, a customer waiting effect (for example, see FIG. 47 (ε)) is executed and a demo movie is displayed. According to this example, even if the number of pending activation balls becomes zero at the end of the ceiling game and the waiting period begins, the ceiling activation effect will be executed and the player will be notified that the ceiling time is being shortened. can. In addition, during the ceiling activation effect, the decorative pattern is displayed in a retracted manner, and the menu display possible notification effect 811 is not displayed, so the visibility of the ceiling activation effect is not obstructed, and it is clearly notified that the ceiling activation is being performed. is now possible.

Further, as the ceiling game ends, the ceiling function is activated, the ceiling activation flag is set to ON state (step S923 in FIG. 58, step S923A in FIG. 69), and the special game flag is set to ON state. When the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag or the special game flag is in the ON state, it outputs the ceiling activation signal as the outer end signal.

When an action-holding ball occurs, the game of the 1001st rotation is started, but unlike the case of FIG. 91, the ceiling activation effect is not executed during the game of the 1001st rotation. This is because the ceiling activation performance is executed based on the ceiling activation performance execution trigger command, and the ceiling activation performance execution trigger command is not transmitted until the ceiling activation trigger arrives again. Therefore, in this case, the ceiling activation effect is not executed, and the effect during the 1001st game is based on the contents of the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command as usual.

(Modification 3: Figure 93)
The example of effect shown in FIG. 93 is an example of effect in the case where the ceiling is activated at the end of the game and the ceiling is reached continuously. However, in this example, the number of time reductions due to ceiling time reduction is 997, and the ceiling number of games is 1000 games. In other words, even if the ceiling time reduction state is exited, the ceiling number of games will not be reached. In other words, there is no such thing as a "ceiling consecutive game activation" in which the ceiling time reduction state is reached again during the ceiling time reduction state. It becomes. Note that content that is substantially the same as that explained in FIGS. 91 and 92 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid redundant description. The major feature of this example is the output form of the outer end signal. This will be explained below using FIG. 93.

In this example, since the number of time reductions is 997, the ceiling time reduction state is exited from the 1998th rotation to the 2000th rotation, and as shown in the figure, the ceiling activation flag is in the OFF state. However, unlike FIGS. 91 and 92, in this example, the ceiling activation signal remains in the ON state. The ceiling activation signal according to this example continues to be output as long as the special game flag is maintained in the ON state. The reason why the ceiling activation signal continues to be output even after exiting the ceiling time saving state and falling to the normal state is as follows.

If the ceiling is reached again in a relatively short gaming period after exiting the ceiling time shortening state, it is better to turn off the ceiling activation signal the next time a jackpot is won instead of turning it off all at once, which reduces the control burden. This is to prevent an increase. In particular, in this example, after exiting the ceiling time shortening state at the 1997th rotation, the ceiling game (2000th rotation) is reached again at the 3rd rotation when the number of balls held is less than the maximum. During the ceiling time shortening state, it is easy to win a prize, and unless an irregular event such as the player intentionally not winning a prize occurs, there will be an operation pending ball on the special drawing 2 side when the ceiling time shortening state is exited. , there are approximately 3 to 4 balls (maximum number of pending balls), and after exiting the ceiling time reduction state, if you wait for the existing balls to be held, the ceiling will be reached again. Therefore, if the "number of time savings due to ceiling time saving + maximum number of pending memory" is greater than "the number of ceiling games", the ceiling will be reached again in a short period of time, so as long as the special game flag is in the ON state, in other words, there will be no jackpot winning. It is preferable to continue outputting the ceiling activation signal for as long as possible. In addition, in the case of "number of time reductions due to ceiling time reduction + maximum number of pending memories ≧ number of ceiling games", the maximum number of pending memories is the maximum number of pending memories of that one special symbol if it is a type that changes priority. If it is a non-priority variation type in which the reserved balls are consumed in the order of winning, the total number of maximum reserved memory numbers of special figures 1 and 2 (in this example, 4 pieces) is preferable. In this case, it is preferable that the number is 8).

Note that the above-mentioned remaining ceiling number display effect may be executed from the 1998th rotation to the 2000th rotation when the vehicle is about to reach the ceiling. Further, when reaching the ceiling for the second time and thereafter, it is not necessary to transmit the ceiling activation performance execution trigger command. In this case, since the ceiling activation effect is not executed, the effect during the 2001st rotation of the game is executed based on the contents of the variation pattern designation command and the decorative pattern designation command as usual.

(Notification to prevent getting stuck and notification to forget to remove the card)
In this embodiment, as a notification effect to alert a player to a certain act, a notification effect related to prevention of addiction (hereinafter referred to as "addiction prevention alert") and a notification effect related to prevention of forgetting to take out a prepaid card are used. At least one of the notification effects (hereinafter referred to as "notification of forgetting to take out a card") can be configured to be executable.

At the time of ceiling time-saving entry or support time-saving entry, it is possible to execute "an alert to prevent getting addicted" and/or "an alert to forget to take out a card." Examples of cases in which it is executed at the time of "ceiling time reduction entry" include, for example, when it is executed at a predetermined timing during a fluctuating presentation related to a ceiling game, when it is executed at a predetermined timing during a ceiling entry notification presentation, when the ceiling is activated. When it is executed at a predetermined timing during the performance, when it is executed at the end of the ceiling game (during the period from the end of the variable time to the end of the fixed display time), when it is executed at the end of the fixed display time of the ceiling game (especially when executed while waiting for a customer when there is no pending ball), when executed at a predetermined timing during the next game after a ceiling game (especially when executed at the start of the next game), ceiling intrusion notification There are cases where it is executed after the effect ends, cases where it is executed after the ceiling activation effect, etc.

In addition, examples of cases in which it is executed "when support time reduction enters" include, for example, when it is executed at a predetermined timing during a fluctuating presentation during a support time reduction winning game, or when it is executed at a predetermined timing during a time reduction notification presentation. , when executed at the end of the support time-saving winning game (during the period from the end of the variable time to the end of the confirmed display time), when executed at the end of the confirmed display time of the support time-saving winning game (especially when there is no pending ball) In some cases, this may be executed while waiting for a customer), or after the end of the time-saving rush notification effect.

In any case, the alert can be executed at an appropriate timing when the ceiling activation is determined or when the support time reduction state is determined. In addition, if it is to be executed when entering the jackpot time saving state, it may be executed during the jackpot game (for example, during the end INT (during the ending performance)).

In addition, at the end of the jackpot time reduction (when the jackpot time reduction exits), at the end of the ceiling time reduction state (when the ceiling time reduction exit), or at the end of the support time reduction state (when the support time reduction exit), the "addictive prevention alert" and/or "Card It is possible to carry out a warning for forgetting to take the item. When executed at the end of each time saving state, for example, when it is executed during the fluctuating effect related to the final time saving number (time saving final game), when it is executed at the end of the time saving final game (variable time end to the end of the fixed display time). Further, the jackpot time saving state can be a jackpot time saving state related to one or more specific jackpots. For example, it may be a jackpot with a relatively high advantage (for example, a 10R variable jackpot), or a jackpot with a relatively low advantage (for example, a 4R time-saving jackpot).

When carrying out the above-mentioned "alert to prevent getting addicted" or "notice to forget to take out the card", the following configurations may be used (Mangoku 50) to (Mangoku 71).
(Mangoku 50) When entering the ceiling to save time, a warning to prevent getting addicted and/or a warning to forget to take out the card is executed, and when entering to shorten support time, the warning to prevent getting addicted and the warning to forget to take out the card are not executed.
(Mangoku 51) When rushing to the ceiling to save time, a warning to prevent getting addicted and/or to remind to forget to take out a card is executed, and at least one of the warning to prevent getting addicted and to remind to forget to take out a card is executed when to shorten support time.
(Mangoku 53) When entering to shorten support time, a warning to prevent getting addicted and/or to remind to forget to take out a card is executed, and when entering to shorten ceiling time, warning to prevent getting addicted and to remind to not to forget to take out a card are not executed.
(Mangoku 54) When entering to shorten support time, a warning to prevent getting addicted and/or a warning to forget to take out a card is executed, and at least one of a warning to prevent getting addicted and a warning to forget to take out a card is executed when to shorten ceiling time.
(Mangoku 55) In the case of the ceiling activation type at the end of the game, it is preferable to use the elapse of variable time in the ceiling game as an opportunity to issue a warning to prevent getting addicted and/or a warning to forget to take out a card.
(Mangoku 56) The presentation time (notification time) of the "advancement prevention warning" or "reminder of forgetting to take out the card" can be determined as appropriate.
For example, if there is no pending ball at the end of the ceiling game or the support time saving winning game and the game enters the customer waiting period, the game can be ended at a predetermined timing during the customer waiting period. Specifically, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the pre-customer waiting performance, the customer waiting performance (demonstration display) can be started, and the next game can be started.
If there is an operation pending ball at the end of the ceiling game or the end of the support time saving winning game, it can be executed for a predetermined period of time after the start of the next game. In this case, the display position for the attention-calling effect does not interfere with the fluctuating effect of the next game (including the right-hand hit notification (right-hand hit instruction effect)), for example, the position where it does not overlap with at least the decorative symbols, at least the decorative symbols and the pending display. It is preferable to display it in a position that does not overlap with the display, or at least in a position that does not overlap with the decorative pattern, the hold display, and the right hit notification. However, if it is difficult to display in a position that does not overlap due to the effect display, it is preferable to lower the display priority of the attention call and display it. For example, it is preferable to make the transparency of the attention call higher than that of the decorative pattern, the hold display, and the right hit notification to make the effect displayed during the next game more noticeable.
(Mangoku 57) When executing either or both of the alert to prevent getting addicted or the alert to forget to remove the card when entering the ceiling time shortening state, if a jackpot is won during the ceiling time shortening state, during the jackpot game, The alert that has already been executed will not be executed.
(Mangoku 58) When executing either or both of the alert to prevent getting addicted or the alert to forget to take out a card when the support time is shortened, if a jackpot is won during the support time reduction state, during the jackpot game, The alert that has already been executed will not be executed.
(Mangoku 59) When executing either or both of the alert to prevent getting addicted or the alert to forget to remove the card when entering the ceiling time-saving state, the player wins the jackpot after the ceiling time-saving state ends and the state returns to the normal state. In this case, the system is configured such that the alert can be executed again during the jackpot game (for example, during the end INT), regardless of whether or not the alert has been executed at the time of entering the ceiling time reduction.
(Mangoku 60) If you execute either or both of the alert to prevent getting addicted or forget to take out the card when entering the support time reduction state, you win the jackpot after the support time reduction state ends and you transition to the normal state. In this case, the system is configured such that the attention can be executed again during the jackpot game (for example, during the end INT), regardless of whether or not the attention has been executed at the start of the support time reduction.
(Mangoku 61) When executing either or both of the alert to prevent getting addicted or the alert to forget to take out a card when entering the ceiling time reduction state, if a jackpot is won during the ceiling time reduction state, during the jackpot game (for example, The system is configured to be able to execute the already executed alert during the end INT).
(Mangoku 62) When executing either or both of the alert to prevent getting addicted or the alert to forget to take out a card when the support time is shortened, if a jackpot is won during the support time reduction state, during the jackpot game (for example, The system is configured to be able to execute the already executed alert during the end INT).
(Mangoku 63) In the case of the above configuration example (Mangoku 61), with regard to the content of the warning (performance mode, notification time, etc.), the warning related to the ceiling time shortening is different from the warning related to the jackpot game. It is preferable that the content is
(Mangoku 64) In the case of the above configuration example (Mangoku 62), with regard to the content of the warning (performance mode, notification time, etc.), the warning related to the time when the support time is shortened is different from the warning related to the jackpot game. It is preferable that the content is
(Mangoku 65) In the case where either or both of the warning to prevent getting stuck or the warning of forgetting to take out a card is executed when the ceiling time is shortened, if the warning is executed concurrently during another specific performance, for example, , when executed concurrently during the fluctuating performance related to the ceiling game, when executed concurrently during the ceiling rush notification performance, or concurrently during the ceiling activation performance. In such cases, it is possible to shorten the performance time of the performance performed when the ceiling time is shortened.
(Mangoku 66) In the case where either or both of the warning to prevent getting addicted or the warning of forgetting to take out a card is executed when the support time is shortened, if the warning is executed concurrently during another specific performance, for example, , if it is executed concurrently during the fluctuating performance during the support time reduction winning game, or when it is executed in parallel during the time reduction notification performance, etc., the performance time of the performance performed at the time of support time reduction entry is shortened. be able to.
(Mangoku 67) In the case where the ceiling time reduction state is activated during the support time reduction state, it is possible to configure so that either or both of the warning to prevent getting addicted or the reminder to forget to take out the card can be executed when the ceiling time reduction state is activated. . In this case, regardless of whether or not one or both of the warning to prevent falling into the trap or the warning to forget to take out the card are executed when the support time is shortened, the warning to prevent falling into the ceiling or the warning to forget to take out the card is executed when the time is shortened to the ceiling. Either or both of the warnings can be performed.
(Mangoku 68) In the case where the support time reduction state is activated during the ceiling time reduction state, either or both can be configured to be executable at the time of entering the support time reduction state. . In this case, regardless of whether or not one or both of the warnings to prevent trapping or forgetting to remove the card are executed when entering the ceiling to reduce time, the warning to prevent trapping or forgetting to remove the card will be issued when entering the ceiling to shorten support time. Either or both of the warnings can be performed.
(Mangoku 69) In the case where the ceiling time reduction state is activated during the support time reduction state, if either or both of the warning to prevent getting addicted or the reminder for forgetting to take out the card is executed at the time of the ceiling time reduction state, the support time reduction state is activated. Alerts that have already been issued will not be implemented.
(Mangoku 70) In the case where the support time reduction state is activated during the ceiling time reduction state, if either or both of the warning to prevent getting addicted or the reminder for forgetting to take out the card is executed at the time of entering the support time reduction state, the ceiling time reduction state is activated. Alerts that have already been issued will not be implemented.
(Mangoku 71) After the ceiling time saving state ends, if you reach the ceiling game again without winning the jackpot, when entering the ceiling time saving state from the second time onward, either a warning to prevent getting hooked or a warning to forget to remove the card will be issued. or both. Depending on the gameplay (gaming specifications), the ceiling number of games may be set to a small number of games (for example, the number of games that is less than, half, or ⅓ of the probability denominator of the jackpot lottery probability). In such a case, if the player is alerted frequently, the player will feel annoyed.

[Fourth embodiment]
<Restrictions on ball output performance>
By the way, in recent years, in order to moderately suppress the excitement of gambling, regulations have been established on the ball output performance of gaming machines due to legal requirements. For example, the ball output rate (safe balls/out balls) in the short-term test (1 hour) related to the type test above is limited from the upper limit ball output rate "300% (old standard)" to "220% (new standard)". (Regulations on Certification and Type Testing of Gaming Machines, Attached Table 4 Technical Standards Related to Pachinko Gaming Machines (Related to Article 6) (1) Performance Standards B (C), etc.) This regulation has a large impact on the ball output performance, especially during consecutive hits, and if this regulation is complied with, the ball output speed can drop to about two-thirds of the conventional ball output performance. Specifically, if the firing time is one hour, the number of out balls will be 6,000 (firing performance of the firing device 32 100 shots/min x 60 minutes = 6,000 shots), and under the old standard, the upper ball output rate would be ``300. %, so the safe ball is allowed up to 18,000 shots per hour (6,000 shots x 300% = 18,000 shots/h). However, under the new standards, the maximum ball release rate will be limited to ``220%,'' so the upper limit of safe balls will drop to 13,200 shots per hour (6,000 shots x 220% = 13,200 shots/h). Particularly during short time and variable probability conditions, the base condition is high (with electric support), so if you hit the jackpot too many times in a row, you can easily exceed the upper limit of 220% (13,200 shots). This results in nonconformity in the type test. For example, if the base value under the state with electric support is 70 (BA70), the safe ball by the normal electric power open game will be 4200 shots in 1 hour (BA70 x 100 shots / minute x 60 minutes = 4200 shots). Therefore, according to the old standard, it is possible to pay out "13,800 shots" (18,000 shots - 4,200 shots) in a jackpot game, but under the new standard, "9,000 shots" (13,200 shots - 4,200 shots) can be paid out. You will only be able to pay it out. Therefore, under the above regulations, it is necessary to devise ways to control the ball dispensing performance related to jackpots so as to make it easier to pass (comply with) the type test without impairing the ball dispensing feeling as much as possible.

When the number of balls rolled out increases significantly in a short period of time, it is during a jackpot. Therefore, in order to pass the type test, increase the number of wasted balls during the jackpot and reduce the ball output speed. Specifically, during the jackpot closing period (at least the start INT, R-interval INT, and end INT) If one INT) is held for a longer period of time than before, even if there are consecutive jackpots, the rise in the base value will be suppressed, making it difficult to exceed the legally regulated value, and increasing the compliance rate of the type test. However, if the INT period is blindly set for a long time, for example, the interval time such as the start INT is made to be many times longer than before, the player may feel a sense of delay (for example, This can lead to feelings of boredom, fatigue, discomfort), stress, and distrust of the game itself. Therefore, it is necessary to consider the following points (1) and (2).
(1) Rather than blindly making the jackpot game period long, the interval time during jackpot games (start INT, round Interval INT, end INT).
(2) Furthermore, when extending the jackpot game period compared to the past, it is important to devise a performance during the jackpot game so that the player does not feel a sense of delay.
In view of such problems, the present embodiment aims to make it easier to comply with the type test.

In this embodiment, we focus on the length of the playing period of jackpot games and the number of games between successive jackpot games, which have a large influence on ball payout performance, and in particular, we focus on the interval time (starting time) set during jackpot games. INT, inter-round INT, and end INT), and has a unique configuration with ingenuity regarding the effects related to these. Here, for convenience of explanation, the "gaming state with a high jackpot lottery probability state" and/or the "gaming state with an electric support state" will be abbreviated as the "easy consecutive winning state". In addition, as a game situation, after winning a jackpot and finishing the jackpot game (after the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is finished), the game is controlled to be in an easy consecutive winning state, and during the easy consecutive winning state, it is possible to win the jackpot again. It is assumed that a winning situation occurs, that is, a gaming situation in which a consecutive win situation occurs. This embodiment can be configured as follows.

(Bird 10) Depending on the number of games to be executed after the end of the current jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as the "number of addictive games during consecutive games"), the start INT, inter-round INT, and end of the jackpot game due to the next winning jackpot At least one INT (interval time) of the INTs may be configured to be extended or shortened. For example, if the start INT of a jackpot game with jackpot A resulting from winning during a normal state (hereinafter referred to as "normal jackpot game") is, for example, 10 seconds (standard INT), the number of addictive games during a consecutive game is 10. If you win the same jackpot A in >abbreviated INT).
(Bird 11) The performance during INT when it is not extended is different from the performance during the INT when it is extended. For example, during the start INT in the case of extension, effect A is executed, and during the start INT in the case of extension, effect B, which is different from the effect A, is executed.
(Bird 12) Furthermore, after performing the effect A for not extending, the effect C for the extended portion may be executed. For example, during the start INT in the case of extension, "performance A+performance C (=performance B)" is executed. In this case, the part of the effect A can be a common effect (substantially the same effect can be performed both in the case of not extending and in the case of extending).
(Bird 13) In the case of extension B, it is preferable that at least a movable object effect using a movable object is executed. The reason for this is that humans are more attracted to three-dimensional objects than two-dimensional objects. More preferably, the performance is a player participation type performance using an operation means (for example, the performance button 13). This is because player participation production is suitable for preventing players from feeling a sense of delay (for example, see the survey results in FIG. 14 of Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-178205).
(Bird 14) At least a part of the performance during the jackpot is different depending on whether it is extended or not, but the right-hand hit instruction performance performed during the start INT can be a common performance. In addition, performances that notify the content of jackpot games, such as big bonus (10R guaranteed variable jackpot), regular bonus (4R time-saving jackpot), etc., or performances that notify the advantageous degree of jackpot games or the type of jackpot games. Regarding the presentation, it is also possible to use a common presentation.
(Bird 15) When extending at least two INTs: the start INT, the inter-round INT, and the end INT, the respective extension widths can be set to a common extension time (the same or substantially the same extension time).
(Bird 16) When extending at least two INTs: the start INT, the inter-round INT, and the end INT, the respective extension widths can be set to different extension times. For example, the start INT is extended by 5 seconds, the inter-round INT is not extended, the end INT is extended by 2 seconds, and so on.
(Bird 17) If the condition for executing a jackpot game for which a predetermined time has been extended is that the jackpot has been won within a predetermined number of addictive games in a series (for example, within 10 games), the predetermined The configuration may be such that a specific effect that notifies the number of games can be executed.
(Bird 18) If the condition for executing a jackpot game for which a predetermined time has been extended is that the jackpot has been won within the number of addictive games during a predetermined series (for example, within 10 games), then During the number of addictive games in a series, the player is in a dedicated game mode (special mode), and after playing the number of addictive games in a series, it may be configured to be able to shift to a game mode different from the special mode. For example, during the time saving state, the special mode is set for 10 games or less, and the time saving mode 1 is set for the 11th game or later. In this case, the special mode may be a dedicated variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), and a variation pattern distribution table for the special mode may be provided. As a result, during the special mode, it is possible to select a variation pattern different from that in other game modes. Further, a special effect mode corresponding to the special mode can be provided. In this case, a special production mode can be set during the number of addictive games in a series of games, and a production mode different from the special mode can be set after the number of addictive games in a series of games has been executed. Further, depending on the gaming nature, the special mode may be a variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) common to other game modes, and the variable pattern allocation table related to the other game modes may be configured to be shared.
In addition, performances executed in response to winning fluctuation patterns selected within the number of addictive games during a consecutive game (hereinafter referred to as "winning fluctuation performances during a specific period") are executed during a jackpot game that has been extended for a predetermined period of time. The performance (reach performance) can be related to the contents of the jackpot performance (including start INT, inter-round INT, and end INT) to be performed. Here, "having a relationship" refers to a relationship in the story, or a relationship that brings to mind, associates, or creates an idea with a certain thing or event if you look at the performance that fluctuates during a specific period. Applicable to those who have. In addition, one or more of the pre-reach performance, reach performance, post-reach performance, win/loss notification after the end of the reach performance, and performance (connection performance, etc.) from the end of the reach performance to the start of the jackpot game in the winning variation performance during a specific period. In the presentation, a presentation having the relevant relationship can be made to appear.
(Bird 19) If the condition for executing a jackpot game for which the predetermined time has been extended is that the jackpot has been won within a predetermined number of addictive games during a consecutive game, with respect to the number of addictive games during the consecutive game, It can be set to be the same or different during the time saving state and during the variable probability state. For example, if the number of addictive games during a consecutive game during a time saving state is X, and the number of addictive games during a consecutive game during a variable time state is Y, then "X=Y", "X<Y", or "X>Y" It can be determined to satisfy the relationship. However, since the time saving state is a low probability state, it is preferable to adopt "X<Y". In addition, when "X=Y", if there are multiple times of time saving due to the time saving jackpot (for example, 100 times of time saving, 150 times of time saving, and 200 times of time saving), the minimum number of time saving among the plurality of time saving times. It is preferable to use a number smaller than the number of time-saving games (here, 100 times) as the number of addictive games during a series of games (for example, 99 times).
(Bird 20) If the condition for executing a jackpot game for which the predetermined time has been extended is that the jackpot has been won within a predetermined number of addictive games (for example, 10 games) during a series of games, the predetermined time will be extended. A jackpot and a non-extended jackpot can be provided. For example, even if you win a jackpot within 10 games after playing a jackpot game, if the maximum number of rounds is relatively large (10R guaranteed variable jackpot), you can play a jackpot game with an extended predetermined INT (extended jackpot game). ) is executed, and in the case of "4R time-saving jackpot" where the maximum number of rounds is relatively small, a jackpot game that is not extended (normal jackpot game) is executed. Further, it may be configured such that all jackpot games are uniformly extended regardless of the type of jackpot. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot game with a relatively small maximum number of rounds is extended, and a jackpot game with a relatively large maximum number of rounds is not extended. Also, if the extension time MA is for a jackpot game where the maximum number of rounds is relatively small, and the extension time GK is for a jackpot game where the maximum number of rounds is relatively large, then "extension time MA<extension time GK" or "extension time MA> extension time GK".
(Bird 21) When extending the inter-round INT, you may extend all the inter-round INT, or some of the inter-round INT (for example, in the case of a 10R probability-variable jackpot, "1R and 2R" and "6R You may extend the inter-round INT between the 7th round and the 7th round. In addition, when extending the INT between multiple rounds, the extension time of the INT between each round may be a common extension time (same or substantially the same extension time), or may be different extension times, At least one of the plurality of inter-round INTs may have different extension times.
(Bird 22) In the performance (opening performance) during the start INT, a predetermined pre-start performance (for example, big win Performances such as bonuses (10R guaranteed variable jackpot), regular bonuses (4R time-saving jackpots, etc.) that notify the degree of advantage of the jackpot game, or the type of jackpot game, or the BGM selection that plays during the jackpot, etc.) The time may be extended. The contents of this pre-start performance include a performance that can give the player a sense of tension and exhilaration, for example, if the current jackpot is a 10R guaranteed strange jackpot, the pre-start performance will be played for a predetermined period of time after the start of the "regular bonus (4R)". "Time-saving jackpot)!" is displayed, but after a predetermined period of time, a special effect that steps up (ranks up) the jackpot content is performed, such as "Big bonus (10R guaranteed strange jackpot)! Congratulations!" However, it is preferable to entertain the players. Further, it is preferable that the special performance is a player participation type performance that includes pressing the performance button, pressing it for a long time, repeatedly hitting the button, and the like. Further, the performance time width required for the special performance may be configured to be longer than in the case where it is not extended. Even if the performance time width of such a special performance is extended, it is thought that the player is unlikely to feel a sense of prolongation because the performance content can give the player a sense of tension and exhilaration. If such a special performance were to be made into a player-participation type performance, the effect would be tremendous. Further, the special performance may not be executed if the duration is not extended, and may be executed only if the duration is extended.
(Tori 23) In addition, if the performance executed when extending the performance is approximately the same as the performance when not extending (this does not mean that the performance time is approximately the same, but that the performance mode is approximately the same), the content of the performance is the same. However, the execution time of some animation displays (for example, the display time of announcing the advantage of the jackpot game or the type of jackpot game, the display time of various effects, etc.) may be extended. At first glance, the effects appear to be the same, but by lengthening the execution time, an extended jackpot game may be executed.
(Bird 24) The above-mentioned "Number of addictive games in consecutive games" counts the same number as the maximum number of reserved memories for special map 1 and special map 2 (in this example, 8), or for special map 1 and special map 2. The number can be set to be the same as the maximum number of reserved memories (in this example, four) of either one of 2. In this case, when a so-called "on-hold consecutive games" occurs, an extended jackpot game may be executed for the jackpot game related to the consecutive games. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the speed at which the balls come out during consecutive hits.
(Bird 25) If the condition for executing a jackpot game for which the predetermined time has been extended is that the jackpot has been won within the predetermined number of addictive games during a series of games, during the easy series of games after the first success. If you win a jackpot within the number of addictive games during a consecutive game, the extended jackpot game will not be executed, but if you win a jackpot within the number of addictive games during a consecutive game during the second consecutive game or later, during the easy state of consecutive games. In some cases, an extended jackpot game may be executed. In this case, for a jackpot won during the easy consecutive winnings state after the first winning, the normal jackpot game is executed regardless of the number of addictive games during the consecutive winnings.
(Bird 26) A plurality of types of addictive game numbers may be provided during the game series. For example, if you win the jackpot before the first condition is met (for example, if you win the jackpot within 10 games) during the easy consecutive winning state, and if you win the jackpot after the first condition is met and before the second condition is met. It may be configured such that a jackpot game with a different extended time is executed depending on when the player wins (for example, when the jackpot is won within 11 to 50 games). Further, in this case, the jackpot game may be configured so that if the jackpot is won within 10 games, the extended time is longer than when the jackpot is won within 11 to 50 games. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot game may be configured such that the extension time is shorter when the jackpot is won within 10 games than when the jackpot is won within 11 to 50 games. Further, the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) may be different between 10 games or less and 11 to 50 games or less. That is, the variation pattern allocation table that is referred to until the first condition is satisfied and the variation pattern allocation table that is referenced until the second condition is satisfied are different.

(Bird 27) Regardless of whether the predetermined conditions for executing the jackpot game where the predetermined time is extended are plural or singular,
an average fluctuation time T of a fluctuation pattern defined in a first fluctuation pattern distribution table that is referred to until a predetermined condition is met;
The average fluctuation time S of the fluctuation pattern defined in the second fluctuation pattern distribution table that is referred to after a predetermined condition is satisfied can be made to be different.
In this case, it may be set as "average fluctuation time T<average fluctuation time S" or "average fluctuation time T>average fluctuation time S".
Further, the first variation pattern distribution table may be configured so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than the second variation pattern distribution table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first variation pattern distribution table may be configured so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than the second variation pattern distribution table.
Further, regarding the loss fluctuation pattern, "average fluctuation time T<average fluctuation time S", but regarding the winning fluctuation pattern, it can be set as "average fluctuation time T>average fluctuation time S". In this way, by making the winning fluctuation pattern selected until a predetermined condition is met longer than the winning fluctuation pattern selected after the predetermined condition is met, after a jackpot game, the next jackpot can be achieved with a shorter number of fluctuations. When a player wins, the time until the next jackpot game starts can be set longer, and the speed at which balls are put out when winning consecutive games can be reduced.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. Regarding the loss fluctuation pattern, "average fluctuation time T>average fluctuation time S", but regarding the winning fluctuation pattern, it may be "average fluctuation time T<average fluctuation time S".

The configuration may be a combination of one or more of all the embodiments described above (including all the various configurations and modifications described in each embodiment), and the contents described in each embodiment may be different from those of the individual embodiments. It is not limited to only.

Further, in the embodiment described above, a pinball game machine that uses game balls as the game medium has been described, but the present invention is not limited to a pinball game machine. For example, it may be an arrangement ball machine or a mahjong ball game machine, and other game media include a game machine that uses game medals (reel type game machine) and a game medium that uses electromagnetic recording means. It may also be a managed game machine or the like.

The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 gaming machine,
2 Front frame (door),
3, 3a Game board, game area,
19 Game ball payout device,
20 Main control unit (main control board),
24 Production control unit (production control board, liquid crystal control board)
28 Launch control board,
29 Payout control board,
34, 34a Upper starting port, upper starting port sensor 35, 35a Lower starting port, lower starting port sensor,
37, 37a Normal symbol starting port, normal symbol starting port sensor,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Normal symbol display device,
50, 52a Big winning opening, big winning opening sensor 41, 41c Normal variable winning device, normal electric accessory solenoid,
52, 52c Special variable winning device, big winning opening solenoid,
36, 45, 46 Liquid crystal display device, decorative lamp, speaker,
49 Out mouth,
94 Setting key switch,
95 Setting change switch,
96 Setting change completion switch,
97 Setting display,
98 RAM clear switch,
201, 202, 203 main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM,
241, 242, 243 Performance control CPU, performance control ROM, performance control RAM.

Claims (1)

a symbol display means configured to be able to perform variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols, and capable of stopping and displaying the plurality of decorative symbols in a display mode according to a game result;
During one fluctuating display of the decorative symbols, a predetermined performance including a result performance that notifies the game result, a success/failure performance that suggests the content of the result performance , and a pre-success/failure performance that is executed before the success/failure performance. A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
A production mode control means capable of controlling the production mode;
Equipped with a special electric accessory that can open and close the grand prize opening,
A gaming machine capable of controlling the winning state of opening and closing the big prize opening,
In a normal state, a first specific state that can be transitioned to via the winning state;
In the normal state, it has a second specific state that can be transitioned to without going through the hit state,
In the case where the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the state is transferred to the first specific state via the winning state, and after the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the state is transferred to the second specific state without passing through the winning state. In the case of migration, while the same pre-success/failure performance is executed, the content of the success/failure performance is different,
The production mode control means is configured to control to a first production mode in the first specific state, and to control to a second production mode different from the first production mode in the second specific state. configured,
In the second performance mode, the player is configured to be able to issue an alert alert to the player;
The variable display of the decorative patterns is capable of executing a plurality of stopping motion patterns having different stopping motion periods from the time when at least one of the decorative symbols first starts the stopping motion until all the decorative symbols stop;
The stop motion pattern is configured to be able to perform variable display of the decorative pattern in which the stop motion pattern differs depending on the performance to be performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images